ProWORX 32 Ladder Logic Block Library

Transcription

ProWORX 32
Ladder Logic Block Library
31007523.00
12/2006
www.telemecanique.com
ii
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Part I General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Instruction Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Instruction Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ASCII Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Counters and Timers Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fast I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Loadable DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Matrix Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Skips/Specials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Special Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Coils, Contacts, and Interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 3
Closed Loop Control / Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PCFL Subfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
A PID Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PID2 Level Control Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 4
Formatting Messages for ASCII READ/WRIT Operations . . . . 31
Format Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Special Set-up Considerations for Control/Monitor Signals Format . . . . . . . . . . 36
Chapter 5
Coils, Contacts, and Interconnects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Interconnects (Shorts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
iii
Chapter 6
Interrupt Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 7
Subroutine Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 8
Installation of DX Loadables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Part II Instruction Descriptions (A to D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 9
1X3X - Input Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 10
AD16: Ad 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Chapter 11
ADD: Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 12
AND: Logical And . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 13
BCD: Binary to Binary Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Chapter 14
BLKM: Block Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chapter 15
BLKT: Block to Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 16
BMDI: Block Move with Interrupts Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter 17
BROT: Bit Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
iv
Chapter 18
CALL: Activate Immediate or Deferred DX Function. . . . . . . . 91
Short Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 19
CANT - Interpret Coils, Contacts, Timers, Counters,
and the SUB Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Short Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Parameter Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 20
CCPF - Configure Cam Profile with Variable Instruments . . 105
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Chapter 21
CCPV - Configure Cam Profile with Variable Increments . . . 109
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 22
CFGC - Configure Coordinated Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chapter 23
CFGF - Configure Follower Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Chapter 24
CFGI – Configure Imaginary Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 25
CFGR – Configure Remote Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Chapter 26
CFGS – Configure SERCOS Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 27
CHS: Configure Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 28
CKSM: Check Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
v
Chapter 29
CMPR: Compare Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 30
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
General Usage Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Chapter 31
COMM - ASCII Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 32
COMP: Complement a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 33
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 34
CONV - Convert Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 35
CTIF - Counter, Timer, and Interrupt Function . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Chapter 36
DCTR: Down Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 37
DIOH: Distributed I/O Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 38
DISA - Disabled Discrete Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 39
DIV: Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
vi
Chapter 40
DLOG: Data Logging for PCMCIA Read/Write Support. . . . . 197
Short Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Time Error Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 41
198
199
200
202
DMTH - Double Precision Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Chapter 42
DRUM: DRUM Sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Chapter 43
DV16: Divide 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Part III Instruction Descriptions (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Chapter 44
EARS - Event/Alarm Recording System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Chapter 45
EMTH: Extended Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Point EMTH Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 46
232
233
234
236
EMTH-ADDDP: Double Precision Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 47
EMTH-ADDFP: Floating Point Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chapter 48
EMTH-ADDIF: Integer + Floating Point Addition . . . . . . . . . . 247
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
vii
Chapter 49
EMTH-ANLOG: Base 10 Antilogarithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 50
EMTH-ARCOS: Floating Point Arc Cosine of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Chapter 51
EMTH-ARSIN: Floating Point Arcsine of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Chapter 52
EMTH-ARTAN: Floating Point Arc Tangent of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chapter 53
EMTH-CHSIN: Changing the Sign of a Floating Point
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Chapter 54
EMTH-CMPFP: Floating Point Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Chapter 55
EMTH-CMPIF: Integer-Floating Point Comparison . . . . . . . . 285
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Chapter 56
EMTH-CNVDR: Floating Point Conversion of Degrees to
Radians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
viii
Chapter 57
EMTH-CNVFI: Floating Point to Integer Conversion . . . . . . . 297
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime Error Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 58
EMTH-CNVIF: Integer to Floating Point Conversion . . . . . . . 303
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 59
298
299
301
302
304
305
307
308
EMTH-CNVRD: Floating Point Conversion of Radians to
Degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Chapter 60
EMTH-COS: Floating Point Cosine of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Chapter 61
EMTH-DIVDP: Double Precision Division. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 62
320
321
323
324
EMTH-DIVFI: Floating Point Divided by Integer. . . . . . . . . . . 325
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Chapter 63
EMTH-DIVFP: Floating Point Division. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 64
EMTH-DIVIF: Integer Divided by Floating Point. . . . . . . . . . . 333
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
ix
Chapter 65
EMTH-ERLOG: Floating Point Error Report Log. . . . . . . . . . 337
Representation: EMTH - ERLOG - Floating Point Math - Error Report Log . . . 339
Chapter 66
EMTH-EXP: Floating Point Exponential Function. . . . . . . . . 343
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 67
EMTH-LNFP: Floating Point Natural Logarithm . . . . . . . . . . 349
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chapter 68
EMTH-LOG: Base 10 Logarithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Chapter 69
EMTH-LOGFP: Floating Point Common Logarithm . . . . . . . 361
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Chapter 70
EMTH-MULDP: Double Precision Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . 367
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Chapter 71
EMTH-MULFP: Floating Point Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Chapter 72
EMTH-MULIF: Integer x Floating Point Multiplication . . . . . 377
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 73
EMTH-PI: Load the Floating Point Value of "Pi" . . . . . . . . . . 383
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
x
Chapter 74
EMTH-POW: Raising a Floating Point Number to an
Integer Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Representation: EMTH - POW - Raising a Floating Point Number to an
Integer Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 75
EMTH-SINE: Floating Point Sine of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Representation: EMTH - SINE - Floating Point Math - Sine of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Chapter 76
EMTH-SQRFP: Floating Point Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Chapter 77
EMTH-SQRT: Floating Point Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Chapter 78
EMTH-SQRTP: Process Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 79
414
415
417
418
EMTH-SUBDP: Double Precision Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Representation: EMTH - SUBDP - Double Precision Math - Subtraction . . . . . 421
Chapter 80
EMTH-SUBFI: Floating Point - Integer Subtraction . . . . . . . . 425
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Chapter 81
EMTH-SUBFP: Floating Point Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
xi
Chapter 82
EMTH-SUBIF: Integer - Floating Point Subtraction . . . . . . . 433
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Chapter 83
EMTH-TAN: Floating Point Tangent of an Angle
(in Radians) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Chapter 84
ESI: Support of the ESI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
READ ASCII Message (Subfunction 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
WRITE ASCII Message (Subfunction 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
GET DATA (Subfunction 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
PUT DATA (Subfunction 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
ABORT (Middle Input ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Run Time Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Chapter 85
EUCA: Engineering Unit Conversion and Alarms . . . . . . . . 461
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Part IV Instruction Descriptions (F to N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Chapter 86
FIN: First In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Chapter 87
FOUT: First Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Chapter 88
FTOI: Floating Point to Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
xii
Chapter 89
GD92 - Gas Flow Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description - Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description - Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description - Optional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 90
GFNX AGA#3 ‘85 and NX19 ‘68 Gas Flow Function Block . . 499
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 91
526
527
529
535
536
G392 AGA #3 1992 Gas Flow Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 94
514
515
517
522
523
GM92 AGA #3 and #8 1992 Detail Method Gas Flow
Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 93
500
501
503
510
511
GG92 AGA #3 1992 Gross Method Gas Flow
Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 92
488
489
491
497
498
538
539
541
546
547
HLTH: History and Status Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description Top Node (History Matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description Middle Node (Status Matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Description Bottom Node (Length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
550
551
552
553
558
562
xiii
Chapter 95
HSBY - Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Representation: HSBY - Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Parameter Description Top Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Parameter Description Middle Node: HSBY - Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Chapter 96
IBKR: Indirect Block Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Representation: IBKR - Indirect Block Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Chapter 97
IBKW: Indirect Block Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Chapter 98
ICMP: Input Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Representation: ICMP - Input Compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Cascaded DRUM/ICMP Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Chapter 99
ID: Interrupt Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Chapter 100
IE: Interrupt Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Chapter 101
IMIO: Immediate I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Run Time Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Chapter 102
IMOD: Interrupt Module Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Chapter 103
INDX – Immediate Incremental Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Parameters Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
xiv
Chapter 104
ITMR: Interrupt Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Chapter 105
ITOF: Integer to Floating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Chapter 106
JOGS – JOG Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Chapter 107
JSR: Jump to Subroutine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Chapter 108
LAB: Label for a Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Chapter 109
LOAD: Load Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Chapter 110
MAP3: MAP Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Chapter 111
MATH - Integer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Chapter 112
MBIT: Modify Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Chapter 113
MBUS: MBUS Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The MBUS Get Statistics Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
656
657
658
660
xv
Chapter 114
MMFB – Modicon Motion Framework Bits Block . . . . . . . . . 665
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Chapter 115
MMFE – Modicon Motion Framework Extended
Parameters Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Chapter 116
MMFI – Modicon Motion Framework Initialize Block . . . . . . 673
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Chapter 117
MMFS – Modicon Motion Framework Subroutine Block . . . 679
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Chapter 118
MOVE – Absolute Move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Chapter 119
MRTM: Multi-Register Transfer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Chapter 120
MSPX (Seriplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Chapter 121
MSTR: Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Write MSTR Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
READ MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Get Local Statistics MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Clear Local Statistics MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Write Global Data MSTR Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Read Global Data MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Get Remote Statistics MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Clear Remote Statistics MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Peer Cop Health MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Reset Option Module MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Read CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Write CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Modbus Plus Network Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
xvi
TCP/IP Ethernet Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Time Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SY/MAX-specific Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 122
732
733
734
736
738
741
MU16: Multiply 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Chapter 123
MUL: Multiply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Chapter 124
NBIT: Bit Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Chapter 125
NCBT: Normally Closed Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Chapter 126
NOBT: Normally Open Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Chapter 127
NOL: Network Option Module for Lonworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Detailed Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Part V Instruction Descriptions (O to Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Chapter 128
OR: Logical OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Chapter 129
PCFL: Process Control Function Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
xvii
Chapter 130
PCFL-AIN: Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Chapter 131
PCFL-ALARM: Central Alarm Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Chapter 132
PCFL-AOUT: Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Chapter 133
PCFL-AVER: Average Weighted Inputs Calculate . . . . . . . . 799
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Chapter 134
PCFL-CALC: Calculated Preset Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Chapter 135
PCFL-DELAY: Time Delay Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Chapter 136
PCFL-EQN: Formatted Equation Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Chapter 137
PCFL-INTEG: Integrate Input at Specified Interval . . . . . . . . 821
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Chapter 138
PCFL-KPID: Comprehensive ISA Non Interacting PID . . . . . 825
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
xviii
Chapter 139
PCFL-LIMIT: Limiter for the Pv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Chapter 140
PCFL-LIMV: Velocity Limiter for Changes in the Pv . . . . . . . 835
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Chapter 141
PCFL-LKUP: Look-up Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Chapter 142
PCFL-LLAG: First-order Lead/Lag Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Chapter 143
PCFL-MODE: Put Input in Auto or Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . 849
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Chapter 144
PCFL-ONOFF: ON/OFF Values for Deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Chapter 145
PCFL-PI: ISA Non Interacting PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Chapter 146
PCFL-PID: PID Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Chapter 147
PCFL-RAMP: Ramp to Set Point at a Constant Rate. . . . . . . 869
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
xix
Chapter 148
PCFL-RATE: Derivative Rate Calculation over a
Specified Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Chapter 149
PCFL-RATIO: Four Station Ratio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Chapter 150
PCFL-RMPLN: Logarithmic Ramp to Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Chapter 151
PCFL-SEL: Input Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Chapter 152
PCFL-TOTAL: Totalizer for Metering Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Chapter 153
PEER: PEER Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Chapter 154
PID2: Proportional Integral Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Detailed Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Run Time Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Part VI Instruction Descriptions (R to Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Chapter 155
R --> T: Register to Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
xx
Chapter 156
RBIT: Reset Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Chapter 157
READ: Read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Chapter 158
RET: Return from a Subroutine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Representation: RET - Return to Scheduled Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Chapter 159
RTTI - Register to Input Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Chapter 160
RTTO - Register to Output Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Chapter 161
RTU - Remote Terminal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Chapter 162
SAVE: Save Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Chapter 163
SBIT: Set Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Chapter 164
SCIF: Sequential Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Chapter 165
SENS: Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Chapter 166
Shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
xxi
Chapter 167
SKP - Skipping Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Chapter 168
SRCH: Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
Chapter 169
STAT: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Description of the Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for Quantum and Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 20 for Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 171 for Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Communication Status Words 172 - 277 for Quantum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for TSX Compact and Atrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 15 for TSX Compact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Global Health and Communications Retry Status Words 182 ... 184
for TSX Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Chapter 170
SU16: Subtract 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Chapter 171
SUB: Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Chapter 172
SWAP - VME Bit Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Chapter 173
TTR - Table to Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Representation: TTR - Table to Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Chapter 174
T --> R Table to Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
xxii
Chapter 175
T --> T: Table to Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Short Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Parameter Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Chapter 176
T.01 Timer: One Hundredth of a Second Timer . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
Chapter 177
T0.1 Timer: One Tenth Second Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
Chapter 178
T1.0 Timer: One Second Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Chapter 179
T1MS Timer: One Millisecond Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Chapter 180
TBLK: Table to Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Chapter 181
TEST: Test of 2 Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Chapter 182
UCTR: Up Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Chapter 183
VMER - VME Read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Chapter 184
VMEW - VME Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
xxiii
Chapter 185
WRIT: Write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Chapter 186
XMIT - Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
XMIT Modbus Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
Chapter 187
XMIT Communication Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Chapter 188
XMIT Port Status Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Chapter 189
XMIT Conversion Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Chapter 190
XMRD: Extended Memory Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Chapter 191
XMWT: Extended Memory Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
Chapter 192
XOR: Exclusive OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
xxiv
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mcxxxvii
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mclix
Safety Information
§
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates
that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in injury or equipment damage.
31007523 12/2006
xxv
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by
qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
© 2006 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
xxvi
31007523 12/2006
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This documentation will help you configure the ladder logic instructions from
ProWORX 32.
Validity Note
This documentation is valid for ProWORX 32 under Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft
Windows 2000, and Microsoft Windows NT 4.x.
Note: For additional up-to-date notes, please refer to the Read Me file in
ProWORX 32.
Related
Documents
User Comments
31007523 12/2006
Title of Documentation
Reference Number
XMIT Function Block User Guide
840 USE 113
Quantum Hot Standby Planning and Installation Guide
840 USE 106
Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide
890 USE 100
Quantum 140 ESI 062 10 ASCII Interface Module User Guide
840 USE 108
Modicon S980 MAP 3.0 Network Interface Controller User Guide
GM-MAP3-001
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
[email protected]
xxvii
About the Book
xxviii
31007523 12/2006
General Information
I
Introduction
At a Glance
In this part you will find general information about the instruction groups and the use
of instructions.
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
31007523 12/2006
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
1
Instructions
3
2
Instruction Groups
3
Closed Loop Control / Analog Values
19
4
Formatting Messages for ASCII READ/WRIT Operations
31
5
Coils, Contacts, and Interconnects
39
6
Interrupt Handling
45
7
Subroutine Handling
47
8
Installation of DX Loadables
49
5
1
General Information
2
31007523 12/2006
Instructions
1
Parameter Assignment of Instuctions
General
Programming for electrical controls involves a user who implements Operational
Coded instructions in the form of visual objects organized in a recognizable ladder
form. The program objects designed, at the user level, is converted to computer
usable OP codes during the download process. the Op codes are decoded in the
CPU and acted upon by the controllers firmware functions to implement the desired
control.
Each instruction is composed of an operation, nodes required for the operation and
in- and outputs.
31007523 12/2006
3
Instructions
Parameter
Assignment
Parameter assignment with the instruction DV16 as an example:
Instruction
Inputs
Operation
Nodes
Outputs
e.g. DV16
Middle input
top node
middle node
Bottom input
DV16
Top input
Top output
Middle output
Bottom output
bottom node
Operation
The operation determines which functionality is to be executed by the instruction,
e.g. shift register, conversion operations.
Nodes, In- and
Outputs
The nodes and in- and outputs determines what the operation will be executed with.
4
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
2
At a Glance
Introduction
In this chapter you will find an overview of the instruction groups.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Instruction Groups
6
ASCII Functions
7
Counters and Timers Instructions
8
Fast I/O Instructions
9
Loadable DX
10
Math Instructions
11
Matrix Instructions
13
Miscellaneous
14
Move Instructions
15
Skips/Specials
16
Special Instructions
17
18
5
Instruction Groups
Instruction Groups
General
All instructions are attached to one of the following groups.
ASCII Functions (see p. 7)
z Counters/Timers (see p. 8)
z Fast I/O Instructions (see p. 9)
z Loadable DX (see p. 10)
z Math (see p. 11)
z Matrix (see p. 13)
z Miscellaneous (see p. 14)
z Move (see p. 15)
z Skips/Specials (see p. 16)
z Special (see p. 17)
z Coils, Contacts and Interconnects (see p. 18)
z
6
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
ASCII Functions
ASCII Functions
This group provides the following instructions.
Instruction
Meaning
Available at PLC family
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
READ
Read ASCII messages
yes
no
no
no
WRIT
Write ASCII messages
yes
no
no
no
PLCs that support ASCII messaging use instructions called READ and WRIT to
handle the sending of messages to display devices and the receiving of messages
from input devices. These instructions provide the routines necessary for
communication between the ASCII message table in the PLC’s system memory and
an interface module at the remote I/O drops.
For further information, see p. 31.
31007523 12/2006
7
Instruction Groups
Counters and Timers Instructions
Counters and
Timers
Instructions
The table shows the counters and timers instructions.
Instruction Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
UCTR
Counts up from 0 to a
preset value
yes
yes
yes
yes
DCTR
Counts down from a
preset value to 0
yes
yes
yes
yes
T1.0
Timer that increments in
seconds
yes
yes
yes
yes
T0.1
tenths of a second
yes
yes
yes
yes
T.01
hundredths of a second
yes
yes
yes
yes
T1MS
one millisecond
yes
yes
(See note.)
yes
yes
Note: The T1MS instruction is available only on the B984-102, the Micro 311, 411,
512, and 612, and the Quantum 424 02.
8
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
Fast I/O Instructions
Fast I/O
Instructions
The following instructions are designed for a variety of functions known generally as
fast I/O updating.
Instruction
Meaning
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
BMDI
Block move with interrupts yes
disabled
yes
no
yes
ID
Disable interrupt
yes
yes
no
yes
IE
Enable interrupt
yes
yes
no
yes
IMIO
Immediate I/O instruction
yes
yes
no
yes
IMOD
Interrupt module
instruction
yes
no
no
yes
ITMR
Interval timer interrupt
no
yes
no
yes
Quantum
For more information, see p. 45.
Note: The fast I/O instructions are only available after configuring a CPU without
extension.
31007523 12/2006
9
Instruction Groups
Loadable DX
Loadable DX
Instruction
Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
CHS
Hot standby (Quantum)
yes
no
no
no
DRUM
DRUM sequenzer
yes
yes
no
yes
ESI
Support of the ESI module yes
140 ESI 062 10
no
no
no
EUCA
Engineering unit
conversion and alarms
yes
yes
no
yes
HLTH
History and status
matrices
yes
yes
no
yes
ICMP
Input comparison
yes
yes
no
yes
MAP3
MAP 3 Transaction
no
no
no
no
MBUS
MBUS Transaction
no
no
no
no
MRTM
Multi-register transfer
module
yes
yes
no
yes
NOL
Transfer to/from the NOL
Module
yes
no
no
no
PEER
PEER Transaction
no
no
no
no
XMIT
RS 232 Master Mode
yes
yes
yes
no
10
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
Math Instructions
Math
Instructions
Two groups of instructions that support basic math operations are available. The first
group comprises four integer-based instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL and DIV.
The second group contains five comparable instructions, AD16, SU16, TEST, MU16
and DV16, that support signed and unsigned 16-bit math calculations and
comparisons.
Three additional instructions, ITOF, FTOI and BCD, are provided to convert the
formats of numerical values (from integer to floating point, floating point to integer,
binary to BCD and BCD to binary). Conversion operations are usful in expanded
math.
Integer Based
Instructions
Comparable
Instructions
31007523 12/2006
This part of the group provides the following instructions.
Instruction
Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
ADD
Addition
yes
yes
yes
yes
DIV
Division
yes
yes
yes
yes
MUL
Multiplication
yes
yes
yes
yes
SUB
Subtraction
yes
yes
yes
yes
Instruction
Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
AD16
Add 16 bit
yes
yes
yes
yes
DV16
Divide 16 bit
yes
yes
yes
yes
MU16
Multiply 16 bit
yes
yes
yes
yes
SU16
Subtract 16 bit
yes
yes
yes
yes
TEST
Test of 2 values
yes
yes
yes
yes
11
Instruction Groups
Format
Conversion
12
Instruction
Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
BCD
Conversion from binary to
binary code or binary code
to binary
yes
yes
yes
yes
FTOI
Conversion from floating
point to integer
yes
yes
yes
yes
ITOF
Conversion from integer to
floating point
yes
yes
yes
yes
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
Matrix Instructions
Matrix
Instructions
A matrix is a sequence of data bits formed by consecutive 16-bit words or registers
derived from tables. DX matrix functions operate on bit patterns within tables.
Just as with move instructions, the minimum table length is 1 and the maximum table
length depends on the type of instruction you use and on the size of the CPU (24bit) in your PLC.
Groups of 16 discretes can also be placed in tables. The reference number used is
the first discrete in the group, and the other 15 are implied. The number of the first
discrete must be of the first of 16 type 000001, 100001, 000017, 100017, 000033,
100033, ... , etc..
31007523 12/2006
Instruction
Meaning
AND
Logical AND
BROT
Bit rotate
yes
yes
yes
yes
CMPR
Compare register
yes
yes
yes
yes
COMP
Complement a matrix
yes
yes
yes
yes
MBIT
Modify bit
yes
yes
yes
yes
NBIT
Bit control
yes
yes
no
yes
NCBT
Normally open bit
yes
yes
no
yes
NOBT
Normally closed bit
yes
yes
no
yes
OR
Logical OR
yes
yes
yes
yes
RBIT
Reset bit
yes
yes
no
yes
SBIT
Set bit
yes
yes
no
yes
SENS
Sense
yes
yes
yes
yes
XOR
Exclusive OR
yes
yes
yes
yes
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
yes
yes
yes
yes
13
Instruction Groups
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Instruction Meaning
Quantum
14
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
CKSM
Check sum
yes
yes
yes
yes
DLOG
Data Logging for
PCMCIA Read/Write
Support
no
yes
no
no
EMTH
Extended Math
Functions
yes
yes
yes
yes
LOAD
Load flash
yes
(CPU 434 12/
534 14 only)
yes
yes
no
(CCC 960 x0/
980 x0 only)
MSTR
Master
yes
yes
yes
SAVE
Save flash
yes
(CPU 434 12/
534 14 only)
yes
yes
no
(CCC 960 x0/
980 x0 only)
SCIF
Sequential control
interfaces
yes
yes
no
yes
XMRD
Extended memory read yes
no
no
yes
XMWT
Extended memory write yes
no
no
yes
yes
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
Move Instructions
Move
Instructions
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
BLKM
Block move
yes
yes
yes
yes
BLKT
Table to block move
yes
yes
yes
yes
FIN
First in
yes
yes
yes
yes
FOUT
First out
yes
yes
yes
yes
IBKR
Indirect block read
yes
yes
no
yes
IBKW
Indirect block write
yes
yes
no
yes
R→T
Register to tabel move
yes
yes
yes
yes
SRCH
Search table
yes
yes
yes
yes
T→R
Table to register move
yes
yes
yes
yes
T→T
Table to table move
yes
yes
yes
yes
TBLK
Table to block move
yes
yes
yes
yes
15
Instruction Groups
Skips/Specials
Skips/Specials
Instruction
Meaning
Quantum
Compact
Momentum
Atrium
JSR
Jump to subroutine
yes
yes
yes
yes
LAB
Label for a subroutine
yes
yes
yes
yes
RET
Return from a subroutine
yes
yes
yes
yes
SKPC
Skip (constant)
yes
yes
yes
yes
SKPR
Skip (register)
yes
yes
yes
yes
The SKP instruction is a standard instruction in all PLCs. It should be used with
caution.
DANGER
UNINTENTIONAL I/O SKIPPING
Take precaution when using the SKP• instruction. If inputs and outputs that
normally effect control are unintentionally skipped (or not skipped), the result can
create hazardous conditions for personnel and application equipment.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
16
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Groups
Special Instructions
Special
Instructions
These instructions are used in special situations to measure statistical events on the
overall logic system or create special loop control situations.
Instruction Meaning
31007523 12/2006
Quantum Compact Momentum
Atrium
DIOH
Distributed I/O health
yes
no
no
yes
PCFL
Process control function
library
yes
yes
no
yes
PID2
Proportional integral
derivative
yes
yes
yes
yes
STAT
Status
yes
yes
yes
yes
17
Instruction Groups
Coils, Contacts,
and
Interconnects
18
Coils, contacts, and interconnects are available at all PLC families.
normal coil
z memory-retentive, or latched, coil
z normally open (N.O.) contact
z normally closed (N.C.) contact
z positive transitional (P.T.) contact
z negative transitional (N.T.) contact
z horizontal short
z vertical short
z
31007523 12/2006
Closed Loop Control /
Analog Values
3
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides general information about configuring closed loop control and
using analog values.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
31007523 12/2006
Page
20
PCFL Subfunctions
21
A PID Example
25
PID2 Level Control Example
28
19
General
An analog closed loop control system is one in which the deviation from an ideal
process condition is measured, analyzed and adjusted in an attempt to obtain and
maintain zero error in the process condition. Provided with the Enhanced Instruction
Set is a proportional-integral-derivative function block called PID2, which allows you
to establish closed loop (or negative feedback) control in ladder logic.
Definition of Set
Point and
Process Variable
The desired (zero error) control point, which you will define in the PID2 block, is
called the set point (SP). The conditional measurement taken against SP is called
the process variable (PV). The difference between the SP and the PV is the
deviation or error (E). E is fed into a control calculation that produces a manipulated
variable (Mv) used to adjust the process so that PV = SP (and, therefore, E = 0).
control
end device
PV
process
process
transmitter
Mv
(output)
20
_
control
calculation
PV (Input)
E
+
SP
31007523 12/2006
PCFL Subfunctions
General
The PCFL instruction gives you access to a library of process control functions
utilizing analog values.
PCFL operations fall into three major categories.
z advanced calculations
z signal processing
z regulatory control
Advanced
Calculations
Advanced calculations are used for general mathematical purposes and are not
limited to process control applications. With advanced calculations, you can create
custom signal processing algorithms, derive states of the controlled process, derive
statistical measures of the process, etc.
Simple math routines have already been offered in the EMTH instruction. The
calculation capability included in PCFL is a textual equation calculator for writing
custom equations instead of programming a series of math operations one by one.
Signal
Processing
Signal processing functions are used to manipulate process and derived process
signals. They can do this in a variety of ways; they linearize, filter, delay and
otherwise modify a signal. This category would include functions such as an analog
input/output, limiters, lead/lag and ramp generators.
Regulatory
Control
Regulatory functions perform closed loop control in a variety of applications.
Typically, this is a PID (proportional integral derivative) negative feedback control
loop. The PID functions in PCFL offer varying degrees of functionality. Function PID
has the same general functionality as the PID2 instruction but uses floating point
math and represents some options differently. PID is beneficial in cases where PID2
is not suitable because of numerical concerns such as round-off.
31007523 12/2006
21
Explanation of
Formula
Elements
General
Equations
Meaning of formula elements in the following formulas:
Formula Elements
Meaning
Y
Manipulated variable output
YP
Proportional part of the calculation
YI
Integral part of the calculation
YD
Derivative part of the calculation
Bias
Constant added to input
BT
Bumpless transfer register
SP
Set point
KP
Proportional gain
Dt
Time since last solve
TI
Integral time constant
TD
Derivative time constant
TD1
Derivative time lag
XD
Error term, deviation
XD_1
Previous error term
X
Process input
X_1
Previous process input
The following general equations are valid.
Equation
Condition/Requirement
Y = YP + YI + YD + BIAS
Integral bit ON
Y = YP + YD + BIAS + BT
Integral bit OFF
Y high ≤ Y ≤ Y low
High/low limits
with
YP, YI, YD = f(XD)
22
XD = SP – X ± ( GRZ × ( 1 – KGRZ ) )
Gain reduction
XD = SP – X
Gain reduction zone not used
31007523 12/2006
Proportional
Calculations
The following equations are valid.
Equation
YP = KP × XD
Proportional bit ON
YP = 0
Integral
Calculation
Equation
Δt XD_1 + XD
YI = YI + KP × ------ × -----------------------------TI
2
Integral bit ON
YI = 0
Derivative
Calculation
Equation
DXD = X_1 – X
Base derivative or PV
DXD = XD – X_1
TD1 × YD ) + ( TD × KP × DXD )
YD = (------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Δt + TD1
Derivative bit ON
YD = 0
31007523 12/2006
23
Structure
Diagram
control deviation
anti-windup-reset
a)
proportional
gain
set point
SP
0
1
+
1
_
0
1 = integral ON
- gain
0
1
1
0
control
input
1
X(n)
0
b)
c)
1 = derivative ON
0 = base derivative on XD
1 = base derivative on X
1 = proportion ON
a)
integral
TI
operating
modes
anti-windup-limits
+
high
b)
low
P+I+D
derivative
TD
Manual
Automatic
Halt
control
output
Y (n)
contributions
c)
summing junction
mode select
24
31007523 12/2006
A PID Example
Description
This example illustrates how a typical PID loop could be configured using PCFL
function PID. The calculation begins with the AIN function, which takes raw input
simulated to cause the output to run between approximately 20 and 22 when the
engineering unit scale is set to 0 ... 100.
984LL Diagram
#3
AIN
LKUP
RAMP
MODE
PID
AOUT
400100
400120
400160
400190
400200
400250
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
# 14
# 39
# 14
#8
# 44
#9
400112
400157
400172
400196
400242
400120
400200
400190
400206
400250
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
#2
#2
#2
#2
#2
000100
T0.1
000100
400185
The process variable over time should look something like this.
process variable value
22
20
time
31007523 12/2006
25
Main PID Ladder
Logic
The AIN output is block moved to the LKUP function, which is used to scale the input
signal. We do this because the input sensor is not likely to produce highly linear
readings; the result is an ideal linear signal.
7 points defined
in look up table
*
100
*
80
*
60
50
linearized signal
*
40
actual input
*
20
0
input
*
20 40
50 60 80 100
The look-up table output is block moved to the PID function. RAMP is used to control
the rise (or fall) of the set point for the PID controller with regard to the rate of ramp
and the solution interval. In this example, the set point is established in another logic
section to simulate a remote setting. The MODE function is placed after the RAMP
so that we can switch between the RAMP-generated set point or a manual value.
Simulated
Process
The PID function is actually controlling the process simulated by this logic [value in
400100: 878(Dec)].
#3
LLAG
LLAG
DELAY
AOUT
400260
400280
400300
400340
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
PCFL
# 20
# 20
# 32
#9
400242
400278
400298
400330
400348
400260
400280
400300
400340
400100
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
BLKM
#1
#1
#1
#1
#1
000103
T0.1
000103
400188
000103
26
31007523 12/2006
The process simulator is comprised of two LLAG functions that act as a filter and
input to a DELAY queue that is also a PCFL function block. This arrangement is the
equivalent of a second-order process with dead time.
The solution intervals for the LLAG filters do not affect the process dynamics and
were chosen to give fast updates. The solution interval for the DELAY queue is set
at 1000 ms with a delay of 5 intervals,i.e. 5 s. The LLAG filters each have lead terms
of 4 s and lag terms of 10 s. The gain for each is 1.0.
In process control terms the transfer function can be expressed as:
– 5S
4S + 1 ) ( 4S + 1 )e
Gp(S) = (---------------------------------------------------( 10S + 1 ) ( 10S + 1 )
The AOUT function is used only to convert the simulated process output control
value into a range of 0 ... 4 095, which simulates a field device. This integer signal
is used as the process input in the first network.
PID Parameters
The PID controller is tuned to control this process at 20.0, using the Ziegler-Nichols
tuning method. The resulting controller gain is 2.16, equivalent to a proportional
band of 46.3%.
The integral time is set at 12.5 s/repeat (4.8 repeats/ min). The derivative time is
initially 3 s, then reduced to 0.3 s to de-emphasize the derivative effect.
An AOUT function is used after the PID. It conditions the PID control output by
scaling the signal back to an integer for use as the control value.
The entire control loop is preceded by a 0.1 s timer. The target solution interval for
the entire loop is 1 s, and the full solve is 1 s. However, the nontime-dependent
functions that are used (AIN, LKUP, MODE, and AOUT) do not need to be solved
every scan. To reduce the scan time impact, these functions are scheduled to solve
less frequently. The example has a loop solve every 3 s, reducing the average scan
time dramatically.
Note: It is still important to be aware of the maximum scan impact. When
programming other loops, you will not want all of the loops to solve on the same
scan.
31007523 12/2006
27
PID2 Level Control Example
Description
Here is a simplified P&I diagram for an inlet separator in a gas processing plant.
There is a 2-phase inlet stream: liquid and gas.
vent
blowdown
inlet vent
plant
inlet
FCV
inlet block
LT
1
LSH
1
LC
1
gas
PV-1
LSL
1
LV
I/P
1
FC
condensate
LT-1 4 ... 20 mA level transmitter
I/P-1 4 ... 20 mA current to pneumatic converter
LV-1 control valve, fail CLOSED
LSH-1 high level switch, normally closed
LSL-1 low level switch, normally open
LC-1 level controller
I/P-1 Mv to control the flow into tank T-1
The liquid is dumped from the tank to maintain a constant level. The control objective
is to maintain a constant level in the separator. The phases must be separated
before processing; separation is the role of the inlet separator, PV-1. If the level
controller, LC-1, fails to perform its job, the inlet separator could fill, causing liquids
to get into the gas stream; this could severely damage devices such as gas
compressors.
28
31007523 12/2006
Ladder Logic
Diagram
The level is controlled by device LC-1, a Quantum controller connected to an analog
input module; I/P-1 is connected to an analog output module. We can implement the
control loop with the following 984LL.
300001
400102
#0
#0
SUB
SUB
400113
400500
400100
000101
000102
400200
PID2
000103
# 30
The first SUB block is used to move the analog input from LT-1 to the PID2 analog
input register, 40113. The second SUB block is used to move the PID2 output Mv to
the I/O mapped output I/P-1. Coil 00101 is used to change the loop from auto to
manual mode, if desired. For auto mode, it should be on.
Register Content
Specify the set point in mm for input scaling (E.U.). The full input range will be 0 ...
4000 mm (for 0 ... 4095 raw analog). Specify the register content of the top node in
the PID2 block as follows.
Register
Content
Numeric
400100
31007523 12/2006
Content
Meaning
Comments
Scaled PV (mm)
PID2 writes this
400101
2000
Scaled SP (mm)
Set to 2000 mm (half full) initially
400102
0000
Loop output (0 ... 4095
PID2 writes this; keep it set to 0 to be
safe
400103
3500
Alarm High Set Point (mm)
If the level rises above 3500 mm, coil
000102 goes ON
400104
1000
Alarm Low Set Point (mm)
If the level drops below 1000 mm, coil
000103 goes ON
400105
0100
PB (%)
The actual value depends on the
process dynamics
29
Register
Content
Numeric
Content
Meaning
Comments
400106
0500
Integral constant (5.00
repeats/min)
The actual value depends on the
process dynamics
400107
0000
Rate time constant (per min)
Setting this to 0 turns off the
derivative mode
400108
0000
Bias (0 ... 4095)
This is set to 0, since we have an
integral term
400109
4095
High windup limit (0 ... 4095)
Normally set to the maximum
400110
0000
Low windup limit (0 ... 4095)
Normally set to the minimum
400111
4000
High engineering range (mm)
The scaled value of the process
variable when the raw input is at 4095
400112
0000
Low engineering range (mm)
The scaled value of the process
variable when the raw input is at 0
Raw analog measure
(0 ... 4095)
A copy of the input from the analog
input module register (300001)
copied by the first SUB
400113
400114
0000
Offset to loop counter register Zero disables this feature.
Normally, this is not used
400115
0000
Max loops solved per scan
See register 400114
400116
0102
Pointer to reset feedback
If you leave this as zero, the PID2
function automatically supplies a
pointer to the loop output register. If
the actual output (400500) could be
changed from the value supplied by
PID2, then this register should be set
to 500 (400500) to calculate the
integral properly
400117
4095
Output clamp high (0 ... 4095) Normally set to maximum
400118
0000
Output clamp low (0 ... 4095)
Normally set to minimum
400119
0015
Rate Gain Limit Constant
(2 ... 30)
Normally set to about 15. The actual
value depends on how noisy the
input signal is. Since we are not using
derivative mode, this has no effect on
PID2
400120
0000
Pointer to track input
Used only if the PRELOAD feature is
used. If the PRELOAD is not used,
this is normally zero
The values in the registers in the 400200 destination block are all set by the PID2
block.
30
31007523 12/2006
Formatting Messages for
ASCII READ/WRIT Operations
4
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides general information about formatting messages for ASCII
READ/WRIT operations.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
32
Format Specifiers
33
Special Set-up Considerations for Control/Monitor Signals Format
36
31
General
The ASCII messages used in the READ and WRIT instructions can be created via
your panel software using the format specifiers described below. Format specifiers
are character symbols that indicate:
z The ASCII characters used in the message
z Register content displayed in ASCII character format
z Register content displayed in hexadecimal format
z Register content displayed in integer format
z Subroutine calls to execute other message formats
Overview Format
Specifiers
The following format specifiers can be used.
32
Specifier
Meaning
/
ASCII return (CR) and linefeed (LF)
" "
Enclosure for octal control code
‘ ´
Enclosure for ASCII text characters
X
Space indicator
()
Repeat contents of the parentheses
I
Integer
L
Leading zeros
A
Alphanumeric
O
Octal
B
Binary
H
Hexadecimal
31007523 12/2006
Format Specifiers
Format
Specifier /
Format
Specifier " "
Format
Specifier ‘ ´
Format
Specifier X
31007523 12/2006
ASCII return (CR) and linefeed (LF)
Field width
None (defaults to 1)
Prefix
Input format
Outputs CR, LF; no ASCII characters accepted
Output format
Outputs CR, LF
Enclosure for octal control code
Field width
Three digits enclosed in double quotes
Prefix
None
Input format
Accepts three octal control characters
Output format
Outputs three octal control characters
Enclosure for ASCII text characters
Field width
1 ... 128 characters
Prefix
Input format
Inputs number of upper and/or lower case printable characters
specified by the field width
Output format
Outputs number of upper and/or lower case printable characters
specified by the field width
Space indicator, e.g., 14X indicates 14 spaces left open from the point where the
specifier occurs.
Field width
Prefix
1 ... 99 spaces
Input format
Inputs specified number of spaces
Output format
Outputs specified number of spaces
33
Format
Specifier ( )
Format
Specifier I
Format
Specifier L
Format
Specifier A
34
Repeat contents of the parentheses, e.g., 2 (4X, I5) says repeat 4X, I5 two
times
Field width
None
Prefix
1 ... 255
Input format
Repeat format specifiers in parentheses the number of times
specified by the prefix
Output format
Repeat format specifiers in parentheses the number of times
specified by the prefix
Integer, e.g., I5 specifies five integer characters
Field width
1 ... 8 characters
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
Accepts ASCII characters 0 ... 9. If the field width is not satisfied, the
most significant characters in the field are padded with zeros
Output format
Outputs ASCII characters 0 ... 9. If the field width is not satisfied, the
most significant characters in the field are padded with zeros. The
overflow field consists of asterisks.
Leading zeros, e.g., L5 specifies five leading zeros
Field width
1 ... 8 characters
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
most significant characters in the field are padded with zeros
Output format
most significant characters in the field are padded with zeros. The
overflow field consists of asterisks.
Alphanumeric, e.g., A27 specifies 27 alphanumeric characters, no suffix allowed
Field width
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
Accepts any 8-bit character except reserved delimiters such as CR,
LF, ESC, BKSPC, DEL.
Output format
Outputs any 8-bit character
31007523 12/2006
Format
Specifier O
Format
Specifier B
Format
Specifier H
31007523 12/2006
Octal, e.g., O2 specifies two octal characters
Field width
1 ... 6 characters
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
most significant characters are padded with zeros.
Output format
most significant characters are padded with zeros. No overflow
indicators.
Binary, e.g., B4 specifies four binary characters
Field width
1 ... 16 characters
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
Accepts ASCII characters 0 and 1. If the field width is not satisfied,
the most significant characters are padded with zeros.
Output format
Outputs ASCII characters 0 and 1. If the field width is not satisfied,
the most significant characters are padded with zeros. No overflow
indicators.
Hexadecimal, e.g., H2 specifies two hex characters
Field width
1 ... 4 characters
Prefix
1 ... 99
Input format
Accepts ASCII characters 0 ... 9 and A ... F. If the field width is not
satisfied, the most significant characters are padded with zeros.
Output format
Outputs ASCII characters 0 ... 9 and A ... F. If the field width is not
satisfied, the most significant characters are padded with zeros. No
overflow indicators.
35
Special Set-up Considerations for Control/Monitor Signals Format
General
To control and monitor the signals used in the messaging communication, specify
code 1002 in the first register of the control block (the register displayed in the top
node). Via this format, you can control the RTS and CTS lines on the port used for
messaging.
Note: In this format, only the local port can be used for messaging, i.e., a parent
PLC cannot monitor or control the signals on a child port. Therefore, the port
number specified in the fifth implied node of the control block must always be 1.
The first three registers in the data block (the displayed register and the first and
second implied registers in the middle node) have predetermined content.
Register
Content
Displayed
Stores the control mask word
First implied
Stores the control data word
Second implied
Stores the status word
These three data block registers are required for this format, and therefore the
allowable range for the length value (specified in the bottom node) is 3 ... 255.
Control Mask
Word
Usage of word:
1
36
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1
1 = port can be taken
0 = port cannot be taken
2 - 15
Not used
16
1 = control RTS
0 = do not control RTS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Control Data
Word
Usage of word:
1
Status Word
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1
1 = take port
0 = return port
2 - 15
Not used
16
1 = activate RTS
0 = deactivate RTS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Usage of word:
1
31007523 12/2006
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1
1 = port taken
2
1 = port ACTIVE as Modbus slave
3 - 13
Not used
14
1 = DSR ON
15
1 = CTS ON
16
1 = RTS ON
37
38
31007523 12/2006
Coils, Contacts, and
Interconnects
5
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides information about coils, contacts, and interconnects, also
called shorts. Details of all the elements in the ladder logic instruction set appear in
an alphabetical listing.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Coils
40
Contacts
42
Interconnects (Shorts)
44
39
Coils
Definition of
Coils
A coil is a discrete output that is turned ON and OFF by power flow in the logic
program. A single coil is tied to a 0x reference in the PLC’s state RAM. Because
output values are updated in state RAM by the PLC, a coil may be used internally in
the logic program or externally via the I/O map to a discrete output unit in the control
system. When a coil is ON, it either passes power to a discrete output circuit or
changes the state of an internal relay contact in state RAM.
There are two types of coils.
A normal coil
z A memory-retentive, or latched, coil
z
Normal Coil
WARNING
Forcing of Coils
When a discrete input (1x) is disabled, signals from its associated input field device
have no control over its ON/OFF state. When a discrete output (0x) is disabled, the
PLC’s logic scan has no control over the ON/OFF state of the output. When a
discrete input or output has been disabled, you can change its current ON/OFF
state with the Force command.
There is an important exception when you disable coils. Data move and data matrix
instructions that use coils in their destination node recognize the current ON/OFF
state of all coils in that node, whether they are disabled or not. If you are expecting
a disabled coil to remain disabled in such an instruction, you may cause
unexpected or undesirable effects in your application.
When a coil or relay contact has been disabled, you can change its state using the
Force ON or Force OFF command. If a coil or relay is enabled, it cannot be forced.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
A normal coil is a discrete output shown as a 0x reference.
A normal coil is ON or OFF, depending on power flow in the program.
A ladder logic network can contain up to seven coils, no more than one per row.
When a coil is placed in a row, no other logic elements or instruction nodes can
appear to the right of the coil’s logic-solve position in the row. Coils are the only
ladder logic elements that can be inserted in column 11 of a network.
40
31007523 12/2006
To define a discrete reference for the coil, select it in the editor and click to open a
dialog box called Coil.
Symbol
Retentive Coil
If a retentive (latched) coil is energized when the PLC loses power, the coil will come
back up in the same state for one scan when the PLC’s power is restored.
To define a discrete reference for the coil, select it in the editor and click to open a
dialog box called Retentative coil (latch).
Symbol
L
31007523 12/2006
41
Contacts
Definition of
Contacts
Contacts are used to pass or inhibit power flow in a ladder logic program. They are
discrete, i.e., each consumes one I/O point in ladder logic. A single contact can be
tied to a 0x or 1x reference number in the PLC’s state RAM, in which case each
contact consumes one node in a ladder network.
Four kinds of contacts are available.
normally open (N.O.) contacts
z normally closed (N.C.) contacts
z positive transitional (P.T.) contacts
z negative transitional (N.T.) contacts
z
Contact
Normally Open
A normally open (NO) contact passes power when it is ON.
To define a discrete reference for the NO contact, select it in the editor and click to
open a dialog called Normally open contact.
Symbol
Contact
Normally Closed
A normally closed (NC) contact passes power when it is OFF.
To define a discrete reference for the NC contact, double ckick on it in the ladder
node to open a dialog called Normally closed contact.
Symbol
42
31007523 12/2006
Contact Pos
Trans
A positive transitional (PT) contact passes power for only one scan as it transitions
from OFF to ON.
To define a discrete reference for the PT contact, select it in the editor and click to
open a dialog called Positive transition contact.
Symbol
Contact Neg
Trans
A negative transitional (NT) contact passes power for only one scan as it transitions
from ON to OFF.
To define a discrete reference for the NT contact, select it in the editor and click to
open a dialog called Contact negative transition .
Symbol
31007523 12/2006
43
Interconnects (Shorts)
Definition of
Interconnects
(Shorts)
Shorts are simply straight-line connections between contacts and/or instructions in
a ladder logic network. Shorts may be inserted horizontally or vertically in a network.
Two kinds of shorts are available.
horizontal short
z vertical short
z
Horizontal Short
A short is a straight-line connection between contacts and/or nodes in an instruction
through which power flow can be controlled.
A horizontal short is used to extend logic out across a row in a network without
breaking the power flow. Each horizontal short consumes one node in the network,
and uses a word of memory in the PLC.
Symbol
Vertical Short
A vertical short connects contacts or nodes in an instruction positioned one above
the other in a column. Vertical shorts can also connect inputs or outputs in an
instruction to create either-or conditions. When two contacts are connected by a
vertical short, power is passed when one or both contacts receive power.
The vertical short is unique in two ways.
It can coexist in a network node with another element or nodal value.
z It does not consume any PLC memory.
z
Symbol
44
31007523 12/2006
Interrupt Handling
6
Interrupt Handling
Interrupt-related
Performance
The interrupt-related instructions operate with minimum processing overhead. The
performance of interrupt-related instructions is especially critical. Using a interval
timer interrupt (ITMR) instruction adds about 6% to the scan time of the scheduled
ladder logic, this increase does not include the time required to execute the interrupt
handler subroutine associated with the interrupt.
Interrupt Latency
Time
The following table shows the minimum and maximum interrupt latency times you
can expect.
ITMR overhead
No work to do
60 ms/ms
Response time
Minimum
98 ms
Maximum during logic solve and Modbus
command reception
400 ms
Total overhead (not counting normal logic solve time)
155 ms
These latency times assume only one interrupt at a time.
Interrupt
Priorities
The PLC uses the following rules to choose which interrupt handler to execute in the
event that multiple interrupts are received simultaneously.
z An interrupt generated by an interrupt module has a higher priority than an
interrupt generated by a timer.
z Interrupts from modules in lower slots of the local backplane have priority over
interrupts from modules in the higher slots.
If the PLC is executing an interrupt handler subroutine when a higher priority
interrupt is received, the current interrupt handler is completed before the new
interrupt handler is begun.
31007523 12/2006
45
Interrupt Handling
Instructions that
Cannot Be Used
in an Interrupt
Handler
The following (nonreenterant) ladder logic instructions cannot be used inside an
interrupt handler subroutine.
z MSTR
z READ / WRIT
z PCFL / EMTH
z T1.0, T0.1, T.01, and T1MS timers (will not set error bit 2, timer results invalid)
z equation networks
z user loadables (will not set error bit 2)
If any of these instructions are placed in an interrupt handler, the subroutine will be
aborted, the error output on the ITMR or IMOD instruction that generated the
interrupt will go ON, and bit 2 in the status register will be set.
Interrupt with
BMDI/ID/IE
Three interrupt mask/unmask control instructions are available to help protect data
in both the normal (scheduled) ladder logic and the (unscheduled) interrupt handling
subroutine logic. These are the Interrupt Disable (ID) instruction, the Interrupt
Enable (IE) instruction, and the Block Move with Interrupts Disabled (BMDI)
instruction.
An interrupt that is executed in the timeframe after an ID instruction has been solved
and before the next IE instruction has been solved is buffered. The execution of a
buffered interrupt takes place at the time the IE instruction is solved. If two or more
interrupts of the same type occur between the ID ... IE solve, the mask interrupt
overrun error bit is set, and the subroutine initiated by the interrupts is executed only
one time
The BMDI instruction can be used to mask both a timer-generated and local I/Ogenerated interrupts, perform a single block data move, then unmask the interrupts.
It allows for the exchange of a block of data either within the subroutine or at one or
more places in the scheduled logic program.
BMDI instructions can be used to reduce the time between the disable and enable
of interrupts. For example, BMDI instructions can be used to protect the data used
by the interrupt handler when the data is updated or read by Modbus, Modbus Plus,
Peer Cop or Distributed I/O (DIO).
46
31007523 12/2006
Subroutine Handling
7
Subroutine Handling
JSR / LAB
Method
The example below shows a series of three user logic networks, the last of which is
used for an up-counting subroutine. Segment 32 has been removed from the orderof-solve table in the segment scheduler.
Scheduled Logic Flow
Segment 001
Network 00001
Subroutine Segment
Segment 032
Network 00001
Network 00002
00001
JSR
10001
00001
LAB
00001
40256
40256
00001
ADD
40256
40256
SUB
40256
RET
00001
40256
00010
SUB
40999
00001
JSR
00001
Segment 002
Network 00001
31007523 12/2006
47
Subroutine Handling
When input 100001 to the JSR block in network 2 of segment 1 transitions from OFF
to ON, the logic scan jumps to subroutine #1 in network 1 of segment 32.
The subroutine will internally loop on itself ten times, counted by the ADD block. The
first nine loops end with the JSR block in the subroutine (network 1 of segment 32)
sending the scan back to the LAB block. Upon completion of the tenth loop, the RET
block sends the logic scan back to the scheduled logic at the JSR node in network
2 of segment 1.
48
31007523 12/2006
8
How to install the
DX Loadables
The DX loadable instructions are only available if you have installed them. With the
installation of the Concept software, DX loadables are located on your hard disk.
Now you have to unpack and install the loadables you want to use as follows.
Step
Action
1
With the menu command Project → Configurator you open the
configurator.
2
With Configure → Loadables... you open the dialog box Loadables.
3
Press the command button Unpack... to open the standard Windows dialog
box Unpack Loadable File where the multifile loadables (DX loadables) can
be selected. Select the loadable file you need, click the button OK and it is
inserted into the list box Available:.
4
Now press the command button Install=> to install the loadable selected in
the list box Available:. The installed loadable will be displayed in the list box
Installed:.
5
Press the command button Edit... to open the dialog box Loadable
Instruction Configuration. Change the opcode if necessary or accept
the default. You can assign an opcode to the loadable in the list box Opcode in
order to enable user program access through this code. An opcode that is
already assigned to a loadable, will be identified by a *. Click the button OK.
6
Click the button OK in the dialog box Loadables.
Configuration loadables count is adjusted. The installed loadable is available for
programming at the menu Objects → List Instructions → DX
Loadable.
31007523 12/2006
49
50
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Descriptions (A to D)
II
At a Glance
Introduction
In this part instruction descriptions are arranged alphabetically from A to D.
What's in this
Part?
Chapter
9
31007523 12/2006
Chapter Name
Page
1X3X - Input Simulation
53
10
AD16: Ad 16 Bit
57
11
ADD: Addition
61
12
AND: Logical And
65
13
BCD: Binary to Binary Code
71
14
BLKM: Block Move
75
15
BLKT: Block to Table
79
16
BMDI: Block Move with Interrupts Disabled
83
17
BROT: Bit Rotate
87
18
CALL: Activate Immediate or Deferred DX Function
91
19
CANT - Interpret Coils, Contacts, Timers, Counters, and the
SUB Block
99
20
CCPF - Configure Cam Profile with Variable Instruments
105
21
CCPV - Configure Cam Profile with Variable Increments
109
22
CFGC - Configure Coordinated Set
113
23
CFGF - Configure Follower Set
117
24
CFGI – Configure Imaginary Axis
121
25
CFGR – Configure Remote Axis
125
26
CFGS – Configure SERCOS Axis
129
27
CHS: Configure Hot Standby
133
28
CKSM: Check Sum
139
51
Instruction Descriptions (A to D)
Chapter
52
Chapter Name
Page
29
CMPR: Compare Register
143
30
Coils
147
31
COMM - ASCII Communications Function
151
32
COMP: Complement a Matrix
155
33
Contacts
161
34
CONV - Convert Data
165
35
CTIF - Counter, Timer, and Interrupt Function
169
36
DCTR: Down Counter
177
37
DIOH: Distributed I/O Health
181
38
DISA - Disabled Discrete Monitor
187
39
DIV: Divide
191
40
DLOG: Data Logging for PCMCIA Read/Write Support
197
41
DMTH - Double Precision Math
203
42
DRUM: DRUM Sequencer
211
43
DV16: Divide 16 Bit
217
31007523 12/2006
9
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction 1X3X.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
54
Representation
55
53
Short Description
Function
Description
54
The Input Simulation instruction provides a simple method to simulate 1xxxx and
3xxx input data values. This block is similar to a Block Move, the BLKM instruction.
When the control input receives power, the source table is copied to the destination
(input) table.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
Representation of the instruction
control input
active
destination
table
source table
1X3X
table length: 1 - 100
Parameter
Description
Description of the instruction’s parameters
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Meaning
destination table 1x, 3x
(top node)
INT
source table
(middle node
INT
Contains source to be moved to destination
INT
(Length: NNN if 3X)
Length: 16* if 4x
None
Passes power when top input receives
power.
4x
length
(bottom node
Top output
31007523 12/2006
length
0x
55
56
31007523 12/2006
AD16: Ad 16 Bit
10
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction AD16.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
58
Representation
59
57
AD16: Ad 16 Bit
Short Description
Function
Description
58
The AD16 instruction performs signed or unsigned 16-bit addition on value 1 (its top
node) and value 2 (its middle node), then posts the sum in a 4x holding register in
the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
AD16: Ad 16 Bit
Representation
Symbol
control input
successful completion
value 1
maximum value
65535
value 2
maximum value
65535
signed value
AD16
sum
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
overflow
unsigned = 65535
signed = 32767 or < -32768
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = add value 1 and value 2
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = signed operation
OFF = unsigned operation
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Addend, can be displayed explicitly as an
integer (range 1 ... 65 535) or stored in a
register
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Addend, can be displayed explicitly as an
register
sum
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Sum of 16 bit addition
Top output
0x
None
ON = successful completion of the
operation
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = overflow in the sum
59
AD16: Ad 16 Bit
60
31007523 12/2006
ADD: Addition
11
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ADD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
62
Representation
63
61
ADD: Addition
Short Description
Function
Description
62
The ADD instruction adds unsigned value 1 (its top node) to unsigned value 2 (its
middle node) and stores the sum in a holding register in the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
ADD: Addition
Representation
Symbol
control input
maximum values:
999 - 16 bit PLC
9999 - 24 bit PLC
65535 - 785L PLC
overflow
value 1
sum > 999 - 16 bit PLC
sum > 9999 - 24 bit PLC
65535 - 785L PLC
value 2
ADD
sum
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = add value 1 and value 2
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
sum > 9999 - 24 bit PLC
65535 - 785L PLC
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
sum > 9999 - 24 bit PLC
65535 - 785L PLC
sum
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Sum
Top output
0x
None
ON = overflow in the sum
sum > 999 in 16 bit PLC
sum > 9999 in 24 bit PLC
65535 in 785L PLC
63
ADD: Addition
64
31007523 12/2006
AND: Logical And
12
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction AND.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
66
Representation
67
Parameter Description
69
65
AND: Logical And
Short Description
Function
Description
The AND instruction performs a Boolean AND operation on the bit patterns in the
source and destination matrices.
The ANDed bit pattern is then posted in the destination matrix, overwriting its
previous contents.
source
bits
0
0
1
1
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
0
0
0
1
1
1
destination
bits
0
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the AND instruction, check for disabled coils. AND will override any
disabled coils within the destination matrix without enabling them.This can cause
personal injury if a coil has disabled an operation for maintenance or repair
because the coil’s state can be changed by the AND operation.
equipment damage.
66
31007523 12/2006
AND: Logical And
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
matrix
destination
matrix
length: 1 - 100 registers
(16 to 1600 bits)
AND
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Initiates AND
source matrix
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
BOOL, WORD
First reference in the source matrix
destination matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
BOOL, WORD
First reference in the destination
matrix
INT, UINT
Matrix length; range 1 ... 100.
None
Echoes state of the top input
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
0x
67
AND: Logical And
An AND Example
When contact 10001 passes power, the source matrix formed by the bit pattern in
registers 40600 and 40601 is ANDed with the destination matrix formed by the bit
pattern in registers 40604 and 40605. The ANDed bits are then copied into registers
40604 and 40605, overwriting the previous bit pattern in the destination matrix.
source matrix
40600 = 1111111100000000 40601 = 1111111100000000
40600
10001
40604
AND
00002
Original destination matrix
40604 = 1111111111111111 40605 = 0000000000000000
ANDed destination matrix
40604 = 1111111100000000 40605 = 0000000000000000
Note: If you want to retain the original destination bit pattern of registers 40604 and
40605, copy the information into another table using the BLKM instruction before
performing the AND operation.
68
31007523 12/2006
AND: Logical And
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
The integer entered in the bottom node specifies the matrix length, i.e. the number
of registers or 16-bit words in the two matrices. The matrix length can be in the range
1 ... 100. A length of 2 indicates that 32 bits in each matrix will be ANDed.
69
AND: Logical And
70
31007523 12/2006
13
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction BCD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
72
Representation
73
71
Short Description
Function
Description
72
The BCD instruction can be used to convert a binary value to a binary coded decimal
(BCD) value or a BCD value to a binary value. The type of conversion to be
performed is controlled by the state of the bottom input.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
register
destination
register
binary/BCD
error
BCD
ON = BCD to binary
OFF = binary to BCD
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
#1
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enable conversion
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = BCD → binary conversion
OFF = binary → BCD conversion
source register
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Source register where the numerical value
to be converted is stored
destination register 4x
(middle node)
INT, UINT
Destination register where the converted
numerical value is posted
#1
(bottom node)
INT, UINT
Constant value, can not be changed
Top output
0x
None
Echoes the state of the top input
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error in the conversion operation
73
74
31007523 12/2006
BLKM: Block Move
14
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction BLKM.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
76
Representation
77
75
BLKM: Block Move
Short Description
Function
Description
The BLKM (block move) instruction copies the entire contents of a source table to a
destination table in one scan.
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the BLKM instruction, check for disabled coils. BLKM will override any
disabled coils within a destination table without enabling them. This can cause
injury if a coil has been disabled for repair or maintenance because the coil’s state
can change as a result of the BLKM instruction.
equipment damage.
76
31007523 12/2006
BLKM: Block Move
Representation
Symbol
control input
table of 16-bit locations or
of registers
table of 16-bit locations or
of registers
active
source
table
destination
table
BLKM
(16 - 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates block move
source table
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
ANY_BIT
Source table that will have its contents
copied in the block move
destination table
(middle node)
0x, 4x
ANY_BIT
Destination table where the contents of the
source table will be copied in the block move
INT, UINT
Table size (number of registers or 16-bit
words) for both the source and destination
tables; they are of equal length.
Range: 1 ... 100
None
table length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
table length
0x
77
BLKM: Block Move
78
31007523 12/2006
15
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction BLKT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
80
Representation
81
82
79
Short Description
Function
Description
The BLKT (block-to-table) instruction combines the functions of R→T and BLKM in
a single instruction. In one scan, it can copy data from a source block to a destination
block in a table. The source block is of a fixed length. The block within the table is of
the same length, but the overall length of the table is limited only by the number of
registers in your system configuration.
WARNING
4x REGISTER CORRUPTION
Use external logic in conjunction with the middle or bottom input to confine the
value in the pointer to a safe range. BLKT is a powerful instruction that can corrupt
all the 4x registers in your PLC with data copied from the source block.
equipment damage.
80
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
move complete
source
block
hold pointer
reset pointer
(16 - 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
BLKT
block length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates the DX move
middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = hold pointer
bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = reset pointer to zero
source block
(top node)
4x
BYTE, WORD First holding register in the block of
contiguous registers whose content will be
copied to a block of registers in the
destination table
pointer
(middle node)
4x
BYTE, WORD Pointer to the destination table
block length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
error
pointer
INT, UINT
Block length (number of 4x registers) of the
source block and of the destination block
Range: 1 ... 100
Top output
0x
None
ON = operation successful
Middle output
0x
None
ON = error / move not possible
81
Middle and
Bottom Input
The middle and bottom input can be used to control the pointer so that source data
is not copied into registers that are needed for other purposes in the logic program.
When the middle input is ON, the value in the pointer register is frozen while the
BLKT operation continues. This causes new data being copied to the destination to
overwrite the block data copied on the previous scan.
When the bottom input is ON, the value in the pointer register is reset to zero. This
causes the BLKT operation to copy source data into the first block of registers in the
destination table.
Pointer
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the pointer to the destination table. The
first register in the destination table is the next contiguous register after the pointer,
e.g. if the pointer register is 400107, then the first register in the destination table is
400108.
Note: The destination table is segmented into a series of register blocks, each of
which is the same length as the source block. Therefore, the size of the destination
table is a multiple of the length of the source block, but its overall size is not
specifically defined in the instruction. If left uncontrolled, the destination table could
consume all the 4x registers available in the PLC configuration.
The value stored in the pointer register indicates where in the destination table the
source data will begin to be copied. This value specifies the block number within the
destination table.
82
31007523 12/2006
BMDI: Block Move with
Interrupts Disabled
16
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction BMDI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
84
Representation
85
83
Short Description
Function
Description
84
The BMDI instruction masks the interrupt, initiates a block move (BLKM) operation,
then unmasks the interrupts.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
table of 16-bit locations or of
registers
table of 16-bit locations or of
registers
active
source
table
destination
table
BMDI
(16 - 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
source table (top
node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
INT, UINT, Source table that will have its contents
WORD
copied in the block move
destination table
(middle node)
0x, 4x
INT, UINT, Destination table where the contents of the
WORD
source table will be copied in the block move
table length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
table length
ON = masks interrupt, initiates a block
move, then unmasks the interrupts
INT, UINT Integer value, specifies the table size, i.e.
the number of registers, in the source and
destination tables (they are of equal length)
Range: 1 ... 100
0x
None
85
86
31007523 12/2006
BROT: Bit Rotate
17
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction BROT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
88
Representation
89
90
87
BROT: Bit Rotate
Short Description
Function
Description
The BROT (bit rotate) instruction shifts the bit pattern in a source matrix, then posts
the shifted bit pattern in a destination matrix. The bit pattern shifts left or right by one
position per scan.
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the BROT instruction, check for disabled coils. BROT will override any
disabled coils within a destination matrix without enabling them. This can cause
injury if a coil has been disabled for repair or maintenance if BROT unexpectedly
changes the coil’s state.
equipment damage.
88
31007523 12/2006
BROT: Bit Rotate
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
matrix
direction (left/right)
shift/rotate
length: 1 -100 registers
(16 - 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
sense bit (ON/OFF)
destination
matrix
BROT
length
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = shifts bit pattern in source matrix by one
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON= shift left
OFF = shift right
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = exit bit falls out of the destination matrix
ON = exit bit wraps to start of the destination
matrix
source matrix
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x,
4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the source matrix, i.e. in the
matrix that will have its bit pattern shifted
destination matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the destination matrix, i.e. in
the matrix that shows the shifted bit pattern
length
(bottom node)
0x
INT, UINT Matrix length; range: 1 ... 100
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
OFF = exit bit is 0
ON = exit bit is 1
89
BROT: Bit Rotate
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies the matrix length, i.e. the
number of registers or 16-bit words in each of the two matrices. The source matrix
and destination matrix have the same length. The matrix length can range from 1 ...
100, e.g. a matrix length of 100 indicates 1600 bit locations.
Result
of the Shift
(Middle Output)
The middle output indicates the sense of the bit that exits the source matrix (the
leftmost or rightmost bit) as a result of the shift.
90
31007523 12/2006
CALL: Activate Immediate or
Deferred DX Function
18
AT A GLANCE
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CALL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
92
Representation
93
Representation
96
91
CALL: Activate DX Function
Short Description
Function
Description
A CALL instruction activates an immediate or deferred DX function from a library of
functions defined by function codes. The Copro copies the data and function code
into its local memory, processes the data, and copies the results back to controller
memory.
Function Codes:
0-499: User Immediate/Deferred DXs
z 500-9999: System Immediate/Deferred DXs
z
The two MSBs of the top register are the Copro# in a multiple Copro system.
92
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Overview
The content in this section applies specifically to the Immediate DX function of the
CALL instruction.
Symbol
Representation of the instruction for an Immediate DX CALL
control input
complete
function
code
source
code
scan call
error
CALL
length: 1 - 255
31007523 12/2006
length
93
Parameter
Description
Description of the instruction’s parameters for an Immediate DX CALL
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates the CALL.
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
The input to the bottom node is used with an
immediate DX function to keep scanning the
instruction regardless of the state of the top
input.
A list of the codes, their names, and their
function is detailed in the table below named
Immediate DX Functions.
value
(top node)
0x, 3x
INT, UINT
The top node is used to specify the function
code to be executed. It may be entered
explicitly as a constant or as a value in a
4xxxx holding register. The codes fall into
two ranges:
z 0 through 499 are for user-definable DXs
z 500 through 9999 are for system DXs
Both User-definable and System-definable
codes apply to both immediate and deferred.
Both User-definable and System-definable
are provided by Schneider Electric.
register
(middle node)
4x
length
(bottom node)
94
INT, UINT
The 4xxxx register in the middle node is the
first in a block of registers to be passed to the
Copro for processing.
INT, UINT
The number of registers in the block is
defined in the bottom node.
Top output
0x
None
ON when the function completes
successfully.
Bottom output
0x
None
The output from the bottom node will go ON
if an error is detected in the function.
31007523 12/2006
Immediate DX
Functions
31007523 12/2006
This table lists the Immediate DX functions
Name
Code
Function
f_config
500
Obtain Copro configuration data
f_2md_fl
501
Convert a two-register long integer to 64-bit floating point
f_fl_2md
502
Convert floating point to two-register long integer
f_4md_fl
503
Convert a four-register long integer to floating point
f_fl_4md
504
Convert floating point to four-register long integer
f_1md_fl
505
Convert a one-register long integer to floating point
f_fl_1m
506
Convert floating point to one-register long integer
f_exp
507
Exponential function
f_log
508
Natural logarithm
f_log10
509
Base 10 logarithm
f_pow
510
Raise to a power
f_sqrt
511
Square root
f_cos
512
Cosine
f_sin
513
Sine
f_tan
514
Tangent
f_atan
515
Arc tangent x
f_atan2
516
Arc tangent y/x
f_asin
517
Arc sine
f_acos
518
Arc cosine
f_add
519
Add
f_sub
520
Subtract
f_mult
521
Multiply
f_div
522
Divide
f_deg_rad
523
Convert degrees to radians
f_rad_deg
524
Convert radians to degrees
f_swap
525
Swap byte positions within a register
f_comp
526
Floating point compare
f_dbwrite
527
Write Copro register database from PLC
f_dbread
528
Read Copro register database from PLC
95
Representation
Overview
The content in this section applies specifically to the Deferred DX function of the
CALL instruction.
Symbol
Representation of the instruction for a Deferred DX CALL
control input
complete
function
code
deferred DX mode
selected
active
source
table
error
CALL
length: 1 - 255
Parameter
Description
96
length
Description of the instruction’s parameters for a Deferred DX CALL
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates the CALL.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
The instruction calls a deferred DX when the input
to the middle node is enabled.
A list of the codes, their names, and their function
is detailed in the table below named Deferred DX
functions.
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
value
(top node)
0x, 3x
INT,
UINT
The top node is used to specify the function code
to be executed. It may be entered explicitly as a
constant or as a value in a 4xxxx holding register.
The codes fall into two ranges:
z 0 through 499 are for user-definable DXs
z 500 through 9999 are for system DXs
Both User-definable and System-definable codes
apply to both immediate and deferred. Both Userdefinable and System-definable are provided by
Schneider Electric.
register
(middle node)
4x
length
(bottom node)
Deferred DX
Functions
31007523 12/2006
INT,
UINT
The 4xxxx register in the middle node is the first in
a block of registers to be passed to the Copro for
processing.
INT,
UINT
The number of registers in the block is defined in
the bottom node.
Top output
0x
None
ON when the function completes successfully.
Middle output
0x
None
The output from the middle node, which is used
only with deferred DX functions, goes ON to
indicate that the function s in process.
Bottom output
0x
None
The output from the bottom node will go ON if an
error is detected in the function.
This table lists the Deferred DX Functions
Name
Code
Function
f_config
500
Obtain Copro configuration data
f_d_dbwr
501
Write Copro register database from PLC
f_d_dbrd
502
Read Copro register database from PLC
f_dgets
515
Issue dgets() on comm line
f_dputs
516
Issue dputs() on comm line
f_sprintf
518
Generate a character string
f_sscanf
519
Interpret a character string
f_egets
520
IEEE-488 gets() function
f_eputs
521
IEEE-488 puts() function
f_ectl
522
IEEE-488 error control function
97
98
31007523 12/2006
CANT - Interpret Coils,
Contacts, Timers, Counters,
and the SUB Block
19
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CANT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
100
Representation
101
102
99
CANT - Interpret Coils, Contacts, Timers, Counters, and the SUB Block
Short Description
Function
Description
This DX Loadable function block, upon initializing a triggering contact, analyzes your
ladder logic to extract the specific column and the corresponding contact IDs where
power flow has stopped. The CANT block contains 20 registers. A MSTR block is
used to export data from the CANT's 20 registers to a PC running the Action Monitor
program.
The CANT block is specifically used to interpret coils, contacts, timers, counters, and
the SUB block. You may not use any other types of ladder logic instructions in a
network. Otherwise, you receive incorrect results. If, however, you must use one of
the other ladder logic instructions you may place them in a separate network linked
to a coil that is referenced to the network containing the CANT block.
Note: Only 24-bit logic Quantum and 984 PLCs support the DX Loadable function
block. 16-bit controllers will not work with this particular block.
100
31007523 12/2006
CANT - Interpret Coils, Contacts, Timers, Counters, and the SUB
Representation
Symbol
action contact 3
register #
action contact 2
data
register
action contact 1
CANT
delay
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Action contact 3
Please see the Note below.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Action contact 2
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Action contact 1
register #
top node
4x
INT,
UINT
Each CANT block contains a block of 10 setup
registers, which will automatically fill these 10
registers with internal data.
data register
middle node
4x
INT,
UINT
This node is the start of the 4x output data registers.
(For detailed information please see p. 102.)
INT,
UINT
A delay timer value with 10ms increments. The value
1 is assigned to OFF.
delay
bottom node
Note: When any of the above inputs are activated, the CANT function block begins to
solve the routine. The bottom node specifies a delay time in 10ms increments that the
block uses to delay the start of the solve routine.
31007523 12/2006
101
Output Data
Registers Table
(Middle Node)
102
Output Data Register Description (Purpose)
4x
Contains the address of the "CANT in use flag" coil number
Coil must be programmed with NO POWER CONNECTED FROM
THE LEFT in the last network of your ladder logic
4x + 01
CANT version number in hexadecimal format (for example, 0105 for
v1.05)
4x + 02
Hi Byte = Internal operational flags
Lo Byte = MB+ address of a PLC
4x + 03
Output coil number (a variable that is dependent on the block's state)
4x + 04
The Id of the trigger contact or coil
Bit 15 → 0 - if a coil; 1 - if a contact
Bit 14-00 → coil or contact number (1 based)
4x + 05
Hi 12 bits = network number where logic fails (1 based)
Lo 4 bits = column number where logic fails (1 based)
4x + 06
Rung #1:
Hi Byte = node state
Lo Byte = node type (opcode from node database)
4x + 07
Rung #1: Contact number (1 based)
4x + 08
Rung #2: Refer to 4x + 06
4x + 09
4x + 10
4x + 11
4x + 12
4x + 13
4x + 14
4x + 15
Rung #5 Refer to 4x + 07
4x + 16
4x + 17
4x + 18
4x + 19
31007523 12/2006
CANT - Interpret Coils, Contacts, Timers, Counters, and the SUB
Programming
Each network can only contain one COIL and one CANT block, which must be
located in column 10, row 5. Column 9 of the bottom rung contains the power input
for the triggers (action contacts) to the CANT block, which will provide more space
for your ladder logic programming.
Note: This is not at the top of the block as it usually is with DX blocks.
In any of the available row positions 5, 6, or 7, you may have up to 3 triggers that
must be a transitional type of either [P] or [N]. The CANT block node number will
default to 22 (hexadecimal) and not be changed.
Ladder Node
Setup
column 10
][
row 6
][
()
4xxxx
10 unique setup registers
start
4xxxx
common output register
block start
CANT
1
delay timer value in 1Φms
increments
(value of 1 is off)
]P[
]P[
row 7
MSTR Write Data
Setup
31007523 12/2006
]P[
The purpose of the MSTR block is to send the 20 4x CANT registers to a PC-based
Action Monitor program. This transmittal of registers is done using either Modbus
Plus or an Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus.
103
Example:
MSTR statistics control registers
Register
Value
Description
400121
1
Write data function
400122
?
MSTR error register
400123
20
# of data registers to send
400124
40001
Start of data registers
400125
22
Destination MB+ address
400126
1
MB+ routing
400127
0
MB+ routing
400128
0
MB+ routing
400129
0
MB+ routing
Note: It is necessary to program a MSTR block for each receiving (PC) address if
you want to transmit data to more than one PC running Action Monitor.
MSTR Setup
40121
MSTR control registers
(e.g. 40121)
40001
CANT output register base
(e.g. 40001)
MSTR
20
20 registers to be written out
-()1530
<-- See 4xxx1 register in
CANT DX block setup above
]P[
1530
104
31007523 12/2006
CCPF - Configure Cam Profile with
Variable Instruments
20
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CCPF instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
106
Representation
107
105
CCPF
Short Description
Function
Description
The CCPF function block configures a Cam Profile with fixed master increments. A
CamProfile relates the position of a follower axis for a given position of a master axis.
The CamProfile is a table of master and follower position coordinates. Position
points that are not explicitly listed in the table are derived by interpolating between
the given points. Linear and cubic interpolations are supported.
CamProfile Type
The CamProfile type is used to execute electronic cams in the motion controller.
electronic cams simplify programming of complex moves. They can be applied in
winding applications, flying cutoff applications, thermoforming machines, press
feeds, and many other complex control situations.
Note: A CamProfile configuration block can be re-executed to change the profile.
A CMD_NOT_ALLOWED error will be generated if a FollowerSet is already using
the CamProfile and following is turned on.
Related
Information
106
See the MMFStart Loadables for ProWORX 32 file in the Programs\Lib\Quantum
folder on the ProWORX 32 installation CD for more detailed information on using
motion loadables.
31007523 12/2006
CCPF
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the instruction.
ON starts config
MMFSTART
4X register
configuration executed
without error
table
block
address
configuration executed with
not used
not used
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
table
length (18)
error (see error register)
bad table length
The following table describes the instruction’s parameters.
Parameters State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the configuration function. When this input
goes off, the function is reset and can be initiated again.
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
Address of the MMFSTART 200 Register
communications table. This is normally 401001. This
address can be configured by modifying the
MMFSTART.CFG file on the QUANTUM SERCOS
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
This register points to a block of registers that define all
the arguments and returns for a generic subrouting call.
The last two registers are for state control.
Bottom
Node
4x
INT
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies
the table length. In this case, the number of registers in
the table must be 18.
Top Output
0x
None
Turned on when the cam configuration call is complete
without error.
Middle
Output
0x
None
and an error code is generated in register 4xxx15.
Bottom
Output
0x
None
Turned on when the register length is not set at 18.
107
CCPF
Registers
108
The following table shows the registers.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
The CamProfile ID to be configured
4xxxx1
Short
The number of points in the Cam Table
4xxxx2
Unsigned
Interpolation Type: Linear = 1 or Cubic = 2
4xxxx4
Unsigned
Position units of the master (Rev, Deg, etc.)
4xxxx6
Float
First Master Position
4xxxx8
Float
Fixed master position increment
4xxx10
Unsigned
Position units of the follower (Inch, Rev, etc.)
4xxx12
Float
Pointer to first register of follower cam table
4xxx14
Register Block
Pointer to address of cam configuration block
4xxx15
Short
Error code generated by configuration block
4xxx16
Short
Current operating state number
4xxx17
Short
Current state entry count
31007523 12/2006
CCPV - Configure Cam Profile with
Variable Increments
21
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CCPV instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
110
Representation
111
109
CCPV
Short Description
Function
Description
The CCPV function block configures a CamProfile with variable master increments.
A CamProfile relates the position of a follower axis for a given position of a master
axis. The CamProfile is a table of master and follower position coordinates. Position
points that are not explicitly listed in the table are derived by interpolating between
the given points. Linear and cubic interpolation are supported. See p. 106 for more
information on a CamProfile type.
Related
Information
motion loadables.
110
31007523 12/2006
CCPV
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the CCPV instruction.
ON starts Cam
configuration
not used
not used
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
Cam configuration executed
without error
table
block
address
config executed with error
table
length (16)
(see error register)
bad table length
Parameters State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
Bottom
node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None
Bottom
output
0x
None
111
CCPV
Registers
112
The following table describes the instruction’s registers.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
The CamProfile ID to be configured
4xxxx1
Short
The number of points in the Cam Table
4xxxx2
Unsigned
Interpolation Type: Linear = 1 or Cubic = 2
4xxxx4
Unsigned
Position units of the master (Rev, Deg, etc.)
4xxxx6
Float
Pointer to first register of the master cam table
4xxxx8
Unsigned
Position units of the follower (Inch, Rev, etc.)
4xxx10
Float
Pointer to first register of follower cam table
4xxx12
Register Block
Pointer to first register of cam configuration block
4xxx13
Short
4xxx14
Short
4xxx15
Short
31007523 12/2006
CFGC - Configure Coordinated Set
22
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CFGC instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
114
Representation
115
113
CFGC
Short Description
Function
Description
The CFGC function block configures a Coordinated Set. Each motion axis object
has a set of motion parameters that must be configured before the motion axis
object may be used. The configure function provides the default value for these
parameters. The default values are placed into a block of holding registers in a
specified order.
Related
Information
motion loadables.
114
31007523 12/2006
CFGC
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the CFGC instruction.
ON starts
configuration
MMFSTART
4X register
Cam configuration executed
without error
table
block
address
not used
table
length (13)
not used
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
bad table length
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
Bottom
node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None
Bottom
output
0x
None
115
CFGC
Registers
116
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id of the Coordinated Set to be configured
4xxxx1
Short
Axis id of axis member to be included in the set
4xxxx2
Short
4xxxx3
Short
4xxxx4
Short
4xxxx5
Short
4xxxx6
Short
4xxxx7
Short
4xxxx8
Short
4xxxx9
Register Block
Pointer to register address of configuration block
4xxx10
Short
4xxx11
Short
4xxx12
Short
31007523 12/2006
CFGF - Configure Follower Set
23
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CFGF instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
118
Representation
119
117
CFGF
Short Description
Function
Description
The CFGF function block configures a Follower Set. Each motion axis object has a
set of motion parameters that must be configured before the motion axis object may
be used. The configure function provides the default value for these parameters.
The default values are placed into a block of holding registers in a specified order.
Related
Information
motion loadables.
118
31007523 12/2006
CFGF
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the CFGF instruction.
ON starts
configuration
MMFSTART
4X register
config executed
without error
table
block
address
not used
table
length (14)
not used
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
bad table length
Reference
Data Meaning
Type
Top input
0x
None ON initiates the configuration function. When tthis input
Top node
4x
INT, Address of the MMFSTART 200 Register
UINT communications table. This is normally 401001. This
address can be configured by modifyinghe
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT, This register points to a block of registers that define all
UINT the arguments for the configuration. The last two
registers are for state control.
Bottom node 4x
INT
Top output
0x
None Turned on when the cam configuration call is complete
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None Turned on when the subroutine call is complete and an
error code is generated in register 4xxx11.
Bottom
output
4x
None Turned on when the register length is not set at 14.
119
CFGF
Registers
120
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id of the Follower Set to be configured
4xxxx1
Short
Axis id of Master Axis of the Follower Set
4xxxx2
Short
4xxxx3
Short
4xxxx4
Short
4xxxx5
Short
4xxxx6
Short
4xxxx7
Short
4xxxx8
Short
4xxxx9
Short
4xxx10
Register Block
Pointer to register address of configuration block
4xxx11
Short
4xxx12
Short
4xxx13
Short
31007523 12/2006
CFGI – Configure Imaginary Axis
24
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CFGI instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
122
Representation
123
121
CFGI
Short Description
Function
Description
The CFGI function block configures an ImaginaryAxis. Each motion axis object has
a set of motion parameters that must be configured before the motion axis object
may be used. The configure function provides the default value for these
parameters. The default values are placed into a block of holding registers in a
specified order.
Related
Information
motion loadables.
122
31007523 12/2006
CFGI
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a CFGI instruction.
ON starts
configuration
MMFSTART
4X register
config executed
without error
table
block
address
not used
table
length (20)
not used
Parameter
Descriptions
31007523 12/2006
bad table length
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
the arguments for the configuration. The last two
Bottom
node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None
Turned on when the subroutine call is complete and an
Bottom
output
0x
None
123
CFGI
Registers
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id for Imaginary Axis to be configured
4xxxx1
Unsigned
Velocity units for the axis
4xxxx2
Float
Numerator of the gear ratio
4xxxx4
Float
Denominator of the gear ratio1
4xxxx6
Float
Positive position limit (optional)
4xxxx8
Float
Negative position limit (optional)
4xxx10
Float
Velocity limit (optional)
4xxx12
Float
Default acceleration (optional)
4xxx14
Float
Default deceleration (optional)
4xxx16
Register Block
Pointer to register of axis configuration block
4xxx17
Short
4xxx18
Short
4xxx19
Short
1
The units associated with this value are revolutions of the feedback device. Typically the
feedback device is directly coupled to the shaft of the motor, and, therefore, this parameter
specifies the number of motor revolutions required to produce the physical travel specified by
the numerator.
124
31007523 12/2006
CFGR – Configure Remote Axis
25
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CFGR instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
126
Representation
127
125
CFGR
Short Description
Function
Description
The CFGR function block configures a Remote Axis. Each motion axis object has a
Related
Information
motion loadables.
126
31007523 12/2006
CFGR
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the CFGR instruction.
ON starts
configuration
MMFSTART
4X register
config executed
without error
table
block
address
not used
table
length (13)
not used
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
bad table length
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
Bottom
node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None
Bottom
output
4x
None
127
CFGR
Registers
Register
128
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id of the Remote Axis to be configured
4xxxx1
Short
4xxxx2
Short
Number of position units per
4xxxx4
Short
Number of motor revolutions
4xxxx6
Short
Axis id of the SERCOS Axis with secondary feedback basis
4xxxx7
Short
SERCOS identification number of secondary feedback
device—default is 53
4xxxx9
Short
4xxx10
Short
4xxx11
Short
4xxx12
Short
31007523 12/2006
CFGS – Configure SERCOS Axis
26
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CFGS instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
130
Representation
131
129
CFGS
Short Description
Function
Description
The CFGS function block configures a Sercos Axis. Each motion axis object has a
Related
Information
motion loadables.
130
31007523 12/2006
CFGS
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a representation of the CFGS instruction.
ON starts
configuration
MMFSTART
4X register
config executed
without error
table
block
address
not used
table
length (20)
not used
Parameters
Description
31007523 12/2006
bad table length/time out/
revision
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
Bottom
node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
without error.
Middle
output
0x
None
Bottom
output
0x
None
131
CFGS
Registers
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id for SERCOS Axis to be configured
4xxxx1
Unsigned
4xxxx2
Float
Numerator of the gear ratio
4xxxx4
Float
Denominator of the gear ratio1
4xxxx6
Float
Positive position limit (optional)
4xxxx8
Float
Negative position limit (optional)
4xxx10
Float
Velocity limit (optional)
4xxx12
Float
Default acceleration (optional)
4xxx14
Float
Default deceleration (optional)
4xxx16
Register Block
4xxx17
Short
4xxx18
Short
4xxx19
Short
1
The units associated with this value are revolutions of the feedback device. Typically the
feedback device is directly coupled to the shaft of the motor, and, therefore, this parameter
specifies the number of motor revolutions required to produce the physical travel specified by
the numerator.
132
31007523 12/2006
27
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CHS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
134
Representation
135
136
133
Short Description
Function
Description
Note: This instruction is only available if you have unpacked and installed the DX
Loadables. For further information, see p. 49.
The logic in the CHS loadable is the engine that drives the Hot Standby capability in
a Quantum PLC system. Unlike the HSBY instruction, the use of the CHS instruction
in the ladder logic program is optional. However, the loadable software itself must
be installed in the Quantum PLC in order for a Hot Standby system to be
implemented.
134
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
command
register
command register
error
non transfer
area
enable non transfer area
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
config ext. present
CHS
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Execute Hot Standby (unconditionally)
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Enable command register
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Enable non transfer area
OFF = non transfer area will not be used and
the Hot Standby status register will not exist
command
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Hot Standby command register
nontransfer area 4x
(middle node)
INT, UINT,
WORD
First register in the nontransfer area of state
RAM
length
(bottom node)
INT, UINT
Number of registers of the Hot Standby
nontransfer area in state RAM; range 4 ... 8000
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = System detects interface error
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = System configuration set by configuration
extension
135
Hot Standby
System
Configuration via
the CHS
Instruction
Program the CHS instruction in network 1, segment 1 of your ladder logic program
and unconditionally connect the top input to the power rail via a horizontal short (as
the HSBY instruction is programmed in a 984 Hot Standby system).
This method is particularly useful if you are porting Hot Standby code from a 984
application to a Quantum application. The structure of the CHS instruction is almost
exactly the same as the HSBY instruction. You simply remove the HSBY instruction
from the 984LL and replace it with a CHS instruction in the Quantum logic.
If you are using the CHS instruction in ladder logic, the only difference between it
and the HSBY instruction is the use of the bottom output. This output senses
whether or not method 2 has been used. If the Hot Standby configuration extension
screens have been used to define the Hot Standby configuration, the configuration
parameters in the screens will override any different parameters defined by the CHS
instruction at system startup.
For a detailed discussion of the issues related to the configuration extension
capabilities of a Quantum Hot Standby system, refer to the Modicon Quantum Hot
Standby System Planning and Installation Guide.
Parameter
Description
Execute Hot
Standby (Top
Input)
When the CHS instruction is inserted in ladder logic to control the Hot Standby
configuration parameters, its top input must be connected directly to the power rail
by a horizontal short. No control logic, such as contacts, should be placed between
the rail and the input to the top node.
WARNING
ERRATIC BEHAVIOR IN THE HOT STANDBY SYSTEM
Do not enable or disable the non-transfer area while the Hot Standby system is
running.
Although it is legal to do so, we strongly discourage this practice because it can
lead to erratic behavior in the Hot Standby system.
equipment damage.
136
31007523 12/2006
Parameter
Description
Command
Register
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the Hot Standby command register; 8 bits
in this register are used to configure and control Hot Standby system parameters:
Usage of command word:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Bit
Function
1-5
Not used
6
0 = swap Modbus port 3 address during switchover
1 = no swap
7
1 = no swap
8
1 = no swap
9 - 11
Not used
12
0 = allow exec upgrade only after application stops
1 = allow the upgrade without stopping the application
13
0 = force standby offline if there is a logic mismatch
1 = do not force
14
0 = controller B is in OFFLINE mode
1 = controller B is in RUN
15
0 = controller A is in OFFLINE mode
1 = controller A is in RUN
16
0 = disable keyswitch override
1 = enable the override
15
16
Note: The Hot Standby command register must be outside of the nontransfer area
of state RAM.
31007523 12/2006
137
Parameter
Description
Nontransfer Area
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first register in the non-transfer area
of state RAM. The non-transfer area must contain at least 4 registers, the first 3 of
which have a predefined usage:
Register
Content
Displayed and first implied
Reverse transfer registers for passing information from the
standby to the primary PLC
Second implied
CHS status register
The content of the remaining registers is application-specific; the length is defined
in the parameter length (bottom node).
The 4x registers in the non-transfer area are never transferred from the primary to
the standby PLC during the logic scans. One reason for scheduling additional
registers in the non-transfer area is to reduce the impact of state RAM transfer on
the total system scan time.
CHS Status
Register
Usage of status word:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bit
Function
1
1 = the top output is ON (indicating Hot Standby system is active)
2
1 = the middle output is ON (indicating an error condition)
3 - 10
Not used
11
0 = PLC switch is set to A
1 = PLC switch is set to B
12
0 = PLC logic is matched
1 = there is a logic mismatch
13 - 14
The 2 bit value is:
z 0 1 if the other PLC is in OFFLINE mode
z 1 0 if other PLC is running in primary mode
z 1 1 if other PLC is running in standby mode
15 - 16
The 2 bit value is:
z 0 1 if this PLC is in OFFLINE mode
z 1 0 if this PLC is running in primary mode
z 1 1 if this PLC is running in standby mode
138
31007523 12/2006
CKSM: Check Sum
28
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CKSM.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
140
Representation
141
142
139
CKSM: Check Sum
Short Description
Function
Description
140
Several PLCs that do not support Modbus Plus come with a standard checksum
(CKSM) instruction. CKSM has the same opcode as the MSTR instruction and is not
provided in executive firmware for PLCs that support Modbus Plus.
31007523 12/2006
CKSM: Check Sum
Representation
Symbol
control input
checksum completed
source
CKSM select 1
CKSM select 2
Parameter
Description
implied register count > length
or
implied register count = 0
CKSM
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Initiates checksum calculation of source table
Middle input
0x,1x
None
CKSM select 1
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
CKSM select 2
source
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
First holding register in the source table. The
checksum calculation is performed on the registers in
this table.
result/count
4x
(middle node)
INT,
UINT
First of two contiguous registers
length
(bottom node)
INT
Number of 4x registers in the source table; range: 1 ...
255
0x
None
ON = Checksum calculation successful
Middle output 0x
None
ON = implied register count > length or implied register
count =0
Top output
31007523 12/2006
result/count
141
CKSM: Check Sum
Inputs
Result / Count
(Middle Node)
142
The states of the inputs indicate the type of checksum calculation to be performed:
CKSM Calculation
Top Input
Middle Input
Bottom Input
Straight Check
ON
OFF
ON
Binary Addition Check
ON
ON
ON
CRC-16
ON
ON
OFF
LRC
ON
OFF
OFF
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first of two contiguous 4x registers:
Register
Content
Displayed
Stores the result of the checksum calculation
First implied
Posts a value that specifies the number of registers selected from
the source table as input to the calculation. The value posted in the
implied register must be ≤ length of source table.
31007523 12/2006
29
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CMPR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
144
Representation
145
146
143
Short Description
Function
Description
144
The CMPR instruction compares the bit pattern in matrix a against the bit pattern in
matrix b for miscompares. In a single scan, the two matrices are compared bit
position by bit position until a miscompare is found or the end of the matrices is
reached (without miscompares).
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
matrix a
first register or
discrete address
of matrix
reset pointer
miscompare
pointer register
(matrix b)
CMPR
length: 1 to 100 registers
(16 to 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates compare operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = restart at last miscompare
ON = restart at the beginning
matrix a
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in matrix a, one of the two
matrices to be compared
pointer register
(middle node)
4x
WORD
Pointer to matrix b: the first register in
matrix b is the next contiguous 4x register
following the pointer register
INT, UINT
Matrix length; range: 1 ... 100
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
state of miscompare
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = miscompare detected
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = miscompared bit in matrix a is 1
OFF = miscompared bit in matrix a is 0
145
Pointer Register
(Middle Node)
The pointer register entered in the middle node must be a 4x holding register. It is
the pointer to matrix b, the other matrix to be compared. The first register in matrix
b is the next contiguous 4x register following the pointer register.
The value stored inside the pointer register increments with each bit position in the
two matrices that is being compared. As bit position 1 in matrix a and matrix b is
compared, the pointer register contains a value of 1; as bit position 2 in the matrices
are compared, the pointer value increments to 2; etc.
When the outputs signal a miscompare, you can check the accumulated count in the
pointer register to determine the bit position in the matrices of the miscompare.
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
146
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies a length of the two matrices,
i.e. the number of registers or 16-bit words in each matrix. (Matrix a and matrix b
have the same length.) The matrix length can range from 1 ... 100, i.e. a length of 2
indicates that matrix a and matrix b contain 32 bits.
31007523 12/2006
Coils
30
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction element Coils.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
148
General Usage Guidelines
149
147
Coils
Short Description
Function
Description
Coil Types
A coil is a discrete output that is turned ON and OFF by power flow in the logic
program. A single coil is tied to a 0xxxx reference in the PLC’s state RAM. Because
output values are updated in state RAM by the PLC, a coil may be used internally in
the logic program or externally via the I/O map to a discrete output unit in the control
system. When a coil is ON, it either passes power to a discrete output circuit or
changes the state of an internal relay contact in state RAM.
There are two types of coils:
Normal coil -( )A normal or non-retentive or normal coil looses state when power to controller is
lost.
When power is removed from a PLC, a normal coil will be turned OFF. Once
power is restored, the coil will always be in the OFF state on the first logic scan.
z Memory-retentive or latched coil -(M)- or -(L)A memory-retentive or latched coil does NOT loose state when power to
controller is lost.
If a memory-retentive (or latched) coil is ON at the time a PLC loses power, the
coil will come back up in an ON state when power is restored. The coil will
maintain that ON state for the first logic scan, and then the logic program will take
control.
z
Coils are referenced as 0xxxx. They may be disabled and forced ON or OFF.
Disabling a coil stops the user programmed logic from changing the state of the coil.
Note: Disabled Coils used as destinations in DX function blocks may have their
state overwritten by the function.
148
31007523 12/2006
Coils
General Usage Guidelines
Overview
Once a 0x reference number has been assigned to a coil, it cannot be assigned to
any other coils in the logic program.
An 0x reference number can be referenced to any number of relay contacts, which
can then be controlled via the state of the coil with same reference number. Most
panel software packages have a feature called tracing with which you can locate the
positions in ladder logic of the contacts controlled by a coil. Refer to your software
user manual for more details.
Enable/Disable
Capabilities for
Discrete Values
Via panel software, you may disable a logic coil or a discrete input in your logic
program.
A disable condition will cause the following:
z Input field device to have no control over its assigned 1x logic
z Logic to have no control over the disable 9x value
Memory protection in the PLC must be OFF before you disable or enable a coil or a
discrete input.
Note: There is an important exception that you need to be aware of when disabling
coils:
Data transfer functions allow coils in their destination nodes to recognize the
current ON/OFF state of ALL coils, whether those coils are disabled or not, and
this recognition causes the logic to respond accordingly—maybe producing
unexpected and undesirable effects.
If you are expecting a disabled coil to remain disabled in the DX function, your
application may experience unexpected and undesirable effects.
Forcing
Discretes ON
and OFF
Most panel software also provides FORCE ON and FORCE OFF capabilities. When
a coil or discrete input is disabled, you can change its state from OFF to ON with
FORCE ON, and from ON to OFF with FORCE OFF.
When a coil or discrete input is enabled, it cannot be forced ON or OFF.
31007523 12/2006
149
Coils
150
31007523 12/2006
COMM ASCII Communications Function
31
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the COMM instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
152
Representation
153
151
Short Description
Function
Description
The ASCII Communications Function (COMM) block is used to transmit/receive
ASCII data (in the form of a single ASCII character, 1 to 4 integers or 1 to 4
hexadecimal numbers) to or from the simple ASCII port. The COMM instruction
gives you the ability to read and write canned messages to/from ASCII character
input/output devices via one of the built-in communication ports on a Micro PLC or,
if the PLC is a parent, via a comm port on one of the child PLCs on the expansion
link.
Note: Available only on the Micro 311, 411, 512, and 612 controllers.
152
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
control
block
error
data
block
source for writes/
destination for reads
abort
success
COMM
(data area size 3 - 255)
31007523 12/2006
length
(3 ... 255)
153
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON starts the COMM operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON aborts the operation and sets the middle out.
control block
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The 4xxxx register entered in the top node is the
first of 10 contiguous holding registers in the
control block.
(For the register usage please see the Register
Usage Table below.
data block
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The middle node contains the first 4xxxx register
of the data block - a table where variable
message data is placed. In a read operation, the
data block is a destination table. In a write
operation the data block is a source table.
INT,
UINT
The integer value entered in the bottom node
specifies the length, which is the number of
registers in the data block. The length can range
from 3 through 255.
None
Echoes the state of the top input.
length
(bottom node)
(Top output)
Register Usage
Table
154
0x
Middle output
0x
None
ON = error detected (for one scan).
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = operation complete (for one scan).
This table details the register usage for the top node.
Register
Usage
4xxxx + 0
Operation Code
4xxxx + 1
Error Status
4xxxx + 2
Number of data fields provided/expected
4xxxx + 3
Number of data fields processed
4xxxx + 4
Reserved
4xxxx + 5
Port Number (1 for local, 2 for child #1, 3 for child #2, etc.
4xxxx + 6
Reserved
4xxxx + 7
Reserved
4xxxx + 8
Reserved
4xxxx + 9
Active Status Timer
31007523 12/2006
32
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction COMP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
156
Representation
157
159
155
Short Description
Function
Description
The COMP instruction complements the bit pattern, i.e. changes all 0s to 1s and all
1s to 0s, of a source matrix, then copies the complemented bit pattern into a
destination matrix. The entire COMP operation is accomplished in one scan.
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the COMP instruction, check for disabled coils. COMP will override
any disabled coils in the destination matrix without enabling them. This can cause
can be changed by the COMP operation.
equipment damage.
156
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
first register or
discrete address
of matrix
destination
first register or
discrete address
of matrix
(16 to 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates the complement operation
source
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the source matrix, which
contains the original bit pattern before the
complement operation
destination
(middle node)
0x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the destination matrix
where the complemented bit pattern will
be posted
INT, UINT
Matrix length; range: 1 ... 100.
None
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
COMP
0x
157
A COMP
Example
When contact 10001 passes power, the bit pattern in the source matrix (registers
40600 and 40601) is complemented, then the complemented bit pattern is posted in
the destination matrix (registers 40602 and 40603). The original bit pattern is
maintained in the source matrix.
source matrix
40600 = 1111111100000000 40601 = 1111111100000000
40600
10001
40602
Complemented destination matrix
40602 = 000000011111111 40603 = 0000000011111111
COMP
00002
158
31007523 12/2006
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies a matrix length, i.e. the
number of registers or 16-bit words in the matrices. Matrix length can range from
1 ... 100. A length of 2 indicates that 32 bits in each matrix will be complemented.
159
160
31007523 12/2006
Contacts
33
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction element Contacts.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
162
Representation
163
161
Contacts
Short Description
Function
Description
162
Contacts are used to pass or inhibit power flow in a ladder logic program.
31007523 12/2006
Contacts
Representation
Function
Description
They are discrete, which means each consumes one I/O point in ladder logic. A
single contact can be tied to a 0x or 1x reference number in the PLC’s state RAM,
in which case each contact consumes one node in a ladder network.
Four kinds of contacts are available:
z normally open (N.O.) contacts
z normally closed (N.C.) contacts
z positive transitional (P.T.) contacts
z negative transitional (N.T.) contacts
Referencing
Normally Open/
Normally Closed
Contacts
Normally open -| |- and normally closed -|\|- contacts may be referenced by inputs
(1xxxx) or coils (0xxxx).
Field Device state vs. Programmed Contact Flow
Field Device
Programmed Contact
Field Contact Closed
-| |-
-| |-
Passes Power
-|\|-
Field Contact Open
-|\|-
Passes Power
-| |-
Passes Power
Passes Power
Referencing
Transitional
Contacts
Transitional contacts positive -| ↑ |- and negative -| ↓ |- contacts may be referenced
by inputs (1xxxx) or coils (0xxxx).
State Table Transition
Power Flow at Transition
-|↑|-
Off to On
On
1 Scan Power
-|↓|-
On to Off
Off
Flow Pulse
Note: A transitional contact will pass power continuously if the referenced coil is
skipped by a SKP instruction or by the segment scheduler. A transitional contact
may not pass power if it is referenced to an input that has been scheduled to read
from the I/O drop more than once per scan via the segment scheduler.
31007523 12/2006
163
Contacts
164
31007523 12/2006
CONV - Convert Data
34
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction CONV.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
166
Representation
167
165
CONV - Convert Data
Short Description
Function
Description
The Convert block is a 484-replacement instruction, and it is one of four replacement
instructions. The CONV block is used to convert:
z
z
discrete data to a holding register
holding-register data to discrete data
The conversion can be either:
z
z
z
binary to binary
BCD to binary (discrete to register)
binary to BCD (register to discrete)
This block uses 12 bits in 12 bits out, but if the conversion is straight binary to binary,
bits 11 and 12 are forced off.
In converting discretes to a holding register, the source is specified as a constant
which implies a 1xxxx and the destination is specified as a constant which implies
a 4xxxx (for example, 00049 implies 40049).
In converting a register to output discretes, the source is specified as a holding
register (4xxxx) and the destination is specified as a constant which implies a 0xxxx.
For example 00032 implies 12 coils with 00032.
Note: Take precaution when converting register data to discretes as coils may
inadvertently be activated.
Note: Available only on the 984-351 and 984-455 PLCs.
166
31007523 12/2006
CONV - Convert Data
Representation
Symbol
control input
complete
source
conversion
CONV
register #
ON = binary
OFF = BCD
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates specified operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Binary
OFF = BCD
source
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Converts content of register
register
(bottom node)
3x
INT, UINT
Top output
0x
None
Operation successful
167
CONV - Convert Data
168
31007523 12/2006
CTIF - Counter, Timer, and
Interrupt Function
35
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the CTIF instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
170
Representation
171
172
169
Short Description
Function
Description
The CTIF block is used by a parent PLC to access child functions over an I/O
expansion bus. The parent function block will complete in the same scan. If multiple
blocks exist, the last one executed will be used.
The CTIF instruction is used with the Micro PLCs to set up the inputs for hard-wired
interrupt and/or hard-wired counter/timer operations. This instruction always starts
and finishes in the same scan. The CTIF instruction is a configuration/operation tool
for Modicon Micro PLCs that contain hardware interrupts (all models except the
110CPU311 models). The actual counter/timer and interrupts are in the PLC
hardware, and the CTIF instruction is used to set up this hardware.
Note: The counter, timer, interrupt function (CTIF) is only available on Micro 311,
411, 512, and 612 controllers.
170
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register #
CTIF
range: 1 ... 5
Parameter
Description
drop number
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates specified operation
register #
(top node)
4x
INT
first of four contiguous holding registers in the
CTIF parameter block.
(For detailed information about the four registers
please see p. 172.)
INT
indicates the drop number where the operation
will be performed. The drop number is in the
range of 1 through 5.
drop number
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
error
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
Error
171
Overview
The top node holds four contiguous registers, 4x through 4x+3. This topic describes
how those registers are used and configured in the top node.
First Register
(4x) Usage
The first register, 4x, gives you information either about the type of error generated
or about the type of operation being performed. When you configure the register you
need to consider both how the bits will be used, Bit Usage, and the results of ON/
OFF Combinations.
Here is a graphic demonstrating the Bit Usage for the first register (4x),
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
and the following table describes the Bit Usage for the first register (4x).
Bit
Usage
1-4
Reserved
5-8
Error/Operation type messages
9 - 14
Reserved
15
Set Mode
16
Get Mode
The following table describes the ON/OFF Combinations for bits 5 through 8 and
the error/operation type message generated by the first register (4x).
Bit
172
5
6
7
8
Description
0
0
0
0
No error detected
0
0
0
1
Unsupported operation type specified
0
0
1
0
Interrupt 2 not supported in this model
0
0
1
1
Interrupt 3 not supported while counter is selected
0
1
0
0
Counter value of 0 specified
0
1
0
1
Counter value too big (counter value > 16,383)
0
1
1
0
Operation type supported only on local drop
0
1
1
1
Specified drop not in I/O map
1
0
0
0
No subroutine for enabled interrupt
1
0
0
1
Remote drop is unhealthy
1
0
1
0
Function not supported remotely
31007523 12/2006
The following table describes Bit Usage and the ON/OFF Combinations for bits 15
and 16 of the first register (4x).
Bit
Second Register
(4x+1) Usage
15
16
Description
0
0
Set Mode
0
1
Get Mode
The second register, 4x+1, allows you to control the set-up for the Set Mode
operation. When you configure the register you need to consider both how the bits
will be used, Bit Usage, and the results of the ON/OFF Combinations.
Here is a graphic demonstrating the Bit Usage for the second register (4x+1).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The following tables describe both Bit Usage and the ON/OFF Combinations for
bits 1 through 16 of the second register (4x+1).
The following table describes Bit Usage and ON/OFF Combinations for bits 1 and
2 of the second register (4x+1).
Bit
Usage
1
Terminal-count loading
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
2
Reserved
Bit
3
4
Description
0
1
Disable interrupt service for Interrupt 3
1
0
Enable interrupt service for Interrupt 3
Bit
31007523 12/2006
5
6
Description
0
1
1
0
173
Bit
7
8
Description
0
1
1
0
Bit
9
10
Description
0
1
Disable interrupt service for timer/counter interrupt
1
0
Enable interrupt service for timer/counter interrupt
Bit
11
12
Description
0
1
Disable auto-restart operation
1
0
Enable auto-restart operation
Bit
13
14
Description
0
1
Stop counter/timer operation
1
0
Start counter/timer operation
Bit
Third Register
(4x+2) Usage
15
16
Description
0
1
Counter Mode
1
0
Timer Mode
The third register, 4x+2, gives you the status for the Get Mode operation. When you
configure the register you need to consider both how the bits will be used, Bit
Usage, and the results of the ON/OFF Combinations.
Here is a graphic demonstrating the Bit Usage for the third register (4x+2).
1
174
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
The following table describes Bit Usage and ON/OFF Combinations for bits 1
through 16 for the third register (4x+2).
Fourth Register
(4x+3) Usage
31007523 12/2006
Bit
Usage
1
No subroutine for Interrupt 3
2
3
4
No subroutine for timer/counter interrupt
5-9
Reserved
10
Interrupt 3
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
11
Interrupt 2
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
12
Interrupt 1
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
13
Interrupt serve for time/counter input
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
14
Auto restart operation
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled
15
Counter/timer operation
0 - Stopped
1 - Started
16
0 - Counter Mode
1 - Timer Mode
The fourth register marks the current count value of the timer/counter interrupt. The
count value can be set either by the instruction block (set automatically) or by the
user.
z Get Mode
Instruction block sets the current count.
z Set Mode
User sets the counter/timer.
175
176
31007523 12/2006
DCTR: Down Counter
36
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DCTR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
178
Representation
179
177
DCTR: Down Counter
Short Description
Function
Description
178
The DCTR instruction counts control input transitions from OFF to ON down from a
counter preset value to zero.
31007523 12/2006
DCTR: Down Counter
Representation
Symbol
control
preset value:
max. 999-16-bit PLC
max. 9999- 24-bit PLC
max. 65535- *PLC
enable reset
counter preset
DCTR
output condition
DCTR: count = zero
output condition
count > zero
count
*Available on the following:
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
z Quantum Series PLCs
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
OFF → ON = initiates the counter operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = accumulated count is reset to preset value
ON = counter accumulating
counter preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT,
UINT
Preset value, can be displayed explicitly as an
integer (range 1 ... 65 535) or stored in a register
Preset Value: Max. 999 - 16-bit PLC Max.
9999 - 24-bit PLC Max. 65535 - *PLC
accumulated count
(bottom node)
4x
INT,
UINT
Count value (actual value); which decrements by
one on each transition from OFF to ON of the top
input until it reaches zero.
Top output
0x
None
ON = accumulated count = 0
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = accumulated count > 0
179
DCTR: Down Counter
180
31007523 12/2006
37
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DIOH.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
182
Representation
183
185
181
Short Description
Function
Description
182
The DIOH instruction lets you retrieve health data from a specified group of drops
on the distributed I/O network. It accesses the DIO health status table, where health
data for modules in up to 189 distributed drops is stored.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
destination
DIO health table
number of drops
(1 - 64)
DIOH
error
(1 ... 64)
31007523 12/2006
183
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates the retrieval of the specified status
words from the DIO health table into the
destination table
INT,
UINT
The source value entered in the top node is a
four-digit constant in the form xxyy, where:
z xx is a decimal value in the range 00 ... 16,
indicating the slot number in which the
relevant DIO processor resides. The value 00
can always be used to indicate the Modbus
Plus ports on the PLC, regardless of the slot
in which it resides.
z yy is a decimal value in the range 1 ... 64,
indicating the drop number on the
appropriate token ring.
source
(top node)
For example, if you are interested in retrieving
drop status starting at distributed drop #1 on a
network being handled by a DIO processor in
slot 3, enter 0301 in the top node.
destination
(middle node)
4x
length
(bottom node)
184
INT,
UINT,
WORD
First holding register in the destination table, i.e.
in a block of contiguous registers where the
retrieved health status information is stored
INT,
UINT
Length of the destination table, range 1 ... 64
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = invalid source entry
31007523 12/2006
Source Value
(Top Node)
The source value entered in the top node is a four-digit constant in the form xxyy,
where:
Digits
Meaning
xx
Decimal value in the range 00 ... 16, indicating the slot number in which the
relevant DIO processor resides. The value 00 can always be used to indicate the
Modbus Plus ports on the PLC, regardless of the slot in which it resides.
yy
Decimal value in the range 1 ... 64, indicating the drop number on the appropriate
token ring
For example, if you are interested in retrieving drop status starting at distributed drop
#1 on a network being handled by a DIO processor in slot 3, enter 0301 in the top
node.
Length of
Destination
Table
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies the length, i.e. the number of
4x registers, in the destination table. The length is in the range 1 ... 64.
Note: If you specify a length that excedes the number of drops available, the
instruction will return status information only for the drops available. For example,
if you specify the 63rd drop number (yy) in the top node register and then request
a length of 5, the instruction will give you only two registers (the 63rd and 64th drop
status words) in the destination table.
185
186
31007523 12/2006
38
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DISA.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
188
Representation
189
187
Short Description
Function
Description
188
The Disabled Discrete Monitor (DISA) is a loadable function, an instruction that
monitors disabled coils and inputs. Therefore, DISA monitors the disabled states of
all 0xxxx and 1xxxx addresses.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
disabled coil
coils
disabled inputs
inputs
active
DISA
length
Note: The NSUP loadable must be loaded prior to loading the DISA loadable.
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Disabled coils table
coils
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Number of disabled coils found (even if > NNN)
4x+#
INT, UINT
Address of ‘#’ disabled coil found
INT, UINT
Number of disabled input discretes found (even
if > NNN)
INT, UINT
Address of ‘#’’ disabled discrete found
INT, UINT
Passes power when top input receives power
None
ON if disabled coils are found
inputs
4y
(middle node)
4y+#
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
Middle output
0x
None
ON if disabled inputs are found
Bottom output 0x
None
Echoes state of top input
189
190
31007523 12/2006
DIV: Divide
39
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DIV.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
192
Representation
193
Example
195
191
DIV: Divide
Short Description
Function
Description
192
The DIV instruction divides unsigned value 1 (its top node) by unsigned value 2 (its
middle node) and posts the quotient and remainder in two contiguous holding
registers in the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
DIV: Divide
Representation
Symbol
control input
dividend
max. 999 - 16 bit
max. 9999 - 24 bit
max. 65535 - *PLC
value 1
dec. remain
divisor
max. 999 - 16 bit
max. 9999 - 24 bit
max. 65535 - *PLC
value 2
DIV
quotient > 9999
max. 999 - 16 bit
max. 9999 - 24 bit
max. 65535 - *PLC
middle value = 0
result/
remainder
*Available on the following:
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
31007523 12/2006
193
DIV: Divide
Parameter
Description
194
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = value 1 divided by value 2
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = decimal remainder
OFF = fraction remainder
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Dividend, can be displayed explicitly as an
integer (range 1 ... 9999)* or stored in two
contiguous registers (displayed for highorder half, implied for low-order half)
*Max. 999 - 16 bit Max. 9999 - 24 bit Max.
65535 - *PLC (See availability list above.)
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Divisor, can be displayed explicitly as an
integer (range 1 ... 9999) or stored in a
register
result /
remainder
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
First of two contiguous holding registers:
displayed: result of division
implied: remainder (either a decimal or a
fraction, depending on the state of middle
input)
Top output
0x
None
ON = division successful
Middle output
0x
None
ON = overflow:
if result > 9999*, a 0 value is returned
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = value 2 = 0
31007523 12/2006
DIV: Divide
Example
Quotient of
Instruction DIV
31007523 12/2006
The state of the middle input indicates whether the remainder will be expressed
as a decimal or as a fraction. For example, if value 1 = 8 and value 2 = 3, the
decimal remainder (middle input ON) is 6666; the fractional remainder (middle input
OFF) is 2.
195
DIV: Divide
196
31007523 12/2006
DLOG: Data Logging for PCMCIA
Read/Write Support
40
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DLOG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
198
Representation
199
200
Run Time Error Handling
202
197
Short Description
Function
Description
Note: This instruction is only available with the PLC family TSX Compact.
PCMCIA read and write support consists of a configuration extension to be
implemented using a DLOG instruction. The DLOG instruction provides the facility
for an application to copy data to a PCMCIA flash card, copy data from a PCMCIA
flash card, erase individual memory blocks on a PCMCIA flash card, and to erase
an entire PCMCIA flash card. The data format and the frequency of data storage are
controlled by the application.
Note: The DLOG instruction will only operate with PCMCIA linear flash cards that
use AMD flash devices.
198
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
control
block
terminate active
DLOG operation
data area
operation terminated
unsuccessfully
operation successful
DLOG
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = DLOG operation enabled, it should remain ON
until the operation has completed successfully or an
error has occurred.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = stops the currently active operation
control block
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
First of five contiguous registers in the DLOG control
block
data area
4x
(middle node)
INT,
UINT
First 4x register in a data area used for the source or
destination of the specified operation
length
(bottom node)
INT,
UINT
Maximum number of registers reserved for the data
area, range: 0 ... 100.
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
None
Middle output 0x
None
ON = error during DLOG operation (operation
terminated unsuccessfully)
Bottom output 0x
None
ON = DLOG operation finishes successfully (operation
successful)
199
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of five contiguous registers in the
DLOG control block.
The control block defines the function of the DLOG command, the PCMCIA flash
card window and offset, a return status word, and a data word count value.
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Error Status
Displays DLOG errors in HEX values
First implied
Operation Type
1 = Write to PCMCIA Card
2 = Read to PCMCIA Card
3 = Erase One Block
4 = Erase Entire Card Content
Second
implied
Window
(Block Identifier)
This register identifies a particular block (PCMCIA
memory window) located on the PCMCIA card
(1 block=128k bytes)
The number of blocks are dependent on the memory
size of the PCMCIA card. (e.g.. 0 ... 31 Max. for a 4Meg
PCMCIA card).
Third implied
Offset
(Byte Address
within the Block)
Particular range of bytes located within a particular block
on the PCMCIA card.
Range: 1 ... 128k bytes
Fourth implied Count
Number of 4x registers to be written or read to the
PCMCIA card. Range: 0 ... 100.
Note: PCMCIA Flash Card address are address on a Window:Offset basis.
Windows have a set size of 128k bytes (65 535 words (16-bit values)). No Write or
Read operation can cross the boundary from one window to the next. Therefore,
offset (third implied register) plus length (fourth implied register) must always be
less or equal to 128k bytes (65 535 words).
200
31007523 12/2006
Data Area
(Middle Node)
Length
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first register in a contiguous block
of 4x word registers, that the DLOG instruction will use for the source or destination
of the operation specified in the top node’s control block.
Operation
State Ram Reference
Function
Write
4x
Source Address
Read
4x
Destination Address
Erase Block
none
None
Erase Card
none
None
The integer value entered in the bottom node is the length of the data area, i.e., the
maximum number of words (registers) allowed in a transfer to/from the PCMCIA
flash card. The length can range from 0 ... 100.
201
Error Codes
202
The displayed register of the control block contains the following DLOG errors in
Hex-code.
Error Code in Hex
Content
1
The count parameter of the control block > the DLOG block length
during a WRITE operation (01)
2
PCMCIA card operation failed when intially started (write/read/
erase)
3
PCMCIA card operation failed during execution (write/read/erase)
31007523 12/2006
41
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the four double precision math operations executed by the
instruction DMTH. The four operations are addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
204
Representation
205
203
Short Description
Function
Description
The Double Precision Math (DMTH) instruction performs double precision addition,
subtraction, multiplication, or division (set by bottom node). DMTH uses 2 registers
appended together to form one operand.
Each DMTH instruction operates on the same two operands.
z OP1 = 4x, 4x + 1 (top node)
z OP2 = 4y, 4y + 1 (middle node)
Function Codes
The DMTH instruction performs any one of four possible double precision math
operations. DMTH performs the operation by calling a function. To call the desired
function enter a function code in the bottom node. Function codes range from 1 ... 4.
Code DMTH Function
Function Performed
Result Registers
1
Double Precision Addition
Add (OP1) + (OP 2)
(4y + 3, 4y + 4)
2
Double Precision Subtraction
Subtract (OP1) - (OP 2) (4y + 2, 4y + 3)
3
Double Precision Multiplication Multiply (OP1) * (OP 2) (4y + 2, 4y + 3)
(4y + 4, 4y + 5)
4
Double Precision Division
Divide (OP1)\(OP 2)
(4y + 2, 4y + 3) quotient
(4y + 4, 4y + 5) remainder
Notes:
For numbers spread over more than one register, the least significant 4 digits are
stored in the highest holding register.
z Results, flags, and remainders are stored in the registers following OP2.
z Registers not used by the chosen math function may be used for other purposes.
z The Subtract Function uses the outputs to indicate the result of comparison
between Operands OP1 and OP2.
z
204
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Overview
This topic describes the addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division operations,
which are the four operations performed by the instruction DMTH. Each operations
has a symbol, which is a graphical representation of the instruction, and a
parameter description, which is a table-format representation of the instruction.
Symbol Addition
Representation of the instruction for the addition operation
control input
operand 1
error
operand 2
and sum
DMTH
1
Parameter
Description Addition
31007523 12/2006
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the addition operation
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON adds operands and posts sum in designated
registers.
operand 1
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is
entered in the top node. The second 4xxxx
register is implied. Operand 1 is stored here.
Each register holds a value in the range 0000
through 9999, for a combined double precision
value in the range 0 through 99,999,999. The
high-order half of operand 1 is stored in the
displayed register, and the low-order half is stored
in the implied register.
205
Symbol Subtraction
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
operand 2 and
sum
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The first of six contiguous 4x registers is entered
in the middle node.
The remaining five registers are implied:
z The displayed register and the first implied
register store the high-order and low-order
halves of operand 2, respectively, for a
combined double precision value in the range
0 through 99,999,999
z The value stored in the second implied register
indicates whether an overflow condition exists
(a value of 1 = overflow)
z The third and fourth implied registers store the
high-order and low-order halves of the double
precision sum, respectively
z The fifth implied register is not used in the
calculation but must exist in state RAM
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
On = operand out of range or invalid
Representation of the instruction for the subtraction operation
control input
operand 1 > operand 2
operand 1
operand 1 = operand 2
operand 2/
difference
operand 1 < operand 2
DMTH
2
206
31007523 12/2006
Parameter
Description Subtraction
31007523 12/2006
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the subtraction operation
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON subtracts operand 2 from operand 1 and posts
difference in designated registers.
operand 1
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
entered in the top node. The second 4xxxx register
is implied. Operand 1 is stored here.
value in the range 0 through 99,999,999. The highorder half of operand 1 is stored in the displayed
register, and the low-order half is stored in the
implied register.
operand 2
difference
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The first of six contiguous 4xxxx registers is
entered in the middle node.
combined double precision value in the range 0
through 99,999,999
z The value stored in the second implied register
indicates whether an overflow condition exists
(a value of 1 = overflow)
Top output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 > operand 2
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 = operand 2
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 < operand 2
207
Symbol Multiplication
Representation of the instruction for the multiplication operation
control input
ON = operatin successful
operand 1
error
operand 2/
product
DMTH
3
Parameter
Description Multiplication
208
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the multiplication operation
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = operand 1 x operand 2 and product posted in
designated registers.
operand 1
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
entered in the top node. The second 4xxxx register
is implied. Operand 1 is stored here. The second 4x
register is implied.
value in the range 0 through 99,999,999. The highorder half of operand 1 is stored in the displayed
register, and the low-order half is stored in the
implied register.
31007523 12/2006
Symbol Division
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
operand 2/
product
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
combined double precision value in the range 0
through 99,999,999
z The last four implied registers store the double
precision product in the range 0 through
9,999,999,999,999,999
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operand out of range
Representation of the instruction for the division operation
control input
operand 1
remainder
error
operand 2
quotient
remainder
divide by 0 attempted
DMTH
4
31007523 12/2006
209
Parameter
Description Division
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the division operation
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = operand 1 divided by operand 2 and result
posted in designated registers.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = fractional remainder
operand 1
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
register is implied. Operand 1 is stored here. The
second 4x register is implied.
value in the range 0 through 99,999,999. The
displayed register, and the low-order half is stored
in the implied register.
operand 2
quotient
remainder
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The first of six contiguous 4x registers is entered
in the middle node.
0 through 99,999,999
Note: Since division by 0 is illegal, a 0 value
causes an error; an error trapping routine sets the
remaining middle-node registers to 0000 and turns
the bottom output ON.
z The second and third implied registers store an
eight-digit quotient
z The fourth and fifth implied registers store the
remainder. If the remainder is expressed as a
fraction, it is eight digits long and both registers
are used, if the remainder is expressed as a
decimal, it is four digits long and only the fourth
implied register is used
210
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = an operand out of range
Bottom output
0x
None
On = operand 2 is 0
31007523 12/2006
42
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DRUM.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
212
Representation
213
214
211
Short Description
Function
Description
The DRUM instruction operates on a table of 4x registers containing data
representing each step in a sequence. The number of registers associated with this
step data table depends on the number of steps required in the sequence. You can
pre-allocate registers to store data for each step in the sequence, thereby allowing
you to add future sequencer steps without having to modify application logic.
DRUM incorporates an output mask that allows you to selectively mask bits in the
register data before writing it to coils. This is particularly useful when all physical
sequencer outputs are not contiguous on the output module. Masked bits are not
altered by the DRUM instruction, and may be used by logic unrelated to the
sequencer.
212
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
Current Step Number
next step
reset
length:
max. 255 - 16-bit PLC
max. 999 - 24-bit PLC
max. 65535 - *PLC
active
step pointer
step data table
last step
error
DRUM
*Available on the following
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates DRUM sequencer
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = step pointer increments to next step
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = reset step pointer to 0
step pointer
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
Current step number
step data table 4x
(middle node)
INT,
UINT
First register in a table of step data information
length
(bottom node)
INT,
UINT
Number of application-specific registers used in
the step data table, range: 1 .. 999
Length:Max. 255 - 16-bit PLC Max. 999 - 24-bit
PLC Max. 65535 - *PLC
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = step pointer value = length
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Error
213
Step Pointer
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node stores the current step number. The value
in this register is referenced by the DRUM instruction each time it is solved. If the
middle input to the block is ON, the contents of the register in the top node are
incremented to the next step in the sequence before the block is solved.
Step Data Table
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first register in a table of step data
information.
The first six registers in the step data table hold constant and variable data required
to solve the block:
Register
Name
Content
Displayed
masked output
data
Loaded by DRUM each time the block is solved;
contains the contents of the current step data register
masked with the outputmask register
First implied
current step data
Loaded by DRUM each time the block is solved;
contains data from the step pointer, causes the block
logic to automatically calculate register offsets when
accessing step data in the step data table
Second implied output mask
Loaded by user before using the block, DRUM will not
alter output mask contents during logic solve; contains
a mask to be applied to the data for each sequencer
step
Third implied
machine ID
number
Identifies DRUM/ICMP blocks belonging to a specific
machine configuration; value range: 0 ... 9 999 (0 =
block not configured); all blocks belonging to same
machine configuration have the same machine ID
number
Fourth implied
profile ID number
Identifies profile data currently loaded to the
sequencer; value range: 0... 9 999 (0 = block not
configured); all blocks with the same machine ID
number must have the same profile ID number
Fifth implied
steps used
Loaded by user before using the block, DRUM will not
alter steps used contents during logic solve; contains
between 1 ... 999 for 24 bit CPUs, specifying the actual
number of steps to be solved; the number must be
greater or less than the table length in the bottom node
The remaining registers contain data for each step in the sequence.
214
31007523 12/2006
Length
(Bottom Node)
The integer value entered in the bottom node is the length, i.e., the number of
application-specific registers used in the step data table. The length can range from
1 ... 999 in a 24-bit CPU.
The total number of registers required in the step data table is the length + 6. The
length must be greater or equal to the value placed in the steps used register in the
middle node.
31007523 12/2006
215
216
31007523 12/2006
DV16: Divide 16 Bit
43
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction DV16.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
218
Representation
219
Example
220
217
DV16: Divide 16 Bit
Short Description
Function
Description
218
The DV16 instruction performs a signed or unsigned division on the 16-bit values in
the top and middle nodes (value 1 / value 2), then posts the quotient and remainder
in two contiguous 4x holding registers in the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
DV16: Divide 16 Bit
Representation
Symbol
control input
value 1
ON = signed
OFF = unsigned
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
overflow
value 2
DV16
unsigned: > 65535
signed: > 32767 or < -32767
error
middle node = 0
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables value 1 / value 2
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT,
UINT
Dividend, can be displayed explicitly as an integer
(range 1 ... 65 535) or stored in two contiguous
registers (displayed for high-order half, implied for
low-order half)
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT,
UINT
Divisor, can be displayed explicitly as an integer
(range 1 ... 65 535, enter e.g. #65535) or stored in a
register
quotient
(bottom node)
4x
INT,
UINT
displayed: result of division
implied: remainder (either a decimal or a fraction,
depending on the state of middle input)
Top output
0x
None
ON = Divide operation completed successfully
Middle output
0x
None
ON = overflow:
quotient > 65 535 in unsigned operation
-32 768 > quotient > 32 767 in signed operation
Bottom output
0x
None
Error
219
DV16: Divide 16 Bit
Example
Quotient of
Instruction DV16
220
The state of the middle input indicates whether the remainder will be expressed as
a decimal or as a fraction. For example, if the middle input is ON and value 1 = 8 and
value 2 = 3, the quotient has a value of 2 in the Result register and a value of 6666
in the Remainder register.
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Descriptions (E)
III
At a Glance
Introduction
In this part all instruction descriptions start with E.
What's in this
Part?
31007523 12/2006
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
44
EARS - Event/Alarm Recording System
223
45
EMTH: Extended Math
231
46
EMTH-ADDDP: Double Precision Addition
237
47
EMTH-ADDFP: Floating Point Addition
243
48
EMTH-ADDIF: Integer + Floating Point Addition
247
49
EMTH-ANLOG: Base 10 Antilogarithm
251
50
EMTH-ARCOS: Floating Point Arc Cosine of an Angle (in Radians)
257
51
EMTH-ARSIN: Floating Point Arcsine of an Angle (in Radians)
263
52
EMTH-ARTAN: Floating Point Arc Tangent of an Angle (in Radians)
267
53
EMTH-CHSIN: Changing the Sign of a Floating Point Number
273
54
EMTH-CMPFP: Floating Point Comparison
279
55
EMTH-CMPIF: Integer-Floating Point Comparison
285
56
EMTH-CNVDR: Floating Point Conversion of Degrees to Radians
291
57
EMTH-CNVFI: Floating Point to Integer Conversion
297
58
EMTH-CNVIF: Integer to Floating Point Conversion
303
59
EMTH-CNVRD: Floating Point Conversion of Radians to Degrees
309
60
EMTH-COS: Floating Point Cosine of an Angle (in Radians)
315
61
EMTH-DIVDP: Double Precision Division
319
62
EMTH-DIVFI: Floating Point Divided by Integer
325
63
EMTH-DIVFP: Floating Point Division
329
64
EMTH-DIVIF: Integer Divided by Floating Point
333
221
Instruction Descriptions (E)
Chapter
222
Chapter Name
Page
65
EMTH-ERLOG: Floating Point Error Report Log
337
66
EMTH-EXP: Floating Point Exponential Function
343
67
EMTH-LNFP: Floating Point Natural Logarithm
349
68
EMTH-LOG: Base 10 Logarithm
355
69
EMTH-LOGFP: Floating Point Common Logarithm
361
70
EMTH-MULDP: Double Precision Multiplication
367
71
EMTH-MULFP: Floating Point Multiplication
373
72
EMTH-MULIF: Integer x Floating Point Multiplication
377
73
EMTH-PI: Load the Floating Point Value of "Pi"
383
74
EMTH-POW: Raising a Floating Point Number to an Integer Power
389
75
EMTH-SINE: Floating Point Sine of an Angle (in Radians)
395
76
EMTH-SQRFP: Floating Point Square Root
401
77
EMTH-SQRT: Floating Point Square Root
407
78
EMTH-SQRTP: Process Square Root
413
79
EMTH-SUBDP: Double Precision Subtraction
419
80
EMTH-SUBFI: Floating Point - Integer Subtraction
425
81
EMTH-SUBFP: Floating Point Subtraction
429
82
EMTH-SUBIF: Integer - Floating Point Subtraction
433
83
EMTH-TAN: Floating Point Tangent of an Angle (in Radians)
437
84
ESI: Support of the ESI Module
441
85
EUCA: Engineering Unit Conversion and Alarms
461
31007523 12/2006
EARS Event/Alarm Recording System
44
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction EARS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
224
Representation
225
227
223
Short Description
Function
Description
The EARS block is loaded to a PLC used in an alarm/event recording system. An
EARS system requires that the PLC work in conjunction with a human-machine
interface (HMI) host device that runs a special offline software package. The PLC
monitors a specified group of events for changes in state and logs change data into
a buffer. The data is then removed by the host over a high speed network such as
Modbus Plus. The two devices comply with a defined handshake protocol that
ensures that all data detected by the PLC is accurately represented in the host.
PLC Functions in
an Event/Alarm
Recording
System
When a PLC is employed in an EARS environment, it is set up to maintain and
monitor two tables of 4xxxx registers, one containing the current state of a set of
user-defined events and one containing the history of the most recent state of these
events. Event states are stored as bit representations in the 4xxxx registers; a bit
value of 1 signifying an ON state and a bit value of 0 signifying an OFF state. Each
table can contain up to 62 registers, allowing you to monitor the states of up to 992
events.
When the PLC detects a change between the current state bit and the history bit for
an event, the EARS instruction prepares a two word message and places it in a
buffer where they can be off-loaded to a host HMI.
This message contains:
a time stamp representing the time span from midnight to 24:00 hours in tenths
of a second
z a transition flag indicating that the event is either a positive or negative transition
with respect to the event state
z a number indicating which event has occurred
z
Host to PLC
Interaction
224
The host HMI device must be able to read and write PLC data registers via the
Modbus protocol. A handshake protocol maintains integrity between the host and
the circular buffer running in the PLC. This enables the host to receive events
asynchronously from the buffer at a speed suitable to the host while the PLC detects
event changes and load the buffer at its faster scan rate.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
queue not empty
state table
pointer / history
table
history table
(4xxxx-4xxxx + 63)
clear to send
buffer table
queue info and queue
(event/alarm
table length 5+NNN)
reset
queue full
EARS
length: 1 - 1000
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Handshake performed (if needed), validation
check performed, and EARS operations proceeds
OFF = Handshake performed (if needed) and
outstanding transactions are completed
Bottom input 0x, 1x
None
Buffer Reset: Event table and top node pointers cleared
to 0
state table
pointer /
history table
(top node)
INT,
UINT
The 4xxxx register entered in the top node is the first of
64 contiguous registers. The first two registers contain
values that specify the location and size of the current
state table.
The remaining 61 registers are available to store history
data. If all the remaining registers are not required for
the history table, those registers may be used
elsewhere in the program for other purposes, but they
will still be found (by a Modbus search) in the top node
of the EARS block.
4x
225
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
buffer table
(middle
node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The 4xxxx register entered in the middle node is the first
in a series of contiguous registers uses as a buffer
table. The first five registers are used as follows, and
the rest contain the circular buffer. The circular buffer
uses an even number of registers in the range 2 through
100.
The time stamp is encoded in 20 bits as a binary
weighted value that represents the time in an increment
of 0.1 s, starting from midnight of the day on which the
status change was detected:
z 1 hour = 3,600 seconds = 36,000 tenths of a second
z 24 hours = 86,400 seconds = 864,000 tenths of a
second
Note: The real time clock in the chassis mount
controllers has a tenth-of-a-second resolution, but the
other 984s have real time clock chips that resolve only
to a second. An algorithm is used in EARS to provide a
best estimate of tenth-of-a-second resolution; it is
accurate in the relative time intervals between events,
but it may vary slightly from the real time clock.
length
(bottom
node)
226
INT,
UINT
The integer value entered in the bottom node is the
length - i.e., actual number of registers allocated for the
circular buffer. The length can range from 2 through
100. Each event requires two registers for data storage.
Therefore, if you wish to trap up to 25 events at any
given time in the buffer, assign a length of 50 in the
bottom node.
Top output
0x
None
ON = Data in the buffer
Passes power when data is in the queue
Middle
output
0x
None
ON for one scan following communications
acknowledgment from host
Passes power for one scan after getting a host
response
Bottom
output
0x
None
Buffer full: No events can be added until host off-loads
some or until Buffer Reset
Passes power when queue is full. No more events can
be added
31007523 12/2006
Overview
This topic provides detailed and expanded information in table form for the top and
middle nodes, and the middle node provides further information, which is detailed in
three additional tables.
Therefore, there are five tables in this topic.
z register table (top node)
z data register table (middle node)
z status/error codes table
z event-change data table
z binary weighted value table
Register Table
(Top Node)
31007523 12/2006
This is the register table for the top node of EARS.
Register
Content
4x
Indirect pointer to the current state table for example if the register contains a
value of 5, then the state table begins at register 40005; the indirect pointer
register must be hard-coded by the programmer
4x+1
Contains a value in the range 1 through 62 that specifies the number of
registers in the current state table; this value must be hard-coded by the
programmer
4x+2
First register of the history table, and the remaining registers allocated to the
top node may be used in the table as required; the history table can provide
monitoring for as many as 992 contiguous events (if 16 bits in all the 62
available registers are used)
227
Data
Register Table
(Middle Node)
This is the data register table for the middle node of EARS.
Register
Content
4x
A value that defines the maximum number of registers the circular buffer may
occupy
4x+1
The Q_take pointer - the pointer to the next register where the host will go to
remove data
4x+2
The low byte contains the Q_put pointer - the pointer to the register in the
circular buffer where the EARS block will begin to place the next state-change
data. The high byte contains the last transaction number received.
4x+3
The Q+count is a value indicating the number of words currently in the circular
buffer.
4x+4
The 4x+4 register gives Status/Error information
For an explanation of the codes and the status/error messages that the code
represents please see the Status/Error Codes Table below.
4x+5
The 4x+5 register
z Gives Event-change data
z Is the first register in a circular buffer
z Is where Event-change data are stored
Each change in event status produces two contiguous registers, and those
registers are explained in the Event-change Data Table below.
Status/Error
Codes Table
228
This is the status/error codes table for the 4x+4 register of the middle node. The
information below provides detailed and expanded information for the 4x+4 register
of the middle node. The code number displayed represents an existing condition.
Code
Condition
1
Invalid block length
2
Invalid clock request
3
Invalid clock configuration
4
Invalid state length
5
Invalid queue put
6
Invalid queue take
7
Invalid state
8
Invalid queue count
9
Invalid sequence number
10
Count removed
255
Bad clock chip
31007523 12/2006
Event-change
Data Table
When a change occurs in the 4x+5 register, this register then produces two
contiguous registers. This topic explains how these contiguous registers are used.
Event Data Register 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
15
16
The following table describes the Bit Usage.
Bit
Usage
1-4
Four most significant bits of Event Time Stamp
5
Transition Event Type
0 = Negative
1 = Positive
6
Reserved
7 - 16
Event Number (1 ... 992)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
The following table describes the Bit Usage.
Bit
Usage
1 - 16
Sixteen least significant bits of Event Time Stamp
The time stamp is encoded in 20 bits as a binary weighted value that represents the
time in an increment of 0.1 s (tenths of a second), starting from midnight of the day
on which the status change was detected.
z 1 hour = 3600 seconds = 36000 tenths of a second
z 24 hours = 86,400 seconds = 864,000 tenths of a second
For expanded and detailed information on binary weighted values for the time stamp
see the Binary Weighted Values Table below.
31007523 12/2006
229
Binary Weighted
Values Table
Event Data Register 1 (Most significant nibble (4 bits))
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
The following table shows binary weighted values for the time stamp, where n is the
relative bit position in the 20-bit time scheme.
2n
n
2n
n
2n
n
1
0
256
8
65536
16
2
1
512
9
131072
17
4
2
1024
10
262144
18
8
3
2048
11
524288
19
16
4
4096
12
32
5
8192
13
64
6
16384
14
128
7
32768
15
Note: The real time clock in chassis mount controllers has a tenth-of-a-second
resolution, but the other 984s have real time clock chips that resolve only to a
second. An algorithm is used in EARS to provide a best estimate of tenth-of-asecond resolution. The algorithmic estimate is accurate in relative time intervals
between events, but the estimate may vary slightly from the real time clock.
230
31007523 12/2006
EMTH: Extended Math
45
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction EMTH.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
232
Representation
233
234
Floating Point EMTH Functions
236
231
EMTH: Extended Math
Short Description
Function
Description
This instruction accesses a library of double-precision math, square root and
logarithm calculations and floating point (FP) arithmetic functions.
The EMTH instruction allows you to select from a library of 38 extended math
functions. Each of the functions has an alphabetical indicator of variable
subfunctions that can be selected from a pulldown menu in your panel software and
appears in the bottom node. EMTH control inputs and outputs are functiondependent.
232
31007523 12/2006
EMTH: Extended Math
Representation
Symbol
top input
top output
top node
middle input
middle output
middle node
bottom input
bottom output
EMTH
subfunction
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Depends on the selected EMTH function
(see p. 234)
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
top node
3x, 4x
DINT,
UDINT,
REAL
Two consecutive registers, usually 4x holding
registers but, in the integer math cases, either 4x
or 3x registers
middle node
4x
DINT,
UDINT,
REAL
Two, four, or six consecutive registers,
depending on the function you are implementing.
subfunction
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
An alphabetical label, identifying the EMTH
function (see p. 234)
Top output
0x
None
(see p. 234)
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
233
EMTH: Extended Math
Inputs, Outputs
and Bottom Node
The implementation of inputs to and outputs from the block depends on the EMTH
subfunction you select. An alphabetical indicator of variable subfunctions appears in
the bottom node identifing the EMTH function you have chosen from the library.
You will find the EMTH subfunctions in the following tables.
Double Precision Math
z Integer Math
z Floating Point Math
z
Subfunctions for
Double Precision
Math
Subfunctions for
Integer Math
234
Double Precision Math
EMTH Function
Subfunction
Active Inputs
Active Outputs
Addition
ADDDP
Top
Top and Middle
Subtraction
SUBDP
Top
Top, Middle and Bottom
Multiplication
MULDP
Top
Top and Middle
Division
DIVDP
Top and Middle
Integer Math
EMTH Function
Subfunction
Active Inputs
Active Outputs
Square root
SQRT
Top
Top and Middle
Process square root
SQRTP
Top
Top and Middle
Logarithm
LOG
Top
Top and Middle
Antilogarithm
ANLOG
Top
Top and Middle
31007523 12/2006
EMTH: Extended Math
Subfunctions for
Floating Point
Math
31007523 12/2006
EMTH Function
Subfunction
Active Inputs
Active Outputs
Integer-to-FP conversion
CNVIF
Top
Top
Integer + FP
ADDIF
Top
Top
Integer - FP
SUBIF
Top
Top
Integer x FP
MULIF
Top
Top
Integer / FP
DIVIF
Top
Top
FP - Integer
SUBFI
Top
Top
FP / Integer
DIVFI
Top
Top
Integer-FP comparison
CMPIF
Top
Top
FP-to-Integer conversion
CNVFI
Top
Top and Middle
Addition
ADDFP
Top
Top
Subtraction
SUBFP
Top
Top
Multiplication
MULFP
Top
Top
Division
DIVFP
Top
Top
Comparison
CMPFP
Top
Square root
SQRFP
Top
Top
Change sign
CHSIN
Top
Top
Load Value of p
PI
Top
Top
Sine in radians
SINE
Top
Top
Cosine in radians
COS
Top
Top
Tangent in radians
TAN
Top
Top
Arcsine in radians
ARSIN
Top
Top
Arccosine in radians
ARCOS
Top
Top
Arctangent in radians
ARTAN
Top
Top
Radians to degrees
CNVRD
Top
Top
Degrees to radians
CNVDR
Top
Top
FP to an integer power
POW
Top
Top
Exponential function
EXP
Top
Top
Natural log
LNFP
Top
Top
Common log
LOGFP
Top
Top
Report errors
ERLOG
Top
Top and Middle
235
EMTH: Extended Math
Floating Point EMTH Functions
Use of Floating
Point Functions
To make use of the floating point (FP) capability, the four-digit integer values used
in standard math instructions must be converted to the IEEE floating point format.
All calculations are then performed in FP format and the results must be converted
back to integer format.
The IEEE
Floating Point
Standard
EMTH floating point functions require values in 32-bit IEEE floating point format.
Each value has two registers assigned to it, the eight most significant bits
representing the exponent and the other 23 bits (plus one assumed bit) representing
the mantissa and the sign of the value.
Note: Floating point calculations have a mantissa precision of 24 bits, which
guarantees the accuracy of the seven most significant digits. The accuracy of the
eighth digit in an FP calculation can be inexact.
It is virtually impossible to recognize a FP representation on the programming panel.
Therefore, all numbers should be converted back to integer format before you
attempt to read them.
Dealing with
Negative
Floating Point
Numbers
236
Standard integer math calculations do not handle negative numbers explicitly. The
only way to identify negative values is by noting that the SUB function block has
turned the bottom output ON.
If such a negative number is being converted to floating point, perform the Integerto-FP conversion (EMTH subfunction CNVIF), then use the Change Sign function
(EMTH subfunction CHSIN) to make it negative prior to any other FP calculations.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ADDDP:
Double Precision Addition
46
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ADDDP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
238
Representation
239
241
237
Short Description
Function
Description
238
This instruction is a subfunction of the EMTH instruction. It belongs to the category
"Double Precision Math."
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
adds operands
operand 1
operand 2 and
sum
operand out of range or invalid
EMTH
ADDDP
31007523 12/2006
239
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = adds operands and posts sum in
designated registers
operand 1
(top node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Operand 1 (first of two contiguous registers)
value in the range of 0 through 99,999,999. The
displayed register, and the low-order half is
stored in the implied register.
operand 2 and
sum
(middle node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Operand 2 and sum (first of six contiguous
registers)
0 through 99,999,999
z The value stored in the second implied
register indicates whether an overflow
condition exists (a value of 1 = overflow)
ADDDP
(bottom node)
240
Selection of the subfunction ADDDP
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operand out of range or invalid
31007523 12/2006
Operand 1
(Top Node)
Operand 2
and Sum
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
The first of two contiguous 4x registers is entered in the top node. The second 4x
Register
Content
Displayed
Register stores the low-order half of operand 1
Range 0 000 ... 9 999, for a combined double precision value in the
range 0 ... 99 999 999
First implied
Register stores the high-order half of operand 1
range 0 ... 99 999 999
The first of six contiguous 4x registers is entered in the middle node. The remaining
five registers are implied:
Register
Content
Displayed
Register stores the low-order half of operand 2, respectively, for a
combined double precision value in the range 0 ... 99 999 999
First implied
Register stores the high-order half of operand 2, respectively, for a
Second implied
The value stored in this register indicates whether an overflow
condition exists (a value of 1 = overflow)
Third implied
Register stores the low-order half of the double precision sum.
Fourth implied
Register stores the high-order half of the double precision sum.
Fifth implied
Register is not used in the calculation but must exist in state RAM
241
242
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ADDFP:
Floating Point Addition
47
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ADDFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
244
Representation
245
246
243
Short Description
Function
Description
244
"Floating Point Math."
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates FP addition
value 1
value 2 and
sum
EMTH
ADDFP
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
ON = enables FP addition
Top input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
4x
REAL Floating point value 1 (first of two contiguous registers)
The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered
in the top node. The second register is implied. FP
value 1 in the addition is stored here.
value 2 and
4x
sum
(middle node)
REAL Floating point value 2 and the sum (first of four
contiguous registers)
The first of four contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered
in the middle node. The remaining three registers are
implied. FP value 2 is stored in the displayed register
and the first implied register. The sum of the addition
is stored in FP format in the second and third implied
registers.
ADDFP
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction ADDFP
0x
None
245
Floating
Point Value 1
(Top Node)
Floating Point
Value 2 and Sum
(Middle Node)
246
The first of two contiguous 4x registers is entered in the top node. The second
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers store the FP value 1.
The first of four contiguous 4x registers is entered in the middle node. The remaining
three registers are implied
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers store the FP value 2.
Second implied
Third implied
Registers store the sum of the addition in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ADDIF:
Integer + Floating Point Addition
48
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ADDIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
248
Representation
249
250
247
Short Description
Function
Description
248
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates integer
+ FP operation
integer
FP and sum
EMTH
ADDIF
Parameter
Description
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
ON = initiates integer + FP operation
Top input
0x, 1x
None
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT, Integer value (first of two contiguous registers)
UDINT The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
the top node. The second register is implied. The
double precision integer value to be added to the FP
value is stored here.
FP and sum 4x
(middle
node)
REAL
ADDIF
(bottom
node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
FP value and sum (first of four contiguous registers)
The first of four contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
the middle node. The remaining three registers are
implied. The displayed register and the first implied
register store the FP value to be added in the operation,
and the sum is posted in the second and third implied
registers. The sum is posted in FP format.
Selection of the subfunction ADDIF
0x
None
249
Integer Value
(Top Node)
FP Value
and Sum
(Middle Node)
250
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value to be added to the FP value is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers store the FP value to be added in the operation.
Second implied
Third implied
The sum is posted here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ANLOG:
Base 10 Antilogarithm
49
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ANLOG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
252
Representation
253
255
251
Short Description
Function
Description
252
"Integer Math."
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enables antilog(X)
operation
source
result
error or
value out of range
EMTH
ANLOG
31007523 12/2006
253
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables antilog(x) operation
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT,
UINT
Source value
The top node is a single 4xxxx holding register or
3xxxx input register. The source value (the value
on which the antilog calculation will be performed)
is stored here in the fixed decimal format 1.234 .
It must be in the range of 0 through 7999,
representing a source value up to a maximum of
7.999.
result
(middle node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Result (first of two contiguous registers
entered in the middle node. The second register
is implied. The result of the antilog calculation is
posted here in the fixed decimal format
12345678.
The most significant bits are posted in the
displayed register, and the least significant bits
are posted in the implied register. The largest
antilog value that can be calculated is 99770006
(9977 posted in the displayed register and 0006
posted in the implied register).
ANLOG
(bottom node)
254
Selection of the subfunction ANLOG
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = an error or value out of range
31007523 12/2006
Source Value
(Top Node)
The top node is a single 4x holding register or 3x input register. The source value,
i.e. the value on which the antilog calculation will be performed, is stored here in the
fixed decimal format 1.234. It must be in the range 0 ... 7 999, representing a source
value up to a maximum of 7.999.
Result
(Middle Node)
The first of two contiguous 4x registers is entered in the middle node. The second
register is implied. The result of the antilog calculation is posted here in the fixed
decimal format 12345678:
Register
Content
Displayed
Most significant bits
First implied
Least significant bits
The largest antilog value that can be calculated is 99770006 (9977 posted in the
displayed register and 0006 posted in the implied register).
31007523 12/2006
255
256
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ARCOS: Floating Point Arc
Cosine of an Angle (in Radians)
50
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ARCOS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
258
Representation
259
261
257
Short Description
Function
Description
258
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the arc cosine of
the floating point value
value
arc cosine of
value
EMTH
ARCOS
31007523 12/2006
259
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates arc cosine of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the cosine of an angle (first of
two contiguous registers)
entered in the top node. The second register is
implied. An FP value indicating the cosine of an
angle between 0 through Pi radians is stored
here.
This value must be in the range of -1.0 through
+1.0; if not:
z The arc cosine is not computed
z An invalid result is returned
z An error is flagged in the EMTH ERLOG
function
arc cosine of
value
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Arc cosine in radians of the value in the top node
(first of four contiguous registers)
The first of four contiguous 4xxxx registers is
entered in the middle node.The remaining three
registers are implied.
The arc cosine in radians of the FP value in the
top node is posted in the second and third implied
registers. The displayed register and the first
implied register are not used but their allocation in
state RAM is required.
Tip: To preserve registers, you can make the 4x
reference numbers assigned to the displayed
register and the first implied register in the middle
node equal to the register references in the top
node, since the first two middle-node registers are
not used.
ARCOS
(bottom node)
Top output
260
Selection of the subfunction ARCOS
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
An FP value indicating the cosine of an angle between 0 ... p radians
is stored here.
This value must be in the range of -1.0 ... +1.0;
If the value is not in the range of -1.0 ... +1.0:
z The arc cosine is not computed
z An error is flagged in the EMTH-ERLOG function
Arc Cosine
of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers are not used but their allocation in state RAM is required.
Second implied
Third implied
The arc cosine in radians of the FP value in the top node is posted here.
Note: To preserve registers, you can make the 4x reference numbers assigned to
the displayed register and the first implied register in the middle node equal to the
register references in the top node, since the first two middle-node registers are not
used.
31007523 12/2006
261
262
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ARSIN: Floating Point
Arcsine of an Angle (in Radians)
51
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ARSIN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
264
Representation
265
266
263
Short Description
Function
Description
264
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the arc sine of
the floating point value
value
arc sine of
value
EMTH
ARSIN
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the arcsine of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the sine of an angle (first of two
in the top node. The second register is implied. An
FP value indicating the sine of an angle between -Pi/
2 through +Pi/2 radians is stored here.
This value, the sine of an angle, must be in the range
of -1.0 through +1.0; if not:
z The arcsine is not computed
z An error is flagged in the EMTH ERLOG function
arcsine of value 4x
(middle node)
REAL
Arcsine of the value in the top node (first of four
ARSIN
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction ARSIN
0x
None
ON = operation successful*
*Error is flagged in the EMTH ERLOG function.
265
Value (Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
An FP value indicating the sine of an angle between -π/2 ... π/2
radians is stored here. This value (the sine of an angle) must be in
the range of -1.0 ... +1.0;
If the value is not in the range of -1.0 ... +1.0:
The arcsine is not computed
z
Arcsine of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The arcsine of the value in the top node is posted here in FP format.
used.
266
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ARTAN: Floating Point Arc
Tangent of an Angle (in Radians)
52
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-ARTAN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
268
Representation
269
271
267
Short Description
Function
Description
268
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the arc tangent
of the floating point value
value
arc tangent of
value
EMTH
ARTAN
31007523 12/2006
269
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the arc tangent of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the tangent of an angle (first
of two contiguous registers)
implied. An FP value indicating the tangent of an
angle between -Pi/2 through +Pi/2 radians is
stored here. Any valid FP value is allowed.
arc tangent of
value
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Arc tangent of the value in the top node (first of
four contiguous registers)
entered in the middle node. The remaining three
The arc tangent in radians of the FP value in the
implied register are not used but their allocation in
Tip: To preserve registers, you can make the
4xxxx reference numbers assigned to the
displayed register and the first implied register in
the middle node equal to the register references
in the top node, since the first two middle-node
registers are not used.
ARTAN
(bottom node)
Top output
270
Selection of the subfunction ARTAN
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Arc Tangent
of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
An FP value indicating the tangent of an angle between -π/2 ... π/2
radians is stored here. Any valid FP value is allowed.;
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The arc tangent in radians of the FP value in the top node is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
271
272
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CHSIN: Changing the Sign
of a Floating Point Number
53
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CHSIN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
274
Representation
275
277
273
Short Description
Function
Description
274
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
changes the sign of a
floating point number
value
-(value)
EMTH
CHSIN
31007523 12/2006
275
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = changes the sign of FP value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value (first of two contiguous
registers)
implied. The FP value whose sign will be changed
is stored here.
-(value)
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value with changed sign (first of
four contiguous registers)
registers are implied.The top node FP value in the
implied register in the middle node are not used
in the operation but their allocation in state RAM
is required.
CHSIN
(bottom node)
Top output
276
Selection of the subfunction CHSIN
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Floating Point
Value (Top Node)
Floating Point
Value with
changed sign
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value whose sign will be changed is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The top node FP value with changed sign is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
277
278
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CMPFP:
Floating Point Comparison
54
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CMPFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
280
Representation
281
283
279
Short Description
Function
Description
280
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates comparison
value 1
value 1 >= value 2
value 2
value 1 <= value 2
EMTH
CMPFP
31007523 12/2006
281
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates comparison
value 1
(top node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
First floating point value (first of two contiguous
registers)
implied. The first FP value (value 1) to be
compared is stored here.
value 2
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Second floating point value (first of four
registers are implied. The second FP value
(value 2) to be compared is entered in the
displayed register and the first implied register;
the second and third implied registers are not
used in the comparison but their allocation in
CMPFP
(bottom node)
282
Selection of the subfunction CMPFP
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Please see the table on p. 283, which indicates
the relationship created when CMFPF compares
two floating point values.
Bottom output
0x
None
Please see the table on p. 283, which indicates
the relationship created when CMFPF compares
two floating point values.
31007523 12/2006
Value 1
(Top Node)
Value 2
(Middle Node)
Middle and
Bottom Output
31007523 12/2006
register is implied:
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The first FP value (value 1) to be compared is stored here.
three registers are implied:
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The second FP value (value 2) to be compared is stored here.
Second implied
Third implied
When EMTH function CMPFP compares its two FP values, the combined states of
the middle and the bottom output indicate their relationship:
Middle Output
Bottom Output
Relationship
ON
OFF
value 1 > value 2
OFF
ON
value 1 < value 2
ON
ON
value 1 = value 2
283
284
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CMPIF: Integer-Floating
Point Comparison
55
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CMPIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
286
Representation
287
289
285
Short Description
Function
Description
286
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiate comparison
integer
FP
integer >= FP
integer <= FP
EMTH
CMPIF
31007523 12/2006
287
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates comparison
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT, UDINT
Integer value (first of two contiguous
registers)
The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers
is entered in the top node. The second
register is implied. The double precision
integer value to be compared is stored
here.
FP
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value (first of four
The first of four contiguous 4xxxx registers
is entered in the middle node. The
remaining three registers are implied. The
FP value to be compared is entered in the
displayed register and the first implied
register; the second and third implied
registers are not used in the comparison
but their allocation in state RAM is
required.
CMPIF
(bottom node)
288
Selection of the subfunction CMPIF
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Please see the table named Middle and
Bottom Output, p. 289, which indicates the
relationship created when CMPIF
compares two floating point values.
Bottom output
0x
None
Please see the table named Middle and
Bottom Output, p. 289, which indicates the
relationship created when CMPIF
compares two floating point values.
31007523 12/2006
Integer Value
(Top Node)
Floating
Point Value
(Middle Node)
Middle and
Bottom Output
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value to be compared is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value to be compared is stored here.
Second implied
Third implied
When EMTH function CMPIF compares its integer and FP values, the combined
states of the middle and the bottom output indicate their relationship:
Middle Output
Bottom Output
Relationship
ON
OFF
integer > FP
OFF
ON
integer < FP
ON
ON
integer = FP
289
290
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CNVDR: Floating Point
Conversion of Degrees to Radians
56
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CNVDR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
292
Representation
293
295
291
Short Description
Function
Description
292
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiate conversion
value
result
EMTH
CNVDR
31007523 12/2006
293
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates conversion of value 1 to
value 2 (result)
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Value in FP format of an angle in degrees
(first of two contiguous registers)
register is implied. The value in FP format
of an angle in degrees is stored here.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Converted result (in radians) in FP format
remaining three registers are implied.
The converted result in FP format of the
top-node value (in radians) is posted in the
second and third implied registers. The
register are not used but their allocation in
Tip: To preserve registers, you can make
the 4xxxx reference numbers assigned to
the displayed register and the first implied
register in the middle node equal to the
register references in the top node, since
the first two middle-node registers are not
used.
CNVDR
(bottom node)
Top output
294
Selection of the subfunction CNVDR
0x
None
*Error is flagged in the EMTH ERLOG
function.
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Result in
Radians
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The value in FP format of an angle in degrees is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The converted result in FP format of the top-node value (in radians)
is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
295
296
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CNVFI: Floating Point to
Integer Conversion
57
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CNVFI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
298
Representation
299
301
Runtime Error Handling
302
297
Short Description
Function
Description
298
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates
floating point to
integer conversion
FP
integer
EMTH
OFF = positive integer value
ON = negative integer value
CNVFI
31007523 12/2006
299
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP to integer conversion
FP
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value to be converted (first of
two contiguous registers)
entered in the top node. The second register
is implied. The double precision integer value
to be converted to 32-bit FP format is stored
here.
Note: If an invalid integer value ( > 9999) is
entered in either of the two top-node
registers, the FP conversion will be
performed but an error will be reported and
logged in the EMTH ERLOG function (see
page 138). The result of the conversion may
not be correct.
integer
(middle node)
4x
DINT, UDINT Integer value (first of four contiguous
registers)
entered in the middle node. The remaining
three registers are implied. The FP result of
the conversion is posted in the second and
third implied registers. The displayed register
and the first implied register are not used in
the function but their allocation in state RAM
is required.
4x reference numbers assigned to the
register references in the top node, since the
first two middle-node registers are not used.
CNVFI
(bottom node)
300
Selection of the subfunction CNVFI
Top output
0x
None
function.
Bottom output
0x
None
OFF = positive integer value
ON = negative integer value
31007523 12/2006
Integer Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The double precision integer result of the conversion is stored here. This
value should be the largest integer value possible that is ≤ the FP value.
For example, the FP value 3.5 is converted to the integer value 3, while the
FP value -3.5 is converted to the integer value -4.
used.
31007523 12/2006
301
Runtime Errors
302
If the resultant integer is too large for double precision integer format (> 99 999 999),
the conversion still occurs but an error is logged in the EMTH_ERLOG function.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CNVIF: Integer to Floating
Point Conversion
58
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CNVIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
304
Representation
305
307
308
303
Short Description
Function
Description
304
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates integer to
floating point conversion
integer
result
EMTH
CNVIF
31007523 12/2006
305
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data Type
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP to integer conversion
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT, UDINT Integer value (first of two contiguous registers)
implied. The FP value to be converted is stored
here.
result
4x
(middle node)
REAL
CNVIF
(bottom node)
Top output
306
Result (first of four contiguous registers)
The double precision integer result of the
conversion is stored in the second and third
implied registers. This value should be the
largest integer value possible that is <= the FP
value. For example, the FP value 3.5 is
converted to the integer value 3, while the FP
value -3.5 is converted to the integer value -4.
Note: If the resultant integer is too large for 984
double precision integer format (> 99,999,999),
the conversion still occurs but an error is logged
in the EMTH ERLOG function (see page 138).
The displayed register and the first implied
register in the middle node are not used in the
conversion but their allocation in state RAM is
required.
displayed register and the first implied register
in the middle node equal to the register
references in the top node, since the first two
middle-node registers are not used.
Selection of the subfunction CNVIF
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Integer Value
(Top Node)
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value to be converted to 32-bit FP
format is stored here.
three registers are implied.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The FP result of the conversion is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
307
Runtime Errors
308
If an invalid integer value ( > 9 999) is entered in either of the two top-node registers,
the FP conversion will be performed but an error will be reported and logged in the
EMTH_ERLOG function. The result of the conversion may not be correct.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-CNVRD: Floating Point
Conversion of Radians to Degrees
59
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-CNVRD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
310
Representation
311
313
309
Short Description
Function
Description
310
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates conversion
value
result
EMTH
CNVRD
31007523 12/2006
311
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates conversion of value 1 to
value 2
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Value in FP format of an angle in radians
register is implied. The value in FP format
of an angle in radians is stored here.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Converted result (in degrees) in FP format
The converted result in FP format of the
top-node value (in degrees) is posted in
the second and third implied registers. The
used.
CNVRD
(bottom node)
Top output
312
Selection of the subfunction CNVRD
0x
None
function.
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Result
in Degrees
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The value in FP format of an angle in radians is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The converted result in FP format of the top-node value (in degrees)
is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
313
314
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-COS: Floating Point Cosine
of an Angle (in Radians)
60
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-COS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
316
Representation
317
318
315
Short Description
Function
Description
316
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the cosine of the
floating point value
value
cosine of value
EMTH
COS
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the cosine of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the value of an angle in radians
in the top node. The second register is implied. An FP
value indicating the value of an angle in radians is
stored here.
The magnitude of this value must be < 65536.0; if not:
z The cosine is not computed
cosine of value 4x
(middle node)
REAL
Cosine of the value in the top node (first of four
COS
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction COS
0x
None
317
Value (Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
An FP value indicating the value of an angle in radians is stored
here. The magnitude of this value must be < 65 536.0.
If the magnitude of this value is ≥ 65 536.0:
The cosine is not computed
z
Cosine of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The cosine of the value in the top node is posted here in FP format.
used.
318
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-DIVDP:
Double Precision Division
61
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-DIVDP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
320
Representation
321
323
324
319
Short Description
Function
Description
320
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
top node divided by
middle node
operand 1
operand 2
quotient
remainder
operand 2 is 0
EMTH
DIVDP
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = operand 1 divided by operand 2 and result posted
in designated registers.
Middle input 0x, 1x
None
operand 1
top node
DINT, Operand 1 (first of two contiguous registers)
UDINT The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
the top node. The second register is implied. The top
node is stored here. Each register holds a value in the
range of 0000 through 9999, for a combined double
precision value in the range of 0 through 99,999,999.
The high-order half of operand 1 is stored in the
displayed register, and the low-order half is stored in the
implied register.
4x
321
Reference Type
operand 2
4x
quotient
remainder
middle node
Meaning
DINT, Operand 2, quotient and remainder (first of six
UDINT contiguous registers)
The first of six contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
the middle node.
z The displayed register and the first implied register
store the high-order and low-order halves of operand
2, respectively, for a combined double precision
value in the range of 0 through 99,999,999
Note: Since division by 0 is illegal, a 0 value causes an
error. An error trapping routine sets the remaining
middle-node registers to 0000 and turns the bottom
output ON.
z The second and third implied registers store an
eight-digit quotient
z The fourth and fifth implied registers store the
remainder. If the remainder is expressed as a
fraction, it is eight digits long and both registers are
used; if the remainder is expressed as a decimal, it
is four digits long and only the fourth implied register
is used
DIVDP
(bottom
node)
322
Selection of the subfunction DIVDP"
Top output
0x
None
Middle
output
0x
None
ON = an operand out of range or invalid
Bottom
output
0x
None
ON = operand 2 = 0
31007523 12/2006
Operand 1
(Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
Low-order half of operand 1 is stored here.
First implied
High-order half of Operand 1 is stored here.
Each register holds a value in the range 0000 ... 9 999, for a combined double
precision value in the range 0 ... 99 999 999.
Operand 2,
Quotient and
Remainder
(Middle Node)
five registers are implied
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
combined double precision value in the range 0 ... 99 999 999.
Second implied
Third implied
Registers store an eight-digit quotient.
Fourth implied
Fifth implied
Registers store the remainder.
z f it is expressed as a decimal, it is four digits long and only the
fourth implied register is used.
z If it is expressed as a fraction, it is eight digits long and both
registers are used
31007523 12/2006
323
Runtime Errors
324
Since division by 0 is illegal, a 0 value causes an error, an error trapping routine sets
the remaining middle-node registers to 0000 and turns the bottom output ON.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-DIVFI: Floating Point
Divided by Integer
62
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-DIVFI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
326
Representation
327
328
325
Short Description
Function
Description
326
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates floating point /
integer operation
FP
integer and
quotient
EMTH
DIVFI
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP / integer operation
FP
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value (first of two contiguous registers)
in the top node. The second register is implied. The FP
value to be divided by the integer value is stored here.
DINT,
UDINT
Integer value and quotient (first of four contiguous
registers)
implied. The double precision integer value that
divides the FP value is posted in the displayed register
and the first implied register, and the quotient is posted
in the second and third implied registers. The quotient
is posted in FP format.
integer and
4x
quotient
(middle node)
DIVFI
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction DIVFI
0x
None
327
Floating Point
Value (Top Node)
Integer Value and
Quotient (Middle
Node)
328
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value to be divided by the integer value is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value that divides the FP value is
posted here.
Second implied
Third implied
The quotient is posted here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-DIVFP:
Floating Point Division
63
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instrcution EMTH-DIVFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
330
Representation
331
332
329
Short Description
Function
Description
330
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enables floating point division
value 1
value 2 and
quotient
EMTH
DIVFP
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates value 1 / value 2 operation
value 1
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value 1 (first of two contiguous registers)
The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
the top node. The second register is implied. FP value
1, which will be divided by the value 2, is stored here.
value 2 and
4x
quotient
(middle node)
REAL
Floating point value 2 and the quotient (first of four
implied. FP value 2, the value by which value 1 is
divided, is stored in the displayed register and the first
implied register. The quotient is posted in FP format in
the second and third implied registers.
DIVFP
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
Selection of the subfunction DIVFP
0x
None
331
Floating
Point Value 1
(Top Node)
Floating
Point Value 2
and Quotient
(Middle Node)
332
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 1, which will be divided by the value 2, is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 2, the value by which value 1 is divided, is stored here
Second implied
Third implied
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-DIVIF: Integer Divided by
Floating Point
64
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction EMTH-DIVIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
334
Representation
335
336
333
Short Description
Function
Description
334
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates integer /
floating point operation
integer
FP and
quotient
EMTH
DIVIF
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates integer / FP operation
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Integer value (first of two contiguous registers)
implied. The double precision integer value to be
divided by the FP value is stored here.
REAL
FP value and quotient (first of four contiguous
registers)
registers are implied. The displayed register and
the first implied register store the FP value to be
divided in the operation, and the quotient is
posted in the second and third implied registers.
The quotient is posted in FP format.
FP and quotient 4x
(middle node)
DIVIF
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
Selection of the subfunction DIVIF
0x
None
335
Integer Value
(Top Node)
Floating
Point Value
and Quotient
(Middle Node)
336
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value to be divided by the FP value is
stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value to be divided in the operation is posted here.
Second implied
Third implied
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-ERLOG: Floating Point
Error Report Log
65
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instrcution EMTH-ERLOG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
338
Representation: EMTH - ERLOG - Floating Point Math - Error Report Log
339
341
337
Short Description
Function
Description
338
31007523 12/2006
Representation: EMTH - ERLOG - Floating Point Math - Error Report Log
Symbol
RETRIEVES A LOG OF
ERROR TYPES SINCE
LAST INVOCATION
RETRIEVAL SUCCESSFUL
not used
error data
EMTH
ERLOG
31007523 12/2006
ON = NONZERO VLAUES IN
ERROR LOG REGESTER
OFF = ALL ZEROS IN ERROR LOG
REGISTER
339
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = retrieves a log of error types since
last invocation
not used
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
Not used in the operation (first of two
DINT, UDINT, contiguous registers)
REAL
register is implied. These two registers are
not used in the operation but their
allocation in state RAM is required.
error data
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
Error log register (first of four contiguous
DINT, UDINT, registers)
REAL
is entered in the middle node.
The remaining three registers are implied.
The second implied register is used as the
error log register.
(For detailed information about the error
log please see p. 341.)
The third implied register has all its bits
cleared to zero. The displayed register and
the first implied register are not used but
their allocation in state RAM is required.
these registers must be allocated but none
are used.
ERLOG
(bottom node)
340
Selection of the subfunction ERLOG
Top output
0x
None
ON = retrieval successful
Middle output
0x
None
ON = nonzero values in error log register
OFF = all zeros in error log register
31007523 12/2006
Not Used
(Top Node)
Error Data
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
These two registers are not used in the operation but their allocation
in state RAM is required.
Register
Content
Displayed
Error log register, see table.
First implied
This register has all its bits cleared to zero.
Second implied
Third implied
These two registers are not used but their allocation in state RAM is
required.
register references in the top node, since these registers must be allocated but
none are used.
Error Log
Register
Usage of error log register:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1-8
Function code of last error logged
9 - 11
Not used
12
Integer/FP conversion error
13
Exponential function power too large
14
Invalid FP value or operation
15
FP overflow
16
FP underflow
12
13
14
15
16
If the bit is set to 1, then the specific error condition exists for that bit.
31007523 12/2006
341
342
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-EXP: Floating Point
Exponential Function
66
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-EXP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
344
Representation
345
347
343
Short Description
Function
Description
344
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates exponential of
the value
value
result
EMTH
EXP
31007523 12/2006
345
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates exponential function of
the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Value in FP format (first of two contiguous
registers)
register is implied. A value in FP format in
the range -87.34 through +88.72 is stored
here.
If the value is out of range, the result will
either be 0 or the maximum value. No error
will be flagged.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Exponential of the value in the top node
The exponential of the value in the top
node is posted in FP format in the second
and third implied registers. The displayed
register and the first implied register are
not used but their allocation in state RAM
is required.
used.
EXP
(bottom node)
Top output
346
Selection of the subfunction EXP
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
A value in FP format in the range -87.34 ... +88.72 is stored here.
If the value is out of range, the result will either be 0 or the maximum
value. No error will be flagged.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
These registers are not used but their allocation in state RAM is
required
Second implied
Third implied
The exponential of the value in the top node is posted here in FP
format.
used.
31007523 12/2006
347
348
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-LNFP: Floating Point
Natural Logarithm
67
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-LNFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
350
Representation
351
353
349
Short Description
Function
Description
350
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the natural log
of the value
value
result
EMTH
LNFP
31007523 12/2006
351
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the natural log of the
value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Value > 0 in FP format (first of two
register is implied. A value > 0 is stored
here in FP format.
If the value <= 0, an invalid result will be
returned in the middle node and an error
will be logged in the EMTH ERLOG
function.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Natural logarithm of the value in the top
node (first of four contiguous registers)
The natural logarithm of the value in the
top node is posted in FP format in the
used.
LNFP
(bottom node)
Top output
352
Selection of the subfunction LNFP
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
A value > 0 is stored here in FP format.
If the value ≤ 0, an invalid result will be returned in the middle node
and an error will be logged in the EMTH-ERLOG function.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
required
Second implied
Third implied
The natural logarithm of the value in the top node is posted here in
FP format.
used.
31007523 12/2006
353
354
31007523 12/2006
68
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-LOG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
356
Representation
357
359
355
Short Description
Function
Description
356
"Integer Math."
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enables log(X)
operation
source
error or value out of range
result
EMTH
LOG
31007523 12/2006
357
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables log(x) operation
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
DINT, UDINT
Source value (first of two contiguous
registers)
The first of two contiguous 3xxxx or 4xxxx
registers is entered in the top node. The
second register is implied. The source
value upon which the log calculation will
be performed is stored in these registers.
If you specify a 4xxxx register, the source
value may be in the range of 0 through
99,999,99. The low-order half of the value
is stored in the implied register, and the
high-order half is stored in the displayed
register.
value may be in the range of 0 through
9,999. The log calculation is done on only
the value in the displayed register; the
implied register is required but not used.
result
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Result
The middle node contains a single 4xxxx
holding register where the result of the
base 10 log calculation is posted. The
result is expressed in the fixed decimal
format 1.234 , and is truncated after the
third decimal position. The largest result
that can be calculated is 7.999, which
would be posted in the middle register as
7999.
LOG
(bottom node)
358
Selection of the subfunction LOG
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = an error or value out of range
31007523 12/2006
Source Value
(Top Node)
The first of two contiguous 3x or 4x registers is entered in the top node. The second
register is implied. The source value upon which the log calculation will be
performed is stored in these registers.
If you specify a 4x register, the source value may be in the range 0 ... 99 999 99:
Register
Content
Displayed
The high-order half of the value is stored here.
First implied
The low-order half of the value is stored here.
If you specify a 3x register, the source value may be in the range 0 ... 9 999:
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
The source value upon which the log calculation will be performed is
stored here
First implied
This register is required but not used.
The middle node contains a single 4x holding register where the result of the base
10 log calculation is posted. The result is expressed in the fixed decimal format
1.234, and is truncated after the third decimal position.
The largest result that can be calculated is 7.999, which would be posted in the
middle register as 7999.
31007523 12/2006
359
360
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-LOGFP: Floating Point
Common Logarithm
69
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-LOGFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
362
Representation
363
365
361
Short Description
Function
Description
362
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the common log
of the value
value
result
EMTH
LOGFP
31007523 12/2006
363
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the common log of the
value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Value > 0 in FP format (first of two
register is implied. A value > 0 is stored
here in FP format.
If the value <= 0, an invalid result will be
returned in the middle node and an error
will be logged in the EMTH ERLOG
function.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Common logarithm of the value in the top
node (first of four contiguous registers)
The common logarithm of the value in the
top node is posted in FP format in the
used.
LOGFP
(bottom node)
Top output
364
Selection of the subfunction LOGFP
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
A value > 0 is stored here in FP format.
If the value ≤ 0, an invalid result will be returned in the middle node
and an error will be logged in the EMTH-ERLOG function.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
required
Second implied
Third implied
The common logarithm of the value in the top node is posted here in
FP format.
used.
31007523 12/2006
365
366
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-MULDP:
Double Precision Multiplication
70
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-MULDP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
368
Representation
369
371
367
Short Description
Function
Description
368
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
top node multiplied by
middle node
operand 1
operand 2/
product
EMTH
MULDP
31007523 12/2006
369
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Operand 1 x Operand 2
Product posted in designated registers
operand 1
(top node)
4x
DINT, UDINT
Operand 1 (first of two contiguous
registers)
The first of two contiguous 4x registers is
entered in the top node. The second 4x
register is implied. Operand 1 is stored
here. The second 4x register is implied.
Each register holds a value in the range of
0000 through 9999, for a combined double
precision value in the range of 0 through
99,999,999. The high-order half of
operand 1 is stored in the displayed
register, and the low-order half is stored in
the implied register.
operand 2 /
product
(middle node)
4x
DINT, UDINT
Operand 2 and product (first of six
The first of six contiguous 4xxxx registers
is entered in the middle node.
z The displayed register and the first
implied register store the high-order
and low-order halves of operand 2,
respectively, for a combined double
precision value in the range 0 through
99,999,999
z The last four implied registers store the
double precision product in the range 0
through 9,999,999,999,999,999
MULDP
(bottom node)
370
Selection of the subfunction MULDP
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operand out of range
31007523 12/2006
Operand 1
(Top Node)
Operand 2
and Product
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Displayed
range 0 ... 99 999 999
First implied
range 0 ... 99 999 999
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
Fourth implied
Fifth implied
These registers store the double precision product in the range 0 ...
9 999 999 999 999 999
371
372
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-MULFP:
Floating Point Multiplication
71
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-MULFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
374
Representation
375
376
373
Short Description
Function
Description
374
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enables floating point
multiplication
value 1
value 2 and
product
EMTH
MULFP
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP multiplication
value 1
(top node)
4x
REAL
the top node. The second register is implied. FP value
1 in the multiplication operation is stored here.
value 2 and
4x
product
(middle node)
REAL
Floating point value 2 and the product (first of four
implied. FP value 2 in the multiplication operation is
stored in the displayed register and the first implied
register. The product of the multiplication is stored in
FP format in the second and third implied registers.
MULFP
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction MULFP
0x
None
375
Floating
Point Value 1
(Top Node)
Floating
Point Value 2
and Product
(Middle Node)
376
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 1 in the multiplication operation is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 2 in the multiplication operation is stored here.
Second implied
Third implied
The product of the multiplication is stored here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-MULIF: Integer x Floating
Point Multiplication
72
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-MULIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
378
Representation
379
381
377
Short Description
Function
Description
378
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates integer X
floating point operation
integer
FP
and
product
EMTH
MULIF
31007523 12/2006
379
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates integer x FP operation
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT, UDINT
Integer value (first of two contiguous
registers)
register is implied. The double precision
integer value to be multiplied by the FP
REAL
FP value and product (first of four
remaining three registers are implied. The
register store the FP value to be multiplied
in the operation, and the product is posted
in the second and third implied registers.
The product is posted in FP format.The
first of four contiguous 4xxxx registers is
three registers are implied. The displayed
register and the first implied register store
the FP value to be multiplied in the
operation, and the product is posted in the
product is posted in FP format.
FP and product 4x
(middle node)
MULIF
(bottom node)
Top output
380
Selection of the subfunction MULIF
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Integer Value
(Top Node)
FP Value
and Product
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value to be multiplied by the FP value
is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value to be multiplied in the operation is stored here.
Second implied
Third implied
The product of the multiplication is stored here in FP format.
381
382
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-PI: Load the Floating Point
Value of "Pi"
73
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-PI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
384
Representation
385
387
383
Short Description
Function
Description
384
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
loads floating point value of
Pi to middle node registers
not used
FP Value
of π
EMTH
PI
31007523 12/2006
385
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = loads FP value of π to middle node register
not used
(top node)
4x
REAL
First of two contiguous registers
the top node. The second register is implied. These
registers are not used but their allocation in state RAM
is required.
FP value of π 4x
(middle node)
REAL
FP value of π (first of four contiguous registers)
in the middle node.The remaining three registers are
implied.
The FP value of p is posted in the second and third
implied registers. The displayed register and the first
implied register are not used but their allocation in state
RAM is required.
Tip: To preserve registers, you can make the 4xxxx
reference numbers assigned to the displayed register
and the first implied register in the middle node equal
to the register references in the top node, since the first
two middle-node registers are not used.
PI
(bottom node)
Top output
386
Meaning
Selection of the subfunction PI
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Not Used
(Top Node)
Floating Point
Value of π
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
required.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
required.
Second implied
Third implied
The FP value of π is posted here.
used.
31007523 12/2006
387
388
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-POW: Raising a Floating
Point Number to an Integer Power
74
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-POW.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
390
Representation: EMTH - POW - Raising a Floating Point Number to an Integer
Power
391
393
389
Short Description
Function
Description
390
31007523 12/2006
Representation: EMTH - POW - Raising a Floating Point Number to an Integer
Power
Symbol
CALCULATES FP VALUE
RAISED TO THE POWER
OF INT VALUE
OPERATION SUCCESSFUL
FP value
integer
and
result
EMTH
POW
31007523 12/2006
391
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates FP value raised to the
power of integer value
FP value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value (first of two contiguous registers)
register is implied. The FP value to be
raised to the integer power is stored here.
integer and
result
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Integer value and result (first of four
is entered in the middle node.The
The bit values in the displayed register
must all be cleared to zero. An integer
value representing the power to which the
top-node value will be raised is stored in
the first implied register. The result of the
FP value being raised to the power of the
integer value is stored in the second and
third implied registers.
Selection of the subfunction POW
POW
(bottom node)
Top output
392
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
FP Value
(Top Node)
Integer
and Result
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value to be raised to the integer power is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
The bit values in this register must all be cleared to zero.
First implied
An integer value representing the power to which the top-node value
will be raised is stored here.
Second implied
Third implied
The result of the FP value being raised to the power of the integer
393
394
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SINE: Floating Point Sine
of an Angle (in Radians)
75
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SINE.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
396
Representation: EMTH - SINE - Floating Point Math - Sine of an Angle (in
Radians)
397
399
395
Short Description
Function
Description
396
31007523 12/2006
Representation: EMTH - SINE - Floating Point Math - Sine of an Angle
(in Radians)
Symbol
CALCULATES THE SINE
OF THE VALUE
OPERATION SUCCESSFUL
value
sine of
value
EMTH
SINE
31007523 12/2006
397
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the sine of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the value of an angle in
radians (first of two contiguous registers)
implied. An FP value indicating the value of an
angle in radians is stored here.
The magnitude of this value must be < 65536.0;
if not:
z The sine is not computed
z An error is flagged in the EMTH ERLOG
function
sine of value
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Sine of the value in the top node (first of four
entered in the middle node.The remaining three
The sine of the value in the top node is posted in
the second and third implied registers in FP
format. The displayed register and the first
implied register are not used but their allocation
in state RAM is required.
SINE
(bottom node)
Top output
398
Selection of the subfunction SINE
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Value (Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
If the magnitude is ≥ 65 536.0:
z The sine is not computed
Sine of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The sine of the value in the top node is posted here in FP format.
used.
31007523 12/2006
399
400
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SQRFP:
Floating Point Square Root
76
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SQRFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
402
Representation
403
405
401
Short Description
Function
Description
402
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates square root on
value
result
EMTH
SQRFP
31007523 12/2006
403
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates square root on FP value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value (first of two contiguous
registers)
implied. The FP value on which the square
root operation is performed is stored here.
result
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Result in FP format (first of four contiguous
registers)
three registers are implied. The result of the
square root operation is posted in FP format in
the second and third implied registers. The
in the middle node are not used in the
operation but their allocation in state RAM is
required.
in the middle node equal to the register
references in the top node, since the first two
middle-node registers are not used.
SQRFP
(bottom node)
Top output
404
Selection of the subfunction SQRFP
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Floating Point
Value (Top Node)
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value on which the square root operation is performed is
stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The result of the square root operation is posted here in FP format.
used.
31007523 12/2006
405
406
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SQRT:
Floating Point Square Root
77
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SQRT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
408
Representation
409
411
407
Short Description
Function
Description
408
"Integer Math."
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates a standard
SQRT operation
source
top node value out of range
result
EMTH
SQRT
31007523 12/2006
409
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates a standard square root operation
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
DINT,
UDINT
Source value (first of two contiguous registers)
registers is entered in the top node. The second
register is implied. The source value (the value
for which the square root will be derived) is stored
here.
If you specify a 4xxxx register, the source value
may be in the range of 0 through 99,999,99. The
low-order half of the value is stored in the implied
register, and the high-order half is stored in the
displayed register.
If you specify a 3xxxx register, the source value
may be in the range of 0 through 9,999. The
square root calculation is done on only the value
in the displayed register; the implied register is
required but not used.
result
(middle node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Result (first of two contiguous registers)
Enter the first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers
in the middle node. The second register is
implied. The result of the standard square root
operation is stored here.
The result is stored in the fixed-decimal format:
1234.5600. where the displayed register stores
the four-digit value to the left of the first decimal
point and the implied register stores the four-digit
value to the right of the first decimal point.
Numbers after the second decimal point are
truncated; no round-off calculations are
performed.
SQRT
(bottom node)
410
Selection of the subfunction SQRT
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON =source value out of range
31007523 12/2006
Source Value
(Top Node)
register is implied. The source value, i.e. the value for which the square root will be
derived, is stored here.
If you specify a 4x register, the source value may be in the range 0 ... 99 999 99:
Register
Content
Displayed
The high-order half of the value is stored here.
First implied
The low-order half of the value is stored here.
If you specify a 3x register, the source value may be in the range 0 ... 9 999:
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
The square root calculation is done on only the value in the
displayed register
First implied
This register is required but not used.
Enter the first of two contiguous 4x registers in the middle node. The second register
is implied. The result of the standard square root operation is stored here in the
fixed-decimal format: 1234.5600.:.
Register
Content
Displayed
This register stores the four-digit value to the left of the first decimal point.
First implied
This register stores the four-digit value to the right of the first decimal point.
Note: Numbers after the second decimal point are truncated; no round-off
calculations are performed.
31007523 12/2006
411
412
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SQRTP:
Process Square Root
78
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SQRTP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
414
Representation
415
417
Example
418
413
Short Description
Function
Description
"Integer Math."
The process square root function tailors the standard square root function for closed
loop analog control applications. It takes the result of the standard square root result,
multiplies it by 63.9922 (the square root of 4 095) and stores that linearized result in
the middle-node registers.
The process square root is often used to linearize signals from differential pressure
flow transmitters so that they may be used as inputs in closed loop control
operations.
414
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates a process
square root operation
source
top node value out of range
linearized
result
EMTH
SQRTP
31007523 12/2006
415
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates process square root
operation
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
DINT, UDINT
Source value (first of two contiguous
registers)
value (the value for which the square root
will be derived) is stored in these two
registers. In order to generate values that
have meaning, the source value must not
exceed 4095. In a 4xxxx register group the
source value will therefore be stored in the
implied register, and in a 3xxxx register
group the source value will be stored in the
displayed register.
DINT, UDINT
Linearized result (first of two contiguous
registers)
is entered in the middle node. The second
register is implied. The linearized result of
the process square root operation is
stored here.
The result is stored in the fixed-decimal
format: 1234.5600. where the displayed
register stores the four-digit value to the
left of the first decimal point and the
implied register stores the four-digit value
to the right of the first decimal point.
Numbers after the second decimal point
are truncated; no round-off calculations
are performed.
linearized result 4x
(middle node)
SQRTP
(bottom node)
416
Selection of the subfunction SQRPT
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON =source value out of range
31007523 12/2006
Source Value
(Top Node)
register is implied. The source value, i.e. the value for which the square root will be
derived, is stored here. In order to generate values that have meaning, the source
value must not exceed 4 095.
If you specify a 4x register:
Register
Content
Displayed
Not used
First implied
The source value will be stored here
If you specify a 3x register:
Linearized
Result
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
The source value will be stored here
First implied
Not used.
register is implied. The linearized result of the process square root operation is
stored here n the fixed-decimal format 1234.5600..
Register
Content
Displayed
This register stores the four-digit value to the left of the first decimal point.
First implied
This register stores the four-digit value to the right of the first decimal point.
Note: Numbers after the second decimal point are truncated; no round-off
calculations are performed.
31007523 12/2006
417
Example
Process Square
Root Function
This example gives a quick overview of how the process square root is calculated.
Instruction
300030
400030
EMTH
SQRTP
Suppose a source value of 2000 is stored in register 300030 of EMTH function
SQRTP.
First, a standard square root operation is performed:
2000 = 0044.72
Then this result is multiplied by 63.9922, yielding a linearized result of 2861.63:
0044.72 × 63.9922 = 2861.63
The linearized result is placed in the two registers in the middle node:
418
Register
Part of the result
400030
2861 (four-digit value to the left of the first decimal point)
400031
6300 (four-digit value to the right of the first decimal point)
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SUBDP:
Double Precision Subtraction
79
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SUBDP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
420
Representation: EMTH - SUBDP - Double Precision Math - Subtraction
421
423
419
Short Description
Function
Description
420
31007523 12/2006
Representation: EMTH - SUBDP - Double Precision Math - Subtraction
Symbol
SUBTRACTS MIDDLE
NODE FROM TOP NODE
TOP NODE > MIDDLE NODE
operand 1
TOP NODE = MIDDLE NODE
operand 2/
difference
EMTH
TOP NODE < MIDDLE NODE
SUBDP
31007523 12/2006
421
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = subtracts operand 2 from operand 1 and
posts difference in designated registers
operand 1
(top node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Operand 1 (first of two contiguous registers)
value in the range of 0 through 99,999,999. The
low-order half of operand 1 is stored in the
displayed register, and the high-order half is
stored in the implied register.
operand 2/
difference
(middle node)
4x
DINT,
UDINT
Operand 2 and difference (first of six contiguous
registers)
0 through 99,999,999
z The second and third implied registers store
the high-order and low-order halves,
respectively, of the absolute difference in
double precision format
z The value stored in the fourth implied register
indicates whether or not the operands are in
the valid range (1 = out of range and 0 = in
range)
z The fifth implied register is not used in this
SUBDP
(bottom node)
422
Selection of the subfunction SUBDP
Top output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 > operand 2
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 = operand 2
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = operand 1 < operand 2
31007523 12/2006
Operand 1
(Top Node)
Operand 2
and Product
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Displayed
range 0 ... 99 999 999
First implied
range 0 ... 99 999 999
Register
Content
Displayed
Register stores the low-order half of operand 2 for a combined
double precision value in the range 0 ... 99 999 999
First implied
Register stores the high-order half of operand 2 for a combined
double precision value in the range 0 ... 99 999 999
Second implied
This register stores the low-order half of the absolute difference in
Third implied
This register stores the high-order half of the absolute difference in
Fourth implied
0 = operands in range
1 = operands out of range
Fifth implied
This register is not used in the calculation but must exist in state
RAM.
423
424
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SUBFI: Floating Point Integer Subtraction
80
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SUBFI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
426
Representation
427
428
425
Short Description
Function
Description
426
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates floating point
integer operation
FP
integer and
difference
EMTH
SUBFI
Parameter
Description
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP - integer operation
FP
(top node)
4x
REAL
Floating point value (first of two contiguous registers)
the top node. The second register is implied. The FP
value from which the integer value is subtracted is
stored here.
integer and
difference
(middle
node)
4x
DINT, Integer value and difference (first of four contiguous
UDINT registers)
register store the double precision integer value to be
subtracted from the FP value, and the difference is
posted in the second and third implied registers. The
difference is posted in FP format.
SUBFI
(bottom
node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction SUBFI
0x
None
427
Floating Point
Value (Top Node)
Sine of Value
(Middle Node)
428
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The FP value from which the integer value is subtracted is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers store the double precision integer value to be subtracted
from the FP value.
Second implied
Third implied
The difference is posted here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SUBFP:
Floating Point Subtraction
81
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SUBFP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
430
Representation
431
432
429
Short Description
Function
Description
430
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enables floating point
subtraction
value 1
value 2
and
difference
EMTH
SUBFP
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates FP value 1 - value 2 subtraction
value 1
(top node)
4x
REAL
in the top node. The second register is implied. FP
value 1 (the value from which value 2 will be
subtracted) is stored here.
value 2 and
4x
difference
(middle node)
REAL
Floating point value 2 and the difference (first of four
implied. FP value 2 (the value to be subtracted from
value 1) is stored in the displayed register and the first
implied register. The difference of the subtraction is
stored in FP format in the second and third implied
registers.
SUBFP
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction SUBFP
0x
None
431
Floating
Point Value 1
(Top Node)
Floating
Point Value 2
(Top Node)
432
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 1 (the value from which value 2 will be subtracted) is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
FP value 2 (the value to be subtracted from value 1) is stored in
these registers
Second implied
Third implied
The difference of the subtraction is stored here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-SUBIF: Integer - Floating
Point Subtraction
82
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-SUBIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
434
Representation
435
436
433
Short Description
Function
Description
434
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
initiates integer floating point operation
integer
FP and
difference
EMTH
SUBIF
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates integer - FP operation
integer
(top node)
4x
DINT, Integer value (first of two contiguous registers)
UDIN The first of two contiguous 4xxxx registers is entered in
T
the top node. The second register is implied. The
double precision integer value from which the FP value
is subtracted is stored here.
FP and
4x
difference
(middle node)
REAL FP value and difference (first of four contiguous
registers)
register store the FP value to be subtracted from the
integer value, and the difference is posted in the second
and third implied registers. The difference is posted in
FP format.
SUBIF
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Selection of the subfunction SUBIF
0x
None
435
Integer Value
(Top Node)
FP Value and
Difference
(Middle Node)
436
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
The double precision integer value from which the FP value is
subtracted is stored here.
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Registers store the FP value to be subtracted from the integer value.
Second implied
Third implied
The difference is posted here in FP format.
31007523 12/2006
EMTH-TAN: Floating Point
Tangent of an Angle (in Radians)
83
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the EMTH subfunction EMTH-TAN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
438
Representation
439
440
437
Short Description
Function
Description
438
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
calculates the tangent of the
value
tangent of
value
EMTH
TAN
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = calculates the tangent of the value
value
(top node)
4x
REAL
FP value indicating the value of an angle in radians
in the top node. The second register is implied. A
value in FP format indicating the value of an angle in
radians is stored here.
The magnitude of this value must be < 65536.0; if
not:
z The tangent is not computed
tangent of value 4x
(middle node)
REAL
Tangent of the value in the top node (first of four
TAN
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
Selection of the subfunction TAN
0x
None
439
Value (Top Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
If the magnitude is ≥ 65 536.0:
The tangent is not computed
z
Tangent of Value
(Middle Node)
Register
Content
Displayed
First implied
Second implied
Third implied
The tangent of the value in the top node is posted here in FP format.
used.
440
31007523 12/2006
84
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ESI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
442
Representation
443
444
READ ASCII Message (Subfunction 1)
447
WRITE ASCII Message (Subfunction 2)
451
GET DATA (Subfunction 3)
452
PUT DATA (Subfunction 4)
454
ABORT (Middle Input ON)
458
Run Time Errors
459
441
Short Description
Function
Description
The instruction for the ESI module 140 ESI 062 10 are optional loadable instructions
that can be used in a Quantum controller system to support operations using an ESI
module. The controller can use the ESI instruction to invoke the module. The power
of the loadable is its ability to cause a sequence of commands over one or more logic
scans.
With the ESI instruction, the controller can invoke the ESI module to:
Read an ASCII message from a serial port on the ESI module, then perform a
sequence of GET DATA transfers from the module to the controller.
z Write an ASCII message to a serial port on the ESI module after having
performed a sequence of PUT DATA transfers to the variable data registers in the
module.
z Perform a sequence of GET DATA transfers (up to 16 384 registers of data from
the ESI module to the controller); one Get Data transfer will move up to 10 data
registers each time the instruction is solved.
z Perform a sequence of PUT DATA (up to 16 384 registers of data to the ESI
module from the controller). One PUT DATA transfer moves up to 10 registers of
data each time the instruction is solved.
z Abort the ESI loadable command sequence running.
z
Note: After placing the ESI instruction in your ladder diagram, you must enter the
top, middle, and bottom parameters. Proceed by double clicking on the instruction.
This action produces a form for the entry of the 3 parameters. This parametric must
be completed to enable the DX zoom function in the Edit menu pulldown.
442
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
subfunction #
(1 ... 4)
subfunction
parameters
ESI
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables the subfunction
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Abort current message
subfunction
(top node
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Number of possible subfunction, range 1
... 4
subfunction
parameters
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First of eighteen contiguous 4x holding
registers which contain the subfunction
parameters
INT, UINT
Number of subfunction parameter
registers, i.e. the length of the table in the
middle node
length
bottom node
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = operation done
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error detected
443
Top Input
When the input to the top node is powered ON, it enables the ESI instruction and
starts executing the command indicated by the subfunction code in the top node.
Middle Input
When the input to the middle node is powered ON, an Abort command is issued. If
a message is running when the ABORT command is received, the instruction will
complete; if a data transfer is in process when the ABORT command is received, the
transfer will stop and the instruction will complete.
Subfunction #
(Top Node)
The top node may contain either a 4x register or an integer. The integer or the value
in the register must be in the range 1 ... 4.
It represents one of four possible subfunction command sequences to be executed
by the instruction:
Subfunction
Command Sequence
1
One command (READ ASCII Message, p. 447) followed by multiple GET
DATA commands
2
Multiple PUT DATA commands followed by one command
(WRITE ASCII Message, p. 451)
3
Zero or more commands (GET DATA, p. 452)
4
Zero or more commands (PUT DATA, p. 454)
Note: A fifth command, (ABORT ASCII Message (see p. 458)), can be initiated by
enabling the middle input to the ESI instruction.
444
31007523 12/2006
Subfunction
Parameters
(Middle Node)
The first of eighteen contiguous 4x registers is entered in the middle node. The
ramaining seventeen registers are implied.
The following subfunction parameters are available:
Register
Parameter
Contents
Displayed
ESI status register
Returned error codes
First implied
Address of the first 4x register in
the command structure
Register address minus the leading 4 and any leading zeros, as
specified in the I/O Map (e.g., 1 represents register 400001)
Second
implied
Address of the first 3x register in
the command structure
Register address minus the leading 3 and any leading zeros, as
specified in the I/O Map (e.g., 7 represents register 300007)
Third implied
Address of the first 4x register in Register address minus the leading 4 and any leading zeros
the controller's data register area (e.g., 100 representing register 400100)
Fourth implied Address of the first 3x register in Register address minus the leading 3 and any leading zeros
the controller's data register area (e.g., 1000 representing register 301000)
Fifth implied
Starting register for data register
area in module
Number in the range 0 ... 3FFF hex
Sixth implied
Data transfer count
Number in the range 0 ... 4000 hex
Seventh
implied
ESI timeout value, in 100 ms
increments
Number in the range 0 ... FFFF hex, where 0 means no timeout
Eighth implied ASCII message number
Number in the range 1 ... 255 dec
Ninth implied
1 or 2
ASCII port number
Note: The registers below are internally used by the ESI loadable. Do not write registers while the ESI loadable is
running. For best use, initialize these registers to 0 (zero) when the loadable is inserted into logic.
10th implied
ESI loadable previous scan power in state
11th implied
Data left to transfer
12th implied
Current ASCII module command running
13th implied
ESI loadable sequence number
14th implied
ESI loadable flags
15th implied
ESI loadable timeout value (MSW)
16th implied
ESI loadable timeout value (LSW)
17th implied
Parameter Table Checksum generated by ESI loadable
Note: Once power has been applied to the top input, the ESI loadable starts
running. Until the ESI loadable compiles (successfully or in error), the subfunction
parameters should not be modified. If the ESI loadable detects a change, the
loadable will compile in error (Parameter Table).
31007523 12/2006
445
Length
(Bottom Node)
The bottom node contains the length of the table in the middle node, i.e., the number
of subfunction parameter registers. For READ/ WRITE operations, the length must
be 10 registers. For PUT/GET operations, the required length is eight registers; 10
may be specified and the last two registers will be unused.
Ouptuts
Note: NSUP must be loaded before ESI in order for the loadable to work properly.
If ESI is loaded before NSUP or ESI is loaded alone, all three outputs will be turned
ON.
Middle Output
The middle output goes ON for one scan when the subfunction operation specified
in the top node is completed, timed out, or aborted
Bottom Output
The bottom output goes ON for one scan if an error has been detected. Error
checking is the first thing that is performed on the instruction when it is enabled, it it
is completed before the subfunction is executed. For more details, see p. 459.
446
31007523 12/2006
READ ASCII Message (Subfunction 1)
READ ASCII
Message
A READ ASCII command causes the ESI module to read incoming data from one of
its serial ports and store the data in internal variable data registers. The serial port
number is specified in the tenth (ninth implied) register of the subfunction
parameters table. The ASCII message number to be read is specified in the ninth
(eighth implied) register of the subfunction parameters table. The received data is
stored in the 16K variable data space in user-programmed formats.
When the top node of the ESI instruction is 1, the controller invokes the module and
causes it to execute one READ ASCII command followed by a sequence of GET
DATA commands (transferring up to 16,384 registers of data) from the module to the
controller.
Command
Structure
Response
Structure
31007523 12/2006
Command Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
01PD
P = port number (1 or 2); D = data count
1
xxxx
Starting register number, in the range 0 ... 3FFF
2
00xx
Message number, where xx is in the range 1 ... FF (1 ... 255 dec)
3 ... 11
Not used
Command Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
01PD
Echoes command word 0
1
xxxx
Echoes starting register number from Command Word 1
2
00xx
Echoes message number from Command Word 2
3
xxxx
Data word 1
4
xxxx
Data word 2
...
...
...
11
xxxx
Module status or data word 9
447
A Comparative
READ ASCII
Message/Put
Data Example
Below is an example of how an ESI loadable instruction can simplify your logic
programming task in an ASCII read application. Assume that the 12-point
bidirectional ESI module has been I/O mapped to 400001 ... 400012 output registers
and 300001 ... 300012 input registers. We want to read ASCII message #10 from
port 1, then transfer four words of data to registers 400501 ... 400504 in the
controller.
Parameterizing of the ESI instruction:
#0001
401000
ESI
#0018
The subfunction parameter table begins at register 401000 . Enter the following
parameters in the table:
Register
Parameter Value
Description
401000
nnnn
ESI status register
401001
1
I/O mapped output starting register (400001)
401002
1
I/O mapped input starting register (300001)
401003
501
Starting register for the data transfer (400501)
401004
0
No 3x starting register for the data transfer
401005
100
Module start register
401006
4
Number of registers to transfer
401007
600
timeout = 60 s
401008
10
ASCII message number
401009
1
ASCII port number
401010-17
N/A
Internal loadable variables
With these parameters entered to the table, the ESI instruction will handle the read
and data transfers automatically in one scan.
448
31007523 12/2006
Read and Data
Transfers
without ESI
Instruction
The same task could be accomplished in ladder logic without the ESI loadable, but
it would require the following three networks to set up the command and transfer
parameters, then copy the data. Registers 400101 ... 400112 are used as
workspace for the output values. Registers 400201 ... 400212 are initial READ
ASCII Message command values. Registers 400501 ... 400504 are the data space
for the received data from the module.
First Network
000011
000011
000011
400201
400101
400101
400001
BLKM
#0012
BLKM
#0012
Contents of registers
Register
Value (hex)
Description
400201
0114
READ ASCII Message command, Port 1, Four registers
400202
0064
Module’s starting register
400203
nnnn
Not valid: data word 1
...
...
...
400212
nnnn
The first network starts up the READ ASCII Message command by turning ON coil
000011 forever. It moves the READ ASCII Message command into the workspace,
then moves the workspace to the output registers for the module.
Second Network
000011
31007523 12/2006
300001
400088
400098
400098
400098
400101
300002
BLKM
#0001
AND
#0001
TEST
#0001
400102
400099
TEST
#0001
#32768
300001
400089
400099
400099
BLKM
#0001
AND
#0001
TEST
#0001
000020
000012
449
Register
Value (hex)
Description
400098
nnnn
Workspace for response word
400099
nnnn
Workspace for response word
400088
7FFF
Response word mask
400089
8000
Status word valid bit mask
As long as coil 000011 is ON, READ ASCII Message response Word 0 in the input
register is tested to make sure it is the same as command Word 0 in the workspace.
This is done by ANDing response Word 0 in the input register with 7FFF hex to get
rid of the Status Word Valid bit (bit 15) in Response Word 0.
The module start register in the input register is also tested against the module start
register in the workspace to make sure that are the same.
If both these tests show matches, test the Status Word Valid bit in response Word
0. To do this, AND response Word 0 in the input register with 8000 hex to get rid of
the echoed command word 0 information. If the ANDed result equals the Status
Word Valid bit, coil 000020 is turned ON indicating an error and/or status in the
Module Status Word. If the ANDed result is not the status word valid bit, coil 000012
is turned ON indicating that the message is done and that you can start another
command in the module.
Third Network
300012
000020
#0001
000099
TEST
#0001
If coil 000020 is ON, this third network will test the Module Status Word for busy
status. If the module is busy, do nothing. If the Module Status Word is greater than
1 (busy), a detected error has been logged in the high byte and coil 000099 will be
turned ON. At this point, you need to determine what the error is using some errorhandling logic that you have developed.
450
31007523 12/2006
WRITE ASCII Message (Subfunction 2)
WRITE ASCII
Message
In a WRITE ASCII Message command, the ESI module writes an ASCII message to
one of its serial ports. The serial port number is specified in the tenth (ninth implied)
register of the subfunction parameters table. The ASCII message number to be
written is specified in the ninth (eighth implied) register of the subfunction
parameters table.
When the top node of the ESI instruction is 2, the controller invokes the module and
causes it to execute one Write ASCII command. Before starting the WRITE
command, subfunction 2 executes a sequence of PUT DATA transfers (transferring
up to 16 384 registers of data) from the controller to the module.
Command
Structure
Response
Structure
31007523 12/2006
Command Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
02PD
P = port number (1 or 2); D = data count
1
xxxx
2
00xx
Message number, where xx is in the range 1 ... FF (1 ... 255 dec)
3
xxxx
Data word 1
4
xxxx
Data word 2
...
...
...
11
xxxx
Data word 9
Response Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
02PD
1
xxxx
Echoes starting register number from command word 1
2
00xx
Echoes message number from command word 2
3
0000
Returns a zero
...
...
...
10
0000
Returns a zero
11
xxxx
Module status
451
GET DATA (Subfunction 3)
GET DATA
A GET DATA command transfers up to 10 registers of data from the ESI module to
the controller each time the ESI instruction is solved in ladder logic. The total number
of words to be read is specified in Word 0 of the GET DATA command structure (the
data count). The data is returned in increments of 10 in Words 2 ... 11 in the GET
DATA response structure.
If a sequence of GET DATA commands is being executed in conjunction with a
READ ASCII Message command (via subfunction 1), up to nine registers are
transferred when the instruction is solved the first time. Additional data are returned
in groups of ten registers on subsequent solves of the instruction until all the data
has been transferred
If there is an error condition to be reported (other than a command syntax error), it
is reported in Word 11 in the GET DATA response structure. If the command has
requested 10 registers and the error needs to be reported, only nine registers of data
will be returned in Words 2 ... 10, and Word 11 will be used for error status.
Note: If the data count and starting register number that you specify are valid but
some of the registers to be read are beyond the valid register range, only data from
the registers in the valid range will be read. The data count returned in Word 0 of
the response structure will reflect the number of valid data registers returned, and
an error code (1280 hex) will be returned in the Module Status Word (Word 11 in
the response table).
Command
Structure
452
Command Structure
Word
Content (hex) Meaning
0
030D
D = data count
1
xxxx
2 ... 11
Not used
31007523 12/2006
Response
Structure
31007523 12/2006
Response Structure
Word
Content (hex) Meaning
0
030D
1
xxxx
2
xxxx
Data word 1
3
xxxx
Data word 2
...
...
...
11
xxxx
Module status or data word 10
453
PUT DATA (Subfunction 4)
PUT DATA
A PUT DATA command writes up to 10 registers of data to the ESI module from the
controller each time the ESI instruction is solved in ladder logic. The total number of
words to be written is specified in Word 0 of the PUT DATA command structure (the
data count).
The data is returned in increments of 10 in words 2 ... 11 in the PUT DATA command
structure. The command is executed sequentially until command word 0 changes to
another command other than PUT DATA (040D hex).
Note: If the data count and starting register number that you specify are valid but
some of the registers to be written are beyond the valid register range, only data
from the registers in the valid range will be written. The data count returned in Word
0 of the response structure will reflect the number of valid data registers returned,
and an error code (1280 hex) will be returned in the Module Status Word (Word 11
in the response table).
Command
Structure
Response
Structure
454
Command Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
040D
D = data count
1
xxxx
2
xxxx
Data word 1
3
xxxx
Data word 2
...
...
...
11
xxxx
Data word 10
Response Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
040D
1
xxxx
2
0000
Returns a zero
...
...
...
10
0000
Returns a zero
11
xxxx
Module status
31007523 12/2006
A Comparative
PUT DATA
Example
Below is an example of how an ESI loadable instruction can simplify your logic
programming task in a PUT DATA application. Assume that the 12-point
bidirectional ESI 062 module has been I/O mapped to 400001 ... 400012 output
registers and 300001 ... 300012 input registers. We want to put 30 controller data
registers, starting at register 400501, to the ESI module starting at location 100.
Parameterizing of the ESI instruction:
#0004
401000
ESI
#0018
The subfunction parameter table begins at register 401000 . Enter the following
parameters in the table:
Register
Parameter Value
Description
401000
nnnn
ESI status register
401001
1
I/O mapped output starting register (400001)
401002
1
I/O mapped input starting register (300001)
401003
501
Starting register for the data transfer (400501)
401004
0
No 3x starting register for the data transfer
401005
100
Module start register
401006
30
Number of registers to transfer
401007
0
timeout = never
401008
N/A
ASCII message number
401009
N/A
ASCII port number
401009
N/A
Internal loadable variables
With these parameters entered to the table, the ESI instruction will handle the data
transfers automatically over three ESI logic solves.
Handling of Data
Transfer without
ESI Instruction
31007523 12/2006
The same task could be accomplished in ladder logic without the ESI loadable, but
it would require the following four networks to set up the command and transfer
parameters, then copy data multiple times until the operation is complete. Registers
400101 ... 400112 are used as workspace for the output values. Registers 400201
... 400212 are initial PUT DATA command values. Registers 400501 ... 400530 are
the data registers to be sent to the module.
455
First Network - Command Register Network
000011
000011
000011
400201
400501
400101
400101
400103
400001
BLKM
#0012
BLKM
#0010
BLKM
#0012
Register
Value (hex)
Description
400201
040A
PUT DATA command, 10 registers
400202
0064
Module’s starting register
400203
nnnn
...
...
...
400212
nnnn
The first network starts up the transfer of the first 10 registers by turning ON coil
000011 forever. It moves the initial PUT DATA command into the workspace, moves
the first 10 registers (400501 ... 400510) into the workspace, and then moves the
workspace to the output registers for the module.
Second Network - Command Register Network
000020
000020
300001
000011 000020
400101
300002
TEST
#0001
400102
400102
TEST
#0001
#0120
TEST
#0001
000012
As long as coil 000011 is ON and coil 000020 is OFF, PUT DATA response word 0
in the input register is tested to make sure it is the same as the command word in
the workspace. The module start register in the input register is also tested to make
sure it is the same as the module start register in the workspace.
456
31007523 12/2006
If both these tests show matches, the current module start register is tested against
what would be the module start register of the last PUT DATA command for this
transfer. If the test shows that the current module start register is greater than or
equal to the last PUT DATA command, coil 000020 goes ON indicating that the
transfer is done. If the test shows that the current module start register is less than
the last PUT DATA command, coil 000012 indicating that the next 10 registers
should be transferred.
Third Network - Command Register Network
000012
400102
400102
#0100
#0110
TEST
#0001
TEST
#0001
400511
400521
400103
400103
BLKM
#0010
BLKM
#0010
As long as coil 000012 is ON, there is more data to be transferred. The module start
register needs to be tested from the last command solve to determine which set of
10 registers to transfer next. For example, if the last command started with module
register 400110, then the module start register for this command is 400120.
Fourth Network - Command Register Network
400101
000012
#0010
400102
400001
BLKM
#0012
AD16
400102
As long as coil 000012 is ON, add 10 to the module start register value in the
workspace and move the workspace to the output registers for the module to start
the next transfer of 10 registers.
31007523 12/2006
457
ABORT (Middle Input ON)
ABORT
When the middle input to the ESI instruction is powered ON, the instruction aborts
a running ASCII READ or WRITE message. The serial port buffers of the module
are not affected by the ABORT, only the message that is currently running.
Command
Structure
Command Structure
Response
Structure
458
Word
Content (hex)
0
0900
1 ... 11
not used
Response Structure
Word
Content (hex)
Meaning
0
0900
1
0000
Returns a zero
...
...
...
10
0000
Returns a zero
11
xxxx
Module status
31007523 12/2006
Run Time Errors
Run Time Errors
The command sequence executed by the ESI module (specified by the subfunction
value in the top node of the ESI instruction) needs to go through a series of error
checking routines before the actual command execution begins. If an error is
detected, a message is posted in the register displayed in the middle node.
The following table lists possible error message codes and their meanings:
Error Code (dec) Meaning
0001
Unknown subfunction specified in the top node
0010
ESI instruction has timed out (exceeded the time specified in the eighth
register of the subfunction parameter table)
0101
Error in the READ ASCII Message sequence
0102
Error in the WRITE ASCII Message sequence
0103
Error in the GET DATA sequence
0104
Error in the PUT DATA sequence
1000
Length (Bottom Node) is too small
1001
Nonzero value in both the 4x and 3x data offset parameters
1002
Zero value in both the 4x and 3x data offset parameters
1003
4x or 3x data offset parameter out of range
1004
4x or 3x data offset plus transfer count out of range
1005
3x data offset parameter set for GET DATA
1006
Parameter Table Checksum error
1101
Output registers from the offset parameter out of range
1102
Input registers from the offset parameter out of range
2001
Error reported from the ESI module
Once the parameter error checking has completed without finding an error, the ESI
module begins to execute the command sequence.
31007523 12/2006
459
460
31007523 12/2006
EUCA: Engineering Unit
Conversion and Alarms
85
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instrcution EUCA.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
462
Representation
463
464
Examples
466
461
Short Description
Function
Description
The use of ladder logic to convert binary-expressed analog data into decimal units
can be memory-intensive and scan-time intensive operation. The Engineering Unit
Conversion and Alarms (EUCA) loadable is designed to eliminate the need for extra
user logic normally required for these conversions. EUCA scales 12 bits of binary
data (representing analog signals or other variables) into engineering units that are
readily usable for display, data logging, or alarm generation.
Using Y = mX + b linear conversion, binary values between 0 ... 4095 are converted
to a scaled process variable (SPV). The SPV is expressed in engineering units in
the range 0 ... 9 999.
One EUCA instruction can perform up to four separate engineering unit conversions.
It also provides four levels of alarm checking on each of the four conversions:
462
Level
Meaning
HA
High absolute
HW
High warning
LW
Low warning
LA
Low absolute
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
alarm status
alarm in
alarm
parameter
table
error in
error
EUCA
nibble #
(1 ... 4)
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates the conversion
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Alarm input
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Error input
alarm status
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
Alarm status for as many as four EUCA conversions
(For more information please see p. 464.)
parameter table 4x
(middle node)
INT,
UINT,
First of nine contiguous holding registers in the
EUCA parameter table
(For more information please see p. 465.)
nibble # (1...4)
(bottom node)
INT,
UINT
Integer value, indicates which one of the four nibbles
in the alarm status register to use
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON if the middle input is ON or if the result of the
EUCA conversion crosses a warning level
Bottom output
0x
None
ON if the bottom input is ON or if a parameter is out
of range
463
Alarm Status
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node displays the alarm status for as many as four
EUCA conversions, which can be performed by the instruction. The register is
segmented into four four-bit nibbles. Each four-bit nibble represents the four
possible alarm conditions for an individual EUCA conversion.
The most significant nibble represents the first conversion, and the least significant
nibble represents the fourth conversion:
HA1 HW1 LW1 LA1 HA2 HW2 LW2 LA2 HA3 HW3 LW3 LA3 HA4 HW4 LW4 LA4
Nibble 1
(first conversion)
Alarm Setting
Nibble 2
(second conversion)
Nibble 3
(third conversion)
Nibble 4
(fourth conversion)
Condition of alarm setting
Alarm type
Condition
HA
An HA alarm is set when the SPV exceeds the user-defined high alarm value
expressed in engineering units
HW
An HW alarm is set when SPV exceeds a user-defined high warning value
LW
An LW alarm is set when SPV is less than a user-defined low warning value
LA
An LA alarm is set when SPV is less than a user-defined low alarm value
Only one alarm condition can exist in any EUCA conversion at any given time. If the
SPV exceeds the high warning level the HW bit will be set. If the HA is exceeded,
the HW bit is cleared and the HA bit is set. The alarm bit will not change after
returning to a less severe condition until the deadband (DB) area has also been
exited.
464
31007523 12/2006
Parameter Table
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first of nine contiguous holding
registers in the EUCA parameter table:
Register
Content
Range
Displayed
Binary value input by the user
0 ... 4 095
First implied
SPV calculated by the EUCA block
Second implied
High engineering unit (HEU), maximum SPV
required and set by the user (top of the scale)
LEU < HEU ≤ 99 999
Third implied
Low engineering unit (LEU), minimum SPV
required and set by the user (bottom end of the
scale)
0 ≤ LEU < HEU
Fourth implied
DB area in SPV units, below HA levels and above
LA levels that must be crossed before the alarm
status bit will reset
0 ≤ DB < (HEU - LEU)
Fifth implied
HA alarm value in SPV units
HW < HA ≤ HEU
Sixth implied
HW alarm value in SPV units
LW < HW < HA
Seventh implied LW alarm value in SPV units
LA < LW < HW
Eighth implied
LEU ≤ LA < LW
LA alarm value in SPV units
Note: An error is generated if any value is out of the range defined above
31007523 12/2006
465
Examples
Overview
The following examples are shown.
Principles of EUCA Operation (example 1)
z Use in a Drive System (example 2)
z Four EUCA conversions together (example 3)
z
Example 1
This example demonstrates the principles of EUCA operation. The binary value is
manually input in the displayed register in the middle node, and the result is visually
available in the SPV register (the first implied register in the middle node).
The illustration below shows an input range equivalent of a 0 ... 100 V measure,
corresponding to the whole binary 12-bit range:
MSB
LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
100V
90
= 4095 or FFF hex
(Displayed register in
the middle node)
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0V
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
= 0 or 000 hex
unused
A range of 0 ... 100 V establishes 50 V for nominal operation. EUCA provides a
margin on the nominal side of both warning and alarm levels (deadband). If an alarm
threshold is exceeded, the alarm bit becomes active and stays active until the signal
becomes greater (or less) than the DB setting -5 V in this example.
Programming the EUCA block is accomplished by selecting the EUCA loadable and
writing in the data as illustrated in the figure below:
400440
400450
EUCA
# 0001
466
31007523 12/2006
Reference Data
Register
Meaning
Content
400440
STATUS
0000000000000000
400450
INPUT
1871 DEC
400451
SPV
46 DEC
400452
HIGH_unit
100 DEC
400453
LOW_unit
0 DEC
400454
Dead_band
5 DEC
400455
HIGH_ALARM
70 DEC
400456
HIGH_WARN
60 DEC
400457
LOW_ALARM
40 DEC
400458
LOW_WARN
30 DEC
The nine middle-node registers are set using the reference data editor. DB is 5 V
followed by 10 V increments of high and low warning. The actual high and low alarm
is set at 20 V above and below nominal.
On a graph, the example looks like this:
100V
90
80
High Alarm
70
High Warning
60
50
46
*
Normal
40
Low Warning
30
Low Alarm
20
= Dead Band
10
0V
Note: The example value shows a decimal 46, which is in the normal range. No
alarm is set, i.e., register 400440 = 0.
You can now verify the instruction in a running PLC by entering values in register
400450 that fall into the defined ranges. The verification is done by observing the bit
change in register 400440 where:
1 = Low alarm
1 = Low warning
1 = High warning
1 = High alarm
31007523 12/2006
467
Example 2
If the input of 0 ... 4095 indicates the speed of a drive system of 0 ... 5000 rpm, you
could set up a EUCA instruction as follows.
The binary value in 400210 results in an SPV of 4835 decimal, which exceeds the
high absolute alarm level, sets the HA bit in 400209, and powers the EUCA alarm
node.
Parameter
Speed
Maximum Speed
5 000 rpm
Minimum Speed
0 rpm
DB
100 rpm
HA Alarm
4 800 rpm
HW Alarm
4 450 rpm
LW Alarm
2 000 rpm
LA Alarm
1 200 rpm
Instruction
400209
400210
EUCA
# 0001
Reference Data
468
Register
Meaning
Content
400209
STATUS
1000000000000000
400210
INPUT
3960 DEC
400211
SPV
4835 DEC
400212
MAX_SPEED
5000 DEC
400213
MIN_SPEED
0 DEC
400214
Dead_band
100 DEC
400215
HIGH_ALARM
4800 DEC
400216
HIGH_WARN
4450 DEC
400217
LOW_ALARM
2000 DEC
400218
LOW_WARN
1200 DEC
31007523 12/2006
The N.O. contact is used to suppress alarm checks when the drive system is
shutdown, or during initial start up allowing the system to get above the Low alarm
RPM level.
5000 rqm
4950
*
4900
*
*
4850
4800
4750
*
4700
4650
4600
*
4550
High Warning
4500
*
400209 = 4000 hex
4450
4400
*
4350
4300
*
4250
4200
*
High Absolute
400209 = 8000 hex
*
*
*
*
*
Warning - DB
400209 = 4000 hex
*
*
*
Return to normal
400209 = 0000 hex
*
0
Varying the binary value in register 400210 would cause the bits in nibble 1 of
register 400209 to correspond with the changes illustrated above. The DB becomes
effective when the alarm or warning has been set, then the signal falls into the DB
zone.
The alarm is maintained, thus taking what would be a switch chatter condition out of
a marginal signal level. This point is exemplified in the chart above, where after
setting the HA alarm and returning to the warning level at 4700 the signal crosses in
and out of DB at the warning level (4450) but the warning bit in 400209 stays ON.
The same action would be seen if the signal were generated through the low
settings.
31007523 12/2006
469
Example 3
You can chain up to four EUCA conversions together to make one alarm status
register. Each conversion writes to the nibble defined in the block bottom node. In
the program example below, each EUCA block writes it‘s status (based on the table
values for that block) into a four bit (nibble) of the status register 400209.
400209
400209
400209
400209
400210
400220
400230
400240
000023
EUCA
EUCA
EUCA
EUCA
# 0001
# 0002
# 0003
# 0004
400209
000002
000003
000004
000023
000033
BLKM
#1
Reference Data
Register
Meaning
Content
400209
STATUS
0000001001001000
The status register can then be transferred using a BLKM instruction to a group of
discretes wired to illuminate lamps in an alarm enunciator panel.
As you observe the status content of register 400209 you see: no alarm in block 1,
an LW alarm in block 2, an HW alarm in Block 3, and an HA alarm in block 4.
The alarm conditions for the four blocks can be represented with the following table
settings:
Conversion 1
470
Conversion 2
Conversion 3
Conversion 4
Input
400210 = 2048
400220 = 1220
400230 = 3022
400240 = 3920
Scaled #
400211 = 2501
400221 = 1124
400231 = 7379
400241 = 0770
HEU
400212 = 5000
400222 = 3300
400232 = 9999
400242 = 0800
LEU
400213 = 0000
400223 = 0200
400233 = 0000
400243 = 0100
DB
400214 = 0015
400224 = 0022
400234 = 0100
400244 = 0006
Hi Alarm
400215 = 40000
400225 = 2900
400235 = 8090
400245 = 0768
Hi Warn
400216 = 3500
400226 = 2300
400236 = 7100
400246 = 0680
Lo Warn
400217 = 2000
400227 = 1200
400237 = 3200
400247 = 0280
Lo Alarm
400218 = 1200
400228 = 0430
400238 = 0992
400248 = 0230
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Descriptions (F to N)
IV
At a Glance
Introduction
In this part instruction descriptions are arranged alphabetically from F to N.
What's in this
Part?
31007523 12/2006
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
86
FIN: First In
473
87
FOUT: First Out
477
88
FTOI: Floating Point to Integer
483
89
GD92 - Gas Flow Function Block
487
90
GFNX AGA#3 ‘85 and NX19 ‘68 Gas Flow Function Block
499
91
GG92 AGA #3 1992 Gross Method Gas Flow Function Block
513
92
GM92 AGA #3 and #8 1992 Detail Method Gas Flow Function Block
525
93
G392 AGA #3 1992 Gas Flow Function Block
537
94
HLTH: History and Status Matrices
549
95
HSBY - Hot Standby
563
96
IBKR: Indirect Block Read
569
97
IBKW: Indirect Block Write
573
98
ICMP: Input Compare
577
99
ID: Interrupt Disable
583
100
IE: Interrupt Enable
587
101
IMIO: Immediate I/O
591
102
IMOD: Interrupt Module Instruction
597
103
INDX – Immediate Incremental Move
605
104
ITMR: Interrupt Timer
609
105
ITOF: Integer to Floating Point
615
106
JOGS – JOG Move
619
471
Instruction Descriptions (F to N)
Chapter
472
Chapter Name
Page
107
JSR: Jump to Subroutine
623
108
LAB: Label for a Subroutine
627
109
LOAD: Load Flash
631
110
MAP3: MAP Transaction
635
111
MATH - Integer Operations
643
112
MBIT: Modify Bit
651
113
MBUS: MBUS Transaction
655
114
MMFB – Modicon Motion Framework Bits Block
665
115
MMFE – Modicon Motion Framework Extended Parameters Subroutine
669
116
MMFI – Modicon Motion Framework Initialize Block
673
117
MMFS – Modicon Motion Framework Subroutine Block
679
118
MOVE – Absolute Move
683
119
MRTM: Multi-Register Transfer Module
687
120
MSPX (Seriplex)
693
121
MSTR: Master
697
122
MU16: Multiply 16 Bit
743
123
MUL: Multiply
747
124
NBIT: Bit Control
751
125
NCBT: Normally Closed Bit
755
126
NOBT: Normally Open Bit
759
127
NOL: Network Option Module for Lonworks
763
31007523 12/2006
FIN: First In
86
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction FIN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
474
Representatio
475
476
473
FIN: First In
Short Description
Function
Description
474
The FIN instruction is used to produce a first-in queue. A FOUT instruction needs to
be used to clear the register at the bottom of the queue. An FIN instruction has one
control input and can produce three possible outputs.
31007523 12/2006
FIN: First In
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source data
queue is full
queue pointer
queue is empty
FIN
length: 1 - 100
Parameter
Description
queue length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = copies source bit pattern into queue
source data
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
ANY_BIT
Source data, will be copied to the top of the
destination queue in the current logic scan
queue pointer
(middle node)
4x
WORD
First of a queue of 4x registers, contains
queue pointer; the next contiguous
register is the first register in the queue
INT, UINT
Number of 4x registers in the destination
queue. Range: 1 ... 100
queue length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = queue full, no more source data can
be copied to the queue
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = queue empty (value in queue pointer
register = 0)
475
FIN: First In
Mode of
Functioning
The FIN instruction is used to produce a first-in queue. It copies the source data from
the top node to the first register in a queue of holding registers. The source data is
always copied to the register at the top of the queue. When a queue has been filled,
no further source data can be copied to it.
FIN
1111
Source
Queue
Source Data
(Top Node)
Queue Pointer
(Middle Node)
FIN
FIN
1111
2222
Source
2222
1111
Queue
3333
Source
3333
2222
1111
Queue
When using register types 0x or 1x:
First 0x reference in a string of 16 contiguous coils or discrete outputs
z First 1x reference in a string of 16 discrete inputs
z
The 4x register entered in the middle node is a queue pointer. The first register in
the queue is the next contiguous 4x register following the pointer. For example, if the
middle node displays a a pointer reference of 400100, then the first register in the
queue is 400101.
The value posted in the queue pointer equals the number of registers in the queue
that are currently filled with source data. The value of the pointer cannot exceed the
integer maximum queue length value specified in the bottom node.
If the value in the queue pointer equals the integer specified in the bottom node, the
middle output passes power and no further source data can be written to the queue
until an FOUT instruction clears the register at the bottom of the queue.
476
31007523 12/2006
FOUT: First Out
87
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction FOUT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
478
Representation
479
481
477
FOUT: First Out
Short Description
Function
Description
The FOUT instruction works together with the FIN instruction to produce a first infirst out (FIFO) queue. It moves the bit pattern of the holding register at the bottom
of a full queue to a destination register or to word that stores 16 discrete outputs.
An FOUT instruction has one control input and can produce three possible outputs.
DANGER
DISABLED COILS
Before using the FOUT instruction, check for disabled coils. FOUT will override any
disabled coils within a destination register without enabling them. This can cause
can change as a result of the FOUT operation.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
478
31007523 12/2006
FOUT: First Out
Representation
Symbol
control input
source: Single 16-bit location
active
source pointer
queue is full
destination
register
queue is empty
FOUT
queue length
31007523 12/2006
479
FOUT: First Out
Parameter
Description
480
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = clears source bit pattern from the queue
source pointer 4x
(top node)
WORD
First of a queue of 4x registers, contains
source pointer; the next contiguous register is
the first register in the queue
In the FOUT instruction, the source data
comes from the 4xxxx register at the bottom of
a full queue. The next contiguous 4xxxx
register following the source pointer register in
the top node is the first register in the queue.
For example, if the top node displays pointer
register 40100, then the first register in the
queue is 40101.
The value posted in the source pointer equals
the number of registers in the queue that are
currently filled. The value of the pointer cannot
exceed the integer maximum queue length
value specified in the bottom node. If the value
in the source pointer equals the integer
specified in the bottom node, the middle output
passes power and no further FIN data can be
written to the queue until the FOUT instruction
clears the register at the bottom of the queue
to the destination register.
destination
0x, 4x
register
(middle node)
ANY_BIT
Destination register
The destination specified in the middle node
can be a 0xxxx reference or 4xxxx register.
When the queue has data and the top control
input to the FOUT passes power, the source
data is cleared from the bottom register in the
queue and is written to the destination register.
queue length
(bottom node)
INT, UINT
Number of 4x registers in the queue. Range: 1
... 100
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = queue full, no more source data can be
copied to the queue
Bottom output 0x
None
ON = queue empty (value in queue pointer re
31007523 12/2006
FOUT: First Out
Mode of
Functioning
The FOUT instruction works together with the FIN instruction to produce a first infirst out (FIFO) queue. It moves the bit pattern of the holding register at the bottom
of a full queue to a destination register or to word that stores 16 discrete outputs.
FIN
3333
Source
FIN
3333
2222
1111
Queue
3333
2222 FOUT
1111
1111
Queue
Destination
4444
Source
4444
3333
2222
Queue
Note: The FOUT instruction should be placed before the FIN instruction in the
ladder logic FIFO to ensure removal of the oldest data from a full queue before the
newest data is entered. If the FIN block were to appear first, any attempts to enter
the new data into a full queue would be ignored.
Source Pointer
(Top Node)
In the FOUT instruction, the source data comes from the 4x register at the bottom of
a full queue. The next contiguous 4x register following the source pointer register in
the top node is the first register in the queue. For example, if the top node displays
pointer register 400100, then the first register in the queue is 400101.
The value posted in the source pointer equals the number of registers in the queue
that are currently filled. The value of the pointer cannot exceed the integer maximum
queue length value specified in the bottom node. If the value in the source pointer
equals the integer specified in the bottom node, the middle output passes power and
no further FIN data can be written to the queue until the FOUT instruction clears the
register at the bottom of the queue to the destination register.
Destination
Register
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
The destination specified in the middle node can be a 0x reference or 4x register.
When the queue has data and the top input to the FOUT passes power, the source
data is cleared from the bottom register in the queue and is written to the destination
register.
481
FOUT: First Out
482
31007523 12/2006
88
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction FTOI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
484
Representation
485
483
Short Description
Function
Description
484
The FTOI instruction performs the conversion of a floating value to a signed or
unsigned integer (stored in two contiguous registers in the top node), then stores the
converted integer value in a 4x register in the middle node.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
FP
overflow
unsigned > 65535
signed > 32767 or < -32768
converted
integer
signed
FTOI
1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables conversion
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
FP (top node)
4x
REAL
First of two contiguous holding registers
where the floating point value is stored
converted integer
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Converted integer value is posted here
INT, UINT
A constant value of 1 (can not be changed)
1
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
Top output
0x
None
ON = integer conversion completed
successfully
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = converted integer value is out of range:
unsigned integer > 65 535
-32 768 > signed integer > 32 767
485
486
31007523 12/2006
GD92 - Gas Flow Function Block
89
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction GD92 AGA #3 and AGA #8 1992 detail
method.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
Short Description
31007523 12/2006
Page
488
Representation
489
Parameter Description - Inputs
491
Parameter Description - Outputs
497
Parameter Description - Optional Outputs
498
487
GD92 Gas Flow Function Block
Short Description
Function
Description
The gas flow loadable function block allows you to run AGA 3 (1992) and AGA 8
(1992) equations. The computed flow rates agree within 1 ppm of the published AGA
standards.
The GD92 instruction uses the detail method of characterization requiring detailed
knowledge of the gas composition.
The GD92 gas flow loadable function block is available only on certain Compact and
Micro controllers.
Note: GD92 does not support API 21.1 audit trail. GD92 only supports a single
meter run.
Note: You must install the LSUP loadable before the GD92.
More Information
For detailed information about the gas flow function block loadables, especially the:
system warning/error codes (4x+0) for each instruction
z program warning/error codes (4x+1) for each instruction
z API 21.1 Audit Trail
z GET_LOGS.EXE utility
z SET_SIZE.EXE utility
z
please see the Modicon Starling Associates Gas Flow Loadable Function Block
User Guide (890 USE 137).
488
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start operation
operation is active
constant
#0001
user defined warning
system or program warning
register
user defined error
system or program error
GD92
constant
#0003
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = solving
This input starts the calculation of the gas flow.
The calculations are based on your parameters
entered into the input registers.
Important: Never detach the top input while the block
is running. You will generate an error 188 and the data
in this block could be corrupted.
Important: You MUST fill in all pertinent values in the
configuration table.
(For information about entering values, see p. 491.)
Middle input 0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set a warning.
Allows you to capture any user-defined warnings or
errors as needed in your applications.
(For information about entering values,
see p. 491.)
489
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Bottom input 0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set an error and STOP the flow function.
Allows you to capture any user-defined warnings or
errors as needed in your applications.
see p. 491.)
constant
#0001
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The top node must contain a constant, #0001.
register
(middle
node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in
a group of contiguous holding registers that comprise
the configuration parameters and values associated
with the Gas Flow Block.
Important: Do not attempt to change the middle node
4x register while the Gas Flow Block is running. You will
lose your data and generate an error 302. If you need
to change the 4x register, first STOP the PLC.
INT,
UINT
The bottom node specifies the calculation type and
must contain a constant, #0003.
#0003
(bottom
node)
490
Top output
0x
None
ON = Operation successful
Middle
output
0x
None
ON = System or program warning
Bottom
output
0x
None
ON = System or program error
31007523 12/2006
Configuration
Table
You must fill in all pertinent values in the configuration table using the reference data
editor either in ProWORX or Concept, or the DX Zoom screens in Modsoft, or Meter
Manager. The following inputs table lists all the configuration parameters that you
must be fill in.
The outputs (Outputs Results Table) and the optional outputs (Optional Outputs
Results Table) show the calculation results of the block. Some of those parameters
are required.
Note: Only valid entries are allowed. Entries outside the valid ranges are not
accepted. Illegal entries result in errors or warnings.
Note: Concept 2.1 or higher may be used to load the gas blocks. However,
Concept and ProWORX do not provide help or DX zoom screens for configuration.
When using Concept or ProWORX panel software, we recommend you use Meter
Manager for your configuration needs.
Inputs
31007523 12/2006
The following is a detailed description of configuration variables for the GD92 gas
flow function block.
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+3: 1 through 2
Location of Taps
1 - Upstream
2 - Downstream
Meter Tube Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Orfice Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Reserved for Future Use (Do not use)
Optional Outputs
1 - Yes
2 - No
Note: When using only the standard outputs, the loadable uses 157
4xxxx registers. When using the optional outputs, the loadable uses
181 4xxxx registers.
491
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+3: 11 through 16 Reserved for Future Use (Do not use)
4xxxx+4: 1
Absolute/Gauge Pressure
0 - Static Pressure Measured in Absolute Units
1 - Static Pressure Measured in Gauge Units
4xxxx+4: 2
Low Flow Cut Off
0 - Do Not Use Flow Cut Off
1 - Use Flow Cut Off
Load Command
0 - Ready to Accept Command
1 - CMD: Send Configuration to Internal Table from 4xxxx
2 - CMD: Read Configuration from Internal Table to 4xxxx
3 - CMD: Reset API 21.1 configuration change log
Input Type
1 - 3xxxx Pointers entered in 4x+6 ... 4x+10
2 - Input Values entered in 4x+6 ... 4x+10
Mole % Error Limits
1 - Enable
2 - Disable
4xxxx+4: 11 through 12 Dual Range Differential Pressure Option
1 - Yes
2 - No
4xxxx+4: 13 through 14 Compressible/Incompressible
1 - Compressible
2 - Incompressible
4xxxx+4: 15 through 16 Averaging Methods
0 - Flow Dependent Time Weighted Linear
1 - Flow Dependent Time Weighted Formulaic
2 - Flow Weighted Linear
3 - Flow Weighted Formulaic
Note: For most applications you will use 0.
492
Measurement Units
1 - US
2 - Metric (SI)
4xxxx+6
Temperature 3xxxx Pointer or Input Value
Data type: Unsigned integer value
4xxxx+7
Pressure (absolute) 3xxxx Pointer or Input Value
4xxxx+8
Differential Pressure 1 3xxxx Pointer or Input Value
4xxxx+9
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+10
Analog Input Raw Value Minimum Temperature
4xxxx+11
Analog Input Raw Value Maximum Temperature
4xxxx+12
Analog Input Raw Value Minimum Pressure
Data type: Signed integer value
4xxxx+13
Analog Input Raw Value Maximum Pressure
4xxxx+14
Analog Input Raw Value Minimum Differential Pressure 1
4xxxx+15
Analog Input Raw Value Maximum Differential Pressure 1
4xxxx+16
4xxxx+17
4xxxx+18 through 19
Engineering Unit Temperature Minimum
-200 through 760°F (-128.89 through 404.4°C)
Data type: Floating point number
4xxxx+20 through 21
Engineering Unit Temperature Maximum
4xxxx+22 through 23
Engineering Unit Pressure Minimum
0 through 40,000psia (0 through 275,790.28kPa)
4xxxx+24 through 25
Engineering Unit Pressure Maximum
4xxxx+26 through 27
Engineering Unit Differential Pressure 1 Minimum
>= 0 (inches H2O or kPa)
4xxxx+28 through 29
Engineering Unit Differential Pressure 1 Maximum
> 0 (inches H2O or kPa)
4xxxx+30 through 31
4xxxx+32 through 33
493
494
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+34 through 35
Orifice Plate Diameter, dr
(0 < dr < 100in) (0 < dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+36 through 37
Orifice Plate Diameter Measurement Temperature, Tr
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+38 through 39
Meter Tube Internal Diameter Dr
(0 <Dr <100in) (0 < Dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+40 through 41
Measured Meter Tube Internal Diameter Temperature Tr
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+42 through 43
Base Temperature, Tb
(32.0 <= Tb < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tb < 25°C)
4xxxx+44 through 45
Base Pressure, Pb
(13.0 <= Pb < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pb < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+46 through 47
Reference Temperature for Relative Density, Tgr
(32.0 <= Tgr < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tgr < 25°C)
4xxxx+48 through 49
Reference Pressure for Relative Density, Pgr
(13.0 <= Pgr < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pgr < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+50 through 57
4xxxx+58 through 59
User Input Correction Factor, Fu
(0 < Fu < 2.0)
4xxxx+60 through 61
Absolute Viscosity of Flowing Fluid, μc
(0.005 <= μc <= 0.5 centipoise)
4xxxx+62 through 63
Isentropic Exponent, k
(1.0 <= k < 2.0)
4xxxx+64
Beginning of Day Hour
(0 ... 23)
4xxxx+65 through 78
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+79 through 80
Atmospheric Pressure Pat
(3 <= Pat <30psi) (20.684 <= Pat < 206.843kPa)
4xxxx+81 through 82
Low Flow Cut Off Level
(>= 0ft3/Hr) (>= 0m3/Hr)
Used if enabled in 4x+4: 2.
4xxxx+83 through 84
Mole % of Methane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+85 through 86
Mole % of Nitrogen, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+87 through 88
Mole % of Carbon Dioxide, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+89 through 90
Mole % of Ethane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
xxx+91 through 92
Mole % of Propane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 12)
4xxxx+93 through 94
Mole % of Water, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 10)
4xxxx+95 through 96
Mole % of Hydrogen Sulfide, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+97 through 98
Mole % of Hydrogen, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+99 through 100
Mole % of Carbon Monoxide, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 3)
4xxxx+101 through 102 Mole % of Oxygen, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 21)
31007523 12/2006
495
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+103 through 104 Mole % of I-Butane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 6) for combined butanes
4xxxx+105 through 106 Mole % of n-Butane, xi
4xxxx+107 through 108 Mole % of I-Pentane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 4) for combined pentanes
4xxxx+109 through 110 Mole % of n-Pentane, xi
4xxxx+111 through 112 Mole % of Hexane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 10) for combined hexanes +
4xxxx+113 through 114 Mole % of Heptane, xi
4xxxx+115 through 116 Mole % of Octane, xi
4xxxx+117 through 118 Mole % of Nonane, xi
4xxxx+119 through 120 Mole % of Decane, xi
4xxxx+121 through 122 Mole % of Helium, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 30)
4xxxx+123 through 124 Mole % of Argon, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
*Valid range
496
31007523 12/2006
Outputs Results
Table
The outputs show the calculation results of the block.
Outputs
Description
4xxxx+0
System Warning/Error Code (Displayed in Hex mode)
4xxxx+1
Program Warning/Error Code
4xxxx+2
Version Number (Displayed in Hex mode)
Temperature at Flowing Conditions (Tf) (F or C)
Pressure (Pf) (psia or kPa)
Differential Pressure (hw) (in H2O or kPa
Integral Value (IV)
Integral Multiplier Value (IMV)
Volume Flow Rate at Base Conditions (Tb, Pb), Qb
(ft3/hr or m3/hr)
Mass Flow Rate (Qm) (lbm/hr or Kg/hr)
Accumulated Volume Current Day
Accumulated Volume Last Hour
Accumulated Volume Last Day
Average Temperature Last Day
Average Pressure Last Day
Average Differential Pressure Last Day
Average IV Last Day
Average Volume Flow Rate at Base Conditions (Tb, Pb) for the
4xxxx+155: 13
4xxxx Table Differs from Actual Configuration
Last Day
31007523 12/2006
4xxxx+155: 14
Flow Rate Solve Complete Heartbeat
4xxxx+155: 15
Block is Functioning Heartbeat
4xxxx+155: 16
End of Day Flag
497
Optional Outputs
Configuration
Table
498
The optional outputs show the calculation results of the block. These are only active
if 4x+3: 9 ... 10 is 1.
Optional Outputs
Description
Compressibility at Flowing Conditions (Tf, Pf), Zf
Compressibility at Base Conditions (Tb, Pb), Zb
Compressibility at Standard Conditions (Ts, Ps), Zs
Density at Fluid Flowing Conditions (Pt,p)
Density of Fluid at Base Conditions (ρ)
Supercompressibility (Fpv)
Gas Relative Density (Gr)
Orifice Plate Coefficient of Discharge (Cd)
Expansion Factor (Y)
Velocity of Approach Factor (Ev)
Volume Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions (Tf, Pf), Qf
4xxxx+180
Orifice Plate Coefficient of Discharge Bounds Flag within
Iteration Scheme (Cd-f)
31007523 12/2006
GFNX AGA#3 ‘85 and NX19 ‘68
Gas Flow Function Block
90
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction GFNX AGA#3 ‘85 and NX19 ‘68.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
500
Representation
501
503
510
511
499
GFNX Gas Flow Function Block
Short Description
Function
Description
The GFNX AGA #3 ‘85 and NX19 API 21.1 gas flow loadable function block is
available only on certain Compact and Micro controllers.
standards.
The GFNX instruction uses the detail method of characterization requiring detailed
Note: You must install the LSUP loadable before the GFNX.
More Information
z
500
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start operation
operation is active
constant
#0001
register
user defined error
GFNX
method
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = solving
This input starts the calculation of the gas
flow.
The calculations are based on your
parameters entered into the input registers.
Important: Never detach the top input
while the block is running. You will generate
an error 188 and the data in this block could
be corrupted.
Important: You MUST fill in all pertinent
values in the configuration table.
see p. 503.)
501
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set a warning and log
peripheral activities in the audit trail even
log without stopping the block.
see p. 503.)
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set an error and STOP the
flow function.
Allows you to set an error, log peripheral
errors in the audit trail event log, and STOP
the flow function.
see p. 503.)
constant #0001
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
The top node must contain a constant,
#0001.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
The 4x register entered in the middle node
is the first in a group of contiguous holding
registers that comprise the configuration
parameters and values associated with the
Gas Flow Block.
Important: Do not attempt to change the
middle node 4x register while the Gas Flow
Block is running. You will lose your data
and generate an error 302. If you need to
change the 4x register, first STOP the PLC.
INT, UINT
The bottom node specifies the calculation
type and must contain a constant.
Important: Use only valid entries. Other
entries deny access to the block’s DX zoom
screens.
method
(bottom node)
502
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Configuration
Table
must fill in.
are required.
Inputs
31007523 12/2006
The following is a detailed description of configuration variables for the GFNX gas
Inputs
Description
Location of Taps
1 - Upstream
2 - Downstream
Meter Tube Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Orfice Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Optional Outputs
1 - Yes
2 - No
503
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+3: 11 through 16 Reserved for Future Use (Do not use)
4xxxx+4: 1
4xxxx+4: 2
Low Flow Cut Off
Load Command
Input Type
Mole % Error Limits
1 - Enable
2 - Disable
4xxxx+4: 11 through 12 Dual Range Differential Pressure Option
1 - Yes
2 - No
4xxxx+4: 13 through 14 Compressible/Incompressible
1 - Compressible
2 - Incompressible
4xxxx+4: 15 through 16 Averaging Methods
Measurement Units
1 - US
2 - Metric (SI)
4xxxx+5: 15 through 16 Reserved for API 21.1
504
4xxxx+6
4xxxx+7
4xxxx+8
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+9
4xxxx+10
4xxxx+11
4xxxx+12
4xxxx+13
4xxxx+14
4xxxx+15
4xxxx+16
4xxxx+17
4xxxx+18 through 19
-40 through 240°F (-40 through 115.5556°C)
4xxxx+20 through 21
-40 through 240°F (-40 through 115.5556°C)
4xxxx+22 through 23
4xxxx+24 through 25
4xxxx+26 through 27
4xxxx+28 through 29
4xxxx+30 through 31
505
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+32 through 33
4xxxx+34 through 35
(0 < dr < 100in) (0 < dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+36 through 37
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+38 through 39
(0 <Dr <100in) (0 < Dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+40 through 41
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+42 through 43
(32.0 <= Tb < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tb < 25°C)
4xxxx+44 through 45
Base Pressure, Pb
(13.0 <= Pb < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pb < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+46 through 57
4xxxx+58 through 59
(0 < Fu < 2.0)
4xxxx+60 through 63
4xxxx+64
(0 ... 23)
4xxxx+65 through 78
Reserved for API 21.1
4xxxx+79 through 80
(3 <= Pat <30psi) (20.684 <= Pat < 206.843kPa)
4xxxx+81 through 82
(>= 0ft3/Hr) (>= 0m3/Hr)
506
31007523 12/2006
Inputs Detail
Method 11
The following inputs apply to detail method 11.
Inputs
Description
Applies when using Detail Method 11
4xxxx+83 through 84
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+85 through 86
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+87 through 88
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+89 through 90
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
xxx+91 through 92
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+93 through 94
Mole % of Water, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+95 through 96
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+97 through 98
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Oxygen, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of I-Butane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
31007523 12/2006
507
Inputs
Description
Applies when using Detail Method 11
Mole % of n-Butane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of I-Pentane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of n-Pentane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Hexane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Heptane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Octane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Nonane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Decane, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
Mole % of Helium, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 30)
Reserved for future use (do not use)
*Valid range
508
31007523 12/2006
Inputs Gross
Methods 10, 12,
and 13
The following inputs apply to gross methods 10, 12, and 13.
Inputs
Description
Applies when using Gross Methods 10, 12, and 13
4xxxx+83 through 84
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
(Required for method 13 ONLY)
4xxxx+85 through 86
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
(Required for methods 10, 12, and 13)
4xxxx+87 through 88
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+93 through 94
Specific Gravity, Gr
(0.07 <= Gr < 1.52
4xxxx+95 through 96
Heating Value, HV
(0.07 HV < 1800)
(Required for method 12 ONLY)
*Valid range
31007523 12/2006
509
Outputs Results
Table
Outputs
Description
4xxxx+0
4xxxx+1
4xxxx+2
Differential Pressure (hw) (in H2O or kPa)
Integral Value (IV)
ft3/hr or m3/hr
510
4xxxx+153
User-definable warning/error value (Use for API 21.1)
4xxxx+155: 13
4xxxx+155: 14
4xxxx+155: 15
4xxxx+155: 16
End of Day Flag
Note: This status bit does not appear in the DX Zoom screen
but may be used in program logic.
31007523 12/2006
Optional Outputs
Configuration
Table
31007523 12/2006
if 4x+3: 9 ... 10 is 1.
Optional Outputs
Description
Supercompressibility, Fpv
Gas Relative Density, Gr
Expansion Factor, Y
511
512
31007523 12/2006
GG92 AGA #3 1992 Gross Method
91
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction GG92 AGA #3 and AGA #8 1992 gross
method gas flow function block.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
Short Description
31007523 12/2006
Page
514
Representation
515
517
522
523
513
GG92 Gross Method Gas Flow Function Block
Short Description
Function
Description
The GG92 gas flow loadable function block is available only on certain Compact and
Micro controllers.
standards. The GG92 allows the API 21.1 audit trail. The GG92 permits 8 passes.
The GG92 instruction uses the detail method of characterization requiring detailed
Note: You must install the LSUP loadable before the GG92.
More Information
z
514
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start operation
operation is active
constant
#0001
register
user defined error
GG92
method
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM Data Type
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
ON = solving
flow.
Important: Never detach the top input while
the block is running. You will generate an
error 188 and the data in this block could be
corrupted.
see p. 517.)
None
515
Parameters
State RAM Data Type
Reference
Meaning
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set a warning and log peripheral
activities in the audit trail event log without
stopping the block.
see p. 517.)
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Allows you to set an error and STOP the flow
function.
the flow function.
see p. 517.)
constant #0001
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
The top node must contain a constant, #0001.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
The 4x register entered in the middle node is
the first in a group of contiguous holding
Gas Flow Block.
Block is running. You will lose your data. If
you need to change the 4x register, first
STOP the PLC.
INT, UINT
type and must contain a constant, #0003.
specifies the characterization method:
z 1 - Gross Method 1 (HV-Gr-CO2)
method
(bottom node)
z 2 - Gross Method 2 (Gr-CO2-N2)
Top output
516
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Configuration
Table
must fill in.
are required.
Inputs
31007523 12/2006
The following is a detailed description of configuration variables for the GG92 gas
Inputs
Description
Location of Taps
1 - Upstream
2 - Downstream
Meter Tube Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Orfice Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Optional Outputs
1 - Yes
2 - No
517
518
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+4: 1
4xxxx+4: 2
Low Flow Cut Off
Load Command
Input Type
Mole % Error Limits
1 - Enable
2 - Disable
Dual Range Differential Pressure Option
1 - Yes
2 - No
Compressible/Incompressible
1 - Compressible
2 - Incompressible
Averaging Methods
Measurement Units
1 - US
2 - Metric (SI)
4xxxx+6
4xxxx+7
4xxxx+8
4xxxx+9
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+10
4xxxx+11
4xxxx+12
4xxxx+13
4xxxx+14
4xxxx+15
4xxxx+16
4xxxx+17
4xxxx+18 through 19
14 through 149°F (-10 through 65°C)
4xxxx+20 through 21
14 through 149°F (-10 through 65°C)
4xxxx+22 through 23
0 through 1,470psia (0 through 11,996kPa)
4xxxx+24 through 25
0 through 1,470psia (0 through 11,996kPa)
4xxxx+26 through 27
4xxxx+28 through 29
4xxxx+30 through 31
4xxxx+32 through 33
519
520
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+34 through 35
(0 < dr < 100in) (0 < dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+36 through 37
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+38 through 39
(0 <Dr <100in) (0 < Dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+40 through 41
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+42 through 43
(32.0 <= Tb < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tb < 25°C)
4xxxx+44 through 45
Base Pressure, Pb
(13.0 <= Pb < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pb < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+46 through 47
(32.0 <= Tgr < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tgr < 25°C)
4xxxx+48 through 49
(13.0 <= Pgr < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pgr < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+50 through 51
Reference Temperature for Molar Density, Td
(32.0 <= Td < 77.0°F) (0 <=Td < 25°C)
4xxxx52 through 53
Reference Pressure for Molar Density, Pd
(13.0 <= Pd < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pd < 110.32kPa
4xxxx+54 through 55
Reference Temperature fo Heating Value, Th
(32.0 <= Th < 77.0) (0 <=Th < 25°C)
4xxxx+56 through 57
4xxxx+58 through 59
(0 < Fu < 2.0)
4xxxx+60 through 61
(0.01 <= μc <= 0.1 centipoise)
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+62 through 63
(1.0 <= k < 2.0)
4xxxx+64
(0 ... 23)
4xxxx+65 through 78
4xxxx+79 through 80
(3 <= Pat <30psi) (20.684 <= Pat < 206.843kPa)
4xxxx+81 through 82
(>= 0ft3/Hr) (>= 0m3/Hr)
4xxxx+83 through 84
4xxxx+85 through 86
*(0.0 <= xi <= 50)
(Required for method 2 only)
4xxxx+87 through 88
*(0.0 <= xi <= 30)
4xxxx+89 through 90
*(0.0 <= xi <= 10)
4xxxx+91 through 92
*(0.0 <= xi <= 3)
4xxxx+93 through 94
Specific Gravity, Gr
*(.55 < Gr < 0.87))
4xxxx+95 through 96
Heating Value, HV
*(477 <= HV < 1211BTU/Ft3) (17.7725 <= HV < 45.1206Kj/dm3)
(Required for method 1 only)
*Valid range
31007523 12/2006
521
Outputs Results
Table
Outputs
Description
4xxxx+0
4xxxx+1
4xxxx+2
Integral Value (IV)
(ft3/hr or m3/hr
522
4xxxx+153
User definable warning/error value (Use for API 21.1)
4xxxx+155: 13
4xxxx+155: 14
4xxxx+155: 15
4xxxx+155: 16
End of Day Flag
31007523 12/2006
Optional Outputs
Configuration
Table
31007523 12/2006
if 4x+3: 9 ... 10 is 1.
Optional Outputs
Description
4xxxx+180
523
524
31007523 12/2006
GM92 AGA #3 and #8 1992 Detail
Method Gas Flow Function Block
92
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction GM92 AGA #3 and #8 1992 detail method
with API 21.1 audit trail.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
Short Description
31007523 12/2006
Page
526
Representation
527
529
535
536
525
GM92 - Gas Flow Function Block
Short Description
Function
Description
The GM92 gas flow loadable function block is available only on certain Compact and
Micro controllers.
standards.
This function block allows you to run the API 21.1 audit trail. The block has 8 mether
runs.
Note: You must install the LSUP loadable before the GM92.
More Information
z
Please see the Modicon Starling Associates Gas Flow Loadable Function Block
526
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start operation
operation is active
constant
#0001
register
user defined error
GM92
constant
#0003
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = solving
flow.
be corrupted.
see p. 529.)
527
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
peripheral activities in the audit trail event
see p. 529.)
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
flow function.
the flow function.
see p. 529.)
constant #0001
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
#0001.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Gas Flow Block.
STOP the PLC.
INT, UINT
None
#0003
(bottom node)
Top output
528
0x
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Configuration
Table
must fill in.
are required.
Inputs
31007523 12/2006
The following is a detailed description of configuration variables for the GD92 gas
Inputs
Description
Location of Taps
1 - Upstream
2 - Downstream
Meter Tube Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Orfice Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Optional Outputs
1 - Yes
2 - No
Note: When using only the standard outputs, the loadable uses
157 4xxxx registers. When using the optional outputs, the
loadable uses 181 4xxxx registers.
529
Inputs
530
Description
4xxxx+4: 1
4xxxx+4: 2
Low Flow Cut Off
Load Command
Input Type
Mole % Error Limits
1 - Enable
2 - Disable
1 - Yes
2 - No
1 - Compressible
2 - Incompressible
Averaging Methods
Measurement Units
1 - US
2 - Metric (SI)
4xxxx+6
4xxxx+7
4xxxx+8
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+9
4xxxx+10
4xxxx+11
4xxxx+12
4xxxx+13
4xxxx+14
4xxxx+15
4xxxx+16
4xxxx+17
4xxxx+18 through 19
4xxxx+20 through 21
4xxxx+22 through 23
4xxxx+24 through 25
4xxxx+26 through 27
4xxxx+28 through 29
4xxxx+30 through 31
4xxxx+32 through 33
531
532
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+34 through 35
(0 < dr < 100in) (0 < dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+36 through 37
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+38 through 39
(0 <Dr <100in) (0 < Dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+40 through 41
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+42 through 43
(32.0 <= Tb < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tb < 25°C)
4xxxx+44 through 45
Base Pressure, Pb
(13.0 <= Pb < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pb < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+46 through 47
(32.0 <= Tgr < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tgr < 25°C)
4xxxx+48 through 49
(13.0 <= Pgr < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pgr < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+50 through 57
4xxxx+58 through 59
(0 < Fu < 2.0)
4xxxx+60 through 61
(0.005 <= μc <= 0.5 centipoise)
4xxxx+62 through 63
(1.0 <= k < 2.0)
4xxxx+64
(0 ... 23)
4xxxx+65 through 78
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+79 through 80
(3 <= Pat <30psi) (20.684 <= Pat < 206.843kPa)
4xxxx+81 through 82
(>= 0ft3/Hr) (>= 0m3/Hr)
31007523 12/2006
4xxxx+83 through 84
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+85 through 86
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+87 through 88
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+89 through 90
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
xxx+91 through 92
*(0.0 <= xi <= 12)
4xxxx+93 through 94
Mole % of Water, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 10)
4xxxx+95 through 96
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
4xxxx+97 through 98
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
*(0.0 <= xi <= 3)
Mole % of Oxygen, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 21)
Mole % of I-Butane, xi
533
Inputs
Description
Mole % of n-Butane, xi
Mole % of I-Pentane, xi
Mole % of n-Pentane, xi
Mole % of Hexane, xi
Mole % of Heptane, xi
Mole % of Octane, xi
Mole % of Nonane, xi
Mole % of Decane, xi
Mole % of Helium, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 30)
Mole % of Argon, xi
*(0.0 <= xi <= 100)
*Valid range
534
31007523 12/2006
Outputs Results
Table
Outputs
Description
4xxxx+0
4xxxx+1
4xxxx+2
Pressure (Pf) (psia or kPa
Integral Value (IV)
(ft3/hr or m3/hr)
31007523 12/2006
4xxxx+153
4xxxx+155: 13
4xxxx+155: 14
4xxxx+155: 15
4xxxx+155: 16
End of Day Flag
535
Optional Outputs
Configuration
Table
536
if 4x+3: 9 ... 10 is 1.
Optional Outputs
Description
4xxxx+180
31007523 12/2006
G392 AGA #3 1992
93
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction G392 AGA #3 1992 gross method with API
21.1 audit trail.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
Short Description
31007523 12/2006
Page
538
Representation
539
541
546
547
537
G392 Gas Flow Function Block
Short Description
Function
Description
The G392 gas flow loadable function block is available only on certain Compact and
Micro controllers.
The gas flow loadable function block allows you to run AGA 3 (1992) equations. The
computed flow rates agree within 1 ppm of the published AGA standards.
Note: You must install the LSUP loadable before the G392.
More Information
z
538
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start operation
operation is active
constant
#0001
register
user defined error
G392
constant
#0017
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = solving
flow.
be corrupted.
see p. 541.)
539
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
peripheral activities in the audit trail event
see p. 541.)
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
flow function.
the flow function.
see p. 541.)
constant #0001
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
#0001.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Gas Flow Block.
STOP the PLC.
INT, UINT
None
#0017
(bottom node)
Top output
540
0x
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Configuration
Table
must fill in.
are required.
Inputs
31007523 12/2006
The following is a detailed description of configuration variables for the G392 gas
Inputs
Description
Location of Taps
1 - Upstream
2 - Downstream
Meter Tube Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Orfice Material
1 - Stainless Steel
2 - Monel
3 - Carbon Steel
Compressibility User Input Type
1 - Density at flowing and base condition
2 - Compressibility factor at flowing and base conditions and
gas relative density at base conditions
541
542
Inputs
Description
Optional Outputs
1 - Yes
2 - No
Note: When using only the standard outputs, the loadable uses
157 4xxxx registers. When using the optional outputs, the
loadable uses 181 4xxxx registers.
4xxxx+4: 1
4xxxx+4: 2
Low Flow Cut Off
Load Command
Input Type
1 - Yes
2 - No
1 - Compressible
2 - Incompressible
Averaging Methods
Measurement Units
1 - US
2 - Metric (SI)
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+6
4xxxx+7
4xxxx+8
4xxxx+9
4xxxx+10
4xxxx+11
4xxxx+12
4xxxx+13
4xxxx+14
4xxxx+15
4xxxx+16
4xxxx+17
4xxxx+18 through 19
4xxxx+20 through 21
4xxxx+22 through 23
4xxxx+24 through 25
4xxxx+26 through 27
543
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+28 through 29
4xxxx+30 through 31
4xxxx+32 through 33
4xxxx+34 through 35
(0 < dr < 100in) (0 < dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+36 through 37
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+38 through 39
(0 <Dr <100in) (0 < Dr < 2540mm)
4xxxx+40 through 41
(32 <= Tr < 77°F) (0 <= Tr < 25°C)
4xxxx+42 through 43
(32.0 <= Tb < 77.0°F) (0 <= Tb < 25°C)
4xxxx+44 through 45
Base Pressure, Pb
(13.0 <= Pb < 16.0PSIA) (89.63 <= Pb < 110.32kPa)
4xxxx+46 through 57
4xxxx+58 through 59
(0 < Fu < 2.0)
4xxxx+60 through 61
(0.005 <= μc <= 0.5 centipoise)
4xxxx+62 through 63
544
(1.0 <= k < 2.0)
31007523 12/2006
Inputs
Description
4xxxx+64
(0 ... 23)
4xxxx+65 through 78
Reserved for API 21.1 configuration
4xxxx+79 through 80
(3 <= Pat <30psi) (20.684 <= Pat < 206.843kPa)
4xxxx+81 through 82
(>= 0ft3/Hr) (>= 0m3/Hr)
4xxxx+83 through 84
Density at Flowing Conditions, ρf
(0 < ρf < 1000.0lbm/ft3) (0 < ρf < 1601.846kg/m3)
4xxxx+85 through 86
Density at Base Conditions, ρb
(0 < ρb < 100.0lbm/ft3) (0 < ρb < 1601.846kg/m3
4xxxx+87 through 88
Compressibility Factor at Flowing Conditions, Zf
(0 < Zf < 3)
4xxxx+89 through 90
Compressibility Factor at Base Conditions, Zb
(0 < Zb < 3)
31007523 12/2006
xxx+91 through 92
Gas Relative Density at Base Conditions, Gr
(0.07 <= Gr < 1.52)
545
Outputs Results
Table
Outputs
Description
4xxxx+0
4xxxx+1
4xxxx+2
Temperature at Flowing Conditions (Tf) ((F or C)
Integral Value (IV)
(ft3/hr or m3/hr)
546
Mass Flow Rate (Qm)
4xxxx+153
4xxxx+155: 13
4xxxx+155: 14
4xxxx+155: 15
4xxxx+155: 16
End of Day Flag
31007523 12/2006
Optional Outputs
Configuration
Table
31007523 12/2006
if 4x+3: 9 ... 10 is 1.
Optional Outputs
Description
4xxxx+180
547
548
31007523 12/2006
94
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction HLTH.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
550
Representation
551
552
Parameter Description Top Node (History Matrix)
553
Parameter Description Middle Node (Status Matrix)
558
Parameter Description Bottom Node (Length)
562
549
Short Description
Function
Description
The HLTH instruction creates history and status matrices from internal memory
registers that may be used in ladder logic to detect changes in PLC status and
communication capabilities with the I/O. It can also be used to alert the user to
changes in a PLC System. HLTH has two modes of operation, (learn) and (monitor).
550
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
history
learn / monitor mode
learn complete
status
learn / monitor mode
error
HLTH
table length: 1 - 131
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates the designated operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Learn / monitor mode
(For detailed information, see p. 552.)
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Learn / monitor mode
(For detailed information, see p. 552.)
history
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
History matrix (first in a block of
contiguous registers, range: 6 ... 135)
status
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Status matrix (first in a block of contiguous
registers, range: 3 ... 132)
INT, UINT
length = (number of RIO drops x 4) + 3
None
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
length
0x
MIddle output
0x
None
Echoes state of the middle input
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Error
551
Modes of
operation
Learn / Monitor
Mode (MIddle
and Bottom
Input)
The HLTH instruction has two modes of operation:
Type of Mode
Meaning
Learn Mode
HLTH can be initialized to learn the configuration in which it is
implemented and save the information as a point-in-time reference called
history matrix.
This matrix contains:
z A user-designated drop number for communications status monitoring
z User logic checksum
z Disabled I/O indicator
z S911 Health
z Choice of single or dual cable system
z I/O Map display
Monitor Mode
Monitor mode enables an operation that checks PLC system conditions.
Detected changes are recorded in a status matrix., which monitors the
most recent system conditions and sets bit patterns to indicate detected
changes.
The status matrix contains:
z Communication status of the drop designated in the history matrix
z A flag to indicate when there is any disabled I/O
z Flags to indicate the "on/off" status of constant sweep and the Memory
protect key switch
z Flags to indicate a battery-low condition and if Hot Standby is
functional
z Failed module position data
z Changed user logic checksum flag
z RIO lost-communication flag
The HLTH instruction block has three control inputs and can produce three possible
outputs.
The combined states of the middle and bottom inputs control the operating mode:
Middle Input
552
Bottom Input
Operation
ON
OFF
Learn Mode as Dual Cable System
ON
ON
Learn Mode as Single Cable System
OFF
ON
Monitor Mode
OFF
OFF
Monitor Mode Update Logic Checksum
31007523 12/2006
Parameter Description Top Node (History Matrix)
History Matrix
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first in a block of contiguous registers
that comprise the history matrix. The data for the history matrix is gathered by the
instruction during a learn mode operation and is set in the matrix when the mode
changes to monitor.
The history matrix can range from 6 ... 135 registers in length. Below is a description
of the words in the history matrix. The information from word 1 is contained in the
displayed register in the top node and the information from words 2 ... 135 is stored
in the implied registers.
Word 1
Enter drop number (range 0 ... 32) to be monitored for retries
Word 2
High word of learned checksum
Word 3
Low word of learned checksum
Word 4
The status and a counter for multiplexing the inputs. HLTH processes 16 words of
input (256 inputs) per scan. This word holds the last word location of the last scan.
The register is overwritten on every scan. The value in the counter portion of the
word increases to the maximum number of inputs, then restarts at 0.
Usage of word 4:
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bit
Function
1
1 = at least one disabled input has been found
2 - 16
Count of the number of word checked for disabled inputs prior to this scan.
553
Word 5
Status and a counter for multiplexing outputs to detect if one is disabled. HLTH looks
at 16 words (256 outputs) per scan to find one that is disabled. It holds the last word
location of the last scan. The block is overwritten on every scan. The value in the
counter portion increases to maximum outputs then restarts at 0.
Usage of word 5:
1
Word 6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bit
Function
1
1 = at least one disabled output has been found.
2 - 16
Count of the number of word checked for disabled outputs prior to this scan.
Hot Standby cable learned data
Usage of word 6:
1
554
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
1 = S911 present during learn.
2-8
Not used
9
1 = cable A is monitored.
10
1 = cable B is monitored.
11 - 16
Not used
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Word 7 ... 134
These words define the learned condition of drop 1 to drop 32 as follows:
Word
Drop No.
7 ... 10
1
11 ... 14
2
15 ... 18
3
:
:
:
:
131 ... 134
32
The structure of the four words allocated to each drop are as follows:
First Word
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bit
Function
1
Drop delay bit 1
Note: Drop delay bits are used by the software to delay the monitoring of the
drop for four scans after reestablishing communications with a drop. The delay
value is for internal use only and needs no user intervention.
2
Drop delay bit 2
3
Drop delay bit 3
4
Drop delay bit 4
5
Drop delay bit 5
6
Rack 1, slot 1, module found
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
555
Second Word
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Third Word
1
556
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31007523 12/2006
Bit
Function
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Fourth Word
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 ... 16
not used
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
557
Parameter Description Middle Node (Status Matrix)
Status Matrix
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in a block of contiguous holding
registers that will comprise the status matrix. The status matrix is updated by the
HLTH instruction during monitor mode (top input is ON and middle input is OFF).
The status matrix can range from 3 ... 132 registers in length. Below is a description
of the words in the status matrix. The information from word 1 is contained in the
displayed register in the middle node and the information from words 2 ... 131 is
stored in the implied registers.
Word 1
This word is a counter for lost-communications at the drop being monitored.
Usage of word 1:
1
Word 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit
Function
1-8
Indicates the number of the drop being monitored (0 ... 32).
9 - 16
Count of the lost communication incidents (0 ... 15).
16
This word is the cumulative retry counter for the drop being monitored (the drop
number is indicated in the high byte of word 1).
Usage of word 2:
1
Bit
558
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1-4
Not used
5 - 16
Cumulative retry count (0 ... 255).
31007523 12/2006
Word 3
This word updates PLC status (including Hot Standby health) on every scan.
Usage of word 3:
1
2
3
Bit
Word 4 ... 131
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1
ON = all drops are not communicating.
2
Not used
3
ON = logic checksum has changed since last learn.
4
ON = at least one disabled 1x input detected.
5
ON = at least one disabled 0x output detected.
6
ON = constant sweep enabled.
7 - 10
Not used
11
ON = memory protect is OFF.
12
ON = battery is bad.
13
ON = an S911 is bad.
14
ON = Hot Standby not active.
15 - 16
Not used
These words indicate the status of drop 1 to drop 32 as follows:
Word
Drop No.
4 ... 7
1
8 ... 11
2
12 ... 15
3
:
:
:
:
128 ... 131
32
The structure of the four words allocated to each drop is as follows:
First Word
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bit
Function
1
Drop communication fault detected
2
Rack 1, slot 1, module fault
11
12
13
14
15
16
559
Bit
Function
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Second Word
1
560
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Third Word
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Fourth Word
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1
2
3
4
5
9
6
7
8
9
Cable A fault
10
Cable B fault
11 ... 16
not used
561
Parameter Description Bottom Node (Length)
Length
(Bottom Node)
The decimal value entered in the bottom node is a function of how many I/O drops
you want to monitor. Each drop requires four registers/matrix. The length value is
calculated using the following formula:
length = (# of I/O drops x 4) + 3
This value gives you the number of registers in the status matrix. You only need to
enter this one value as the length because the length of the history matrix is
automatically increased by 3 registers -i.e., the size of the history matrix is
length + 3.
562
31007523 12/2006
HSBY - Hot Standby
95
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction HSBY.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
564
Representation: HSBY - Hot Standby
565
Parameter Description Top Node
567
Parameter Description Middle Node: HSBY - Hot Standby
568
563
HSBY - Hot Standby
Short Description
Function
Description
The HSBY loadable instruction manages a 984 Hot Standby control system. This
instruction must be placed in network 1 of segment 1 in the application logic for both
the primary and standby controllers. It allows you to program a nontransfer area in
system state RAM—an area that protects a serial group of registers in the standby
controller from being modified by the primary controller.
Through the HSBY instruction you can access two registers—a command register
and a status register. Access allows you to monitor and control Hot Standby
operations. The status register is the third register in the nontransfer area you
specify.
564
31007523 12/2006
HSBY - Hot Standby
Representation: HSBY - Hot Standby
Symbol
control input
active
command
register
command register
error
nontransfer
area
state RAM
HSBY
NB length = nontransfer area
length
length
31007523 12/2006
565
HSBY - Hot Standby
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Execute HSBY (unconditionally)
ON = function enabled
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Enable command register
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Enable nontransfer area
command
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
The 4xxxx register entered in the top node
is the HSBY command register; eight bits in
this register may be configured and
controlled via your panel software.
(For more information, see p. 567.)
nontransfer
area
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
The 4xxxx register entered in the middle
node is the first register reserved for the
nontransfer area in state RAM. The first
three registers in the nontransfer area are
special registers.
(For more information, see p. 568 or
p. 568.)
INT, UINT
The integer value entered in the bottom
node defines the length (the number of
registers) of the HSBY nontransfer area in
state RAM. The length must be at least four
registers; in the range from 4 through 255
registers in a 16-bit CPU, and in the range
of 4 through 8000 registers in a 24-bit CPU.
length
(bottom node)
566
Top output
0x
None
Hot Standby system ACTIVE
Middle output
0x
None
PLC cannot communicate with its HSBY
module
31007523 12/2006
HSBY - Hot Standby
Parameter Description Top Node
Configuring the
Register
You may configure bits six through eight and 12 through 16.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Follow these guidelines for configuring those bits.
31007523 12/2006
Bit
Function
6
0 = Swap Modbus port 2 address during switchover
1 = Do not swap Modbus port 3 address during switchover
7
1 = Do not swap Modbus port 2 address during switchover
8
1 = Do not swap Modbus port q address during switchover
12
0 = Allow exec upgrade only after application stops
1 = Allow exec upgrade without stopping application
13
0 = Force standby offline if there is a logic mismatch
1 = Do not force standby offline if there is a logic mismatch
14
0 = Controller B in OFFLINE mode
1 = Controller B in RUN mode
15
0 = Controller A in OFFLINE mode
1 = Controller A in RUN mode
16
0 = Disable keyswitch override
1 = Enable keyswitch override
567
HSBY - Hot Standby
Parameter Description Middle Node: HSBY - Hot Standby
Nontransfer Area
Special
Registers
Application
Specific
Registers
The first three registers in the nontransfer area are special registers.
Register
Content
These two registers are reverse transfer registers for
passing information from the standby to the primary PLC
Second implied
HSBY status register
Bits 11 through 16 are application specific.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The content of the remaining registers is application specific. The length is defined
in the bottom node.
568
Bit
Function
11
0 = This PLC’s switch set to A
1 = This PLC’s switch set to B
12
0 = PLCs have matching logic
1 = PLCs do not have matching logic
13
14
0 1 = The other PLC in OFFLINE mode
1 0 = The other PLC running in primary mode
1 1 = The other PLC running in standby mode
15
16
0 1 = This PLC in OFFLINE mode
1 0 = This PLC running in primary mode
1 1 = This PLC running in standby mode
31007523 12/2006
96
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction IBKR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
570
Representation: IBKR - Indirect Block Read
571
569
Short Description
Function
Description
570
The IBKR (indirect block read) instruction lets you access non-contiguous registers
dispersed throughout your application and copy the contents into a destination block
of contiguous registers. This instruction can be used with subroutines or for
streamlining data access by host computers or other PLCs.
31007523 12/2006
Representation: IBKR - Indirect Block Read
Symbol
CONTROL INPUT
ACTIVE
source table
destination
block
ERROR
IBKR
length
(1 ... 255)
Length: 1 - 255
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates indirect read operation
source table
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
First holding register in a source table:
contain values that are pointers to the noncontiguous registers you want to collect in
the operation.
destination block
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First in a block of contiguous destination
registers, i.e. the block to which the source
data will be copied.
INT, UINT
Number of registers in the source table and
the destination block, range: 1 ... 255
length (1 ... 255)
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error in source table
571
572
31007523 12/2006
97
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction IBKW.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
574
Representation
575
573
Short Description
Function
Description
574
The IBKW (indirect block write) instruction lets you copy the data from a table of
contiguous registers into several non-contiguous registers dispersed throughout
your application.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
block
destination
pointers
error
IBKW
length: 1 - 255
Parameter
Description
length
(1 ... 255)
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates indirect write operation
source block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
First in a block of source registers: contain
values that will be copied to noncontiguous registers dispersed throughout
the logic program
destination
pointers
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First in a block of contiguous destination
pointer registers. Each of these registers
contains a value that points to the address
of a register where the source data will be
copied.
INT, UINT
Number of registers in the source block
and the destination pointer block,
range: 1 ... 255
length
(1 ... 255)
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error in destination table
575
576
31007523 12/2006
ICMP: Input Compare
98
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ICMP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
578
Representation: ICMP - Input Compare
579
580
Cascaded DRUM/ICMP Blocks
582
577
ICMP: Input Compare
Short Description
Function
Description
The ICMP (input compare) instruction provides logic for verifying the correct
operation of each step processed by a DRUM instruction. Errors detected by ICMP
may be used to trigger additional error-correction logic or to shut down the system.
ICMP and DRUM are synchronized through the use of a common step pointer
register. As the pointer increments, ICMP moves through its data table in lock step
with DRUM. As ICMP moves through each new step, it compares-bit for bit-the live
input data to the expected status of each point in its data table.
578
31007523 12/2006
ICMP: Input Compare
Representation: ICMP - Input Compare
Symbol
CONTROL INPUT
ACTIVE
step
pointer
CASCADE INPUT
CONTROL OUT
step data
table
MAX. # OF STEPS
ERROR
ICMP
00NNN = 255 16-bit PLC
999 24-bit PLC
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates the input comparison
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
A cascading input, telling the block that
previous ICMP comparison were all good,
ON = compare status is passing to the
middle output
step pointer
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Current step number
step data table
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First register in a table of step data
information
INT, UINT
Number of application-specific registersused in the step data table, range: 1 .. 999
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
length
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON =this comparison and all previous
cascaded ICMPs are good
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Error
579
ICMP: Input Compare
Step Pointer
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node stores the step pointer, i.e., the number of
the current step in the step data table. This value is referenced by ICMP each time
the instruction is solved. The value must be controlled externally by a DRUM
instruction or by other user logic. The same register must be used in the top node of
all ICMP and DRUM instructions that are solved as a single sequencer.
Step Data Table
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first register in a table of step data
information. The first eight registers in the table hold constant and variable data
required to solve the instruction:
580
Register
Name
Content
Displayed
raw input data
Loaded by user from a group of sequential inputs to
be used by ICMP for current step
First implied
current step data
Loaded by ICMP each time the block is solved;
contains a copy of data in the step pointer; causes
the block logic to automatically calculate register
offsets when accessing step data in the step data
table
Second implied
input mask
Loaded by user before using the block; contains a
mask to be ANDed with raw input data for each stepmasked bits will not be compared; masked data are
put in the masked input data register
Third implied
masked input data
contains the result of the ANDed input mask and raw
input data
Fourth implied
compare status
contains the result of an XOR of the masked input
data and the current step data; unmasked inputs
that are not in the correct logical state cause the
associated register bit to go to 1-non-zero bits cause
a miscompare, and middle output will not go ON
Fifth implied
machine ID number Identifies DRUM/ICMP blocks belonging to a
specific machine configuration; value range: 0 ...
9999 (0 = block not configured); all blocks belonging
to same machine configuration have the same
machine ID
Sixth implied
Profile ID Number
Identifies profile data currently loaded to the
sequencer; value range: O... 9999 (0 = block not
configured); all blocks with the same machine ID
number must have the same profile ID number
31007523 12/2006
ICMP: Input Compare
Register
Name
Content
Seventh implied
Steps used
Loaded by user before using the block, DRUM will
not alter steps used contents during logic solve:
contains between 1 ... 999 for 24 bit CPUs,
specifying the actual number of steps to be solved;
the number must be £ the table length in the bottom
node of the ICMP block
The remaining registers contain data for each step in the sequence.
Length
(Bottom Node)
The integer value entered in the bottom node is the length-i.e., the number of
application-specific registers-used in the step data table. The length can range from
1 .. 999 in a 24-bit CPU.
length must be > the value placed in the steps used register in the middle node.
31007523 12/2006
581
ICMP: Input Compare
Cascaded DRUM/ICMP Blocks
Cascaded
DRUM/ICMP
Blocks
A series of DRUM and/or ICMP blocks may be cascaded to simulate a mechanical
drum up to 512 bits wide. Programming the same 4x register reference into the top
node of each related block causes them to cascade and step as a grouped unit
without the need of any additional application logic.
All DRUM/ICMP blocks with the same register reference in the top node are
automatically synchronized. The must also have the same constant value in the
bottom node, and must be set to use the same value in the steps used register in
the middle node.
582
31007523 12/2006
99
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ID.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
584
Representation
585
586
583
Short Description
Function
Description
instruction.
The ID instruction masks timer-generated and/or local I/O-generated interrupts.
An interrupt that is executed in the time frame after an ID instruction has been solved
one time.
584
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
ID
type
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = instruction masks timer-generated
and/or local I/O generated interrupts
INT, UINT
Type of interrupt to be masked (Constant
integer)
(For detailed information please see
p. 586.)
None
Type
bottom node
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
585
Type
(Bottom Node)
586
Enter a constant integer in the range 1 ... 3 in the node. The value represents the
type of interrupt to be masked by the ID instruction, where:
Integer Value
Interrupt Type
3
Timer interrupt masked
2
Local I/O module interrupt masked
1
Both interrupt types masked
31007523 12/2006
100
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction IE.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
588
Representation
589
590
587
Short Description
Function
Description
instruction.
The IE instruction unmasks interrupts from the timer or local I/O module and
responds to the pending interrupts by executing the designated subroutines.
An interrupt that is executed in the time frame after an ID instruction has been solved
one time.
588
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
IE
Type
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = instruction unmasks interrupts and
responds pending interrupts
INT, UINT
Type of interrupt to be unmasked
(Constant integer)
None
Type
bottom node
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
589
Top Input
When the input is energized, the IE instruction unmasks interrupts from the timer or
local I/O module and responds to the pending interrupts by executing the designated
subroutines.
Type
(Bottom Node)
Enter a constant integer in the range 1 ... 3 in the node. The value represents the
type of interrupt to be unmasked by the IE instruction, where:
Integer Value
590
Interrupt Type
3
Timer interrupt unmasked
2
Local I/O module interrupt unmasked
1
Both interrupt types unmasked
31007523 12/2006
IMIO: Immediate I/O
101
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction IMIO.
Note: This instruction is only available after configuring a CPU without extension.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
592
Representation
593
594
596
591
IMIO: Immediate I/O
Short Description
Function
Description
The IMIO instruction permits access of specified I/O modules from within ladder
logic. This differs from normal I/O processing, where inputs are accessed at the
beginning of the logic solve for the segment in which they are used and outputs are
updated at the end of the segment’s solution. The I/O modules being accessed must
reside in the local backplane with the Quantum PLC.
In order to use IMIO instructions, the local I/O modules to be accessed must be
designated in the I/O Map in your panel software.
592
31007523 12/2006
IMIO: Immediate I/O
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
control block
control registers
IMIO
I/O function (1 - 3)
error
type
Note: This IMIO block will not work with the following Compact I/O modules due to
hardware design restrictions inherent with these modules
z
z
z
z
Parameter
Description
AS-BADU-204
AS-BADU-205
AS-BADU-206
AS-BADU-216
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables the immediate I/O access
control
block
top node
4x
INT,
Control block (first of two contiguous registers)
UINT, For more information, see p. 596.
WOR
D
type
bottom
node
31007523 12/2006
INT,
UINT
Type of operation (constant integer in the range of 1 ... 3)
This is the function to perform
z 1 – Input operation: Transfer data from module to
state RAM
z 2 – Output operation: Transfer date from state RAM to
module
z 3 – Bidirectional or I/O operation: Allows both Input
and Output for bidirectional modules
Top output
0x
None
Bottom
output
0x
None
Error (indicated by a code in the error status register in
the IMIO control block)
593
IMIO: Immediate I/O
Control Block
(Top Node)
Physical
Address of the
I/O Module
Register
Content
Displayed
This register specifies the physical address of the I/O module to be
accessed.
First implied
This register logs the error status, which is maintained by the
instruction.
The high byte of the displayed register in the control block allows you to specify
which rack the I/O module to be accessed resides in, and the low byte allow you to
specify slot number within the specified rack where the I/O module resides.
Usage of word:
MSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Bit
Function
1-5
Not used
Rack 1 only for Quantum
Local racks 1 through 4 can be used for 32-bit Compact
6-8
Rack number 1 to 4 (only rack 1 is currently supported)
9 - 11
Not used
12 - 16
Slot number
14
15
16
LSB
Rack Number
Bit Number
594
Rack Number
6
7
8
0
0
1
rack 1
Rack 1 only for Quantum
Racks 1 through 4 can be used for 32-bit Compact
0
1
0
rack 2
0
1
1
rack 3
1
0
0
rack 4
31007523 12/2006
IMIO: Immediate I/O
Slot Number
Bit Number
Type
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
Slot Number
12
13
14
15
16
0
0
0
0
1
slot 1
0
0
0
1
0
slot 2
0
0
0
1
1
slot 3
0
0
1
0
0
slot 4
0
0
1
0
1
slot 5
0
0
1
1
0
slot 6
0
0
1
1
1
slot 7
0
1
0
0
0
slot 8
0
1
0
0
1
slot 9
0
1
0
1
0
slot 10
0
1
0
1
1
slot 11
0
1
1
0
0
slot 12
0
1
1
0
1
slot 13
0
1
1
1
0
slot 14
0
1
1
1
1
slot 15
1
0
0
0
0
slot 16
Enter a constant integer in the range 1 ... 3 in the bottom node. The value represents
the type of operation to be performed by the IMIO instruction, where:
Integer Value
Type of Immediate Access
1
Input operation: transfers data from the specified module to state RAM
2
Output operation: transfers data from state RAM to the specified module
3
I/O operation: does both input and output if the specified module is
bidirectional
595
IMIO: Immediate I/O
Runtime Errors
596
The implied register in the control block will contain the following error code when
the instruction detects an error:
Error Code
Meaning
2001
Invalid type specified in the bottom node
2002
Problem with the specified I/O slot, either an invalid slot number entered
in the displayed register of the control block or the I/O Map does not
contain the correct module definition for this slot
2003
A type 3 operation is specified in the bottom node, and the module is not
bidirectional
F001
Specified I/O module is not healthy
31007523 12/2006
IMOD:
Interrupt Module Instruction
102
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction IMOD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
598
Representation
599
601
597
Short Description
Function
Description
598
The IMOD instruction initiates a ladder logic interrupt handler subroutine when the
appropriate interrupt is generated by a local interrupt module and received by the
PLC. Each IMOD instruction in an application is set up to correspond to a specific
slot in the local backplane where the interrupt module resides. The IMOD instruction
can designate the same or a separate interrupt handler subroutine for each interrupt
point on the associated interrupt module.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
slot number
control
block
clears previous error
error
IMOD
number of
interrupts
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Top input
Meaning
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates an interrupt
Bottom input 0x, 1x
None
ON = clears a previously detected error
slot number
(top node)
INT,
UINT
Indicates the slot number where the local interrupt
module resides (constant integer in the range of 1 ...
16)
599
Parameters
600
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
control block 4x
(middle
node)
INT,
Control block (first of max. 19 contiguous registers,
UINT, depending on number of interrupts)
WORD The middle node contains the first 4x register n the
IMOD control block. The control block contains
parameters required to program an IMOD instruction.
The size (number of registers) of the control block will
equal the total number of programmed interrupt points
+ 3.
The first three registers in the control block contain
status information. The remaining registers provide a
means for you to specify the label (LAB) number of the
interrupt handler subroutine. The interrupt handler
subroutine is in the last (unscheduled) segment of the
ladder logic program.
For detailed information please see p. 602,
number of
interrupts
(bottom
node)
INT,
UINT
Indicates the number of interrupts that can be
generated from the associated interrupt module
(constant integer in the range of 1 ... 16)
The bottom node contains an integer indicating the
number of interrupts that can be generated from the
associated interrupt module. The size (number of
registers of the control block is the number of interrupts
+ 3.
The PLC is able to be configured for a maximum of 64
module interrupts (from all the interrupt modules
residing in the local backplane). If the number you enter
in the bottom node of an IMOD instruction causes the
total number of module interrupts system wide to
exceed 64, an error is logged in bit 7 of the first register
in the control block.
For example, if you use four interrupt modules in the
local backplane and assign 16 interrupts to each of
these modules (by entering 16 in the bottom node of
each associated 8MOD instruction, the PLC will not be
able to handle any more module interrupts. If you
attempt to create a fifth IMOD instruction, an error will
be logged in the IMOD’s control block when you specify
a value in the bottom node.
Top output
0x
None
Bottom
output
0x
None
ON = error is detected. The source of the error can be
from any one of the enabled interrupt points on the
interrupt module.
31007523 12/2006
General
Information to
IMOD
Up to 14 IMOD instructions can be programmed in a ladder logic application, one for
each possible option slot in a local backplane.
Each interrupting point on each interrupt module can initiate a different interrupt
handler subroutine.
A maximum of 64 interrupt points can be defined in a user logic application. It is not
necessary that all possible input points on a local interrupt module be defined in the
IMOD instruction as interrupts.
Enabling of
the Instruction
(Top Input)
When the input to the top node is energized, the IMOD instruction is enabled. The
PLC will respond to interrupts generated by the local interrupt module in the
designated slot number. When the top input is not energized, interrupts from the
module in the designated slot are disabled and all previously detected errors are
cleared including any pending masked interrupts.
Clear Error
(Bottom Input)
This input clears previous errors.
Slot Number
(Top Node)
The top node contains a decimal in the range 1 ... 16, indicating the slot number
where the local interrupt module resides. This number is used to index into an array
of control structures used to implement the instruction.
Note: The slot number in one IMOD instruction must be unique with respect to the
slot numbers used in all other IMOD instruction in an application. If not the next
IMOD with that particular slot number will have an error.
Note: The slot numbers where the PLC and the power supply reside are illegal
entries -i.e., a maximum of 14 of the 16 possible slot numbers can be used as
interrupt module slots. If the IMOD slot number is the same as the PLC, the IMOD
will have an error.
31007523 12/2006
601
Control Block
(Middle Node)
The middle node contains the first 4x register in the IMOD control block. The control
block contains parameters required to program an IMOD instruction. The size
(number of registers) of the control block will equal the total number of programmed
interrupt points + 3.
The first three registers in the control block contain status information, of the
remaining registers provide means for you to specify the label (LAB) number of the
interrupt handler subroutine that is in the last (unscheduled) segment of the ladder
logic program.
Control Block for IMOD
Register
Function Status
Bits
Displayed
Function status bits
First implied
State of inputs 1 ... 16 from the interrupt module at the time of the
interrupt
Second implied
State of inputs 17 ... 32 from the interrupt module at the time of the
interrupt (invalid data for a 16-bit interrupt module)
Third implied
LAB number and status for the first interrupt programmed point on
the interrupt module
...
...
Last implied
LAB number and status for the last interrupt programmed point on
the interrupt
MSB
Bit
602
Content
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LSB
Function
1-2
Not used
3
Error: controller slot
The slot number given in the top node of the IMOD is the CPU slot number.
4
Error: interrupt lost due to communication error in backplane
When reading the interrupting module, a computation error occurred and the
data is invalid. Because the interrupting points are cleared on the read, the
interrupt(s) are lost.
5
Module not healthy or not in I/O map
The I/O module in the slot given in the top node is not healthy (i.e., not working,
or missing) or a module has not been specified in the I/O map.
31007523 12/2006
Bit
Function
6
Error: interrupt lost because of on-line editing
While the operator was editing the ladder logic (this includes requesting a power
display of a different network, i.e., page up or page down), two or more interrupts
for the same point occurred. Only one is serviced.
7
Error: Maximum number of interrupts exceeded
More than 64 interrupts have been specified in the ladder logic and this "IMOD"
is the one that causes the count to exceed 64.
8
Error: slot number used in previous network (CAUTION: see p. 603)
The slot number in the top node is used in another "IMOD" block with in the
ladder logic. The first block is working, but this one is ignored.
9 - 15
Not used
16
0 = IMOD disabled
1 = IMOD enabled
This bit reflects to the state of power in the top node.
Loss of
Interrupts
CAUTION
LOSS OF INTERRUPTS: WORKING IMOD INSTRUCTION
An error is indicated in bit 8 when two IMOD instructions are assigned the same
slot number. When this happens, it is possible to lose interrupts from the working
IMOD instruction without an indication if the number specified in the bottom node
of the two instructions is different.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
Status Bits and
LAB Number for
each Interrupt
Point
Bits 1 ... 5 of the third implied through last implied registers are status bits for each
interrupt point. Bits 7 ... 16 are used to specify the LAB number for the interrupt
handler subroutine. The LAB number is a decimal value in the range 1 ... 1023.
MSB
31007523 12/2006
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LSB
603
Bit
Function
Interrupt Point Status
1
Execution delayed because of interrupt mask
This is not an error, but an indication that interrupts are disabled and at least one
interrupt for this point has occurred and will be serviced when interrupts are enabled.
2
Error: invalid block in the interrupt handler subroutine
An invalid DX block has been used in the interrupt handler subroutine for this input
point (see Instructions that Cannot be Used in an Interrupt Handler for details).
3
Error: Mask interrupt overrun
Two or more interrupts for this point have occurred while the interrupt was disabled:
i.e., Use of the Interrupt Disable (ID) block without using the Interrupt Enable (IE)
block or during online editing.
4
Error: execution overrun
A second interrupt (or more) has occurred while the interrupt handler subroutine was
still running.
5
Error: invalid LAB number
The LAB number specified in bits 7...16, zero, or that LAB number is not used in the
last segment of the user logic. This error will Auto Clear.
6
not used
LAB number
7 - 16 LAB number for the associated interrupt handler
Value in the range 1 ... 1023
Whenever the input to the bottom node of the IMOD instruction is enabled, the status
bits (bits 1 ... 5) are cleared. If a LAB number is specified (in bits 7 ... 16) as 0 or an
invalid number, any interrupts generated from that point are ignored by the PLC.
Number of
Interrupts
(Bottom Node)
The bottom node contains an integer indicating the number of interrupts that can be
generated from the associated interrupt module. The size (number of registers) of
the control block is this number + 3.
The PLC is able to be configured for a maximum of 64 module interrupts (from all
the interrupt modules residing in the local backplane). If the number you enter in the
bottom node of an IMOD instruction causes the total number of module interrupts
system wide to exceed 64, an error is logged in bit 7 of the first register in the control
block.
For example, if you use four interrupt modules in the local backplane and assign 16
interrupts to each of these modules (by entering 16 in the bottom node of each
associated IMOD instruction, the PLC will not be able to handle any more module
interrupts. If you attempt to create a fifth IMOD instruction, an error will be logged in
that IMOD’s control block when you specify a value in the bottom node.
604
31007523 12/2006
INDX –
Immediate Incremental Move
103
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the INDX instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
606
Parameters Description
607
605
INDX
Short Description
Function
Description
606
The INDX function block issues an MMFStart Immediate Incremental Move on the
axis specified. The velocity and increment are specified in the associated table.
31007523 12/2006
INDX
Parameters Description
Symbol
The following diagram shows an INDX function.
ON starts
move
not used
not used
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
move started
without error
table
block
address
move not started error
table
length (8)
(See Error Register)
bad table length/time out/
revision
607
INDX
Parameter
Descriptions
Registers
608
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the move function. When this
input goes off, the function is reset and can be
initiated again.
Top node
4x
INT, UINT
communications table. This is normally
401001. This address can be configured by
modifying the MMFSTART.CFG file on the
QUANTUM SERCOS controller.
Middle node
4x
INT, UINT
This register points to a block of registers that
define all the arguments for the move. The last
two registers are for state control.
Bottom node
4x
INT
specifies the table length. In this case, the
number of registers in the table must be 8.
Top output
0x
None
Turned on when the move start is complete
without error.
Middle output
0x
None
Turned on when the move is not started and
an error code is generated in register 4xxxx5.
Bottom output
0x
None
Turned on when the register length is not set
at 8, the MMFSTART revision is not correct, or
the function timed out.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id for the incremental move.
4xxxx1
Float
Length of the incremental move.
4xxxx3
Float
Velocity of the incremental move.
4xxxx5
Short
Error code generated when attempting to start move.
4xxxx6
Short
4xxxx7
Short
Current state entry count.
31007523 12/2006
104
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ITMR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
610
Representation
611
613
609
Short Description
Function
Description
The ITMR instruction allows you to define an interval timer that generates interrupts
into the normal ladder logic scan and initiates the execution of an interrupt handling
subroutine. The user-defined interrupt handler is a ladder logic subroutine created
in the last, unscheduled segment of ladder logic with its first network marked by a
LAB instruction. Subroutine execution is asynchronous to the normal scan cycle.
Up to 16 ITMR instructions can be programmed in an application. Each interval timer
can be programmed to initiate the same or different interrupt handler subroutines,
controlled by the JSR/LAB method described in the chapter General.
Each instance of the interval timer is delayed for a programmed interval while the
PLC is running, then generates a processor interrupt when the interval has elapsed.
An interval timer can execute at any time during normal logic scan, including system
I/O updating or other system housekeeping operations. The resolution of each
interval timer is 1 ms. An interval can be programmed in units of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100
ms, or 1 s. An internal counter increments at the specified resolution.
You should be aware that if the ITMR time is less than the L/L edit time slice, there
will be no power flow display or user logic edit allowed.
610
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enable
active
control
block
error
I/O function (1 ... 3)
ITMR
timer number
31007523 12/2006
611
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables instruction
(For expanded and detailed information please
see the section Top Input.)
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Control block (first of three contiguous registers)
The top node contains the first of three contiguous
4xxxx registers in the ITMR control block. These
registers are used to specify the parameters
required to program each ITMR instruction.
The lower eight bits of the first (displayed) register
in the control block allow you to specify function
control parameters, and the upper eight bits are
used to display function status.
In the second register of the control block, specify
a value representing the interval at which the
ITRM instruction will generate interrupts and
initiate the execution of the interrupt handler. The
interval will be incremented in the units specified
by bits 12 and 13 of the first control block register
- i.e., 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 1 s units.
In the third register of the control block, specify a
value indicating the label (LAB) number that will
start the interrupt handler subroutine. The number
must be in the range of 1 through 1023.
Note: We recommend that the size of the logic
subroutine associated with the LAB be minimized
so that the application does not become interruptdriven.
INT, UINT
Timer number assigned to this ITMR instruction
(must be unique with respect to all other ITMR
instructions in the application); range: 1 ... 16
timer number
(bottom node)
Top output
612
0x
None
Bottom output 0x
None
Error (source of the error may be in the
programmed parameters or a runtime execution
error)
31007523 12/2006
Top Input
When the top input is energized, the ITMR instruction is enabled. It begins counting
the programmed time interval. When that interval has expired the counter is reset
and the designated error handler logic executes.
When the top input is not energized, the following events occur:
z All indicated errors are cleared
z The timer is stopped
z The time count is either reset or held, depending on the state of bit 15 of the first
register in the control block (the displayed register in the top node)
z Any pending masked interrupt is cleared for this timer
Control Block
(Top Node)
The top node contains the first of three contiguous 4x registers in the ITMR control
block. These registers are used to specify the parameters required to program each
ITMR instruction.
Control Block for ITMR
Register
Content
Displayed
Function status and function control bits
First implied
In this register specify a value representing the interval at which the ITMR
instruction will generate interrupts and initiate the execution of the interrupt
handler.
The interval will be incremented in the units specified by bits 12 and 13 of
the first control block register, i.e. 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, or 1 s units.
Second implied In this register specify a value indicating the label (LAB) number that will
start the interrupt handler subroutine.
The number must be in the range 1 ... 1023.
Note: We recommend that the size of the logic subroutine associated with the LAB
be minimized so that the application does not become interrupt-driven.
Function Status
and Function
Control Bits
31007523 12/2006
MSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LSB
613
The lower eight bits of the displayed register in the control block allow you to specify
function control parameters, and the upper eight bits are used to display function
status:
Bit
Function
Function Status
1
Execution delayed because of interrupt mask.
2
Invalid block in the interrupt handler subroutine.
3
Not used
4
Time = 0
5
Mask interrupt overrun.
6
Execution overrun.
7
No LAB or invalid LAB.
8
Timer number used in previous network.
Function Control
Timer Number
(Bottom Node)
9 - 11
Not used
12 - 13
0 0 = 1 ms time base
1 1 = 1 s time base
14
1 = PLC stop holds counter.
0 = PLC stop resets counter.
15
1 = enable OFF holds counter.
0 = enable OFF resets counter.
16
1 = instruction enabled
0 = instruction disabled
Up to 16 ITMR instructions can be programmed in an application. The interrupts are
distinguished from one another by a unique number between 1 ... 16, which you
assign to each instruction in the bottom node. The lowest interrupt number has the
highest execution priority.
For example, if ITMR 4 and ITMR 5 occur at the same time, ITMR 4 is executed first.
After ITMR 4 has finished, ITMR 5 generally will begin executing.
An exception would be when another ITMR interrupt with a higher priority occurs
during ITMR 4’s execution. For example, suppose that ITMR 3 occurs while ITMR 5
is waiting for ITMR 4 to finish executing. In this case, ITMR 3 begins executing when
ITMR4 finishes, and ITMR 5 continues to wait.
614
31007523 12/2006
105
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction ITOF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
616
Representation
617
615
Short Description
Function
Description
616
The ITOF instruction performs the conversion of a signed or unsigned integer value
(its top node) to a floating point (FP) value, and stores the FP value in two
contiguous 4x registers in the middle node.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
converted OK
integer
overflow
converted
FP
signed
ITOF
1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables conversion
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
integer
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Integer value, can be displayed explicitly
as an integer (range 1 ... 65 535) or stored
in a register
converted FP
(middle node)
4x
REAL
Converted FP value (first of two
contiguous holding registers)
INT, UINT
Constant value of 1, can not be changed
None
ON = FP conversion completed
successfully
1
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
0x
617
618
31007523 12/2006
JOGS – JOG Move
106
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the JOGS instruction.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
620
Representation
621
619
JOGS
Short Description
Function
Description
620
This function block jogs an axis positive or negative using MMFStart Immediate
Continuous Move and Halt. Jog velocity is specified in the associated register table.
31007523 12/2006
JOGS
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows the JOGS function.
ON jog positive
ON jog negative
not used
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
jog started
without error
table
block
address
jog issued with error
table
length (6)
bad table length
621
JOGS
Parameter
Descriptions
Registers
622
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON activates a JOG positive. A HALT
command is used when the input turns off.
Middle Input
0x
None
ON activates a JOG negative. A HALT
command is used when the input turns off.
Top node
4x
INT, UINT
Middle node
4x
INT, UINT
This register points to a block of registers
that define all the arguments for the jog.
Bottom node
4x
INT
node specifies the table length. In this
case, the number of registers in the table
must be 6.
Top output
0x
None
Turned on when the jog has been issued
without error and reflects the state of the
top or middle inputs.
Middle output
0x
None
Turned on when the jog has been issued
without error and reflects the state of the
top or middle inputs.
Bottom output
0x
None
Turned on when the register length is not
set at 6.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis id for the incremental move.
4xxxx1
Float
Velocity used for jogging the axis.
4xxxx3
Short
Error code generated when attempting to start move.
4xxxx4
Short
4xxxx5
Short
Current state entry count.
31007523 12/2006
107
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction JSR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
624
Representation
625
623
Short Description
Function
Description
When the logic scan encounters an enabled JSR instruction, it stops the normal
logic scan and jumps to the specified source subroutine in the last (unscheduled)
segment of ladder logic.
You can use a JSR instruction anywhere in user logic, even within the subroutine
segment. The process of calling one subroutine from another subroutine is called
nesting. The system allows you to nest up to 100 subroutines; however, we
recommend that you use no more than three nesting levels. You may also perform
a recursive form of nesting called looping, whereby a JSR call within the subroutine
recalls the same subroutine.
Example to
Subroutine
Handling
624
For an example of subroutine handling, see p. 47.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
copy out
source
conditional jump to subroutine (can
appear anywhere, even nested)
error
JSR
#1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Enables the source subroutine
source
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Source pointer (indicator of the subroutine
to which the logic scan will jump), entered
explicitly as an integer or stored in a
register; range: 1 ... 1 023
INT, UINT
Always enter the constant value 1
#1
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
Error in subroutine jump
On if jump cannot be executed
Label does not exist
or
Nesting level > 100
625
626
31007523 12/2006
108
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction LAB.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
628
Representation
629
630
627
Short Description
Function
Description
The LAB instruction is used to label the starting point of a subroutine in the last
(unscheduled) segment of user logic. This instruction must be programmed in row
1, column 1 of a network in the last (unscheduled) segment of user logic. LAB is a
one-node function block.
LAB also serves as a default return from the subroutine in the preceding networks.
If you are executing a series of subroutine networks and you find a network that
begins with LAB, the system knows that the previous subroutine is finished, and it
returns the logic scan to the node immediately following the most recently executed
JSR block.
Note: If you need real world I/O serviced while you are in the interrupt subroutine,
you must use the IMIO (see p. 591) (read/write) function block in the same
subroutine. If you do not, the real world I/O referenced in that subroutine will not
get serviced until the appropriate segment is solved.
Example to
Subroutine
Handling
628
For an example of subroutine handling, see p. 47.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
label must be in row1, column 1 of a network in the
last segment
Parameter
Description
error
subroutine
(1 ... 255)
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Initiates the subroutine specified by the
number in the bottom node
INT, UINT
Integer value, identifies the subroutine you
are about to execute
Range: 1 ... 255 16-bit PLC.
Range: 1 ... 1023 24-bit PLC.
Size = constant 1 - 255 or
Size = constant 1-1023 for 785L
Subroutine number error ON if return
cannot be executed
If more than one network begins with a
LAB instruction with the same subroutine
value, the lowest-numbered network is
used as the starting point for the
subroutine.
None
ON = error in the specified subroutine’s
initiation
subroutine
(top node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
LAB
0x
629
Subroutine
(Bottom Node)
630
The integer value entered in the node identifies the subroutine you are about to
execute. The value can range from 1 ... 255. If more than one subroutine network
has the same LAB value, the network with the lowest number is used as the starting
point for the subroutine.
31007523 12/2006
LOAD: Load Flash
109
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction LOAD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
632
Representation
633
634
631
LOAD: Load Flash
Short Description
Function
Description
Note: This instruction is available with the PLC family TSX Compact, with Quantum
CPUs 434 12/ 534 14 and Momentum CPUs CCC 960 x0/ 980 x0.
The LOAD instruction loads a block of 4x registers (previously saved) from state
RAM where they are protected from unauthorized modification.
632
31007523 12/2006
LOAD: Load Flash
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register
nothing saved
1, 2, 3, 4
length = saved length
LOAD
length: 1 - 512
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Start LOAD operation: it should remain ON
until the operation has completed
successfully or an error has occurred.
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First of max. 512 contiguous 4x registers
to be loaded from state RAM
1, 2, 3, 4
(middle node)
INT
Integer value, which defines the specific
buffer where the block of data is to be
loaded
length
(bottom node)
INT
Number of words to be loaded, range:
1 ... 512
Top output
0x
None
ON = LOAD is active
Middle output
0x
None
ON = a LOAD is requested from a buffer
where no data has been saved.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Length not equal to SAVEd length
633
LOAD: Load Flash
1, 2, 3, 4
(Middle Node)
The middle node defines the specific buffer where the block of data is to be loaded.
Four 512 word buffers are allowed. Each buffer is defined by placing its
corresponding value in the middle node, that is, the value 1 represents the first
buffer, value 2 represents the second buffer and so on. The legal values are 1, 2, 3,
and 4. When the PLC is started all four buffers are zeroed. Therefore, you may not
load data from the same buffer without first saving it with the instruction SAVE.
When this is attempted the middle output goes ON. In other words, once a buffer is
used, it may not be used again until the data has been removed.
Bottom Output
The output from the bottom node goes ON when a LOAD request is not equal to the
registers that were SAVEd. This kind of transaction is allowed, however, it is your
responsibility to ensure this does not create a problem in your application.
634
31007523 12/2006
110
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MAP3.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
636
Representation
637
638
635
Short Description
Function
Description
Ladder logic applications running in the controller initiate communication with MAP
network nodes through the MAP3 instruction.
636
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control
block
data
source
MAP3
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates a transaction
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = new transaction to be initiated in the
same scan
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Control Block (first register of a block)
data source
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Data source (starting register)
INT, UINT
Length of local data area, range: 1 ... 255)
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
Transaction completes successfully
MIddle output
0x
None
Transaction is in progress
Bottom output
0x
None
Error
637
Top Input
This input initiates a transaction. To start a transaction the input must be held ON
(HIGH) for at least one scan. If the S980 has resources to process the transaction,
the middle output passes power. If resources are not available, no outputs pass
power.
Once a transaction is started, it will run until a reply is received, a communications
error is detected, or a timeout occurs. The values in the control block, data source,
and length must not be altered, or the transaction will not be completed and the
bottom output will pass power. A second transaction cannot be started by the same
block until the first one is complete.
Middle Input
If the top input is also HIGH, the middle input going ON allows a new transaction to
be initiated in the same scan, following the completion of a previous one. A new
transaction begins when the top output passes power from the first transaction.
Control Block
(Top Node)
The top node is the starting 4x register of a block of registers that control the block’s
operation.
The contents of each register is determined by the kind of operation to be performed
by the MAP3 block:
z read or write
z information report
z unsolicited status
z conclude
z abort
Registers of the control block:
638
Word
Meaning
1
Destination Device
2
Qualifier / Function Code
3
Network Mode / Network Type
4
Function Status
5
Register A Reference Type
This word is labeled Register A* and contains the reference type for 4 types of
Read (0x, 1x, 3x, and 4x registers) and 2 types of Write (0X or 4x).
6
Register B Reference Number
This word is labeled Register B* and contains the starting reference number in
the range 1 to 99999.
7
Register C Reference Length
This word is labeled Register C* and contains the Quantity of references
requested.
31007523 12/2006
Destination
Device
Word
Meaning
8
Register D Timeout
This word is labeled Register D* and contains the Timeout parameter. This value
sets the maximum length of time used to complete a transaction, including
retries.
Word 1 contains the destination device in bit position 9 through 16. The computer
works with this byte as the LSB and will accept a range of 1 to 255.
Usage of word 1:
1
2
Bit
Qualifier /
Function Code
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1-8
Not used
9 - 16
Destination device
Word 2 contains two bytes of information. The qualifier bits are 1 to 8 and the
function code is in bits 9 to 16.
Usage of word 2:
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
Qualifier
1-8
0 = addressed
>0 = named
Function Code
9 - 16
31007523 12/2006
4 = read
5 = write
639
Network Mode /
Network Type
Word 3 contains two bites of information. The mode is in bits 5 through 8 and the
type is in bits 9 through 16.
Usage of word 3:
1
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1-4
Not used
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Mode
5-8
1 = association
Type
Function Status
9 - 12
7 = 7 layer MAP network
13 - 16
1 = type 1 service
Word 4 is the function status. An error code is returned if an error occurs in a block
initiated function.
The decimal codes are:
640
Code
Meaning
1
Association request rejected
4
Message timeout application response
5
Invalid destination device
6
Message size exceeded
8
Invalid function code
17
Device not available
19
Unsupported network type
22
No channel available
23
MMS message not sent
24
Control block changed
25
Initiate failed
26
System download in progress
28
Channel not ready
99
Undetermined error
103
Access denied
105
Invalid address
110
Object nonexistent
31007523 12/2006
Function
summary
The network controlling device may issue a function code that alters the control
block register assignment as given above for read/write. Those differences for
information, status, conclude and abort are identified in this summary on the bottom
of your screen.
Refer to Modicon S980 Map 3.0 Network Interface User Guide that describes the
register contents for each operation.
Data Source
(Middle Node)
The middle node is the starting 4x register of the local data source (for a write
request) or local data destination (for a read).
Length
(Bottom Node)
The bottom node defines the maximum size of the local data area (the quantity of
registers) starting at 4x register of data source, in the range of 1 to 255 decimal. The
quantity of data to be actually transferred in the operation is determined by a
reference length parameter in one of the control registers.
Top Output
The top output passes power for one scan when a transaction completes
successfully.
Middle Output
The middle output passes power when a transaction is in progress. If the top input
is ON and the middle input is OFF, then the middle output will go OFF on the same
scan that the top output goes ON. If both top input and middle input are ON, then the
middle output will remain ON.
Bottom Output
The bottom output passes power for one scan when a transaction cannot be
completed. An error code is returned to the function status word (register 4x+3) in
the function’s control block.
31007523 12/2006
641
642
31007523 12/2006
111
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the four integer operations executed by the instruction
MATH. The four operations are decimal square root, process square root, logarithm
(base 10), and antilogarithm (base 10).
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
644
Representation
645
643
Short Description
Function
Description
The MATH instruction performs any one of four integer math operations, which is
called by entering a function code in the range 1 ... 4 in the bottom node.
Table with two columns:
Code
MATH Function
1
Decimal square root
2
Process square root
3
Logarithm (base 10)
4
Antilogarithm (base 10)
Each MATH function operates on the contents of the top node registers and places
a result in the middle node registers.
For example, the normal square root uses registers 3/4xxxx and 3/4xxxx+1 as an 8
digit operand and stores the result in 4yyyy and 4yyyy+1. The result storage format
is XXXX.XX00 where there are 2 places of precision following an implied decimal
point.
Math performs the function indicated by the bottom node:
644
Code
Function
Operand
Registers
Range
Result Registers
Range
1
Normal
3/4x, 3/4x + 1
8 Digits
4y, 4y + 1
xxxx.xxoo
2
Process
3/4x
4 Digits
4y, 4y + 1
xxxx.xxoo
3
Log (x)
3/4x, 3/4x + 1
8 Digits
4y
1 to 7,999
4
Antilog (x)
3/4x
1 to 7,999
4y, 4y + 1
8 Digits
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol - Decimal
Square Root
Representation of the instruction for the decimal square root operation
control input
active
source
error
result
MATH
1
Parameter
Description Decimal Square
Root
31007523 12/2006
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the decimal square root operation
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top Input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates a standard square root
operation.
source
(top node)
3x. 4x
INT, UINT
will be derived) is stored here.
value may be in the range 0 through
99,999,999. The low-order half of the value
is stored in the implied register, and the
high-order half is stored in the displayed
register.
value may be in the range 0 through 9,999.
The square root calculation is done on only
the value in the displayed register; the
implied register is required but not used.
645
Symbol Process Square
Root
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
result
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Enter the first of two contiguous 4xxxx
registers in the middle node. The second
register is implied. The result of the
standard square root operation is stored
here.
register stores the four-digit value to the left
of the first decimal point and the implied
right of the first decimal point. Numbers
after the second decimal point are
performed.
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = top-node value out of range
Representation of the instruction for the process square root operation
control input
active
source
error
linearized
result
MATH
2
646
31007523 12/2006
Parameter
Description Process Square
Root
The process square root function tailors the standard square root function for closed
loop analog control applications. It takes the result of the standard square root result,
multiplies it by 63.9922 (the square root of 4095), and stores that linearized result in
the middle-node registers.
Parameters
31007523 12/2006
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top Input
0x, 1x
None
ON initiates process square root operation
source
(top node)
3x. 4x
INT, UINT
will be derived) is stored in these two
registers.
In order to generate values that have
meaning, the source value must not
exceed 4095. In a 4xxxx register group the
source value will therefore be stored in the
implied register, and in a 3xxxx register
group the source value will be stored in the
displayed register.
result
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
register is implied. The linearized result of
the process square root operation is stored
here.
register stores the four-digit value to the left
of the first decimal point and the implied
right of the first decimal point. Numbers
after the second decimal point are
performed.
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Source value out of range
647
Symbol Logarithm
(base 10)
Representation of the instruction for the Logarith (base 10) operation
control input
active
source
error
result
MATH
3
Parameter
Description Logarithm (base
10 logarithm)
648
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the logarithm (base 10) operation
Reference Type
Meaning
Top Input
0x, 1x
None
ON enables log(x) operation
source
(top node)
3x. 4x
INT,
UINT
The first of two contiguous 3xxxx or 4xxxx registers is
entered in the top node. The second register is implied.
The source value upon which the log calculation will be
performed is stored in these registers.
If you specify a 4xxxx register, the source value may be
in the range 0 through 99,999,99. The low-order half of
the value is stored in the implied register, and the highorder half is stored in the displayed register.
log calculation is done on only the value in the displayed
register; the implied register is required but not used.
result
(middle
node)
4x
INT,
UINT
The middle node contains a single 4xxxx holding register
where the result of the base 10 log calculation is posted.
The result is expressed in the fixed decimal format 1.234
, and is truncated after the third decimal position.
The largest result that can be calculated is 7.999, which
would be posted in the middle register as 7999.
Top output
0x
None
ON = Operation Successful
Bottom
output
0x
None
ON = an error ar a value out of range
31007523 12/2006
Symbol Antilogarithm
(base 10)
Representation of the instruction for the antilogarithm (base 10) operation
control input
active
source
error
result
MATH
4
Parameter
Description Antilogarithm
(base 10)
31007523 12/2006
Description of the instruction’s parameters for the antilogarithm (base 10) operation
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top Input
0x, 1x
None
ON enables antilog(x) operation
source
(top node)
3x. 4x
INT, UINT
The top node is a single 4xxxx holding
register or 3xxxx input register. The source
value (the value on which the antilog
calculation will be performed) is stored here
in the fixed decimal format 1.234 . It must
be in the range 0 through 7999,
representing a source value up to a
maximum of 7.999.
result
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
register is implied. The result of the antilog
calculation is posted here in the fixed
decimal format 12345678.
The largest antilog value that can be
calculated is 99770006 (9977 posted in the
displayed register and 0006 posted in the
implied register).
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = An error or a value out of range
649
650
31007523 12/2006
MBIT: Modify Bit
112
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MBIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
652
Representation
653
654
651
MBIT: Modify Bit
Short Description
Function
Description
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the MBIT instruction, check for disabled coils. MBIT will override any
disabled coils within a destination group without enabling them. This can cause
can change as a result of the MBIT instruction.
equipment damage.
The MBIT instruction modifies bit locations within a data matrix, i.e. it sets the bit(s)
to 1 or clears the bit(s) to 0. One bit location may be modified per scan.
652
31007523 12/2006
MBIT: Modify Bit
Representation
Symbol
control input
pointer: (999 16-bit PLC)
(9600 24-bit PLC)
active
bit
location
clear / set bit loc
sense bit
(copy middle input)
data
matrix
increase pointer
error
pointer > matrix size
MBIT
matrix length (max)
255 (4080 bits) 16-bit PLC
600 (9600 bits) 24-bit PLC
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data Type
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = implements bit modification
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = clear bit locations to 0
ON = set bit locations to 1
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Increment bit location by one after
modification
bit location
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Specific bit location to be set or clear in the
data matrix; entered explicitly as an integer
value or stored in a register (range 1 ... 9 600)
data matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First word or register in the data matrix
INT, UINT
Matrix length; range: 1 ... 600
None
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
length
0x
Middle output
0x
None
Echoes state of the middle input
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error: bit location > matrix length
653
MBIT: Modify Bit
Bit Location
(Top Node)
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
654
Note: If the bit location is entered as an integer or in a 3x register, the instruction
will ignore the state of the bottom input.
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies a matrix length, i.e, the
number of 16-bit words or registers in the data matrix. The length can range from
1 ... 600 in a 24-bit CPU, e.g, a matrix length of 200 indicates 3200 bit locations.
31007523 12/2006
113
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MBUS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
656
Representation
657
658
The MBUS Get Statistics Function
660
655
Short Description
Function
Description
The S975 Modbus II Interface option modules use two loadable function blocks:
MBUS and PEER. MBUS is used to initiate a single transaction with another device
on the Modbus II network. In an MBUS transaction, you are able to read or write
discrete or register data.
PLCs on a Modbus II network can handle up to 16 transactions simultaneously.
Transactions include incoming (unsolicited) messages as well as outgoing
messages. Thus, the number of message initiations a PLC can manage at any time
is 16 - # of incoming messages.
A transaction cannot be initiated unless the S975 has enough resources for the
entire transaction to be performed. Once a transaction has been initiated, it runs until
a reply is received, an error is detected, or a timeout occurs. A second transaction
cannot be started in the same scan that the previous transaction completes unless
the middle input is ON. A second transaction cannot be initiated by the same MBUS
instruction until the first transaction has completed.
656
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
control block
repeat transaction
in same scan
complete
control
block
transaction in progress
or
new transaction started
data
block
error
clear system statistics
MBUS
data area size
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Enable MBUS transaction
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Repeat transaction in same scan
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Clears system statistics
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First of seven contiguous registers in the MBUS
control block
data block
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First 4x register in a data block to be
transmitted or received in the MBUS
transaction.
INT, UINT
Number of words reserved for the data block is
entered as a constant value
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
length
Top output
0x
None
Transaction complete
Middle output
0x
None
Transaction in progress or new transaction
starting
Bottom output
0x
None
Error detected in transaction
657
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of seven contiguous registers in
the MBUS control block:
Register
Function Code
Reference Type
Displayed
Address of destination device (range: 0 ... 246)
First implied
not used
Second implied
Function code
Third implied
Reference type
Fourth implied
Reference number, e.g., if you placed a 4 in the third implied register
and you place a 23 in this register, the reference will be holding
register 400023
Fifth implied
Number of words of discrete or register references to be read or
written
Sixth implied
Time allowed for a transaction to be completed before an error is
declared; expressed as a multiple of 10 ms, e.g., 100 indicates 1 000
ms; the default timeout is 250 ms.
This register contains the function code for requested action:
Value
Meaning
01
Read discretes
02
Read registers
03
Write discrete outputs
04
Write register outputs
255
Get system statistics
This register contains one of 4 possible discrete or register reference types:
Value
658
Content
Reference type
0
Discrete output (0x)
1
Discrete input (1x)
2
Input register (3x)
3
Holding register (4x)
31007523 12/2006
Number of
Words to Read or
Write
Length
(Bottom Node)
Number of words of discrete or register references to be read or written; the length
limits are:
Read register
251 registers
Write register
249 registers
Read coils
7.848 discretes
Write coils
7.800 discretes
The number of words reserved for the data block is entered as a constant value in
the bottom node. This number does not imply a data transaction length, but it can
restrict the maximum allowable number of register or discrete references to be read
or written in the transaction.
The maximum number of words that may be used in the specified transaction is:
Max. Number of Words
31007523 12/2006
Transaction
251
Reading registers (one register/word)
249
Writing registers (one register/word)
490
Reading discretes using 24-bit CPUs (up to 16 discretes/word)
487
Writing discretes using 24-bit CPUs (up to 16 discretes/word
659
The MBUS Get Statistics Function
General
Issuing function code 255 in the second implied register of the MBUS control block
obtains a copy of the Modbus II local statistics, a series of 46 contiguous register
locations where data describing error and system conditions is stored. To use MBUS
for a get statistics operation, set the length in the bottom node to 46, a length < 46
returns an error (the bottom output will go ON), and a length > 46 reserves extra
registers that cannot be used.
Example
Parameterizing of the instruction
Enable
400101
complete
401000
Clear system statistics
MBUS
Error: length < 46
46
Register 400101 is the first register in the MBUS control block, making register
400103 the control register that defines the MBUS function code. By entering a
value of 255 in register 400103, you implement a get statistics function. Registers
401000 ... 401045 are then filled with the system statistics.
System
Statistics
Overview
660
The following system statistics are available.
Token bus controller (TBC)
z Software-maintained receive statistics
z TBC-maintained error counters
z Software-maintained transmit errors
z Software-maintained receive errors
z User logic transaction errors
z Manufacturing message format standard
z (MMFS) errors
z Background statistics
z Software revision
z
31007523 12/2006
Token Bus
Controller (TBC)
Softwaremaintained
Receive
Statistics
TBC-maintained
Error Counters
31007523 12/2006
Registers 401000 ... 401003 are then filled with the following:
Register
Content
401000
Number of tokens passed by this station
401001
Number of tokens sent by this station
401002
Number of time the TBC has failed to pass token and has not found a
successor
401003
Number of times the station has had to look for a new successor
Register
Content
401004
TBC-detected error frames
401005
Invalid request with response frames
401006
Applications message too long
401007
Media access control (MAC) address out of range
401008
Duplicate application frames
401009
Unsupported logical link control (LLC) message types
401010
Unsupported LLC address
Register
Content
401011
Receive noise bursts (no start delimiter)
401012
Frame check sequence errors
401013
E-bit error in end delimiter
401014
Fragmented frames received (start delimiter not followed by end delimiter)
401015
Receive frames too long
401016
Discarded frames because there is no receive buffer
401017
Receive overruns
401018
Token pass failures
661
Softwaremaintained
Transmit Errors
Softwaremaintained
Receive Errors
User Logic
Transaction
Errors
Manufacturing
Message Format
Standard
(MMFS) Errors
662
Register
Content
401019
Retries on request with response frames
401020
All retries performed and no response received from unit
Registers 401021... 401022 are then filled with the following:
Register
Content
401021
Bad transmit request
401022
Negative transmit confirmation
Register
Content
401023
Message sent but no application response
401024
Invalid MBUS/PEER logic
Register
Content
401025
Command not executable
401026
Data not available
Register
Content
401027
Device not available
401028
Function not implemented
401029
Request not recognized
401030
Syntax error
401031
Unspecified error
401032
Data request out of bounds
401033
Request contains invalid controller address
401034
Request contains invalid data type
401035
None of the above
31007523 12/2006
Background
Statistics
Software
Revision
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
401036
Invalid MBUS/PEER request
401037
Number of unsupported MMFS message types received
401038
Unexpected response or response received after timeout
401039
Duplicate application responses received
401040
Response from unspecified device
401041
Number of responses buffered to be processed (in the least significant byte);
number of MBUS/PEER requests to be processed (in the most significant
byte)
401042
Number of received requests to be processed (in the least significant byte);
number of transactions in process (in the most significant byte)
401043
S975 scan time in 10 ms increments
Register
Content
401044
Version level of fixed software (PROMs): major version number in most
significant byte; minor version number in least significant byte
401045
Version of loadable software (EEPROMs): major version number in most
significant byte; minor version number in least significant byte
663
664
31007523 12/2006
MMFB – Modicon Motion
Framework Bits Block
114
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the MMFB block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
666
Representation
667
665
MMFB
Short Description
Function
Description
The MMFB function block sets control bits for an axis in the MMFSTART table area.
See p. 667 for a description of the control bit functions. Most of these functions can
be accomplished with subroutines, but this is more efficient
Related
Information
folder on the ProWORX 32 installation CD for detailed information on using motion
loadables.
666
31007523 12/2006
MMFB
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows the MMFB function.
ON moves control
data
not used
not used
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
echoes state of
top input
table
block
address
not used
table
length (3)
bad table length
667
MMFB
Parameter
Descriptions
Registers
668
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON moves control data. Data will be moved
constantly when this input is on.
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
communications table. This is normally 401001.
This address can be configured by modifying the
MMFSTART.CFG file on the QUANTUM
SERCOS controller.
Middle node
4x
INT,
UINT
define all the arguments for the jog. The last two
Bottom node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
Echoes state of top input, except if the axis (top
node content) is incorrect or table length is not
two.
Bottom output
0x
None
Turned on when the register length is not set at
3.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
INT
Axis id.
4xxxx1
INT
Low order control: bits 0-15
4xxxx2
INT
High order control: bits 16-31
31007523 12/2006
MMFE – Modicon Motion
Framework Extended Parameters
Subroutine
115
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the MMFE block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
670
Representation
671
669
MMFE
Short Description
Function
Description
670
The MMFE function block is designed specifically for executing moveImmed and
moveQueue subroutines with Coordinated Sets. Par1 specifies the MoveType
(Absolute or Incremental) and EPar1 through EParN take the Position for all the N
axes in the Coordinated Set. Then EparN+1 through Epar2N take the Velocity of all
N axes in the Coordinated Set, up to eight axes. For these move subroutines, Par2
is not used and there are no return values, but they are included in the function block
for future subroutines.
31007523 12/2006
MMFE
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows an MMFE block.
ON starts subroutine
data
not used
not used
Parameter
Descriptions
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
subroutine executed
without error
table
block
address
subroutine executed
with error (see error
register)
table
length (47)
bad table length/
tmeout/revision
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the subroutine. When this input goes off,
the function block is reset and can be initiated again.
Top node
4x
INT,
UINT
controller.
Middle node 4x
INT,
UINT
the arguments and routines for a generic subroutine
call. The last two registers are for state control.
Bottom node 4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
Turned on when the subroutine call is complete without
error.
Middle
output
0x
None
error is code is generated in register 4xxx38.
Bottom
output
0x
None
671
MMFE
Registers
Register
672
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Number of the subroutine to be executed
4xxxx1
Short
Axis id for the subroutine
4xxxx2
Unsigned
First parameter for the subroutine
4xxxx4
Unsigned
Second parameter for the subroutine
4xxxx6
Float
Third parameter for the subroutine
4xxxx8
Float
Fourth parameter for the subroutine
4xxx10
Float
4xxx12
Float
4xxx14
Float
4xxx16
Float
4xxx18
Float
4xxx20
Float
4xxx22
Float
4xxx24
Float
4xxx26
Float
4xxx28
Float
4xxx30
Float
4xxx32
Float
4xxx34
Float
4xxx36
Float
4xxx38
Short
Error code generated from subroutine
4xxx39
Unsigned
First return value from subroutine
4xxx41
Float
Second return value from subroutine
4xxx43
Float
Third return value from subroutine
4xxx45
Function State
4xxx47
State Count
31007523 12/2006
MMFI – Modicon Motion
Framework Initialize Block
116
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the MMFI block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
674
Representation
675
673
MMFI
Short Description
Function
Description
This function block defines the MMFSTART communication register table. This table
starts at 41000 length 200. It passes power from input 1 but checks the revision in
the table.
Related
Information
loadables.
674
31007523 12/2006
MMFI
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows an MMFI block.
ON passes power
not used
echoes state of
top input
not used
table
block
address
not used
table
length (200)
not used
Parameter
Descriptions
31007523 12/2006
bad table length/
revision
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the function to check the
MMFSTART revision.
Middle node
4x
INT, UINT
Points to a block of 200 registers that
makeup the MMFSTART communication
area. This address is normally 401001, but
can be changed with MMFSTART
configuration in the SERCOS
CONTROLLER
Bottom node
4x
INT
node specifies the table length. In this case,
the number of registers in the table must be
200.
Top output
0x
None
Echoes the state of top input.
Bottom output
0x
None
at 200.
675
MMFI
Registers
676
The following table shows the instruction’s registers.
Register
Information
Data Type Description
base+001:002
RingControl
UDINT
Indicates enabling, stopping, holding, etc.
base+003
WatchDogCont
INT
Used by controller and PLC to make sure
the other is allowed.
base+004
Debug
INT
Used to output debug messages.
base+005
SubNumber
INT
Indicates the subroutine number.
base+006
AxisID
INT
Apply subroutine to this motion axis.
base+007:010
Parameter 1...2
UDINT
Indicates parameters for this subroutine
(two integers).
base+011:042
Parameter 3...18
REAL
Indicates parameters for this subroutine
(16 floats)
base+043:050
(Reserved)
base+051:066
SA1..8Control
UDINT
Indicates control bits for each
SERCOS Axis
base+067:074
IA1..4Control
UDINT
Imaginary Axis
base+075:082
CS1..4Control
UDINT
Coordinated Set.
base+083:090
FS1..4Control
UDINT
Follower Set.
base+091
USubNumber
INT
Indicates user subroutine number
base+092
UAxisID
INT
Apply user subroutine to this motion axis
base+93:096
UParameter1...2
UDINT
Indicates user parameters for this
subroutine (two integers)
base+97:100
UParameter3...4
REAL
User parameters for this subroutine
(two floats)
base+101:102
RingStatus
UDINT
Indicates fault, enabled, holding, profile
end, in position
base+103
WatchDogState
INT
Echoes what is written in WatchDogCont
base+104
NumberOfAxes
INT
Indicates how many SERCOS axes have
been configured
base+105
FaultAxis
INT
Indicates which axis faulted
base+106
FaultCode
INT
Indicates what fault occurred
base+107
WarnAxis
INT
Indicates which axis is having a problem
(eight words)
base+108
WarnCode
INT
Indicates what warning occurred
base+109
SubNumEcho
INT
Echoes SubNumber when subroutine
code completes
31007523 12/2006
MMFI
Register
31007523 12/2006
Information
Data Type Description
base+110
AxisIDEcho
INT
Echoes AxisID
base+111
Error
INT
Indicates subroutine motion error number
base+112:113
Return1
UDINT
Indicates subroutine return value
(one integer)
base+114:117
Return2...3
REAL
Indicates subroutine return value
(two floats)
base+118
Revision
INT
Indicates interface revision number
base+119:134
SA1..8Position
REAL
Indicates position for eight SERCOS axes
base+135:142
IA1..4Position
REAL
Indicates position for four imaginary axes
base+143:150
RA1..4Position
REAL
indicates position for four remote axes
base+151:166
SA1..8Status
UDINT
Indicates status bits for each
SERCOS Axis
base+167:174
IA1..45Status
UDINT
Imaginary Axis
base+175:182
CS1..45Status
UDINT
Coordinated Set
base+183:190
FS1..45Status
UDINT
Indicates status bits for each Follower Set
base+191
USubNumEcho
INT
Echoes user SubNumber when
subroutine code complete
base+192
UAxisIDEcho
INT
Echoes user AxisID
base+193
UError
INT
Indicates user subroutine motion error
number
base+194
UReturn1
UDINT
Indicates user subroutine return value
(one integer)
base+196:199
UReturn2..3
REAL
Indicates user subroutine value
(two floats)
677
MMFI
678
31007523 12/2006
MMFS – Modicon Motion
Framework Subroutine Block
117
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the MMFS block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
680
Representation
681
679
MMFS
Short Description
Function
Description
This function block issues an MMFSTART subroutine using standard parameters
and returns. It can be used to execute any MMFSTART standard subroutine except
moves to CoordinatedSets. These subroutines provide a common interface to
SERCOS drives.
Related
Information
loadables.
680
31007523 12/2006
MMFS
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows an MMFS block.
ON starts subroutine
MMFSTART
4X register
subroutine executed
without error
table
block
address
subroutine executed
with error (see error
register)
not used
not used
Parameter
Descriptions
31007523 12/2006
table
length (19)
bad table length/
timeout/revision
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the subroutine. When this input
goes off, the function block is reset and can be
initiated again.
Top node
4x
INT, UINT
Middle node
4x
INT, UINT
define all the arguments and routines for a
generic subroutine call. The last two registers
are for state control.
Bottom node
4x
INT
681
MMFS
Registers
682
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top output
0x
None
Turned on when the subroutine call is
complete without error.
Note: Top and middle outputs are reset by the
top input being turned off.
Middle output
0x
None
Turned on when the subroutine call is
complete and an error is code is generated in
register 4xxx10.
Bottom output
0x
None
at 19.
Register
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Number of the subroutine to be executed
4xxxx1
Short
Axis id for the subroutine
4xxxx2
Unsigned
First parameter for the subroutine
4xxxx4
Unsigned
Second parameter for the subroutine
4xxxx6
Float
4xxxx8
Float
4xxx10
Short
Error code generated from the subroutine
4xxx11
Unsigned
First return value from the subroutine
4xxx13
Float
Second return value from the subroutine
4xxx15
Float
Third return value from the subroutine
4xxx17
Short
4xxx18
Short
31007523 12/2006
MOVE – Absolute Move
118
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the MOVE block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
684
Representation
685
683
MOVE
Short Description
Function
Description
This function block issues an MMFStart Immediate Absolute move on the axis
specified. The velocity and position are specified in the associated table.
Related
Information
loadables.
684
31007523 12/2006
MOVE
Representation
Symbol
The following diagram shows a MOVE block.
ON starts move
not used
not used
31007523 12/2006
MMFSTART
4X register
move started
without error
table
block
address
move not started
error (see error
register)
table
length (8)
bad table length/
revision
685
MOVE
Parameter
Descriptions
Registers
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x
None
ON initiates the incremental move. When this
input goes off, the function block is reset and
can be initiated again.
Top node
4x
INT, UINT
Middle node
4x
INT, UINT
define all the arguments for the configuration.
Bottom node
4x
INT
Top output
0x
None
Turned on when the move start is complete
without error.
Note: Top and middle outputs are reset by the
top input being turned off.
Middle output
0x
None
Turned on when the move is not started and
an error is code is generated in register
4xxxx5.
Bottom output
0x
None
at 8.
Register
686
Data Type
Description
4xxxxx
Short
Axis ID for the absolute move
4xxxx2
Float
Target position of the absolute move
4xxxx3
Float
Velocity of the absolute move
4xxxx5
Short
Error generated when attempting to start move
4xxxx6
Short
4xxxx7
Short
31007523 12/2006
MRTM:
Multi-Register Transfer Module
119
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MRTM.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
688
Representation
689
690
687
Short Description
Function
Description
The MRTM instruction is used to transfer blocks of holding registers from the
program table to the command block, a group of output registers. To verify each
block transfer, an echo of the data contained in the first holding register is returned
to an input register.
688
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
program
table
transfer
transfer complete
control
table
pointer ≥ table end
reset
MRTM
length: 1 to 27
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables the operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = one instruction block is transferred, table
pointer of control table is increased by the value
of "length"
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON =reset
program table
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x,
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First register of the program table. The digit 4 is
assumed as the most significant digit.
control table
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First register of the control table. The digit 4 is
assumed as the most significant digit.
INT, UINT
Number of registers moved from the program
table during each transfer, range: 1 to 127
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Instruction block is transferred to the command
block (stays on only for the remainder of the
current scan).
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = pointer value ≥ table end
689
Mode of
Functioning
690
The MRTM transfers contiguous blocks of up to 127 registers from a table of register
blocks to a block size holding register area. The MRTM function block controls the
operation of the module in the following manner:
If power is
applied to the...
Then ...
Top input
The function block is enabled for data transfers.
Note: On initial startup, power must be applied to the bottom input.
Middle input
The function block attempts to transfer one instruction block. Before a
transfer can occur, the echo register is evaluated. The most significant
bit (MSB) of the echo register is not evaluated just bits 0 through 14.
Echo mismatch is a condition that prohibits a transfer. If a transfer is
permitted, one instruction block is transferred form the table starting at
the table pointer.
The table pointer in the control table is then advanced. If the pointer’s
new value is equal to or greater than the table end, the bottom output is
turned on. A table pointer value less than the table end turns off the
output.
Bottom input
The function block resets. The table pointer in the control table is
reloaded with the start of commands value from the header of the
program table
31007523 12/2006
Parameter
Description
Increment Step
(MIddle Input)
When power is applied, this input attempts to transfer one instruction block. Before
a transfer can occur, the echo register is evaluated. The most significant bit (MSB)
of the echo register is not evaluated, just bits 0 through 14. Echo mismatch is a
condition that prohibits a transfer. If a transfer is permitted, one instruction block is
transferred from the program table starting at the table pointer. The table pointer in
the control table is then incremented by the value "Length" (displayed in the bottom
node).
Note: The MRTM function block is designed to accept fault indications from I/O
modules, which echo valid commands to the controller, but set a bit to indicate the
occurrence of a fault. This method of fault indication is common for motion products
and for most other I/O modules. If using a module that reports a fault condition in
any other way, especially if the echo involved is not an echo of a valid command,
special care must be taken when writing the error handler for the ladder logic to
ensure the fault is detected. Failure to do so may result in a lockup or some other
undesirable performance of the MRTM.
Parameter
Description
Reset Pointer
(Bottom Input)
31007523 12/2006
When power is applied to this input, the function block is reset. The table pointer in
the control table is reloaded with the start of commands value from the header of the
program table.
691
692
31007523 12/2006
MSPX (Seriplex)
120
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MSPX.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
694
Representation
695
693
MSPX (Seriplex)
Short Description
Function
Description
The MSPX reads and writes bits within the base unit’s registers.
The top node of the MSPX instruction represents the internal sub-function number.
This node can be assigned a decimal constant value of 32 or a 4xxxx register
containing the value of 32.
The middle node represents the starting 4xxxx register location for the SERIPLEXMOMENTUM interface base unit.
The bottom node is interpreted as a numeric offset from 3000 indicating the first
3xxxx input register assigned to the interface base unit. The bottom node value
specifies the location of the base unit's status register.
694
31007523 12/2006
MSPX (Seriplex)
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
32
run/stop bus
fault
register
error
MSPX
offset
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
The Block Enable/Disable input enables and
disables the operation of the MSPX block. When
the associated logic is TRUE the top input is
turned ON and the block's instructions are
executed. The values of the base unit's input and
output registers are not affected by the enabling
or disabling of the block.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
The Run/Stop Bus input regulates the operation
of the Seriplex bus through the run/halt bit within
the base unit's control register. The run/halt bit is
set to 1 when the associated logic is TRUE, and
cleared to 0 when the associated logic is FALSE.
The parameters of this input are not to be altered
while it is enabled or the run/halt bit will result in
a configuration fault.
695
MSPX (Seriplex)
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
32
(top node)
696
Data
Type
Meaning
INT,
UINT
Represents the internal sub-function number.
This node can be assigned a decimal constant
value of 32 or a 4xxxx register containing the
value of 32.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
Represents the starting 4xxxx register location
for the SERIPLEX-MOMENTUM interface base
unit.
offset
(bottom node)
3x
INT,
UINT
Interpreted as a numeric offset from 3000
indicating the first 3xxxx input register assigned
to the interface base unit. The bottom node value
specifies the location of the base unit's status
register.
Top output
0x
None
The Bus Running Indicator output reports
whether or not the Seriplex bus is running. If the
bus running bit is ON, the output is TRUE and the
Seriplex bus is operating normally, but, if the bus
running bit is OFF, the output will be FALSE.
Middle output
0x
None
The Fault output reports if the MSPX instruction
has experienced a fault condition other than a
configuration fault. This will occur if any of the
following status registers are ON: Bus fault (bit
3); MOMENTUM fault (bit 4); CDR error (bit 5).
The detailed description of the detected fault can
be determined by reading the base unit's status
register.
Bottom output
0x
None
The Config Error output indicates that a
configuration error has occurred, and its state is
explained in the base unit's status register. When
the config fault bit is ON the output becomes
TRUE indicating that an improper attempt was
made while writing to the base units control
register.
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
121
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MSTR.
What's in this
Chapter?
Topic
Short Description
31007523 12/2006
Page
698
Representation
699
702
Write MSTR Operation
706
READ MSTR Operation
708
Get Local Statistics MSTR Operation
710
Clear Local Statistics MSTR Operation
712
Write Global Data MSTR Operation
714
Read Global Data MSTR Operation
715
Get Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
716
Clear Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
718
Peer Cop Health MSTR Operation
720
Reset Option Module MSTR Operation
722
Read CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation
723
Write CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation
725
Modbus Plus Network Statistics
727
TCP/IP Ethernet Statistics
732
Run Time Errors
733
Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet Error Codes
734
SY/MAX-specific Error Codes
736
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes
738
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet
741
697
MSTR: Master
Short Description
Function
Description
PLCs that support networking communications capabilities over Modbus Plus and
Ethernet have a special MSTR (master) instruction with which nodes on the network
can initiate message transactions.
The MSTR instruction allows you to initiate one of 12 possible network
communications operations over the network.
z Read MSTR Operation
z Write MSTR Operation
z Get Local Statistics MSTR Operation
z Clear Local Statistics MSTR Operation
z Write Global Data MSTR Operation
z Read Global Data MSTR Operation
z Get Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
z Clear Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
z Peer Cop Health MSTR Operation
z Reset Option Module MSTR Operation
z Read CTE (Config Extension) MSTR Operation
z Write CTE (Config Extension) MSTR Operation
698
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
control
block
abort
error
data
area
complete
MSTR
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables selected MSTR operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = terminates active MSTR operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Note: Only available for M1E:
ON = TCP port will be held open
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Control block (first of several (networkdependant) contiguous holding registers)
data area
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Data area (source or destination
depending on selected operation)
INT
Length of data area (maximum number of
registers), range: 1 ... 100
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
ON while the instruction is active (echoes
state of the top input)
MIddle output
0x
None
ON if the MSTR operation is terminated
prior to completion (echoes state of the
middle input)
Bottom output
0x
None
699
MSTR: Master
Bottom Input
With 984LL exec. versions 1.20 and later, power is asserted to the bottom input of
the MSTR block. Along with the top enable input, this assertion causes the TCP
connection to remain open. Once the connection has been established, only
Modbus command and response packets are transmitted onto the Ethernet. The
repetition rate, however, cannot be specified. It transmits as fast as the scan and the
target served can accomodate. No dynamic changes to the control block are
accepted until the enable (top) input is pulsed.
984LL function block example for open connection operation
1
2
000007
400001
3
1
400021
2
MSTR
3
700
# 10
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
IEC MSTR
Function Block
A new feature has been added to IEC exec. versions 1.21 and later by setting a bit
in the Slot_ID of the EFB TCP_IP_ADR. Asserting this go-again bit, along with the
TCP/IP operation, bit causes the TCP connection to remain open. Once the
connection has been established, only Modbus command and response packets are
transmitted onto the Ethernet. The only difference is that the repetition rate cannot
be specified. It goes as fast as the scan and the target server can acomodate.
The Slot_ID of the EFB TCP_IP_ADR has extended usage:
z
Bit 0 = 0 MBP operation
Bit 0 = 1 TCP/IP operation
Bit 1 = 0 The TCP port will be closed after the transaction has completed
(as before).
Bit 1 = 1 The TCP port will be held open.
z
Bits 2 through 7 are reserved and must remain at 0.
z
z
z
Note: Map_idx = 0 for Momentum M1E processors
IEC EFB example for open connection operation: Register 400050 = 3 hex
FBI_1_2(1)
TCP_IP_ADDR
0
%400050
112
112
112
77
Map_idx
1
2
Slot_ID
AddrFld
Ip_B4
Ip_B3
Ip_B2
IpB1
FBI_1_3(2)
CREAD_REG
SLAVEREG
NO_REG REG_READ
AddrFld
STATUS
%400051
%400101
This feature is only usable for the following EFBs:
z CREAD_REG
z
z
z
z
CREADREG
CWRITE_REG
CWRITERREG
MBP_MSTR (needs to be always kept active: ENABLE=1)
Do not use this feature with the following EFBs
z READREG
z WRITEREG
z READ_REG
z WRITE_REG
31007523 12/2006
701
MSTR: Master
Mode of
Functioning
The MSTR instruction allows you to initiate one of 12 possible network
communications operations over the network. Each operation is designated by a
code.
Up to four MSTR instructions can be simultaneously active in a ladder logic program.
More than four MSTRs may be programmed to be enabled by the logic flow; as one
active MSTR block releases the resources it has been using and becomes
deactivated, the next MSTR operation encountered in logic can be activated.
Master
Operations
Certain MSTR operations are supported on some networks and not on others.
Code
Type of Operation
Modbus Plus
TCP/IP
Ethernet
SY/MAX
Ethernet
1
Write Data
x
x
x
2
Read Data
x
x
x
3
Get Local Statistics
x
x
-
4
Clear Local Statistics
x
x
-
5
Write Global Database
x
-
-
6
Read Global Database
x
-
-
7
Get Remote Statistics
x
x
-
8
Clear Remote Statistics
x
x
-
9
Peer Cop Health
x
-
-
10
Reset Option Module
-
x
x
11
Read CTE (config extension) -
x
x
12
Write CTE (config extension) -
x
x
Legend
702
x
supported
-
not supported
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of several (network-dependant)
holding registers that comprise the network control block.
The control block structure differs according to the network in use.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Note: You need to understand the routing procedures used by the network you are
using when you program an MSTR instruction. A full discussion of Modbus Plus
routing path structures is given in Modbus Plus Planning and Installtion Guide. If
TCP/IP or SY/MAX Ethernet routing is being implemented, it must be
accomplished via standard third-party Ethernet IP router products.
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
31007523 12/2006
The first of twelve contiguous 4x registers is entered in the top node. The remaining
eleven registers are implied:
Register
Content
Displayed
Identifies one of the nine MSTR operations legal for Modbus Plus
(1 ... 9)
First implied
Displays error status
Second implied
Displays length (number of registers transferred)
Third implied
Displays MSTR operation-dependent information
Fourth implied
The Routing 1 register, used to designate the address of the
destination node for a network transaction. The register display is
implemented physically for the Quantum PLCs
Fifth implied
The Routing 2 register
Sixth implied
Seventh implied
Eighth implied
Ninth implied
not applicable
Tenth implied
not applicable
Eleventh implied
not applicable
703
MSTR: Master
Routing 1
Register for
Quantum
Automation
Series PLCs
(Fourth Implied
Register)
To target a Modbus Plus Network Option module (NOM) in a Quantum PLC
backplane as the destination of an MSTR instruction, the value in the high byte
represents the physical slot location of the NOM, e.g. if the NOM resides in slot 7 in
the backplane, the high byte of routing register 1 would look like this:
1
2
3
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1... 8
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
High byte: indicating physical location (range 1 ... 16)
9 ... 16
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Destination address: binary value between 1 ... 64
Note: If you have created a logic program using an MSTR instruction for a 984 PLC
and want to port it to a Quantum Automation Series PLC without having to edit the
routing 1 register value, make sure that NOM #1 is installed in slot 1 of the Quantum
backplane (and if a NOM #2 is used, that it is installed in slot 2 of the backplane). If
you try to run the ported application with the NOMs in other slots without modifying
the register, an F001 status error will appear, indicating the wrong destination node.
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
704
The first of nine contiguous 4x registers is entered in the top node. The remaining
eight registers are implied.
Register
Content
Displayed
Identifies one of the nine MSTR operations legal for TCP/IP
(1 ... 4, 7, 8, 10 ... 12)
First implied
Second implied
Displays length (number of registers transferred)
Third implied
Displays MSTR operation-dependent information
Fourth implied
Low byte: slot address of the NOE module
High byte: MBP-to-Ethernet Transporter (MET) Map index
Fifth implied
Byte 4 of the 32-bit destination IP Address
Sixth implied
Seventh implied
Eighth implied
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
Data Area
(Middle Node)
The first of seven contiguous 4x registers is entered in the top node. The remaining
six registers are implied.
Register
Content
Displayed
Identifies one of the nine MSTR operations legal for SY/MAX
(1, 2, 10 ... 12)
First implied
Second implied
Displays Read/Write length (number of registers transferred)
Third implied
Displays Read/Write base address
Fourth implied
Low byte: slot address of the NOE module (e.g., slot 10 = 0A00, slot
6 = 0600)
High byte: MBP-to-Ethernet Transporter (MET) Map index
Fifth implied
Destination drop number (or set to FF hex)
Sixth implied
Terminator (set to FF hex)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in a group of contiguous
holding registers that comprise the data area. For operations that provide the
communication processor with data, such as a Write operation, the data area is the
source of the data. For operations that acquire data from the communication
processor, such as a Read operation, the data area is the destination for the data.
In the case of the Ethernet Read and Write CTE operations, the middle node stores
the contents of the Ethernet configuration extension table in a series of registers.
31007523 12/2006
705
MSTR: Master
Write MSTR Operation
Short
Description
An MSTR Write operation transfers data from a master source device to a specified
slave destination device on the network. Read and Write use one data master
transaction path and may be completed over multiple scans.
If you attempt to program the MSTR to Write its own station address, an error will be
generated in the first implied register of the MSTR control block. It is possible to
attempt a Write operation to a nonexistent register in the slave device. The slave will
detect this condition and report it, this may take several scans.
Network
Implementation
The MSTR Write operation can be implemented on the Modbus Plus, TCP/IP
Ethernet, and SY/MAX Ethernet networks.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Write operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top node) contain
the information that differs depending on the type of network you are using.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
706
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
1 = Write
First implied
Error status
Displays a hex value indicating an MSTR error,
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Number of registers to be sent to slave
Third implied
Slave device data
area
Specifies starting 4x register in the slave to be
written to (1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth ... Eighth
implied
Routing 1 ... 5
Designates the first ... fifth routing path addresses,
respectively; the last nonzero byte in the routing
path is the destination device
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
1 = Write
First implied
Error status
Displays a hex value indicating an MSTR error:
Exception code + 3000: Exception response,
where response size is correct
4001: Exception response, where response size is
incorrect
4001: Read/Write
Second implied
Length
Third implied
Slave device data
area
written to (1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth implied
Low byte
Slot address of the network adapter module
Fifth ... eighth
implied
Destination
Each register contains one byte of the 32-bit IP
address
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
1 = Write
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Third implied
Slave device data
area
written to (1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth implied
Slot ID
Low byte: slot address of the network adapter
module
Fourth implied
Slot ID
High byte: Destination drop number
Fifth ... eighth
implied
Terminator
FF hex
707
MSTR: Master
READ MSTR Operation
Short
Description
An MSTR Read operation transfers data from a specified slave source device to a
master destination device on the network. Read and Write use one data master
transaction path and may be completed over multiple scans.
If you attempt to program the MSTR to Read its own station address, an error will
be generated in the first implied register of the MSTR control block. It is possible to
attempt a Read operation to a nonexistent register in the slave device. The slave will
detect this condition and report it, this may take several scans.
Network
Implementation
The MSTR Read operation can be implemented on the Modbus Plus, TCP/IP
Ethernet, and SY/MAX Ethernet networks.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Read operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top node) contain
the information that differs depending on the type of network you are using.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
708
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
2 = Read
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Number of registers to be read from slave
Third implied
Slave device data
area
Specifies starting 4x register in the slave to be read
from(1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth ... Eighth
implied
Routing 1 ... 5
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP
EthernetEthernet
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
2 = Read
First implied
Error status
Displays a hex value indicating an MSTR error:
Exception code + 3000: Exception response,
where response size is correct
4001: Exception response, where response size is
incorrect
4001: Read/Write
Second implied
Length
Third implied
Slave device data
area
from (1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth implied
High byte
Fifth ... eighth
implied
Destination
address
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
2 = Read
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Third implied
Slave device data
area
from (1 = 40001, 49 = 40049)
Fourth implied
Slot ID
module
Fourth implied
Slot ID
High byte: Destination drop number
Fifth ... eighth
implied
Terminator
FF hex
709
MSTR: Master
Get Local Statistics MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Get Local Statistics operation obtains information related to the local node,
where the MSTR has been programmed. This operation takes one scan to complete
and does not require a data master transaction path.
Network
Implementation
The Get Local Statistics operation (type 3 in the displayed register of the top node)
can be implemented for Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet networks. It is not used
for SY/MAX Ethernet.
The following network statistics are available.
Modbus Plus network statistics
z TCP/IP Ethernet network statistics
z
Control Block
Utilization
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
710
In a Get local statistics operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top
node) contain the information that differs depending on the type of network you are
using.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
3
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Starting from offset, the number of words of
statistics from the local processor’s statistics table ;
the length must be > 0 ≤ data area
Third implied
Offset
An offset value relative to the first available word in
the local processor’s statistics table; if the offset is
specified as 1, the function obtains statistics starting
with the second word in the table
Fourth implied
Routing 1
If this is the second of two local nodes, set the high
byte to a value of 1
Note: If your PLC does not support Modbus Plus
option modules (S985s or NOMs), the fourth implied
register is not used.
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
3
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
statistics from the local processor’s statistics table ;
Third implied
Offset
the local processor’s statistics table, if the offset is
Fourth implied
Slot ID
Low byte: Slot address of the network adapter
module
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
Not applicable
711
MSTR: Master
Clear Local Statistics MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Clear local statistics operation clears statistics relative to the local node (where
the MSTR has been programmed). This operation takes one scan to complete and
does not require a data master transaction path.
Note: When you issue the Clear Local Statistics operation, only words 13 ... 22 in
the statistics table are cleared.
Network
Implementation
The Clear Local Statistics operation (type 4 in the displayed register of the top node)
can be implemented for Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet networks. It is not used
for SY/MAX Ethernet.
z
Control Block
Utilization
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
In a Clear local statistics operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top
node) differ according to the type of network in use.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type
4
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Reserved
Third implied
Fourth implied
712
Content
Reserved
Routing 1
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Content
Displayed
Operation type
4
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Reserved
Third implied
Reserved
Fourth implied
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
31007523 12/2006
Function
Slot ID
Low byte: Slot address of the network adapter
module
Reserved
713
MSTR: Master
Write Global Data MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Write global data operation transfers data to the communications processor in
the current node so that it can be sent over the network when the node gets the
token. All nodes on the local network link can receive this data. This operation takes
one scan to complete and does not require a data master transaction path.
Network
Implementation
The Write global data operation (type 5 in the displayed register of the top node) can
be implemented only for Modbus Plus networks.
Control Block
Utilization
The registers in the MSTR control block (the top node) are used in a Write global
data operation
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type
5
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Specifies the number of registers from the data area
to be sent to the comm processor; the value of the
length must be ≤ 32 and must not exceed the size of
the data area
Third implied
Fourth implied
714
Content
Reserved
Routing 1
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Read Global Data MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Read global data operation gets data from the communications processor in
any node on the local network link that is providing global data. This operation may
require multiple scans to complete if global data is not currently available from the
requested node. If global data is available, the operation completes in a single scan.
No master transaction path is required.
Network
Implementation
The Read global data operation (type 6 in the displayed register of the top node) can
Control Block
Utilization
The registers in the MSTR control block (the top node) are used in a Read global
data operation
31007523 12/2006
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
6
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Specifies the number of words of global data to be
requested from the comm processor designated by
the routing 1 parameter; the value of the length must
be > 0 ≤ 32 and must not exceed the size of the data
area
Third implied
Available words
Contains the number of words available from the
requested node; the value is automatically updated
by internal software
Fourth implied
Routing 1
The low byte specifies the address of the node
whose global data are to be returned (a value
between 1 ... 64); if this is the second of two local
nodes, set the high byte to a value of 1
option modules (S985s or NOMs), the high byte of
the fourth implied register is not used and the
highbyte bits must all be set to 0.
715
MSTR: Master
Get Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Get Remote Statistics operation obtains information relative to remote nodes on
the network. This operation may require multiple scans to complete and does not
require a master data transaction path.
Network
Implementation
The Get Remote Statistics operation (type 7 in the displayed register of the top
node) can be implemented for Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet networks. It is not
used for SY/MAX Ethernet.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Get remote statistics operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top
node) contain the information that differs depending on the type of network you are
using.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
7
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
Starting from an offset, the number of words of
statistics to be obtained from a remote node; the
length must be > 0 ≤ total number of statistics
available (54) and must not exceed the size of the
data area
Third implied
Offset
Specifies an offset value relative to the first
available word in the statistics table, the value must
not exceed the number of statistic words available.
Fourth ... Eighth
implied
Routing 1 ... 5
path is the destination device.
The remote comm processor always returns its complete statistics table when a
request is made, even if the request is for less than the full table. The MSTR
instruction then copies only the amount of words you have requested to the
designated 4x registers.
716
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
7
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Length
statistics from the local processor’s statistics table;
Third implied
Offset
the local processor’s statistics table, if the offset is
Fourth implied
Low byte
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
Destination
address
717
MSTR: Master
Clear Remote Statistics MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Clear remote statistics operation clears statistics related to a remote network
node from the data area in the local node. This operation may require multiple scans
to complete and uses a single data master transaction path.
Note: When you issue the Clear Remote Statistics operation, only words 13 ... 22
in the statistics table are cleared
Network
Implementation
The Clear remote statistics operation (type 8 in the displayed register of the top
node) can be implemented for Modbus Plus and TCP/IP Ethernet networks. It is not
used for SY/MAX Ethernet.
z
Control Block
Utilization
Control Block for
Modbus Plus
In a Clear remote statistics operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the
top node) contain information that differs according to the type of network in use.
z Modbus Plus
z TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type
8
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Reserved
Third implied
Fourth ... Eighth
implied
718
Content
Reserved
Routing 1 ... 5
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
8
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Not applicable
Third implied
31007523 12/2006
Fourth implied
Low byte
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
Destination
address
719
MSTR: Master
Peer Cop Health MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The peer cop health operation reads selected data from the peer cop
communications health table and loads that data to specified 4x registers in state
RAM. The peer cop communications health table is 12 words long, and the words
are indexed via this MSTR operation as words 0 ... 11.
Network
Implementation
The peer cop health operation (type 9) in the displayed register of the top node) can
Control Block
Utilization
The registers in the MSTR control block (the top node) are used in a Peer cop health
operation:
Peer Cop
Communications
Health Status
Information
720
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
9
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Data size
Number of words requested from peer cop table
(range 1 ... 12)
Third implied
Index
First word from the table to be read (range 0 ... 11,
where 0 = the first word in the peer cop table and 11
= the last word in the table)
Fourth implied
Routing 1
The peer cop communications health table comprises 12 contiguous registers that
can be indexed in an MSTR operation as words 0 ... 11. Each bit in each of the table
words is used to represent an aspect of communications health relative to a specific
node on the Modbus Plus network.
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Bit-to-Network
Node
Relationship
The bits in words 0 ... 3 represent the health of the global input communication
expected from nodes 1 ... 64. The bits in words 4 ... 7 represent the health of the output
from a specific node. The bits in words 8 ... 11 represent the health of the input to a
specific node:
Type of Status
Global Input
Word Index
0
1
2
3
Specific Output
4
5
6
7
Specific Input
8
9
10
11
State of a Peer
Cop Health Bit
Bit-to-network Node Relationship
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
The state of a peer cop health bit reflects the current communication status of its
associated node. A health bit is set when its associated node accepts inputs for its
peer copped input data group or hears that another node has accepted specific output
data from the its peer copped output data group. A health bit is cleared when no
communication has occurred for its associated data group within the configured peer
cop health time-out period.
All health bits are cleared when the Put Peer Cop interface command is executed at
PLC start-up time. Table values are not valid until at least one full token rotation cycle
has been completed after execution of the Put Peer Cop interface command. The
health bit for a given node is always zero when its associated peer cop entry is null.
31007523 12/2006
721
MSTR: Master
Reset Option Module MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Reset option module operation causes a Quantum NOE option module to enter
a reset cycle to reset its operational environment.
Network
Implementation
The Reset option module operation (type 10 in the displayed register of the top
node) can be implemented for TCP/IP and SY/MAX Ethernet networks, accessed
via the appropriate network adapter. Modbus Plus networks do not use this
operation.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Reset option module operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top
node) differ according to the type of network in use.
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type 10
Content
First implied
Error status
Second implied
Not applicable
when relevant
Third implied
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
Fourth implied
Slot ID
Number displayed in the low byte, in the range 1 ...
16 indicating the slot in the local backplane where
the option module resides
Fifth ... Eighth implied
Not applicable
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type 10
First implied
Error status
Second implied
Not applicable
Content
when relevant
Third implied
722
Fourth implied
Slot ID
Fifth ... Eighth implied
Not applicable
module
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Read CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Read CTE operation reads a given number of bytes from the Ethernet
configuration extension table to the indicated buffer in PLC memory. The bytes to be
read begin at a byte offset from the beginning of the CTE. The content of the
Ethernet CTE table is displayed in the middle node of the MSTR block.
Network
Implementation
The Read CTE operation (type 11 in the displayed register of the top node) can be
implemented for TCP/IP and SY/MAX Ethernet networks, accessed via the
appropriate network adapter. Modbus Plus networks do not use this operation.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Read CTE operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top node)
differ according to the type of network in use.
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
11
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Not applicable
Third implied
Fourth implied
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
31007523 12/2006
Map index
Either a value displayed in the high byte of the
register or not used
Slot ID
Not applicable
723
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for SY/MAX Ethernet
Register
Function
Displayed
Operation type
11
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Data Size
Number of words transferred
Third implied
Base Address
Byte offset in PLC register structure indicating
where the CTE bytes will be written
Fourth implied
Low byte
Slot address of the NOE module
High byte
Terminator (FF hex)
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
CTE Display
Implementation
(Middle Node)
Content
Not applicable
The values in the Ethernet configuration extension table (CTE) are displayed in a
series of registers in the middle node of the MSTR instruction when a Read CTE
operation is implemented. The middle node contains the first of 11 contiguous 4x
registers.
The registers display the following CTE data.
Parameter
Register
Content
Frame type
Displayed
1 = 802.3
2 = Ethernet
IP address
First implied
First byte of the IP address
Second implied
Second byte of the IP address
Third implied
Third byte of the IP address
Fourth implied
Subnetwork mask Fifth implied
Gateway
724
Fourth byte of the IP address
Hi word
Sixth implied
Low word
Seventh implied
First byte of the gateway
Eighth implied
Second byte of the gateway
Ninth implied
Third byte of the gateway
Tenth implied
Fourth byte of the gateway
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Write CTE (Config Extension Table) MSTR Operation
Short
Description
The Write CTE operation writes the configuration CTE table from the data specified
in the middle node to an indicated Ethernet configuration extension table or a
specified slot.
Network
Implementation
The Write CTE operation (type 12 in the displayed register of the top node) can be
implemented for TCP/IP and SY/MAX Ethernet networks, via the appropriate
network adapter. Modbus Plus networks do not use this operation.
Control Block
Utilization
In a Write CTE operation, the registers in the MSTR control block (the top node)
differ according to the type of network in use.
z TCP/IP Ethernet
z SY/MAX Ethernet
Control Block for
TCP/IP Ethernet
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
12
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Not applicable
Third implied
Fourth implied
Fifth ... Eighth
implied
31007523 12/2006
Map index
Either a value displayed in the high byte of the
register or not used
Slot ID
Not applicable
725
MSTR: Master
Control Block for
SY/MAX Ethernet
CTE Display
Implementation
(Middle Node)
Register
Function
Content
Displayed
Operation type
12
First implied
Error status
when relevant
Second implied
Data Size
Number of words transferred
Third implied
Base Address
Byte offset in PLC register structure indicating
where the CTE bytes will be written
Fourth implied
Low byte
Slot address of the NOE module
High byte
Destination drop number
Fifth implied
Terminator
FF hex
Sixth ... Eighth
implied
Not applicable
The values in the Ethernet configuration extension table (CTE) are displayed in a
series of registers in the middle node of the MSTR instruction when a Write CTE
operation is implemented. The middle node contains the first of 11 contiguous 4x
registers.
The registers are used to transfer the following CTE data.
Parameter
Register
Content
Frame type
Displayed
1 = 802.3
2 = Ethernet
First implied
First byte of the IP address
Second implied
Second byte of the IP address
IP address
Third implied
Third byte of the IP address
Fourth implied
Fourth byte of the IP address
Subnetwork mask Fifth implied
Gateway
726
Hi word
Sixth implied
Low word
Seventh implied
First byte of the gateway
Eighth implied
Second byte of the gateway
Ninth implied
Third byte of the gateway
Tenth implied
Fourth byte of the gateway
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Modbus Plus
Network
Statistics
The following table shows the statistics available on the Modbus Plus network. You
may acquire this information by using the appropriate MSTR operation or by using
Modbus function code 8.
Note: When you issue the Clear local or Clear remote statistics operations, only
words 13 ... 22 are cleared.
Word
Bits
00
01
Meaning
Node type ID
0
Unknown node type
1
PLC node
2
Modbus bridge node
3
Host computer node
4
Bridge Plus node
5
Peer I/O node
0 ... 11
Software version number in hex (to read, strip bits 12-15 from
word)
12 ... 14
Reserved
15
Defines Word 15 error counters (see Word 15)
Most significant bit defines use of error counters in Word 15.
Least significant half of upper byte, plus lower byte, contain
software
version:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Software version number (in HEX)
Word 15 error counter (see word 15)
02
31007523 12/2006
Network address for this station
727
MSTR: Master
Word
Bits
Meaning
0
Power up state
03
MAC state variable:
1
Monitor offline state
2
Duplicate offline state
3
Idle state
4
Use token state
5
Work response state
6
Pass token state
7
Solicit response state
8
Check pass state
9
Claim token state
10
Claim response state
04
Peer status (LED code); provides status of this unit relative to
the network:
0
Monitor link operation
32
Normal link operation
64
Never getting token
96
Sole station
128
Duplicate station
05
Token pass counter; increments each time this station gets the
token
06
07
Data master failed during token ownership bit map
HI
Program master failed during token ownership bit map
08
LO
Data master token owner work bit map
HI
Program master token owner work bit map
09
LO
Data slave token owner work bit map
HI
Program slave token owner work bit map
10
HI
Data slave/get slave command transfer request bit map
11
LO
Program master/get master rsp transfer request bit map
HI
Program slave/get slave command transfer request bit map
LO
Program master connect status bit map
HI
Program slave automatic logout request bit map
12
13
728
Token rotation time in ms
LO
LO
Pretransmit deferral error counter
HI
Receive buffer DMA overrun error counter
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Word
Bits
Meaning
14
LO
Repeated command received counter
HI
Frame size error counter
15
If Word 1 bit 15 is not set, Word 15 has the following meaning:
LO
HI
Receiver collision-abort error counter
Receiver alignment error counter
If Word 1 bit 15 is set, Word 15 has the following meaning:
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
31007523 12/2006
LO
Cable A framing error
HI
Cable B framing error
LO
Receiver CRC error counter
HI
Bad packet-length error counter
LO
Bad link-address error counter
HI
Transmit buffer DMA-underrun error counter
LO
Bad internal packet length error counter
HI
Bad MAC function code error counter
LO
Communication retry counter
HI
Communication failed error counter
LO
Good receive packet success counter
HI
No response received error counter
LO
Exception response received error counter
HI
Unexpected path error counter
LO
Unexpected response error counter
HI
Forgotten transaction error counter
LO
Active station table bit map, nodes 1 ... 8
HI
Active station table bit map, nodes 9 ...16
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
Token station table bit map, nodes 1 ... 8
HI
LO
HI
729
MSTR: Master
Word
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
730
Bits
Meaning
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
Global data present table bit map, nodes 1 ... 8
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
Global data present table map, nodes 49 ... 56
HI
LO
Receive buffer in use bit map, buffer 1-8
HI
Receive buffer in use bit map, buffer 9 ... 16
LO
HI
LO
HI
Station management command processed initiation counter
LO
Data master output path 1 command initiation counter
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
Data slave input path 41 command processed counter
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Word
Bits
46
LO
Program master output path 81 command initiation counter
HI
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
LO
HI
LO
Program master command initiation counter
HI
LO
HI
LO
Program slave input path C1 command processed counter
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
731
MSTR: Master
TCP/IP Ethernet
Statistics
A TCP/IP Ethernet board responds to Get Local Statistics and Set Local Statistics
commands with the following information:
Word
Meaning
00 ... 02
MAC address, e.g., if the MAC address is 00 00 54 00 12 34, it is displayed as
follows:
03
04 and 05
Word
Content
00
00 00
01
00 54
02
34 12
Board status
Meaning
0x0001
Running
0x4000
APPI LED (1=ON, 0 = OFF)
0x8000
Link LED
Number of receiver interrupts
06 and 07
Number of transmitter interrupts
08 and 09
Transmit-timeout error count
10 and 11
Collision-detect error count
12 and 13
Missed packets
14 and 15
Memory error count
16 and 17
Number of times driver has restarted lance
18 and 19
Receive framing error count
20 and 21
Receiver overflow error count
22 and 23
Receive CRC error count
24 and 25
Receive buffer error count
26 and 27
Transmit buffer error count
28 and 29
Transmit silo underflow count
30 and 31
Late collision count
32 and 33
Lost carrier count
34 and 35
Number of retries
36 and 37
IP address, e.g., if the IP address is 198.202.137.113 (or c6 CA 89 71), it is
displayed as follows:
Word
732
Content
36
89 71
37
C6 CA
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Run Time Errors
Runtime Errors
If an error occurs during a MSTR operation, a hexadecimal error code will be
displayed in the first implied register in the control block (the top node).
Function error codes are network-specific.
z Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet Error Codes
z SY/MAX-specific Error Codes
z TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes
z CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
733
MSTR: Master
Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet Error Codes
Form of the
Function Error
Code
Hexadecimal
Error Code
734
The form of the function error code for Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet
transactions is Mmss, where
z M represents the major code
z m represents the minor code
z ss represents a subcode
Hex Error Code
Meaning
1001
User has aborted the MSTR element
2001
An unsupported operation type has been specified in the control block
2002
One or more control block parameter has been changed while the MSTR
element is active (applies only to operations that take multiple scans to
complete). Control block parameters may be changed only when the
MSTR element is not active.
2003
Invalid value in the length field of the control block
2004
Invalid value in the offset field of the control block
2005
Invalid values in the length and offset fields of the control block
2006
Invalid slave device data area
2007
Invalid slave device network area
2008
Invalid slave device network routing
2009
Route equal to your own address
200A
Attempting to obtain more global data words than available
30ss
Modbus slave exception response
4001
Inconsistent Modbus slave response
5001
Inconsistent network response
6mss)
Routing failure
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
ss HEX Value in
Error Code 30ss
ss Hex Value in
Error Code 6mss
The ss subfield in error code 30ss is:
ss Hex Value
Meaning
01
Slave device does not support the requested operation
02
Nonexistent slave device registers requested
03
Invalid data value requested
04
Reserved
05
Slave has accepted long-duration program command
06
Function can’t be performed now: a long-duration command in effect
07
Slave rejected long-duration program command
08 ... 255
Reserved
The m subfield in error code 6mss is an index into the routing information indicating
where an error has been detected (a value of 0 indicates the local node, a 2 the
second device on the route, etc.).
The ss subfield in error code 6mss is:
31007523 12/2006
ss Hex Value
Meaning
01
No response received
02
Program access denied
03
Node off-line and unable to communicate
04
Exception response received
05
Router node data paths busy
06
Slave device down
07
Bad destination address
08
Invalid node type in routing path
10
Slave has rejected the command
20
Initiated transaction forgotten by slave device
40
Unexpected master output path received
80
Unexpected response received
F001
Wrong destination node specified for the MSTR operation
735
MSTR: Master
SY/MAX-specific Error Codes
Types or Errors
Three additional types of errors may be reported in the MSTR instruction when SY/
MAX Ethernet is being used.
The error codes have the following designations:
71xx errors: Errors detected by the remote SY/MAX device
z 72xx errors: Errors detected by the serve
z 73xx errors: Errors detected by the Quantum translator
z
Hexadecimal
Error Code SY/
MAX-specific
736
HEX Error Code SY/MAX-specific:
Hex Error Code
Meaning
7101
Illegal opcode detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7103
Illegal address detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7109
Attempt to write a read-only register detected by the remote SY/MAX
device
710F
Receiver overflow detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7110
Invalid length detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7111
Remote device inactive, not communicating (occurs after retries and
time-out have been exhausted) detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7113
Invalid parameter on a read operation detected by the remote SY/MAX
device
711D
Invalid route detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7149
Invalid parameter on a write operation detected by the remote SY/MAX
device
714B
Illegal drop number detected by the remote SY/MAX device
7201
Illegal opcode detected by the SY/MAX server
7203
Illegal address detected by the SY/MAX server
7209
Attempt to write to a read-only register detected by the SY/MAX server
720F
Receiver overflow detected by the SY/MAX server
7210
Invalid length detected by the SY/MAX server
7211
Remote device inactive, not communicating (occurs after retries and
time-out have been exhausted) detected by the SY/MAX server
7213
Invalid parameter on a read operation detected by the SY/MAX server
721D
Invalid route detected by the SY/MAX server
7249
Invalid parameter on a write operation detected by the SY/MAX server
724B
Illegal drop number detected by the SY/MAX server
7301
Illegal opcode in an MSTR block request by the Quantum translator
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
Hex Error Code
Meaning
7303
Read/Write QSE module status (200 route address out of range)
7309
Attempt to write to a read-only register when performing a status write
(200 route)
731D
Invalid rout detected by Quantum translator
Valid routes are:
z dest_drop, 0xFF
z 200, dest_drop, 0xFF
z 100+drop, dest_drop, 0xFF
All other routing values generate an error
734B
One of the following errors has occurred:
z No CTE (configuration extension) table was configured
z No CTE table entry was created for the QSE Module slot number
z No valid drop was specified
z The QSE Module was not reset after the CTE was created
Note: After writing and configuring the CTE and downloading it to the
QSE Module, you must reset the QSE Module to make the changes
take effect.
z When using an MSTR instruction, no valid slot or drop was specified
31007523 12/2006
737
MSTR: Master
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes
Error in an MSTR
Routine
An error in an MSTR routine over TCP/IP Ethernet may produce one of the following
errors in the MSTR control block.
The form of the code is Mmss, where
M represents the major code
z m represents the minor code
z ss represents a subcode
z
Hexadecimal
Error Code for
MSTR Routine
over TCP/IP
Ethernet
ss Hex Value in
Error Code 30ss
738
Hex Error Code
Meaning
1001
User has aborted the MSTR element
2001
An unsupported operation type has been specified in the control block
2002
One or more control block parameter has been changed while the MSTR
element is active (applies only to operations that take multiple scans to
complete). Control block parameters may be changed only when the
MSTR element is not active
2003
Invalid value in the length field of the control block
2004
Invalid value in the offset field of the control block
2005
Invalid values in the length and offset fields of the control block
2006
Invalid slave device data area
3000
Generic Modbus fail code
30ss
Modbus slave exception response
4001
Inconsistent Modbus slave response
The ss subfield in error code 30ss is:
ss Hex Value
Meaning
01
Slave device does not support the requested operation
02
Nonexistent slave device registers requested
03
Invalid data value requested
04
Reserved
05
Slave has accepted long-duration program command
06
Function can’t be performed now: a long-duration command in effect
07
Slave rejected long-duration program command
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
HEX Error Code
TCP/IP Ethernet
Network
31007523 12/2006
An error on the TCP/IP Ethernet network itself may produce one of the following
errors in the MSTR control block.
Hex Error Code
Meaning
5004
Interrupted system call
5005
I/O error
5006
No such address
5009
The socket descriptor is invalid
500C
Not enough memory
500D
Permission denied
5011
Entry exists
5016
An argument is invalid
5017
An internal table has run out of space
5020
The connection is broken
5023
This operation would block and the socket is nonblocking
5024
The socket is nonblocking and the connection cannot be completed
5025
The socket is nonblocking and a previous connection attempt has not yet
completed
5026
Socket operation on a nonsocket
5027
The destination address is invalid
5028
Message too long
5029
Protocol wrong type for socket
502A
Protocol not available
502B
Protocol not supported
502C
Socket type not supported
502D
Operation not supported on socket
502E
Protocol family not supported
502F
Address family not supported
5030
Address is already in use
5031
Address not available
5032
Network is down
5033
Network is unreachable
5034
Network dropped connection on reset
5035
The connection has been aborted by the peer
5036
The connection has been reset by the peer
5037
An internal buffer is required, but cannot be allocated
5038
The socket is already connected
739
MSTR: Master
Hex Error Code
740
Meaning
5039
The socket is not connected
503A
Can’t send after socket shutdown
503B
Too many references; can’t splice
503C
Connection timed out
503D
The attempt to connect was refused
5040
Host is down
5041
The destination host could not be reached from this node
5042
Directory not empty
5046
NI_INIT returned -1
5047
The MTU is invalid
5048
The hardware length is invalid
5049
The route specified cannot be found
504A
Collision in select call; these conditions have already been selected by
another task
504B
The task id is invalid
F001
In Reset mode
31007523 12/2006
MSTR: Master
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/IP Ethernet
CTE Error Codes
for SY/MAX and
TCP/IP Ethernet
31007523 12/2006
HEX Error Code MSTR routine over TCP/IP Ethernet:
Hex Error Code
Meaning
7001
The is no Ethernet configuration extension
7002
The CTE is not available for access
7003
The offset is invalid
7004
The offset + length is invalid
7005
Bad data field in the CTE
741
MSTR: Master
742
31007523 12/2006
122
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MU16.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
744
Representation
745
743
Short Description
Function
Description
744
The MU16 instruction performs signed or unsigned multiplication on the 16-bit
values in the top and middle nodes, then posts the product in two contiguous holding
registers in the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
max. value: 65535
active
value 1
value 2
max. value: 65535
sign / unsign operation
MU16
product
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables value 1 x value 2
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Multiplicand, can be displayed explicitly as
an integer (range 1 ... 65 535, enter e.g.
#65535) or stored in a register
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Multiplier, can be displayed explicitly as an
register
product
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
displayed register contains half of the
product and the implied register contains
the other half
Top output
0x
None
745
746
31007523 12/2006
MUL: Multiply
123
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction MUL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
748
Representation
749
Example
750
747
MUL: Multiply
Short Description
Function
Description
748
The MUL instruction multiplies unsigned value 1 (its top node) by unsigned value 2
(its middle node) and stores the product in two contiguous holding registers in the
bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
MUL: Multiply
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
value 1
max. value: 999 -16-bit PLC
max. value: 9999 - 24-bit PLC
max. value: 65535 - *PLC
value 2
MUL
result
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Meaning
Type
Top input
0x, 1x
None ON = value 1 multiplied by value 2
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
UINT Multiplicand, can be displayed explicitly as an integer
(range 1 ... 9 999) or stored in a register
Max. Value: 999 -16-bit PLC
Max. Value: 9999 - 24-bit PLC
Max. Value: 65535 - *PLC
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
UINT Multiplier, can be displayed explicitly as an integer
(range 1 ... 9 999) or stored in a register
Max. Value: 999 -16-bit PLC
Max. Value: 9999 - 24-bit PLC
Max. Value: 65535 - *PLC
result
(bottom node)
4x
UINT Product (first of two contiguous holding registers;
displayed: high-order digits; implied: low-order digits)
Top output
0x
None Echoes the state of the top input
749
MUL: Multiply
Example
Product of
Instruction MUL
750
For example, if value 1 = 8 000 and value 2 = 2, the product is 16 000. The displayed
register contains the value 0001 (the high-order half of the product), and implied
register contains the value 6 000 (the low-order half of the product).
31007523 12/2006
NBIT: Bit Control
124
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction NBIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
752
Representation
753
751
NBIT: Bit Control
Short Description
Function
Description
The normal bit (NBIT) instruction lets you control the state of a bit from a register by
specifying its associated bit number in the bottom node. The bits being controlled
are similar to coils, when a bit is turned ON, it stays ON until a control signal turns it
OFF.
Note: The NBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement
as 0x-referenced coils do. An NBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a
network and it can be placed to the left of other logic nodes on the same rungs of
the ladder.
752
31007523 12/2006
NBIT: Bit Control
Representation
Symbol
set / clear bit
active
register #
bit number to set (1 - 16)
NBIT
(1 ... 16)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = sets the specified bit to 1
OFF = clears the specified bit to 0
register #
(top node)
4x
WORD
Holding register whose bit pattern is being
controlled
INT, UINT
Indicates which one of the 16 bits is being
controlled
None
Echoes the state of the top input:
ON = top input ON and specified bit set to 1
OFF = top input OFF and specified bit set to 0
bit #
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
753
NBIT: Bit Control
754
31007523 12/2006
125
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction NCBT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
756
Representation
757
755
Short Description
Function
Description
756
The normally closed bit (NCBT) instruction lets you sense the logic state of a bit in
a register by specifying its associated bit number in the bottom node. The bit is
representative of an N.C contact. It passes power from the top output when the
specified bit is OFF and the top input is ON.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
enable
zero bit
register #
bit number to test
(1 - 16)
NCBT
bit #
(1 ... 16)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables bit sensing
register #
(top node)
3x, 4x
WORD
Register whose bit pattern is being used to
represent N.C. contacts
INT, UINT
(Indicates which one of the 16 bits is being
sensed
None
ON = top input is ON and specified bit is OFF
(logic state 0)
bit #
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
757
758
31007523 12/2006
126
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction NOBT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
760
Representation
761
759
Short Description
Function
Description
760
The normally open bit (NOBT) instruction lets you sense the logic state of a bit in a
register by specifying its associated bit number in the bottom node. The bit is
representative of an N.O contact.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
bit sense
register #
bit number to test
(1 ... 16)
NOBT
bit #
(1 ... 16)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables bit sensing
register #
(top node)
3x, 4x
WORD
Register whose bit pattern is being used to
represent N.O. contacts
INT, UINT
(Indicates which one of the 16 bits is being
sensed
None
ON = top input is ON and specified bit is
ON (logic state 1)
bit #
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
0x
761
762
31007523 12/2006
NOL: Network Option Module
for Lonworks
127
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction NOL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
764
Representation
765
Detailed Description
766
763
Short Description
Function
Requirements
The following steps are necessary before using this instruction:
Step
1
Action
Add loadable NSUP.exe to the controller’s configuration
Note: This loadable needs only be loaded once to support multiple loadables,
such as ECS.exe and XMIT.exe.
CAUTION
The outputs of the instruction turn on, regardless of the input states
When the NSUP loadable is not installed or is installed after the NOL loadable or
is installed in a Quantum PLC with an executive < V2.0, all three outputs turn on,
regardless of the input states.
Step
2
Function
Description
764
Action
Unpack and install the DX Loadable NOL. For more information, see p. 49.
The NOL instruction is provided to facilitate the movement of the large amount of
data between the NOL module and the controller register space. The NOL Module
is mapped for 16 input registers (3X) and 16 output registers (4X). Of these
registers, two input and two output registers are for handshaking between the NOL
Module and the instruction. The remaining fourteen input and fourteen output
registers are used to transport the data.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
function #
re - sync
complete
register
block
error
NOL
count
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Enables the NOL function
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = Initialize: causes the instruction to resync with the module
function #
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT, Function number selects the function of the
WORD
NOL block
Function 0 transfers data to/from the module.
Any other function number yields an error.
register block
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT, Register block (first of 16 contiguous registers
WORD
count
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT Total number of registers required by the
instruction
Top output
0x
None
ON = instruction enabled and no error
Middle output
0x
None
New data
Set for one sweep when the entire data block
from the module has been written to the
register area.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = Error
765
Register Block
(Middle Node)
This block provides the registers for configuration and status information, the
registers for the health status bits and the registers for the actual data of the
Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs).
Register Block
Register
Configuration and Status
information
Content
Displayed and first implied I/O Map input base (3x)
Second and third implied
I/O Map output base (4x)
Fourth implied
Enable health bits
Fifth implied
Number of input registers
Sixth implied
Number of output registers
Seventh implied
Number of discrete input registers
Eighth implied
Number of discrete output registers
Ninth implied
Config checksum (CRC)
10th implied
NOL version
11th implied
Module firmware version
12th implied
NOL DX version
13th implied
Module DX version
14th to 15th implied
Not used
SNVTs Health Bit Status
(if enabled in DX-Zoom
screen)
16th to 31st implied
Health bits of each programmable
network variable
SNVTs Actual Data
Enable Health Bit = NO:
from 16th implied up
Enable Health Bit = YES:
from 32nd implied up
Data is stored in 4 groups:
z Discrete inputs
z Register inputs
z Discrete outputs
z Register outputs
These groups of data are set up
consecutively and start on word
boundaries.
The first 16 registers with configuration and status information can be programmed
and monitored via the NOL DX Zoom screen. For setting up the link to the NOL
module the only parameters that need to be entered are the beginning 3x and 4x
registers used when I/O mapping the NOL module.
Further information you will find in the documentation Network Option Module for
LonWorks.
766
31007523 12/2006
Count
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
Defines the total number of registers required by the function block. This value must
be set to a value equal to or greater than the number of data registers required to
transfer and store the network data being used by the NOL module. If the count
value is not large enough for the required data, the error output will be set.
767
768
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Descriptions (O to Q)
V
At a Glance
Introduction
31007523 12/2006
In this part instruction descriptions are arranged alphabetically from O to Q.
769
Instruction Descriptions (O to Q)
What's in this
Part?
770
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
128
OR: Logical OR
771
129
PCFL: Process Control Function Library
777
130
PCFL-AIN: Analog Input
783
131
PCFL-ALARM: Central Alarm Handler
789
132
PCFL-AOUT: Analog Output
795
133
PCFL-AVER: Average Weighted Inputs Calculate
799
134
PCFL-CALC: Calculated Preset Formula
805
135
PCFL-DELAY: Time Delay Queue
811
136
PCFL-EQN: Formatted Equation Calculator
815
137
PCFL-INTEG: Integrate Input at Specified Interval
821
138
PCFL-KPID: Comprehensive ISA Non Interacting PID
825
139
PCFL-LIMIT: Limiter for the Pv
831
140
PCFL-LIMV: Velocity Limiter for Changes in the Pv
835
141
PCFL-LKUP: Look-up Table
839
142
PCFL-LLAG: First-order Lead/Lag Filter
845
143
PCFL-MODE: Put Input in Auto or Manual Mode
849
144
PCFL-ONOFF: ON/OFF Values for Deadband
853
145
PCFL-PI: ISA Non Interacting PI
857
146
PCFL-PID: PID Algorithms
863
147
PCFL-RAMP: Ramp to Set Point at a Constant Rate
869
148
PCFL-RATE: Derivative Rate Calculation over a Specified Time
875
149
PCFL-RATIO: Four Station Ratio Controller
879
150
PCFL-RMPLN: Logarithmic Ramp to Set Point
883
151
PCFL-SEL: Input Selection
887
152
PCFL-TOTAL: Totalizer for Metering Flow
893
153
PEER: PEER Transaction
899
154
PID2: Proportional Integral Derivative
903
31007523 12/2006
OR: Logical OR
128
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction OR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
772
Representation
773
775
771
OR: Logical OR
Short Description
Function
Description
WARNING
DISABLED COILS
Before using the OR instruction, check for disabled coils. OR will override any
disabled coils within the destination matrix without enabling them. This can cause
personal injury if a coil has disabled an operation for maintenance or repair
because the coil’s state can be changed by the OR operation.
equipment damage.
The OR instruction performs a Boolean OR operation on the bit patterns in the
source and destination matrices.
The ORed bit pattern is then posted in the destination matrix, overwriting its previous
contents.
source
bits
0
772
0
1
1
0
OR
OR
OR
OR
0
0
1
1
1
1
destination
bits
1
31007523 12/2006
OR: Logical OR
Representation
Symbol
control input
source matrix
active
source
matrix
destination
matrix
OR
(16 to 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Initiates OR
source matrix
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the source matrix.
destination
matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
ANY_BIT
First reference in the destination matrix
INT, UINT
Matrix length, range: 1 ... 100.
None
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
source bit: 0 0 1 1
compare bit: 0 1 0 1
result bit:
0111
0x
773
OR: Logical OR
An OR Example
Whenever contact 10001 passes power, the source matrix formed by the bit pattern
in registers 40600 and 40601 is ORed with the destination matrix formed by the bit
pattern in registers 40606 and 40607. The ORed bit pattern is then copied into
registers 40606 and 40607, overwriting the original destination bit pattern.
source matrix
40600 = 1111111100000000 40601 = 1111111100000000
40600
10001
40606
OR
00002
40606 = 1111111111111111 40607 = 0000000000000000
ORed destination matrix
40606 = 1111111111111111 40607 = 1111111100000000
CAUTION
OUTPUT/COIL RESTRICTIONS WITH THE OR INSTRUCTION
Do not turn off outputs and coils when using the OR instruction.
Note: If you want to retain the original destination bit pattern of registers 40606 and
40607, copy the information into another table using the BLKM instruction before
performing the OR operation.
774
31007523 12/2006
OR: Logical OR
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
1 ... 100. A length of 2 indicates that 32 bits in each matrix will be ORed.
775
OR: Logical OR
776
31007523 12/2006
PCFL:
Process Control Function Library
129
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction PCFL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
778
Representation
779
780
777
Short Description
Function
Description
The PCFL instruction gives you access to a library of process control functions
utilizing analog values.
PCFL operations fall into three major categories.
Advanced Calculations
z Signal Processing
z Regulatory Control
z
A PCFL function is selected from a list of alphabetical subfunctions in a pulldown
menu in the panel software, and the subfunction is displayed in the top node of the
instruction (see p. 780 for a list of subfunctions and descriptions).
PCFL uses the same FP library as EMTH. If the PLC that you are using for PCFL
does not have the onboard 80x87 math coprocessor chip, calculations take a
comparatively long time to execute. PLCs with the math coprocessor can solve
PCFL calculations ten times faster than PLCs without the chip. Speed, however,
should not be an issue for most traditional process control applications where
solution times are measured in seconds, not milliseconds.
778
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
function
error
parameter
block
PCFL
length: 1 - 255
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables specified process control
function
function
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of process control function
An indicator for the selected PCFL library
function is specified in the top node.
4x
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT,
WORD
First in a block of contiguous holding
registers where the parameters for the
specified subfunction are stored
INT, UINT
Length of parameter block (depending on
selected subfunction
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
779
Function
(Top Node)
A subfunction for the selected PCFL library function is specified in the top node.
Operation
Subfunction Description
Advanced
Calculations
AVER
Average weighted inputs
no
CALC
Calculate preset formula
no
Signal
Processing
Regulatory
Control
780
Timedependent
Operations
EQN
Formatted equation calculator
no
ALARM
Central alarm handler for a PV input
no
AIN
Convert inputs to scaled engineering units
no
AOUT
Convert outputs to values in the 0 ... 4095 range no
DELAY
Time delay queue
yes
LKUP
Look-up table
no
INTEG
Integrate input at specified interval
yes
LLAG
First-order lead/lag filter
yes
LIMIT
Limiter for the PV (low/low, low, high, high/high) no
LIMV
Velocity limiter for changes in the PV (low, high) yes
MODE
Put input in auto or manual mode
no
RAMP
Ramp to set point at a constant rate
yes
RMPLN
Logarithmic ramp to set point (~2/3 closer to set yes
point for each time constant)
RATE
Derivative rate calculation over a specified time yes
SEL
High/low/average input selection
no
KPID
Comprehensive ISA non-interacting
proportional-integral-derivative (PID)
yes
ONOFF
Specifies ON/OFF values for deadband
no
PID
PID algorithms
yes
PI
ISA non-interacting PI (with halt/manual/auto
operation features)
yes
RATIO
Four-station ratio controller
no
TOTAL
Totalizer for metering flow
yes
31007523 12/2006
Advanced
Calculations
Advanced calculations are used for general mathematical purposes and are not
limited to process control applications. With advanced calculations, you can create
custom signal processing algorithms, derive states of the controlled process, derive
statistical measures of the process, etc.
Simple math routines have already been offered in the EMTH instruction. The
calculation capability included in PCFL is a textual equation calculator for writing
custom equations instead of programming a series of math operations one by one.
Signal
Processing
Signal processing functions are used to manipulate process and derived process
signals. They can do this in a variety of ways; they linearize, filter, delay, and
otherwise modify a signal. This category would include functions such as an Analog
Input/Output, Limiters, Lead/Lag, and Ramp generators.
Regulatory
Control
Regulatory functions perform closed loop control in a variety of applications.
Typically, this is a PID (proportional integral derivative) negative feedback control
loop. The PID functions in PCFL offer varying degrees of functionality. Function 75,
PID, has the same general functionality as the PID2 instruction but uses floating
point math and represents some options differently. PID is beneficial in cases where
PID2 is not suitable because of numerical concerns such as round-off.
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in a block of contiguous holding
register where the parameters for the specified PCFL operation are stored.
The ways that the various PCFL operations implement the parameter block are
described in the description of the various subfunctions (PCFL operations).
Within the parameter block of each PCFL function are two registers used for input
and output status.
Output Flags
In all PCFL functions, bits 12 ... 16 of the output status register define the following
standard output flags:
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Bit
Function
1 - 11
Not used
12
1 = Math error - invalid floating point or output
13
1 = Unknown PCFL function
13
14
15
14
not used
15
1 = Size of the allocated register table is too small
16
1 = Error has occurred - pass power to the bottom output
16
781
For time-dependent PCFL functions, bits 9 and 11 are also used as follows:
1
2
Bit
Input Flags
782
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1-8
Not used
9
1 = Initialization working
10
Not used
11
1 = Illegal solution interval
12
1 = Math error - invalid floating point or output
13
1 = Unknown PCFL function
14
not used
15
1 = Size of the allocated register table is too small
16
1 = Error has occurred - pass power to the bottom output
In all PCFL functions, bits 1 and 3 of the input status register define the following
standard input flags:
1
Length
(Bottom Node)
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Bit
Function
1
1 = Function initialization complete or in progress
0 = Initialize the function
2
not used
3
1 = Timer override
4 -16
not used
14
15
16
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies the length, i.e. the number of
registers, of the PCFL parameter block. The maximum allowable length will vary
depending on the function you specify.
31007523 12/2006
130
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-AIN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
784
Representation
785
786
783
Short Description
Function
Description
Note: This instruction is a subfunction of the PCFL instruction. It belongs to the
category Signal Processing.
The AIN function scales the raw input produced by analog input modules to
engineering values that can be used in the subsequent calculations.
Three scaling options are available.
Auto input scaling
z Manual input scaling
z Implementing process square root on the input to linearize the signal before
scaling
z
784
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
AIN
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
AIN
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction AIN
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
Length of parameter block for subfunction
AIN (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
785
Mode of
Functioning
AIN supports the range resolutions for following device types:
Quantum Engineering Ranges
Resolution
Range: Valid
Range: Under
Range: Over
10 V
768 ... 64 768
767
64 769
16 768 ... 48 768
16 767
48 769
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 64 000
0
64 001
0 ... 5 V
0 ... 32 000
0
32 001
1 ... 5 V
6 400 ... 32 000
6 399
32 001
V
Quantum Thermocouple
Resolution
Range: Valid
TC degrees
-454 ... +3 308
TC 0.1 degrees
-4 540 ... +32 767
TC Raw Units
0 ... 65 535
Quantum Voltmeter
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
786
Resolution
Range: Valid
Range: Under
Range: Over
10 V
-10 000 ... +10 000
-10 001
+10 001
5V
-5 000 ... +5 000
-5 001
+5 001
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 10 000
0
10 001
0 ... 5 V
0 ... 5 000
0
5 001
1 ... 5 V
1 000 ... 5 000
999
5 001
The length of the AIN parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Displayed
Input from a 3x register
First implied
Reserved
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth and fifth implied
Scale 100% engineering units
Sixth and seventh implied
Scale 0% engineering units
Eighth and ninth implied
Manual input
10th and 11th implied
Auto input
Output
31007523 12/2006
Output Status
Bit
Function
1...5
Not used
6
1 = with TC PSQRT, invalid: in extrapolation range, PSQRT not used
7
1 = input out of range
8
1 = echo under range from input module
9
1 = echo over range from input module
10
1 = invalid output mode selected
11
1 = invalid Engineering Units
12 ... 16
Standard output bits (flags)
Bit
Function
Input Status
1 ... 3
Standard input bits (flags)
4 ... 8
Ranges (see following tables)
9
1 = process square root on raw input
10
1 = manual scaling mode
0 = auto scaling mode
11
1 = extrapolate over-/under-range for auto mode
0 = clamp over-/under-range for auto mode
12 ... 16
Not used
Quantum Engineering Ranges
Bit
31007523 12/2006
4
5
6
7
8
Range
0
1
0
0
0
+/- 10V
0
1
0
0
1
+/- 5V
0
1
0
1
0
0 ... 10 V
0
1
0
1
1
0 ... 5 V
0
1
1
0
0
1 ... 5 V
787
Quantum Thermocouple
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
Range
0
1
1
0
1
TC degrees
0
1
1
1
0
TC 0.1 degrees
0
1
1
1
1
TC raw units
Quantum Voltmeter
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
Range
1
0
0
0
0
+/- 10V
1
0
0
1
0
+/- 5V
1
0
1
0
0
0 ... 10 V
1
0
1
1
0
0 ... 5 V
1
1
0
0
0
1 ... 5 V
Note: Bit 4 in this register is nonstandard use.
788
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-ALARM:
Central Alarm Handler
131
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-Alarm.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
790
Representation
791
792
789
Short Description
Function
Description
The ALARM function gives you a central block for alarm handling where you can set
high (H), low (L), high high (HH), and low low (LL) limits on a process variable.
ALARM lets you specify
A choice of normal or deviation operating mode
z Whether to use H/L or both H/L and HH/LL limits
z Whether or not to use deadband (DB) around the limits
z
790
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
ALRM
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#16
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
ALRM
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction ALARM
4x
16
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT,
WORD
INT, UINT
ALARM (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
791
Mode of
Functioning
The following operating modes are available.
Mode
Meaning
Normal Operating Mode
ALARM operates directly on the input. Normal is the default
condition
Deviation Operating
Mode
ALARM operates on the change between the current input and
the last input.
Deadband
When enabled, the DB option is incorporated into the HH/H/LL/L
limits. These calculated limits are inclusive of the more extreme
range, e.g. if the input has been in the high range, the output
remains high and does not transition when the input hits the
calculated H limit.
Operations
A flag is set when the input or deviation equals or crosses the
corresponding limit. If the DB option is used, the HH, H, LL, L
limits are adjusted internally for crossed-limit checking and
hysteresis.
Note: ALARM automatically tracks the last input, even when you specify normal
mode, to facilitate a smooth transition to deviation mode.
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
792
The length of the ALARM parameter block is 16 registers.
Register
Content
Input registers
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
HH limit value
H limit value
L limit value
LL limit value
Deadband (DB) around limit
Last input
31007523 12/2006
Output Status
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
Not used
5
1 = DB set to negative number
6
1 = deviation mode chosen with DB option
7
1 = LL crossed (x ≤ LL
8
1 = L crossed (x ≤ L or LL < x ≤ L) with HH/LL option set
9
1 = H crossed (x ≥ H or H ≤ x < HH) with HH/LL option set
10
1 = HH crossed (x ≥ HH)
11
1 = invalid limits specified
12 ... 16
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = deviation mode
0 = normal mode
Input Status
31007523 12/2006
6
1 = both H/L and HH/LL limits apply
7
1 = DB enabled
8
1 = retain H/L flag when HH/LL limits crossed
9 ... 16
Not used
793
794
31007523 12/2006
132
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-AOUT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
796
Representation
797
798
795
Short Description
Function
Description
The AOUT function is an interface for calculated signals for output modules. It
converts the signal to a value in the range 0 ... 4 096.
Formula
Formula of the AOUT function:
scale × ( IN – LEU -)
OUT = -----------------------------------------------( HEU – LEU )
The meaning of the elements:
796
Element
Meaning
HEU
High Engineering Unit
IN
Input
LEU
Low Engineering Unit
OUT
Output
scale
Scale
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
AOUT
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#9
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
AOUT
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction AOUT
4x
9
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
AOUT (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
797
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the AOUT parameter block is 9 registers.
Register
Content
Input in engineering units
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
High engineering units
Low engineering units
Output
Output Status
Bit
Function
1 ... 7
Not used
8
1 = clamped low
9
1 = clamped high
10
not used
11
1 = invalid H/L limits
12 ... 16
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
Input Status
798
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-AVER: Average Weighted
Inputs Calculate
133
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-AVER.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
800
Representation
801
802
799
Short Description
Function
Description
category Advanced Calculation.
The AVER function calculates the average of up to four weighted inputs.
Formula
Formula of the AVER function:
( k + ( w 1 × In 1 ) + ( w 2 × In 2 ) + ( w 3 × In 3 ) + ( w 4 × In 4 ) )
RES = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 + w1 + w2 + w3 + w4
The meaning of the elements:
800
Element
Meaning
In1 ... In4
Inputs
k
Constant
RES
Result
w1 ... w4
Weights
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
AVER
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#24
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
AVER
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction AVER
4x
24
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
AVER (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
801
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the AVER parameter block is 24 registers.
Register
Content
reserved
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Value of In1
Value of Inv2
Value of In3
Value of In4
Value of k
Value of wv1
Value of wv2
Value of wv3
20th and 21st implied
Value of wv4
22nd and 23rd implied
Value of result
Output Status
1
2
Bit
802
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 9
Not used
10
1 = no inputs activated
11
1 = result negative
0 = result positive
12 ... 16
31007523 12/2006
Input Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = In4 and w4 are used
6
7
8
9
1 = k is active
10 ... 16
Not used
A weight can be used only when its corresponding input is enabled, e.g. the 20th
and 21st implied registers (which contain the value of w4) can be used only when
the 10th and 11th implied registers (which contain In4) are enabled. The I in the
denominator is used only when the constant is enabled.
31007523 12/2006
803
804
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-CALC:
Calculated Preset Formula
134
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-CALC.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
806
Representation
807
808
805
Short Description
Function
Description
The CALC function calculates a preset formula with up to four inputs, each
characterized in a separate register of the parameter block.
806
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
CALC
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
CALC
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction CALC
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
CALC (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
807
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the CALC parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Reserved
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Value of input A
Value of input B
Value of input C
Value of input D
Value of the output
Output Status
1
808
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1...10
Not used
11
1 = bad input code chosen
12 ... 16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Input Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 6
not used
7 ... 10
Formula Code
11 ... 16
Not used
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Formula Code
Bit
31007523 12/2006
Formula Code
7
8
9
10
0
0
0
1
(A × B) – (C × D)
0
0
1
1
(A × B) ⁄ (C × D)
0
1
0
0
A ⁄ (B × C × D)
0
1
0
1
(A × B × C) ⁄ D
0
1
1
0
A×B×C×D
0
1
1
1
A+B+C+D
1
0
0
0
A × B ( C –D )
1
0
0
1
A[ (B ⁄ C) ]
1
0
1
0
A × LN(B ⁄ C)
1
0
1
1
( A – B ) – ( C – D ) ⁄ LN [ ( A – B ) ⁄ ( C – D ) ]
1
1
0
0
(A ⁄ B)
1
1
0
1
( A –B ) ⁄ ( C – D )
D
( –C ⁄ D )
809
810
31007523 12/2006
135
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-DELAY.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
812
Representation
813
814
811
Short Description
Function
Description
The DELAY function can be used to build a series of readings for time-delay
compensation in the logic. Up to 10 sampling instances can be used to delay an
input.
All values are carried along in registers, where register x[0] contains the current
sampled input. The 10th delay period does not need to be stored. When the 10th
instance in the sequence takes place, the value in register x[9] can be moved
directly to the output
A DXDONE message is returned when the calculation is complete. The function can
be reset by toggling the first-scan bit.
812
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
DELY
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#32
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
DELY
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction DELY
4x
32
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
DELY (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
813
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the DELAY parameter block is 32 registers.
Register
Content
Input at time n
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Δt (in ms) since last solve
Solution interval (in ms)
x[0] delay
x[1] delay
x[2] delay
...
...
x[9] delay
Output registers
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1...3
Not used
4
1 = k out of range
5 ... 8
Count of registers left to be initialized
9 ... 16
12
13
14
15
16
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
814
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 8
Time Delay ≤ 10
9 ... 11
Echo number of registers left to be initialized
12 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-EQN:
Formatted Equation Calculator
136
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-EQN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
816
Representation
817
818
815
Short Description
Function
Description
The EQN function is a formatted equation calculator. You must define the equation
in the parameter block with various codes that specify operators, input selection and
inputs.
EQN is used for equations that have four or fewer variables but do not fit into the
CALC format. It complements the CALC function by letting you input an equation
with floating point and integer inputs as well as operators.
816
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
EQN
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#64
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
EQN
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction EQN
4x
15 ... 64
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
EQN
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
817
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the EQN parameter block can be as high as 64 registers.
Register
Content
Reserved
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Variable A
Variable B
Variable C
Variable D
Output
14th implied
First formula code
15th implied
Second possible formula code
...
...
63rd implied
Last possible formula code
Output Status
1
818
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
Stack error
2...3
Not used
4 ... 8
Code of last error logged
9
1 = bad operator selection code
10
1 = EQN not fully programmed
11
1 = bad input code chosen
12 ... 16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Input Status
1
Formula Code
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = Degree/radian option for trigonometry
6 ... 8
not used
9 ... 16
Equation size for display in Concept
12
13
14
15
16
Each formula code in the EQN function defines either an input selection code or an
operator selection code.
Formula Code (Parameter Block)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
Not used
5 ... 8
Definition of input selection
9 ... 11
Not used
12 ... 16
Definition of operator selection
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input Selection
Bit
31007523 12/2006
Input Selection
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
Use operator selection
0
0
0
1
Float input
0
0
1
1
16-bit integer
1
0
0
0
Variable A
1
0
0
1
Variable B
1
0
1
0
Variable C
1
0
1
1
Variable D
819
Operator Selection
Bit
820
Operator Selection
12
13
14
15
16
0
0
0
0
0
No operation
0
0
0
0
1
Absolute value
0
0
0
1
0
Addition
0
0
0
1
1
Division
0
0
1
0
0
Exponent
0
0
1
1
1
LN (natural logarithm)
0
1
0
0
0
G (logarithm)
0
1
0
0
1
Multiplication
0
1
0
1
0
Negation
0
1
0
1
1
Power
0
1
1
0
0
Square root
0
1
1
0
1
Subtraction
0
1
1
1
0
Sine
0
1
1
1
1
Cosine
1
0
0
0
0
Tangent
1
0
0
0
1
Arcsine
1
0
0
1
0
Arccosine
1
0
0
1
1
Arctangent
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-INTEG: Integrate Input at
Specified Interval
137
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-INTEG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
822
Representation
823
824
821
Short Description
Function
Description
The INTEG function is used to integrate over a specified time interval. No protection
against integral wind-up is provided in this function. INTEG is time-dependent, e.g.
if you are integrating at an input value of 1/sec, it matters whether it operates over
one second (in which case the result is 1) or over one minute (in which case the
result is 60).
You can set flags to either initialize or restart the function after an undetermined
down-time, and you can reset the integral sum if you wish. If you set the initialize
flag, you must specify a reset value (zero or the last output in case of power failure),
and calculations will be skipped for one sample.
The function returns a DXDONE message when the operation is complete.
822
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
INTG
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#16
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
INTG
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction INTEG
4x
16
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
INTEG (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
823
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the INTEG parameter block is 16 registers.
Register
Content
Current Input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Last input
Reset value
Result
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1...8
Not used
9 ... 16
Input Status
1
824
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
Reset sum
6 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-KPID: Comprehensive ISA
Non Interacting PID
138
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-KPID.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
826
Representation
827
828
825
Short Description
Function
Description
category Regulatory Control.
The KPID function offers a superset of the functionality of the PID function, with
additional features that include:
z A gain reduction zone
z A separate register for bumpless transfer when the integral term is not used
z A reset mode
z An external set point for cascade control
z Built-in velocity limiters for set point changes and changes to a manual output
z A variable derivative filter constant
z Optional expansion of anti-reset wind-up limits
826
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
KPID
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#64
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
KPID
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction KPID
4x
64
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
KPID (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
827
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the KPID parameter block is 64 registers.
General
Parameters
Input
Parameters
Inputs
828
Register
Content
Live input, x
Second implied
Output Status, Register 1
Third implied
Output Status, Register 2
Fourth implied
Reserved
Fifth implied
Input Status
Proportional rate, KP
Reset time, TI
Derivative action time, TD
Delay time constant, TD1
Gain reduction zone, GRZ
Gain reduction in GRZ, KGRZ
Limit rise of manual set point value
Limit rise of manual output
High limit for Y
Low limit for Y
Expansion for anti-reset wind-up limits
External set point for cascade
Manual set point
Manual Y
Reset for Y
Bias
31007523 12/2006
Register
Outputs
Timing
Information
Output
Output Status,
Register 1
31007523 12/2006
1
2
3
Content
Bumpless transfer register, BT
Calculated control difference (error term), XD
42nd implied
Previous operating mode
43rd and 44th implied
Dt (in ms) since last solve
Previous system deviation, XD_1
Previous input, X_1
Integral part for Y, YI
51st and 52nd implied
Differential part for Y, YD
Set point, SP
Proportional part for Y, YP
57th implied
Previous operating status
58th implied
10 ms clock at time n
59th implied
Reserved
Manipulated output variable, Y
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
Error
2
1 = low limit exceeded
3
1 = high limit exceeded
4
1 = Cascade mode selected
5
1 = Auto mode selected
6
1 = Halt mode selected
7
1 = Manual mode selected
8
1 = Reset mode selected
9 ... 16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
829
Output Status,
Register 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1...4
Not used
5
1 = Previous D mode selected
6
1 = Previous I mode selected
7
1 = Previous P mode selected
8
1 = Previous mode selected
9 ... 16
Not used
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
Bit
830
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = Reset mode
6
1 = Manual mode
7
1 = Halt mode
8
1 = Cascade mode
9
1 = Solve proportional algorithm
10
1 = Solve integral algorithm
11
1 = Solve derivative algorithm
12
1 = solve derivative algorithm based on x
0 = solve derivative algorithm based on xd
13
1 = anti--reset wind-up on YI only
0 = normal anti--reset wind-up
14
1 = disable bumpless transfer
0 = bumpless transfer
15
1 = Manual Y tracks Y
16
1 = reverse action for loop output
0 = direct action for loop output
31007523 12/2006
139
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-LIMIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
832
Representation
833
834
831
Short Description
Function
Description
The LIMIT function limits the input to a range between a specified high and low
value. If the high or low limit is reached, the function sets an H or L flag and clamps
the output.
LIMIT returns a DXDONE message when the operation is complete.
832
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
LIMIT
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#9
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
LIMIT
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction LIMIT
4x
9
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
LIMIT (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
833
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the LIMIT parameter block is 9 registers.
Register
Content
Current input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Low limit
High Limit
Eighth implied
Output register
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1...8
Not used
9
1 = input < low limit
10
1 = input > high limit
8
9
10
11
11
1 = invalid high/low limits (e.g., low ≥ high
12 ... 16
12
13
14
15
16
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
834
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
9
10
11
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-LIMV: Velocity Limiter for
Changes in the Pv
140
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-LIMV.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
836
Representation
837
838
835
Short Description
Function
Description
The LIMV function limits the velocity of change in the input variable between a
specified high and low value. If the high or low limit is reached, the function sets an
H or L flag and clamps the output.
LIMV returns a DXDONE message when the operation is complete.
836
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
LIMV
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
LIMV
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction LIMV
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
p. 838.)
INT, UINT
LIMV (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
837
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the LIMV parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Input register
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Velocity limit / sec
Result
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1...5
Not used
6
1 = negative velocity limit
7
1 = input < low limit
8
1 = input > high limit
9 ... 16
Input Status
1
838
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
141
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-LKUP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
840
Representation
841
842
839
Short Description
Function
Description
The LKUP function establishes a look-up table using a linear algorithm to interpolate
between points. LKUP can handle variable point intervals and variable numbers of
points.
840
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
LKUP
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#39
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
LKUP
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction LKUP
4x
39
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
(For more information, please see p. 843.)
INT, UINT
LKUP (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
841
Mode of
Functioning
The LKUP function establishes a look-up table using a linear algorithm to interpolate
between points. LKUP can handle variable point intervals and variable numbers of
points.
If the input (x) is outside the specified range of points, the output (y) is clamped to
the corresponding output y0 or yn. If the specified parameter block length is too
small or if the number of points is out of range, the function does not check the xn
because the information from that pointer is invalid.
Points to be interpolated are determined by a binary search algorithm starting near
the center of x data. The search is valid for x1 < x < xn. The variable x may occur
multiple times with the same value, the value chosen from the look-up table is the
first instance found.
For example, if the table is:
x
y
10.0
1.0
20.0
2.0
30.0
3.0
30.0
3.5
40.0
4.0
Then an input of 30.0 finds the first instance of 30.0 and assigns 3.0 as the output.
An input of 31.0 would assign the value 3.55 as the output.
No sorting is done on the contents of the lookup table. Independent variable table
values should be entered in ascending order to prevent unreachable gaps in the
table.
The function returns a DXDONE message when the operation is complete.
842
31007523 12/2006
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the LKUP parameter block is 39 registers.
Register
Content
Input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Number of point pairs
Fifth and sixth implied
Point x1
Seventh and eighth implied
Point y1
Ninth and tenth implied
Point x2
Point y2
...
...
Point x8
Point y8
Output
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 9
Not used
10
1 = input clamped, i.e. out of table’s range
11
! = invalid number of points
12 ... 16
Input Status
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
9
10
11
12
843
844
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-LLAG:
First-order Lead/Lag Filter
142
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-LLAG.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
846
Representation
847
848
845
Short Description
Function
Description
The LLAG function provides dynamic compensation for a known disturbance. It
usually appears in a feed-forward algorithm or as a dynamic filter. LLAG passes the
input through a filter comprising a lead term (a numerator) and a lag term (a
denominator) in the frequency domain, then multiplies it by a gain. Lead, lag, gain,
and solution interval must be user-specified.
For best results, use lead and lag terms that are ≥ 4 *Δt. This will ensure sufficient
granularity in the output response.
LLAG returns a DXDONE message when the operation completes
846
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
LLAG
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#20
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
LLAG
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction LLAG
4x
20
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
LLAG (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
847
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the LLAG parameter block is 20 registers.
Register
Content
Current Input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Last input
Lead term
Lag term
Filter gain
Result
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1...8
Not used
9 ... 16
Input Status
1
848
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-MODE: Put Input in Auto or
Manual Mode
143
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-MODE.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
850
Representation
851
852
849
Short Description
Function
Description
The MODE function sets up a manual or automatic station for enabling and disabling
data transfers to the next block. The function acts like a BLKM instruction, moving a
value to the output register.
In auto mode, the input is copied to the output. In manual mode, the output is
overwritten by a user entry.
MODE returns a DXDONE message when the operation completes.
850
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
MODE
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#8
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
MODE
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction MODE
4x
8
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
MODE (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
851
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the MODE parameter block is 8 registers.
Register
Content
Input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Manual input
Output register
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 10
Not used
11
Echo mode:
1 = manual mode
0 = auto mode
12 ... 16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
852
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = manual mode
0 = auto mode
6 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-ONOFF:
ON/OFF Values for Deadband
144
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-ONOFF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
854
Representation
855
856
853
Short Description
Function
Description
The ONOFF function is used to control the output signal between fully ON and fully
OFF conditions so that a user can manually force the output ON or OFF.
You can control the output via either a direct or reverse configuration:
Configuration
IF Input...
Then Output...
Direct
< (SP - DB)
ON
> (SP + DB)
OFF
> (SP + DB)
ON
< (SP - DB)
OFF
Revers
Manual Override
854
Two bits in the input status register (the third implied register in the parameter block)
are used for manual override. When bit 6 is set to 1, manual mode is enforced. In
manual mode, a 0 in bit 7 forces the output OFF, and a 1 in bit 7 forces the output
ON. The state of bit 7 has meaning only in manual mode.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
ONOFF
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
ONOFF
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction ONOFF
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
ONOFF (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
855
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the ONOFF parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Current Input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Set point, SP
Deadband (DB) around SP
Fully ON (maximum output)
Fully OFF (minimum output)
Output, ON or OFF
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 8
Not used
9
1 = DB set to negative number
10
Echo mode:
1 = manual override
0 = auto mode
11
1 = output set to ON
0 = output set to OFF
12 ... 16
Input Status
1
856
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = reverse configuration
0 = direct configuration
6
1 = manual override
0 = auto mode
7
1 = force output ON in manual mode
0 = force output OFF in manual mode
8 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
145
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-PI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
858
Representation
859
860
857
Short Description
Function
Description
The PI function performs a simple proportional-integral operations using floating
point math. It features halt / manual / auto operation modes. It is similar to the PID
and KPID functions but does not contain as many options. It is available for higherspeed loops or inner loops in cascade strategies.
858
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
PI
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#36
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
PI
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction PI
4x
36
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
PI (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
859
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the PI parameter block is 36 registers.
General
Parameters
Inputs
Outputs
Timing
Information
Input
Parameters
Output
860
Register
Content
Live input, x
Second implied
Output Status
Third implied
Error Word
Fourth implied
Reserved
Fifth implied
Input Status
Set point, SP
Manual output
Calculated control difference (error), XD
12th implied
Dt (in ms) since last solve
Integral part of output Y
Previous input, X_1
21st implied
22nd implied
10 ms clock at time n
23rd implied
Reserved
Proportional rate, KP
Reset time, TI
High limit on output Y
Low limit on output Y
Manipulated variable output, Y
31007523 12/2006
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1
Error
2
3
4 ... 8
Not used
9 ... 16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Error Word
1
2
3
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
Function
1...11
Not used
12 ... 16
Error Description
Error Description
Bit
Meaning
12
13
14
15
16
1
0
1
1
0
Negative integral time constant
1
0
1
0
1
High/low limit error (low ≥ high)
Input Status
1
2
Bit
31007523 12/2006
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 4
5
Not used
6
1 = Manual mode
7
1 = Halt mode
8 ... 15
Not used
16
861
862
31007523 12/2006
146
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-PID.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
864
Representation
865
866
863
Short Description
Function
Description
The PID function performs ISA non-interacting proportional-integral-derivative (PID)
operations using floating point math. Because it uses FP math (unlike PID2), roundoff errors are negligible.
In the part General Information you will find A PID Example, p. 25.
864
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
PID
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#44
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
PID
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction PID
4x
44
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
PID (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
865
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the KPID parameter block is 44 registers.
General Parameters
Inputs
Outputs
Timing Information
Inputs
Register
Content
Live input, x
Second implied
Output Status
Third implied
Error Word
Fourth implied
Reserved
Fifth implied
Input Status
Set point, SP
Manual output
Summing junction, Bias
Error, XD
14th implied
Elapsed time (in ms) since last solve
Previous input, X_1
21st and 22nd implied
Integral part of output Y, YI
Differential part of output Y, YD
Proportional part of output Y, YP
27th implied
28th implied
Current time
29th implied
Reserved
Reset time, TI
Derivative action time, TD
High limit on output Y
Low limit on output Y
Manipulated control output, Y
Output Status
1
866
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1
Error
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Bit
Function
2
3
4 ... 8
Not used
9 ... 16
Error Word
1
2
3
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1...11
Not used
12 ... 16
Error Description
Error Description
Bit
Meaning
12
13
14
15
16
1
0
1
1
1
Negative derivative time constant
1
0
1
1
0
Negative integral time constant
1
0
1
0
1
High/low limit error (low ≥ high)
Input Status
1
2
Bit
31007523 12/2006
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 4
5
Not used
6
1 = Manual mode
7
1 = Halt mode
8
Not used
9
1 = Solve proportional algorithm
10
1 = Solve integral algorithm
11
1 = Solve derivative algorithm
12
1 = solve derivative algorithm based on x
0 = solve derivative algorithm based on xd
13... 15
Not used
16
867
868
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-RAMP: Ramp to Set Point at
a Constant Rate
147
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-RAMP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
870
Representation
871
872
869
Short Description
Function
Description
The RAMP function allows you to ramp up linearly to a target set point at a specified
approach rate.
You need to specify:
The target set point, in the same units as the contents of the input register are
specified
z The sampling rate
z A positive rate toward the target set point, negative rates are illegal
z
The direction of the ramp depends on the relationship between the target set point
and the input, i.e. if x < SP, the ramp is up; if x > SP, the ramp is down.
You may use a flag to initialize after an undetermined down-time. The function will
store a new sample, then wait for one cycle to collect the second sample.
Calculations will be skipped for one cycle and the output will be left as is, after which
the ramp will resume.
RAMP terminates when the entire ramping operation is complete (over multiple
scans) and returns a DXDONE message.
Starting the
Ramp
The following steps need to be done when starting the ramp (up/down) and each
and every time you need to start or restart the ramp.
Step
870
Action
1
Set bit 1 of the standard input bits to "1" (third implied register of the parameter
block).
2
Retoggle the top input (enable input) to the instruction. Ramp will now start to
ramp up/down from the initial value previously configured up/down to the
previously configured setpoint. Monitor the 12th implied register of the
parameter block for floating point value of the ramp value in progress.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
RAMP
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
RAMP
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction RAMP
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
RAMP (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
871
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the RAMP parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Set point (Input)
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Rate of change (per second) toward set point
Output
Output Status
1
2
Bit
872
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 4
Not used
5
1 = ramp rate is negative
6
1 = ramp complete
0 = ramp in progress
7
1 = ramping down
8
1 = ramping up
9 ... 16
31007523 12/2006
Input Status
1
Top Output
(Operation
Succesfull)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The top output of the PCFL subfunction RAMP goes active at each successive
discrete ramp step up/down. It happens so fast that it appears to be solidly on. This
top output should NOT be used as "Ramp done bit".
Bit 6 of the output status (second impied register of the parameter block) should be
monitored as "Ramp done bit".
31007523 12/2006
873
874
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-RATE: Derivative Rate
Calculation over a Specified Time
148
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-RATE.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
876
Representation
877
878
875
Short Description
Function
Description
The RATE function calculates the rate of change over the last two input values. If
you set an initialization flag, the function records a sample and sets the appropriate
flags.
If a divide-by-zero operation is attempted, the function returns a DXERROR
message.
It returns a DXDONE message when the operation completes successfully.
876
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
RATE
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
RATE
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction RATE
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
RATE (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
877
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the RATE parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Current input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Last input
Result
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
Not used
9 ... 16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
878
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-RATIO:
Four Station Ratio Controller
149
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-RATIO.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
880
Representation
881
882
879
Short Description
Function
Description
The RATIO function provides a four-station ratio controller. Ratio control can be
used in applications where one or more raw ingredients are dependent on a primary
ingredient. The primary ingredient is measured, and the measurement is converted
to engineering units via an AIN function. The converted value is used to set the
target for the other ratioed inputs.
Outputs from the ratio controller can provide set points for other controllers. They
can also be used in an open loop structure for applications where feedback is not
required.
880
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
RATIO
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#20
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
RATIO
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction RATIO
4x
20
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
For more information. please see p. 882.
INT, UINT
RATIO (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
881
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the RATIO parameter block is 20 registers.
Register
Content
Live input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Ratio for input 1
Ratio for input 2
Ratio for input 3
Ratio for input 4
Output for input 1
Output for input 2
Output for input 3
Output for input 4
Output Status
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 9
Not used
10
1 = parameter(s) out of range
11
1 = no inputs activated
12 ... 16
Input Status
1
2
Bit
882
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function
1 ... 4
5
1= input 4 active
6
1= input 3 active
7
1= input 2 active
8
1= input 1 active
9 ... 16
Not used
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-RMPLN:
Logarithmic Ramp to Set Point
150
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-RMPLN.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
884
Representation
885
886
883
Short Description
Function
Description
The RMPLN function allows you to ramp up logarithmically to a target set point at a
specified approach rate. At each successive call, it calculates the output until it is
within a specified deadband (DB). DB is necessary because the incremental
distance the ramp crosses decreases with each solve.
You need to specify:
The target set point, in the same units as the contents of the input register are
specified
z The sampling rate
z The time constant used for the logarithmic ramp, which is the time it takes to
reach 63.2% of the new set point
z
For best results, use a t that is ≥4 *Δt. This will ensure sufficient granularity in the
output response.
You may use a flag to initialize after an undetermined down-time. The function will
store a new sample, then wait for one cycle to collect the second sample.
Calculations will be skipped for one cycle and the output will be left as is, after which
the ramp will resume.
RMPLN terminates when the input reaches the target set point + the specified DB
and returns a DXDONE message.
884
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
RMPLN
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#16
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
RMPLN
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction RMPLN
4x
16
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
For more information, please see p. 886.
INT, UINT
RMPLN (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
885
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the RMPLN parameter block is 16 registers.
Register
Content
Set point (Input)
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
Time constant, τ, (per second) of exponential ramp toward
the target set point
DB (in engineering units)
Output
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
Not used
6
7
8
9
5
1 = DB or τ set to negative units
6
1 = ramp complete
0 = ramp in progress
7
1 = ramping down
8
1 = ramping up
9 ... 16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
886
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5 ... 16
Not used
9
31007523 12/2006
151
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-SEL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
888
Representation
889
890
887
Short Description
Function
Description
The SEL function compares up to four inputs and makes a selection based upon
either the highest, lowest, or average value. You choose the inputs to be compared
and the comparison criterion. The output is a copy of the selected input.
SEL returns a DXDONE message when the operation is complete.
888
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
SEL
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#14
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
SEL
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction SEL
4x
14
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
SEL (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
889
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
The length of the SEL parameter block is 14 registers.
Register
Content
Reserved
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Output
Output Status
1
890
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1 ... 9
Not used
6
7
8
10
Invalid selection modes
11
No inputs selected
12 ... 16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
Input Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = enable input 1
0 = disable input 1
6
1 = enable input 2
0 = dyeable input 2
7
1 = enable input 3
0 = dyeable input 3
8
1 = enable input 4
0 = dyeable input 4
9 ... 10
Selection mode
11 ... 16
Not used
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Selection mode
Bit
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
9
10
0
0
Select average
0
1
Select high
1
0
Select low
1
1
reserved / invalid
891
892
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-TOTAL:
Totalizer for Metering Flow
152
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the subfunction PCFL-TOTAL.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
894
Representation
895
896
893
Short Description
Function
Description
The TOTAL function provides a material totalizer for batch processing reagents. The
input signal contains the units of weight or volume per unit of time. The totalizer
integrates the input over time.
The algorithm reports three outputs:
The integration sum
z The remainder left to meter in
z The valve output (in engineering units).
z
894
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
TOTAL
error
parameter
block
PCFL
#28
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
function
TOTAL
(top node)
parameter
block
(middle node)
Selection of the subfunction TOTAL
4x
28
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
INT, UINT
TOTAL (can not be changed)
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
895
Mode of
Functioning
The function uses up to three different set points:
A trickle flow set point
z A target set point
z An auxiliary trickle flow set point
z
The target set point is for the full amount to be metered in. Here the output will be
turned OFF.
The trickle flow set point is the cut-off point when the output should be decreased
from full flow to a percentage of full flow so that the target set point is reached with
better granularity.
The auxiliary trickle flow set point is optional. It is used to gain another level of
granularity. If this set point is enabled, the output is reduced further to 10% of the
trickle output.
The totalizer works from zero as a base point. The set point must be a positive value
In normal operation, the valve output is set to 100% flow when the integrated value
is below the trickle flow set point. When the sum crosses the trickle flow set point,
the valve flow becomes a programmable percentage of full flow. When the sum
reaches the desired target set point, the valve output is set to 0% flow.
Set points can be relative or absolute. With a relative set point, the deviation
between the last summation and the set point is used. Otherwise, the summation is
used in absolute comparison to the set point.
There is a halt option to stop the system from integrating.
When the operation has finished, the output summation is retained for future use.
You have the option of clearing this sum. In some applications, it is important to save
the sum, e.g. if the meters or load cells cannot handle the full batch in one charge
and measurements are split up, if there are several tanks to fill for a batch and you
want to keep track of batch and production sums.
Parameter Block
(Middle Node)
896
The length of the TOTAL parameter block is 28 registers.
Register
Content
Live input
Second implied
Output status
Third implied
Input status
Fourth implied
Time register
Fifth implied
Reserved
31007523 12/2006
Register
Content
Last input, X_1
Reset value
Set point, target
Set point, trickle flow
% of full flow for trickle flow set point
Full flow
Remaining amount to SP
Resulting sum
Output for final control element
Output Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Function
1 ... 2
Not used
3 ... 4
0 0 = OFF
0 1 = trickle flow
1 0 = full flow
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
1 = operation done
6
1 = totalizer running
7
1 = overshoot past set point by more than 5%
8
1 = parameter(s) out of range
9 ... 16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
Input Status
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
5
1 = reset sum
6
1 = halt integration
7
1 = deviation set point
0 = absolute set point
8
1 = use auxiliary trickle flow set point
9 ... 16
Not used
11
12
897
898
31007523 12/2006
153
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction PEER.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
900
Representation
901
902
899
Short Description
Function
Description
The S975 Modbus II Interface option modules use two loadable function blocks:
MBUS and PEER. The PEER instruction can initiate identical message transactions
with as many as 16 devices on Modbus II at one time. In a PEER transaction, you
may only write register data.
900
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
complete
control block
repeat
active
data block
error
PEER
length: 1 - 249
Parameter
Description
Parameters
length
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Enable MBUS transaction
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Repeat transaction in same scan
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First of 19 contiguous registers in the
PEER control block
data block
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First register in a data block to be
transmitted by the PEER function
INT, UINT
Length, i.e. the number of holding
registers, of the data block; range:
1 ... 249.
length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
Top output
0x
None
Transaction complete
Middle output
0x
None
Transaction in progress or new transaction
starting
Bottom output
0x
None
Error detected in transaction
901
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of 19 contiguous registers in the
PEER control block.
Register
Function
Displayed
Indicates the status of the transactions at each device, the leftmost bit
being the status of device #1 and the rightmost bit the status of device
#16: 0 = OK, 1 = transaction error
First implied
Defines the reference to the first 4x register to be written to in the receiving
device; a 0 in this field is an invalid value and will produce an error (the
bottom output will go ON)
Second implied
Time allowed for a transaction to be completed before an error is
declared; expressed as a multiple of 10 ms, e.g. 100 indicates 1,000 ms;
the default timeout is 250 ms
Third implied
The Modbus port 3 address of the first of the receiving devices; address
range: 1 ... 255 (0 = no transaction requested)
Fourth implied
The Modbus port 3 address of the second of the receiving devices;
address range: 1 ... 255 (0 = no transaction requested)
...
18th implied
902
...
The Modbus port 3 address of the 16th of the receiving devices (address
range: 1 ... 255)
31007523 12/2006
PID2:
Proportional Integral Derivative
154
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction PID2.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
904
Representation
905
907
910
Run Time Errors
915
903
Short Description
Function
Description
The PID2 instruction implements an algorithm that performs proportional-integralderivative operations. The algorithm tunes the closed loop operation in a manner
similar to traditional pneumatic and analog electronic loop controllers. It uses a rate
gain limiting (RGL) filter on the PV as it is used for the derivative term only, thereby
filtering out higher-frequency PV noise sources (random and process generated).
Formula
Proportional Control
M V = K 1 E + bias
Proportional-Integral Control
MV
t
⎛
⎞
⎜
= K 1 E + K 2 ∫ EΔt⎟
⎜
⎟
⎝
⎠
0
Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control
MV
904
t
⎛
⎞
ΔPV
⎜
= K 1 ⎜ E + K 2 ∫ EΔt + K 3 ------------⎟⎟
Δt
⎝
⎠
0
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
manual / auto
loop solution
source
integral preload
high alarm
destination
direct / rev. action
low alarm
PID2
length: 1 - 255
31007523 12/2006
solution
interval
905
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
0 = Manual mode
1 = Auto mode
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
0 = Integral preload OFF
1 = Integral preload ON
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
0 = Output increases as E increases
1 = Output decreases as E decreases
source
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
First of 21 contiguous holding registers in a
source block
destination
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First of nine contiguous holding registers used
for PID2 calculation. Do not load anything in
these registers!
For more information, please see p. 913.
INT, UINT
Contains a number ranging from 1 ... 255,
indicating how often the function should be
performed.
solution interval
(bottom node)
906
Top output
0x
None
1 = Invalid user parameter or Loop ACTIVE
but not being solved
Middle output
0x
None
1 = PV ≥ high alarm limit
Bottom output
0x
None
1 = PV ≤ low alarm limit
31007523 12/2006
Block Diagram
+
Xn-1
Derivative
Contribution
Xn
Xn
+
(4y + 6)/8
+
PV
(4y + 6)/8
ΔPv
-
Δx
RGL
60(RGL - 1)K3
RGL Ts
Zn
4x13
SP
+
-
E
E
+
-
Proportional
Contribution
(4x1 - 4x2)
(4x11 - 4x12)
100
PB
x 4095
GE
+
Output
Clamp
+
Bias
4x8
Integral
Feedback
Mn-1
FIOC
4x16
M
+
+
Preload
Mode
TIOC
4x20
-
Qn
Integral
Clamp
Wn
+
-
4x17 4x2
4x18
Integral
Contribution
In
ΔI
K2 T 2
600000
In-1
In-1
Mn
+
+
In
4y + 3, + 4, + 5
In
The elements in the block diagram have the following meaning:
31007523 12/2006
Element
Meaning
E
Error, expressed in raw analog units
SP
Set point, in the range 0 ... 4095
PV
Process variable, in the range 0 ... 4095
x
Filtered PV
K2
Integral mode gain constant, expressed in 0.01 min-1
907
Element
Meaning
K3
Derivative mode gain constant, expressed in hundredths of a minute
RGL
Rate gain limiting filter constant, in the range 2 ... 30
Ts
Solution time, expressed in hundredths of a second
PB
Proportional band, in the range 5 ... 500%
bias
Loop output bias factor, in the range 0 ... 4095
M
Loop output
GE
Gross error, the proportional-derivative contribution to the loop output
Z
Derivative mode contribution to GE
Qn
Unbiased loop output
F
Feedback value, in the range 0 ... 4095
I
Integral mode contribution to the loop output
Ilow
Anti-reset-windup low SP, in the range 0 ... 4095
Ihigh
Anti-reset-windup high SP, in the range 0 ... 4095
K1
100/PB
Note: The integral mode contribution calculation actually integrates the difference
of the output and the integral sum, this is effectively the same as integrating the
error.
Proportional
Control
With proportional-only control (P), you can calculate the manipulated variable by
multiplying error by a proportional constant, K1, then adding a bias. See p. 904.
However, process conditions in most applications are changed by other system
variables so that the bias does not remain constant; the result is offset error, where
PV is constantly offset from the SP. This condition limits the capability of
proportional-only control.
Note: The value in the integral term (in registers 4y + 3, 4y + 4, and 4y + 5) is
always used, even when the integral mode is not enabled. Using this value is
necessary to preserve bumpless transfer between modes. If you wish to disable
bumpless transfer, these three registers must be cleared.
In manual mode setpoint changes will not take effect unless the above three
registers are cleared and the mode is switched back to automatic. The transfer will
not be bumpless.
908
31007523 12/2006
ProportionalIntegral Control
To eliminate this offset error without forcing you to manually change the bias, an
integral function can be added to the control equation. See p. 904.
Proportional-integral control (PI) eliminates offset by integrating E as a function of
time. K1 is the integral constant expressed as rep/min. As long as E ≠ 0, the
integrator increases (or decreases) its value, adjusting Mv. This continues until the
offset error is eliminated.
ProportionalIntegralDerivative
Control
You may want to add derivative functionality to the control equation to minimize the
effects of frequent load changes or to override the integral function in order to get to
the SP condition more quickly. See p. 904.
Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control can be used to save energy in the
process or as a safety valve in the event of a sudden, unexpected change in process
flow. K3 is the derivative time constant expressed as min. DPV is the change in the
process variable over a time period of Δt.
Example
31007523 12/2006
An example to PID2 level control you will find in PID2 Level Control Example.
909
Source Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of 21 contiguous holding registers
in a source block. The contents of the fifth ... eighth implied registers determine
whether the operation will be P, PI, or PID:
Operation
Fifth Implied
Sixth Implied
P
ON
PI
ON
ON
PID
ON
ON
Seventh Implied Eighth Implied
ON
ON
The source block comprises the following register assignments:
Register
Name
Content
Displayed
Scaled PV
Loaded by the block each time it is scanned; a linear
scaling is done on register 4x + 13 using the high and
low ranges from registers 4x + 11 and 4x + 12:
Scaled PV = (4x13 / 4095) * (4x11 - 4x12) + 4x12
First implied
SP
You must specify the set point in engineering units; the
value must be < value in the 11th implied register and >
value in the 12th implied register
Second
implied
Mv
Loaded by the block every time the loop is solved; it is
clamped to a range of 0 ... 4095, making the output
compatible with an analog output module; the
manipulated variable register may be used for further
CPU calculations such as cascaded loops
Third implied
High Alarm Limit
Load a value in this register to specify a high alarm for
PV (at or above SP); enter the value in engineering units
within the range specified in the 11th and 12th implied
registers
Fourth implied Low Alarm Limit
Load a value in this register to specify a low alarm for PV
(at or below SP); enter the value in engineering units
within the range specified in the 11th and 12th implied
registers
Fifth implied
910
Proportional Band Load this register with the desired proportional constant
in the range 5 ... 500; the smaller the number, the larger
the proportional contribution; a valid number is required
in this register for PID2 to operate
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Register
Name
Content
Sixth implied
Reset Time
Constant
Load this register to add integral action to the
calculation; enter a value between 0000 ... 9999 to
represent a range of 00.00 ... 99.99 repeats/min; the
larger the number, the larger the integral contribution; a
value > 9999 stops the PID2 calculation
Seventh
implied
Rate Time
Constant
Load this register to add derivative action to the
calculation; enter a value between 0000 ... 9999 to
represent a range of 00.00 ... 99.99 min; the larger the
number, the larger the derivative contribution; a value >
9999 stops the PID2 calculation
Eighth implied Bias
Load this register to add a bias to the output; the value
must be between 000 .... 4095, and added directly to
Mv, whether the integral term is enabled or not
Ninth implied
High Integral
Windup Limit
Load this register with the upper limit of the output value
(between 0 ... 4095) where the anti-reset windup takes
effect; the updating of the integral sum is stopped if it
goes above this value (this is normally 4095)
10th implied
Low Integral
Windup Limit
Load this register with the lower limit of the output value
(between 0 ... 4095) where the anti-reset windup takes
effect (this is normally 0)
11th implied
High Engineering
Range
Load this register with the highest value for which the
measurement device is spanned, e.g. if a resistance
temperature device ranges from 0 ... 500 degrees C, the
high engineering range value is 500; the range must be
given as a positive integer between 0001 ... 9999,
corresponding to the raw analog input 4095
12th implied
Low Engineering
Range
Load this register with the lowest value for which the
measurement device is spanned; the range must be
given as a positive integer between 0 ... 9998, and it
must be less than the value in the 11th implied register;
it corresponds to the raw analog input 0
13th implied
Raw Analog
Measurement
The logic program loads this register with PV; the
measurement must be scaled and linear in the range 0
... 4095
911
912
Register
Name
Content
14th implied
Pointer to Loop
Counter Register
The value you load in this register points to the register
that counts the number of loops solved in each scan; the
entry is determined by discarding the most significant
digit in the register where the controller will count the
loops solved/scan, e.g., if the PLC does the count in
register 41236, load 1236 into the 14th implied register;
the same value must be loaded into the 14th implied
register in every PID2 block in the logic program
15th implied
Maximum Number Solved In a Scan: If the 14th implied register contains a
of Loops
non-zero value, you may load a value in this register to
limit the number of loops to be solved in one scan
16th implied
Pointer To Reset
Feedback Input:
The value you load in this register points to the holding
register that contains the value of feedback (F); drop the
4 from the feedback register and enter the remaining
four digits in this register; integration calculations
depend on the F value being should F vary from 0 ...
4095
17th implied
Output Clamp High
The value entered in this register determines the upper
limit of Mv (this is normally 4095)
18th implied
Output Clamp Low
The value entered in this register determines the lower
limit of Mv (this is normally 0)
19th implied
Rate Gain Limit
(RGL) Constant
The value entered in this register determines the
effective degree of derivative filtering; the range is from
2 ... 30; the smaller the value, the more filtering takes
place
20th implied
Pointer to Integral
Preload
The value entered in this register points to the holding
register containing the track input (T) value; drop the 4
from the tracking register and enter the remaining four
digits in this register; the value in the T register is
connected to the input of the integral lag whenever the
auto bit and integral preload bit are both true
31007523 12/2006
Destination
(MIddle Node)
The 4y register entered in the middle node is the first of nine contiguous holding
register used for PID2 calculations. You do not need to load anything into these
registers:
Register
Name
Content
Displayed
Loop Status Register
Twelve of the 16 bits in this register are used to
define loop status.
First implied
Error (E) Status Bits
This register displays PID2 error codes.
Second
implied
Loop Timer Register
This register stores the real-time clock reading on
the system clock each time the loop is solved: the
difference between the current clock value and the
value stored in the register is the elapsed time; if
elapsed time ≥ solution interval (10 times the value
given in the bottom node of the PID2 block), then the
loop should be solved in this scan
Third implied
For Internal Use
Integral (integer portion)
Fourth implied For Internal Use
Integral-fraction 1 (1/3 000)
Fifth implied
For Internal Use
Integral-fraction 2 (1/600 000)
Sixth implied
Pv x 8 (Filtered)
This register stores the result of the filtered analog
input (from register 4x14) multiplied by 8; this value
is useful in derivative control operations
Seventh
implied
Absolute Value of E
This register, which is updated after each loop
solution, contains the absolute value of (SP - PV); bit
8 in register 4y + 1 indicates the sign of E
Eighth implied For Internal Use
31007523 12/2006
Current solution interval
913
Loop Status
Register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Bit
Function
1
Top output status (Node lockout or parameter error
14
15
16
2
Middle output status (High alarm)
3
Bottom output status (Low alarm)
4
Loop in AUTO mode and time since last solution ≥ solution interval
5
Wind-down mod (for REV B or higher)
6
Loop in AUTO mode but not being solved
7
4x14 register referenced by 4x15 is valid
8
Sign of E in 4y + 7:
z 0 = + (plus)
z 1 = - (minus)
9
Rev B or higher
10
Integral windup limit never set
11
Integral windup saturated
12
Negative values in the equation
13
Bottom input status (direct / reverse acting)
14
Middle input status (tracking mode)
z 1 = tracking
z 0 = no tracking
Solution Interval
(Bottom Node)
914
15
Top input status (MAN / AUTO)
16
Bit 16 is set after initial startup or installation of the loop. If you clear the bit, the
following actions take place in one scan:
z The loop status register 4y is reset
z The current value in the real-time clock is stored in the first implied register
(4y+1)
z Values in the third ... fifth registers (4y+2,3) are cleared
z The value in the13th implied register (4x+13) x 8 is stored in the sixth implied
register (4y+6)
z The seventh and eighth implied registers (4y+7,8) are cleared
The bottom node indicates that this is a PID2 function and contains a number
ranging from 1 ... 255, indicating how often the function should be performed. The
number represents a time value in tenths of a second, or example, the number 17
indicates that the PID function should be performed every 1.7 s.
31007523 12/2006
Run Time Errors
Error Status Bit
31007523 12/2006
The first implied register of the destination contains the error status bits:
Code
Explanation
Check these Registers in the
Source Block (Top Node)
0000
No errors, all validations OK
None
0001
Scaled SP above 9999
First implied
0002
High alarm above 9999
Third implied
0003
Low alarm above 9999
Fourth implied
0004
Proportional band below 5
Fifth implied
0005
Proportional band above 500
Fifth implied
0006
Reset above 99.99 r/min
Sixth implied
0007
Rate above 99.99 min
Seventh implied
0008
Bias above 4095
Eighth implied
0009
High integral limit above 4095
Ninth implied
0010
Low integral limit above 4095
10th implied
0011
High engineering unit (E.U.) scale above 9999 11th implied
0012
Low E.U. scale above 9999
0013
High E.U. below low E.U.
0014
Scaled SP above high E.U.
First and 11th implied
0015
.Scaled SP below low E.U.
First and 12th implied
0016
Maximum loops/scan > 9999
Note: Activated by maximum loop feature, i.e.
only if 4x15 is not zero.
15th implied
0017
Reset feedback pointer out of range
16th implied
0018
High output clamp above 4095
17th implied
0019
Low output clamp above 4095
18th implied
0020
Low output clamp above high output clamp
0021
RGL below 2
19th implied
12th implied
0022
RGL above 30
19th implied
0023
Track F pointer out of range
Note: Activated only if the track feature is ON,
i.e. the middle input of the PID2 block is
receiving power while in AUTO mode.
20th implied with middle input
ON
915
916
Code
Explanation
Check these Registers in the
Source Block (Top Node)
0024
Track F pointer is zero
Note: Activated only if the track feature is ON,
i.e. the middle input of the PID2 block is
receiving power while in AUTO mode.
20th implied with middle input
ON
0025
None
Node locked out (short of scan time)
Note: If lockout occurs often and the
parameters are all valid, increase the maximum
number of loops/scan. Lockout may also occur
if the counting registers in use are not cleared
as required.
0026
Loop counter pointer is zero
0027
Loop counter pointer out of range
31007523 12/2006
Instruction Descriptions (R to Z)
VI
At a Glance
Introduction
In this part instruction descriptions are arranged alphabetically from R to Z.
What's in this
Part?
31007523 12/2006
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
155
R --> T: Register to Table
919
156
RBIT: Reset Bit
923
157
READ: Read
927
158
RET: Return from a Subroutine
933
159
RTTI - Register to Input Table
937
160
RTTO - Register to Output Table
941
161
RTU - Remote Terminal Unit
945
162
SAVE: Save Flash
951
163
SBIT: Set Bit
955
164
SCIF: Sequential Control Interfaces
959
165
SENS: Sense
965
166
Shorts
969
167
SKP - Skipping Networks
973
168
SRCH: Search
977
169
STAT: Status
170
SU16: Subtract 16 Bit
983
171
SUB: Subtraction
1013
172
SWAP - VME Bit Swap
1017
173
TTR - Table to Register
1021
174
T --> R Table to Register
1025
175
T --> T: Table to Table
1031
1009
917
Instruction Descriptions (R to Z)
Chapter
918
Chapter Name
Page
176
T.01 Timer: One Hundredth of a Second Timer
1037
177
T0.1 Timer: One Tenth Second Timer
1041
178
T1.0 Timer: One Second Timer
1045
179
T1MS Timer: One Millisecond Timer
1049
180
TBLK: Table to Block
1055
181
TEST: Test of 2 Values
1061
182
UCTR: Up Counter
1065
183
VMER - VME Read
1069
184
VMEW - VME Write
1073
185
WRIT: Write
1077
186
XMIT - Transmit
1083
187
XMIT Communication Block
1091
188
XMIT Port Status Block
1103
189
XMIT Conversion Block
1111
190
XMRD: Extended Memory Read
1119
191
XMWT: Extended Memory Write
1125
192
XOR: Exclusive OR
1131
31007523 12/2006
155
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction R → T.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
920
Representation
921
922
919
Short Description
Function
Description
920
The R→T instruction copies the bit pattern of a register or of a string of contiguous
discretes stored in a word into a specific register located in a table. It can
accommodate the transfer of one register/word per scan.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input /
increase pointer
prevents pointer from
increasing
active
source
pointer = table length
destination
pointer
reset pointer
RÆT
length:
max. 255 16-bit PLC
max. 999 24-bit PLC
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = copies source data and increments
the pointer value
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = freezes the pointer value
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = resets the pointer value to zero
source
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Source data to be copied in the current
scan
destination
pointer
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Destination table where source data will
be copied in the scan
INT, UINT
Number of registers in the destination
table, range: 1 ... 999
Length:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
table length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
table length
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = pointer value = table length
(instruction cannot increment any further)
921
Top Input
The input to the top node initiates the DX move operation.
Middle Input
When the middle input goes ON, the current value stored in the destination pointer
register is frozen while the DX operation continues. This causes new data being
copied to the destination to overwrite the data copied on the previous scan.
Bottom Input
When the bottom input goes ON, the value in the destination pointer register is reset
to zero. This causes the next DX move operation to copy source data into the first
register in the destination table.
Source Data (Top
Node)
Destination
Pointer (Middle
Node)
When using register types 0x or 1x:
First 0x reference in a string of 16 contiguous coils or discrete outputs
z First 1x reference in a string of 16 discrete inputs
z
The 4x register entered in the middle node is a pointer to the destination table where
source data will be copied in the scan. The first register in the destination table is the
next contiguous 4x register following the pointer, i.e. if the pointer register is 400027,
then the destination table begins at register 400028.
The value posted in the pointer register indicates the register in the destination table
where the source data will be copied. A value of zero indicates that the source data
will be copied to the first register in the destination table; a value of 1 indicates that
the source data be copied to the second register in the destination table; etc.
Note: The value posted in the destination pointer register cannot be larger than the
table length integer specified in this node.
Outputs
922
R→T can produce two possible outputs, from the top and middle nodes. The state
of the output from the top node echoes the state of the top input. The output from
the middle node goes ON when the value in the destination pointer register equals
the specified table length. At this point, the instruction cannot increment any further.
31007523 12/2006
RBIT: Reset Bit
156
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction RBIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
924
Representation
925
923
RBIT: Reset Bit
Short Description
Function
Description
The reset bit (RBIT) instruction lets you clear a latched-ON bit by powering the top
input. The bit remains cleared after power is removed from the input. This instruction
is designed to clear a bit set by the SBIT instruction.
Note: The RBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement
as 0x-referenced coils do. An RBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a
the ladder.
924
31007523 12/2006
RBIT: Reset Bit
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register #
bit number to reset
(1 - 16)
RBIT
bit #
(1 ... 16)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = clears the specified bit to 0. The bit
remains cleared after power is removed from
the input
register #
(top node)
4x
WORD
controlled
INT, UINT
cleared
None
ON = the specified bit has been cleared to 0
bit #
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
925
RBIT: Reset Bit
926
31007523 12/2006
READ: Read
157
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction READ.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
928
Representation
929
930
927
READ: Read
Short Description
Function
Description
The READ instruction provides the ability to read data from an ASCII input device
(keyboard, bar code reader, etc.) into the PLC’s memory via its RIO network. The
connection to the ASCII device is made at an RIO interface.
In the process of handling the messaging operation, READ performs the following
functions:
z Verifies the lengths of variable data fields
z Verifies the correctness of the ASCII communication parameters, e.g. the port
number, the message number
z Performs error detection and recording
z Reports RIO interface status
READ requires two tables of registers: a destination table where retrieved variable
data (the message) is stored, and a control block where comm port and message
parameters are identified.
Further information about formatting messages you will find on p. 31.
928
31007523 12/2006
READ: Read
Representation
Symbol
control
(off to on)
active
control block
pause operation
error (one scan)
destination
abort operation
complete (one scan)
READ
length:
max. 255 16-bit PLC
max. 999 24-bit PLC
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data Type Meaning
Reference
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates a READ
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = pauses READ operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = abort READ operation
control block
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT, Control block (first of seven contiguous holding
WORD
registers)
destination
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT, Destination table
WORD
table length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
table length
INT, UINT
Length of destination table
(number of registers where the message data
will be stored), range: 1 ... 999
Length:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = error in communication or operation has
timed out (for one scan)
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = READ complete (for one scan)
929
READ: Read
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of seven contiguous holding
register in the control block.
Register
Definition
Displayed
Port number and error code
First implied
Message number
Second implied
Number of registers required to satisfy format
Third implied
Count of the number of registers transmitted thus far
Fourth implied
Status of the solve
Fifth implied
Reserved
Sixth implied
Checksum of registers 0 ... 5
Port Number and
Error Code
930
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
PLC error code
5
Not used
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
Input from the ASCII device not compatible with format
7
Input buffer overrun, data received too quickly at RIOP
8
USART error, bad byte received at RIOP
9
ASCII device off-line, check cabling
10
Illegal format, not received properly by RIOP
11
ASCII message terminated early (in keyboard mode
12 ... 16
Comm port # (1 ... 32)
15
16
31007523 12/2006
READ: Read
PLC Error Code
Bit
Destination
(Middle Node)
Meaning
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
1
Error in the input to RIOP from ASCII device
0
0
1
0
Exception response from RIOP, bad data
0
0
1
1
Sequenced number from RIOP differs from expected value
0
1
0
0
User register checksum error, often caused by altering
READ registers while the block is active
0
1
0
1
Invalid port or message number detected
0
1
1
0
User-initiated abort, bottom input energized
0
1
1
1
No response from drop, communication error
1
0
0
0
Node aborted because of SKP instruction
1
0
0
1
Message area scrambled, reload memory
1
0
1
0
Port not configured in the I/O map
1
0
1
2
Illegal ASCII request
1
1
0
0
Unknown response from ASCII port
1
1
0
1
Illegal ASCII element detected in user logic
1
1
1
1
RIOP in the PLC is down
The middle node contains the first 4x register in a destination table. Variable data in
a READ message are written into this table. The length of the table is defined in the
bottom node.
Consider this READ message:
please enter password:
(Embedded Text)
AAAAAAAAAA
(Variable Data)
Note: An ASCII READ message may contain the embedded text, placed inside
quotation marks, as well as the variable data in the format statement, i.e., the ASCII
message.
The 10-character ASCII field AAAAAAAAAA is the variable data field; variable data
must be entered via an ASCII input device.
31007523 12/2006
931
READ: Read
932
31007523 12/2006
158
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction RET.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
934
Representation: RET - Return to Scheduled Logic
935
933
Short Description
Function
Description
The RET instruction may be used to conditionally return the logic scan to the node
immediately following the most recently executed JSR block. This instruction can be
implemented only from within the subroutine segment, the (unscheduled) last
segment in the user logic program.
Note: If a subroutine does not contain a RET block, either a LAB block or the endof-logic (whichever comes first) serves as the default return from the subroutine.
An example to the subroutine handling you will find on p. 47.
934
31007523 12/2006
Representation: RET - Return to Scheduled Logic
Symbol
RETURN TO PREVIOUS
LOGIC
ERROR
RET
00001
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = return to previous logic
ON returns the logic scan to the node
immediately following the most recently
executed JSR instruction or to the point
where the interrupt occurred in the logic
scan.
INT, UINT
Constant value, can not be changed
0x
None
ON = error in the specified subroutine
00001
Top output
31007523 12/2006
935
936
31007523 12/2006
159
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction RTTI.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
938
Representation
939
937
Short Description
Function
Description
938
The Register to Input Table block is one of four 484-replacement instructions. It
copies the contents of an input register or a holding register to another input or
holding register. This destination register is pointed to by the input register implied
by the constant in the bottom node. Only one such operation can be accommodated
by the system in each scan.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
error
RTTI
destination
offset pointer
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Control source
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
The source node (top node) contains the
source register address. The data located
in the source register address will be
copied to the destination address, which is
determined by the destination offset
pointer.
pointer
(bottom node)
(1 ... 254)
(801 ... 832)
INT, UINT
The pointer is a 3xxxx implied by a constant
(i.e. 00018 -> 30018) whose contents
indicate the destination. A value of 1 to 254
indicates a holding register (40001 - 40254)
and a value of 801 to 832 indicates an input
register (30001 - 30032). If the value is
outside this range, the operation is not
performed and the ERROR rail is powered.
Note the pointer's value is NOT
automatically increased.
Top output
0x
None
Echoes the value of the top input
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
Pointer value out of range
939
940
31007523 12/2006
160
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction RTTO.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
942
Representation
943
941
Short Description
Function
Description
942
The Register to Output Table block is one of four 484-replacement instructions. It
copies the contents of an input register or a holding register to another input or
holding register. The holding register implied by the constant in the bottom node
points to this destination register. Only one such operation can be accommodated
by the system in each scan.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
copy
source
error
RTTO
destination
offset pointer
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Control source
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
source register address. The data located
in the source register address will be
copied to the destination address, which is
determined by the destination offset
pointer.
pointer
(bottom node)
(1 ... 254)
(801 ... 824)
INT, UINT
The pointer is a 4xxxx implied by a constant
(i.e. 00018 -> 40018) whose contents
indicate the destination. A value of 1 to 254
indicates a holding register (40001 - 40254)
and a value of 801 to 832 indicates an input
register (30001 - 30032). If the value is
Note that the pointer's value is NOT
automatically increased.
Top output
0x
None
Echoes the value of the top input
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error
943
944
31007523 12/2006
161
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction RTU.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
946
Representation
947
945
Short Description
Function
Description
The Modbus Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) block supports the following data baud
rates:
z
z
z
z
z
946
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Parameter
Description
Register Entries
for Baud Rates
Description of the instructions parameters
Register
Function
4x
RTU revision number (read-only)
4x + 1
Fault status field (read-only)
4x + 2
Field not used
4x + 3
Set the Data Baud Rate register
For expanded and detailed information about the register entries for baud rates
please see the section below: Register Entries for Baud Rates.
4x + 4
Set the Data Bits register
For expanded and detailed information about the register entries for data bits
please see the section below: Register Entries for Data Bits
4x + 5
Parity register
4x + 6
Stop bit register
4x + 7
Field not used
4x + 8
Set the Command Word register
For expanded and detailed information about the register entries for command
words please see the section below: Register Entries for Command Words
The Modbus Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) block supports the following data baud
rates:
z
z
z
z
z
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
Below are the register entries for the supported data rates. To configure a data rate,
type the appropriate decimal number (for example 1200) in the data baud rate
register.
31007523 12/2006
Register Entry
Baud Rate
1200
1200
2400
2400
4800
4800
9600
9600
19200
19200
947
Register Entries
for Data Bits
The RTU block supports data bits 7 and 8. Below are the possible register entries
for the data bits field:
Register Entry
Data Bit Field
7
7
8
8
Modbus messages can be sent in Modbus RTU format or Modbus ASCII format.
If messages are sent in Modbus ASCII format, type 7 in the field.
z If messages are sent in Modbus RTU format, type 8.
z
If you're sending ASCII character messages, this register can be set to 7 or 8 data
bits.
Register Entries
for Command
Words
948
The RTU block interprets each bit of the command word as a function to implement
or perform. Below are the bit definitions for the command word register entries.
Register Entry
Definitions
1 (msb)
Not used
2
Enable RTS/CTS control
3
Not used
4
Not used
5
Not used
6
Not used
7
Enable ASCII string messaging
8
Enable Modbus messaging
9
Not used
10
Not used
11
Not used
12
Not used
13
Not used
14
Hang up modem
15
Dial modem
16 (lsb)
Initialize modem
31007523 12/2006
The following items provide expanded and detailed information about
Bits 2, 7, and 8.
z
z
z
31007523 12/2006
Bit 2 – Enable request-to-send/clear-to-send (RTS/CTS) control
This bit should be set (or true) when a DCE that is connected to the PLC requires
hardware handshaking using RTS/CTS control.
This bit can be used in conjunction with the values contained in the (4xxxx ¸ 13)
start-of-transmission delay register and the (4xxxx + 13) end-of-transmission
delay register. Start-of-transmission delay keeps RTS asserted for 0-9999 ms
before the RTU block sends a message from the PLC port. After the RTU block
sends a message, end-of-transmission delay keeps RTS asserted for 0-9999 ms.
When end-of-transmission delay has expired, the RTU block de-asserts RTS.
Bit 7 – Enable ASCII string messaging
This bit should be set (or true) to send ASCII string messages form the PLC
communication Port #1.
The RTU block can send an ASCII string of up to 512 characters in length. Each
ASCII message must be programmed into contiguous 4x registers of the PLC.
Two characters per register are allowed.
Note: This ASCII message string should not be confused with a Modbus
message sent in ASCII format.
Bit 8 – Enable Modbus messaging
This bit should be set (or true) to send Modbus messages from the PLC
communication port #1.
Modbus messages can be sent in RTU or ASCII formats.
z If sending Modbus messages in RTU format, set the data bits in the (4xxxx +
4) data bits register to 8.
z If sending Modbus message in ASCII format, set the data bits in the (4xxxx +
4) data bits register to 7.
949
950
31007523 12/2006
SAVE: Save Flash
162
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SAVE.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
952
Representation
953
954
951
SAVE: Save Flash
Short Description
Function
Description
Note: This instruction is available with the PLC family TSX Compact, with Quantum
CPUs 434 12/ 534 14 and Momentum CPUs CCC 960 x0/ 980 x0.
The SAVE instruction saves a block of 4x registers to state RAM where they are
protected from unauthorized modification.
952
31007523 12/2006
SAVE: Save Flash
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register
error
SAVE not allowed
1, 2, 3, 4
SAVE
length
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Start SAVE operation: it should remain ON
until the operation has completed
successfully or an error has occurred.
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First of max. 512 contiguous 4x registers
to be saved to state RAM
1, 2, 3, 4
(see p. 954)
(middle node)
INT
Integer value, which defines the specific
buffer where the block of data is to be
saved
length
(bottom node)
INT
Number of words to be saved, range: 1 ...
512
Top output
0x
None
ON = SAVE is active
Middle output
(see p. 954)
0x
None
ON = SAVE is not allowed
953
SAVE: Save Flash
1, 2, 3, 4
(Middle Node)
The middle node defines the specific buffer, within state RAM, where the block of
data is to be saved. Four 512 word buffers are allowed. Each buffer is defined by
placing its corresponding value in the middle node, that is, the value 1 represents
the first buffer, value 2 represents the second buffer and so on. The legal values are
1, 2, 3, and 4. When the PLC is started all four buffers are zeroed. Therefore, you
may not save data to the same buffer without first loading it with the instruction
LOAD (see p. 631). When this is attempted the middle output goes ON. In other
words, once a buffer is used, it may not be used again until the data has been
removed.
Middle Output
The output from the middle node goes ON when previously saved data has not been
accessed using the LOAD (see p. 631) instruction. This prevents inadvertent
overwriting of data in the SAVE buffer.
954
31007523 12/2006
SBIT: Set Bit
163
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SBIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
956
Representation
957
955
SBIT: Set Bit
Short Description
Function
Description
The set bit (SBIT) instruction lets you set the state of the specified bit to ON (1) by
powering the top input.
Note: The SBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement
as 0x-referenced coils do. An SBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a
the ladder.
956
31007523 12/2006
SBIT: Set Bit
Representation
Symbol
on sets bit to 1
active
register #
SBIT
bit #
(1 ... 16)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = sets the specified bit to 1. The bit
remains set after power is removed from
the input
register #
(top node)
4x
WORD
controlled
INT, UINT
set
None
Goes ON, when the specified bit is set and
remains ON until it is cleared (via the RBIT
(see p. 923) instruction)
bit #
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
957
SBIT: Set Bit
958
31007523 12/2006
SCIF:
Sequential Control Interfaces
164
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SCIF.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
960
Representation
961
963
959
Short Description
Function
Description
The SCIF instruction performs either a drum sequencing operation or an input
comparison (ICMP) using the data defined in the step data table.
The choice of operation is made by defining the value in the first register of the step
data table (see p. 963):
z 0 = drum mode:
The instruction controls outputs in the drum sequencing application.
z 1 = ICMP mode:
The instruction reads inputs to ensure that limit switches, proximity switches,
pushbuttons, etc. are properly positioned to allow drum outputs to be fired.
960
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
step pointer
operation specific
operation specific
step data table
reset step pointer
error
SCIF
length: 1 - 255
31007523 12/2006
length
(1 ... 255)
961
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates specified sequence control
operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Drum mode: step pointer increments to
the next step
ICMP mode: compare status is shown at
the middle output
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Drum mode: ON = reset step pointer to 0
ICMP mode: not used
step pointer
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
Number of the current step in the step data
table
step data table
(see p. 963)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
First register in the step data table
p. 963.)
INT, UINT
Number of application-specific registers
used in the step data table
length (see
p. 964)
(bottom node)
962
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Drum mode goes ON for the last step
Note: When using the middle output, be
aware that when integrating with other
logic, if the step pointer is zero and the
middle input is ON, then the middle output
will also be ON. This condition will cause
the step pointer to be one step out of
sequence.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error is detected
31007523 12/2006
Step Data Table
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first register in the step data table.
The first seven registers in the table hold constant and variable data required to
solve the instruction:
Register
Register Name
Description
Displayed subfunction type
0 = drum mode; 1 = ICMP mode
(entry of any other value in this register will result in all
outputs OFF)
First
implied
masked output
data
(in drum mode)
Loaded by SCIF each time the block is solved; the register
contains the contents of the current step data register
masked with the output mask register
raw input data
(in ICMP mode)
Loaded by the user from a group of sequential inputs to be
used by the block in the current step
Second
implied
current step data
Loaded by SCIF each time the block is solved; the register
contains data from the current step (pointed to by the step
pointer)
Third
implied
output mask
(in drum mode)
Loaded by the user before using the block, the contents will
not be altered during logic solving; contains a mask to be
applied to the data for each sequencer step
input mask
(in ICMP mode)
Loaded by the user before using the block, it contains a mask
to be ANDed with raw input data for each step, masked bits
will not be compared; the masked data are put in the masked
input data register
Fourth
implied
masked input data Loaded by SCIF each time the block is solved, it contains the
(in ICMP mode)
result of the ANDed input mask and raw input data
not used in drum
mode
Fifth
implied
compare status
(in ICMP mode)
Loaded by SCIF each time the block is solved, it contains the
result of an XOR of the masked input data and the current
step data; unmasked inputs that are not in the correct logical
state cause the associated register bit to go to 1, non-zero
bits cause a miscompare and turn ON the middle output from
the SCIF block
not used in drum
mode
Sixth
implied
31007523 12/2006
start of data table
First of K registers in the table containing the user-specified
control data
Note: This and the rest of the registers represent applicationspecific step data in the process being controlled.
963
Length of Step
Data Table
(Bottom Node)
The integer value entered in the bottom node is the length, i.e. the number of
application-specific registers, used in the step data table. The length can range from
1 ... 255.
length must be ≥ the value placed in the steps used register in the middle node.
964
31007523 12/2006
SENS: Sense
165
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SENS.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
966
Representation
967
968
965
SENS: Sense
Short Description
Function
Description
966
The SENS instruction examines and reports the sense (1 or 0) of a specific bit
location in a data matrix. One bit location is sensed per scan.
31007523 12/2006
SENS: Sense
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
bit location
Pointer: (999 16-bit PLC)
(max) (9600 24-bit PLC)
increase pointer
sense bit (on/off)
data matrix
reset pointer
SENS
matrix length (max)
255 registers (4080 bits 16-bit PLC)
600 registers (9600 bits 24-bit PLC)
Parameter
Description
length
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = senses the bit location
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
Increment bit location by one on next scan
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
Reset bit location to 1
bit location (see
p. 968)
(top node)
3x, 4x
WORD
Specific bit location to be sensed in the data
matrix, entered explicitly as an integer or
stored in a register; range: 1 ... 9600
Pointer: ( 999 16-bit PLC)
(max) (9900 24-bit PLC)
data matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
BOOL,
WORD
First word or register in the data matrix
INT,
UINT
Matrix length max
255 Registers (4080 bits 16-bit PLC)
600 Registers (9600 bits 24-bit PLC)
length (see p. 968)
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
error
operation not performed
pointer > matrix size
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = bit sense is 1
OFF = bit sense is 0
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = error: bit location > matrix length
967
SENS: Sense
Bit Location
(Top Node)
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
968
Note: If the bit location is entered as an integer or in a 3x register, the instruction
will ignore the state of the middle and bottom inputs.
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies a matrix length, i.e, the
number of 16-bit words or registers in the data matrix. The length can range from 1
... 600 in a 24-bit CPU, e.g, a matrix length of 200 indicates 3200 bit locations.
31007523 12/2006
Shorts
166
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction element Shorts.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
970
Representation
971
969
Shorts
Short Description
Function
Description
970
Shorts are simply straight-line connections between contacts and/or instructions in
a ladder logic network. Vertical (|) and horizontal (—) shorts are used to make
connections between rows and columns of logic. To cancel a vertical short, use a
vertical open.
31007523 12/2006
Shorts
Representation
Vertical Shorts
Connects contacts or instructions vertically in a network column, or node inputs and
outputs to create either/or conditions. When two contacts are connected by vertical
shorts, power is passed when one or both contacts receive power.
Horizontal
Shorts
Expands logic horizontally along a rung in a ladder logic network.
31007523 12/2006
971
Shorts
972
31007523 12/2006
167
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SKP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
974
Representation
975
973
Short Description
Function
Description
The SKP instruction is a standard instruction in all PLCs. It should be used with
caution.
The SKP instruction is used to reduce the scan time by not solving a portion of the
logic. The SKP instruction causes the logic scan to skip specified networks in the
program.
The SKP function can be used to
bypass seldom used program sequences
z create subroutines
z
The SKP instruction allows you to skip a specified number of networks in a ladder
logic program. When it is powered, the SKP operation is performed on every scan.
The remainder of the network in which the instruction appears counts as the first of
the specified number of networks to be skipped. The CPU continues to skip
networks until the total number of networks skipped equals the number specified in
the instruction block or until a segment boundary is reached. A SKP operation
cannot cross a segment boundary.
A SKP instruction can be activated only if you specify in the PLC set-up editor that
skips are allowed. SKP is a one-high nodal instruction.
WARNING
SKIPPED INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
When using the SKP instruction, watch for skipped inputs and outputs. SKP is a
dangerous instruction that should be used carefully. If inputs and outputs that
normally effect control are unintentionally skipped (or not skipped), the result can
create hazardous conditions for personnel and application equipment.
equipment damage.
CAUTION
READING VALUES WHILE CHANGING
Use 3xxxx and 4xxxx registers with caution. The processor can read the value
while it's changing.
974
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
SKP
# of networks
skipped
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
1x
None
ON initiates a skip network operation when
it passes power. A SKP operation is
performed on every scan while the input is
ON
# of networks
skipped
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
WORD
The value entered in the node specifies the
number of networks to be skipped.
The value can be
z Specified explicitly as an integer
constant in the range 1 through 999
z Stored in a 3xxxx input register
z Stored in a 4xxxx holding register
The node value includes the network that
contains the SKP instruction. The nodal
regions in the network where the SKP
resides that have not already been
scanned will be skipped; this counts as one
of the networks specified to be skipped.
The CPU continues to skip networks until
the total number of networks skipped
equals the value specified.
31007523 12/2006
975
976
31007523 12/2006
SRCH: Search
168
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SRCH.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
978
Representation
979
981
977
SRCH: Search
Short Description
Function
Description
978
The SRCH instruction searches the registers in a source table for a specific bit
pattern.
31007523 12/2006
SRCH: Search
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source table
start search at
pointer register
match found
pointer
SRCH
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates search
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = search from beginning
ON = search from last match
source table
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Source table to be searched
pointer (see
p. 981)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Pointer into the source table
INT, UINT
Number of registers in the source table;
range: 1 ... 100
table length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
table length
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = match found
979
SRCH: Search
A SRCH Example
In the following example, we search a source table that contains five registers
(40421 ... 40425) for a specific bit pattern. The pointer register (40430) indicates that
the desired bit pattern is stored in register 40431, and we see that the register
contains a bit value of 3333.
40421
40430
10001
10002
40430
40500
SRCH
00005
BLKM
0001
register
source table content
40421
40422
40423
40424
40425
= 1111
= 2222
= 3333
= 4444
= 5555
pointer
40430
register
content
40431
= 3333
00142
In each scan where P.T. contact 10001 transitions from OFF to ON, the source table
is searched for a bit pattern equivalent to the value 3333. when the math is found,
the middle output passes power to coil 00142.
If N.O. contact 10002 is OFF when the match is found at register 40423, the SRCH
instruction energizes coil 00142 for one scan, then starts the search again in the
next scan at the top of the source table (register 40421). If contact 10002 is ON, the
SRCH instruction energizes coil 00142 for one scan, then starts the search in
register 40424,
Because the top input is a P.T. contact, on any scan where power is not applied to
the top input the pointer value is cleared. We use a BLKM instruction here to sage
the pointer value to register 40500.
980
31007523 12/2006
SRCH: Search
Pointer
(Middle Node)
31007523 12/2006
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the pointer into the source table. It
points to the source register that contains the same value as the value stored in the
next contiguous register after the pointer, e.g. if the pointer register is 400015, then
register 400016 contains a value that the SRCH instruction will attempt to match in
source table.
981
SRCH: Search
982
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
169
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction STAT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
984
Representation
985
986
Description of the Status Table
987
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for Quantum and Momentum
990
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 20 for Momentum
994
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 171 for Quantum
996
Communication Status Words 172 - 277 for Quantum
998
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for TSX Compact and Atrium
1003
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 15 for TSX Compact
1006
Global Health and Communications Retry Status Words 182 ... 184 for TSX Compact
1007
983
STAT: Status
Short Description
Function
Description
The STAT instruction accesses a specified number of words in a status table
(see p. 987) in the PLC’s system memory. Here vital diagnostic information
regarding the health of the PLC and its remote I/O drops is posted.
This information includes:
PLC status
z Possible error conditions in the I/O modules
z Input-to-PLC-to-output communication status
z
984
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Representation
Symbol
control destination
top input
destination
STAT
length
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = copies specified number of words
from the status table
destination (see
p. 986) (top node)
0x, 4x
INT, UINT,
BOOL, WORD
First position in the destination block
INT, UINT
number of registers or 16-bit words in
the destination block
node specifies a matrix length - i.e., the
number of 16-bit words or registers in
the data matrix. The length can range
from 1 through 255 in a 16-bit CPU and
from 1 through 600 in a 24-bit CPU—
e.g., a matrix length of 200 indicates
3200 bit locations.
Note: If 0xxxx references are used as
the destination, they cannot be
programmed as coils, only as contacts
referencing those coil numbers.
(For detailed information regarding table
length and PLCs see p. 986.)
None
length (see p. 986)
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
0x
985
STAT: Status
Mode of
Functioning
With the STAT instruction, you can copy some or all of the status words into a block
of registers or a block of contiguous discrete references.
The copy to the STAT block always begins with the first word in the table up to the
last word of interest to you. For example, if the status table is 277 words long and
you are interested only in the statistics provided in word 11, you need to copy only
words 1 ... 11 by specifying a length of 11 in the STAT instruction.
Destination
Block (Top Node)
The reference number entered in the top node is the first position in the destination
block, i.e. the block where the current words of interest from the status table will be
copied.
The number of holding registers or 16-bit words in the destination block is specified
in the bottom node (length).
Note: We recommend that you do not use discretes in the STAT destination node
because of the excessive number required to contain status information.
Length
(Bottom Node)
The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies the number of registers or
16-bit words in the destination block where the current status information will be
written.
The maximum allowable length will differ according to the type of PLC in use and the
type of I/O communications protocol employed.
z For a 984A, 984B, or 984X Chassis Mount PLC using the S901 RIO protocol the
available range of the system status table is 1 ... 75 words
z For PLCs with 16-bit CPUs using the S908 RIO protocol - for example the 38x,
48x, and 68x Slot Mount PLCs - the available range of the system status table is
1 ... 255
z For PLCs with 24-bit CPUs using the S908 RIO protocol - for example the 78x
Slot Mount PLCs, the Quantum PLCs - the available range of the system status
table is 1 ... 277
z For Compact-984 PLCs the available range of the system status table is 1 ... 184
z For Modicon Micro PLCs the available range of the system status table is 1 ... 56
986
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Description of the Status Table
General
The STAT instruction is used to display the Status of Controller and I/O system for
Quantum (see p. 987), Atrium (see p. 989), TSX Compact (see p. 989) and
Momentum (see p. 988).
The first 11 status words are used by Quantum and Momentum in the same way and
by TSX Compact and Atrium in the same way. The following have a different
meaning for Quantum, TSX Compact and Momentum.
Quantum
Overview
The 277 words in the status table are organized in three sections:
z Controller Status (words 1 ... 11) (see p. 990)
z I/O Module Health (words 12 ... 171) (see p. 996)
z I/O Communications Health (words 172 ... 277) (see p. 998)
Words of the status table:
31007523 12/2006
Decimal Word
Word Content
Hex Word
1
Controller Status
01
2
Hot Standby Status
02
3
Controller Status
03
4
RIO Status
04
5
Controller Stop State
06
6
Number of Ladder Logic Segments
06
7
End-of-logic (EOL) Pointer
07
8
RIO Redundancy and Timeout
08
9
ASCII Message Status
09
10
RUN/LOAD/DEBUG Status
0A
11
not used
0B
12
Drop 1, Rack 1
0C
13
Drop 1, Rack 2
0D
...
......
...
16
Drop 1, Rack 5
0F
17
Drop 2, Rack 1
10
18
Drop 2, Rack 2
11
...
......
...
171
Drop 32, Rack 5
AB
172
S908 Startup Error Code
AC
173
Cable A Errors
AD
174
Cable A Errors
AE
175
Cable A Errors
AF
987
STAT: Status
Momentum
Overview
Decimal Word
Word Content
Hex Word
176
Cable B Errors
B0
178
Cable B Errors
B1
178
Cable B Errors
B2
179
Global Communication Errors
B3
180
B4
181
B5
182
Drop 1 Errors/Health Status and Retry Counters
(in the TSX Compact 984 Controllers) (First word)
B6
183
(in the TSX Compact 984 Controllers) (Second word)
B7
184
(in the TSX Compact 984 Controllers) (Third word)
B8
185
B9
...
......
...
275
113
276
(in the TSX Compact 984 Controllers) (Second word)
114
277
(in the TSX Compact 984 Controllers) (Third word)
115
The 20 words in the status table are organized in two sections:
Controller Status (words 1 ... 11) (see p. 990)
z
988
Decimal Word
Word Content
Hex Word
1
Controller Status
01
2
Hot Standby Status
02
3
Controller Status
03
4
RIO Status
04
5
Controller Stop State
06
6
06
7
07
8
RIO Redundancy and Timeout
08
9
ASCII Message Status
09
10
0A
11
not used
0B
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
TSX Compact
and Atrium
Overview
Decimal Word
Word Content
Hex Word
12
Local Momentum I/O Module Health
0C
13
I/O Bus Module Health
0D
14
0E
15
0F
16
10
17
11
18
12
19
13
20
14
The 184 words in the status table are organized in three sections:
z Controller Status (words 1 ... 11) (see p. 1003)
z Not used (16 ... 181)
z Global Health and Communications retry status (words 182 ... 184) (see p. 1007)
31007523 12/2006
Decimal Word
Word Content
Hex Word
1
CPU Status
01
2
not used
02
3
Controller Status
03
4
not used
04
5
CPU Stop State
06
6
06
7
07
8
not used
08
9
not used
09
10
0A
11
not used
0B
12
I/O Health Status Rack 1
0C
13
0D
14
0E
15
0F
16 ... 181
not used
10 ... B5
182
Health Status
B6
183
I/O Error Counter
B7
184
PAB Bus Retry Counter
B8
989
STAT: Status
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for Quantum and Momentum
Controller Status
(Word 1)
Word 1 displays the following aspects of the PLC status:
1
2
Bit
Hot Standby
Status (Word 2)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1-5
Not used
6
1 = enable constant sweep
7
1 = enable single sweep delay
8
1 = 16 bit user logic
9
1 = AC power on
10
1 = RUN light OFF
11
1 = memory protect OFF
12
1 = battery failed
13 - 16
Not used
Word 2 displays the Hot Standby status for 984 PLCs that use S911/R911 Hot
Standby Modules:
1
990
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Bit
Function
1
1 = S911/R911 present and healthy
2 - 10
Not used
11
0 = controller toggle set to A
1 = controller toggle set to B
12
0 = controllers have matching logic
1 = controllers do not have matching logic
13, 14
Remote system state:
0 1 = Off line (1 dec)
1 0 = primary (2 dec)
1 1 = standby (3 dec)
15, 16
Local system state:
0 1 = Off line (1 dec)
1 0 = primary (2 dec)
1 1 = standby (3 dec)
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Controller Status
(Word 3)
RIO Status
(Word 4)
Controller Stop
State (Word 5)
Word 3 displays more aspects of the controller status:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bit
Function
1
1 = first scan
2
1 = start command pending
3
1 = constant sweep time exceeded
4
1 = Existing DIM AWARENESS
5 - 12
Not used
13 - 16
Single sweeps
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
12
13
14
15
16
Word 4 is used for IOP information:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Function
1
1 = IOP bad
2
1 = IOP time out
3
1 = IOP loop back
7
8
4
1 = IOP memory failure
5 - 12
Not used
13 - 16
00 = IO did not respond
01 = no response
02 = failed loopback
9
10
CAUTION
Using a Quantum or 984-684E/785E PLC
If you are using a Quantum or 984-684E/785E PLC, bit 15 in word 5 is never set.
These PLCs can be started and run with coils disabled in RUN (optimized) mode.
Also all the bits in word 5 must be set to 0 when one of these PLCs is running.
31007523 12/2006
991
STAT: Status
Word 5 displays the PLC’s stop state conditions:
1
Controller Stop
State (Word 6)
992
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bit
Function
1
1 = peripheral port stop
2
Extended memory parity error (for chassis mount controllers) or traffic cop/S908
error (for other controllers)
If the bit = 1 in a 984B controller, an error has been detected in extended memory;
the controller will run, but the error output will be ON for XMRD/XMWT functions
If the bit = 1 for any other controller than a chassis mount, then either a traffic
cop error has been detected or the S908 is missing from a multi-drop configuration.
3
1 = controller in DIM AWARENESS
4
1 = illegal peripheral intervention
5
1 = segment scheduler invalid
6
1 = start of node did not start segment
7
1 = state RAM test failed
8
1 = invalid traffic cop
9
1 = watchdog timer expired
10
1 = real time clock error
11
CPU logic solver failed (for chassis mount controllers) or Coil Use TABLE (for other
controllers)
If the bit = 1 in a chassis mount controller, the internal diagnostics have detected
CPU failure.
If the bit = 1 in any controller other than a chassis mount, then the Coil Use Table
does not match the coils in user logic.
12
1 = IOP failure
13
1 = invalid node
14
1 = logic checksum
15
1 = coil disabled in RUN mode (see Caution below)
16
1 = bad config
Word 6 displays the number of segments in ladder logic; a binary number is shown:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Bit
Function
1 - 16
Number of segments (expressed as a decimal number)
15
16
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Controller Stop
State (Word 7)
RIO Redundancy
and Timeout
(Word 8)
Word 7 displays the address of the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:
1
2
Word 11
31007523 12/2006
5
6
7
Function
1 - 16
EOL pointer address
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Word 8 uses its four least significant bits to display the remote I/O timeout constant:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 - 12
Not used
13 - 16
RIO timeout constant
Word 9 uses its four least significant bits to display ASCII message status:
1
2
Bit
RUN/LOAD/
DEBUG Status
(Word 10)
4
Bit
Bit
ASCII Message
Status (Word 9)
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 12
Not used
13
1 = Mismatch between numbers of messages and pointers
14
1 = Invalid message pointer
15
1 = Invalid message
16
1 = Message checksum error
Word 10 uses its two least significant bits to display RUN/LOAD/DEBUG status:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1 ... 14
Not used
15, 15
0 0 = Debug (0 dec)
0 1 = Run (1 dec)
1 0 = Load (2 dec)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
This word is not used.
993
STAT: Status
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 20 for Momentum
I/O Module
Health Status
Status words 12 ... 20 display I/O module health status.
Local Momentum
I/O Module
Health
Word 12 displays the Local Momentum I/O Module health:
994
1 word is reserved for each of up to 1 Local drop, 8 words are used to represent the
health of up to 128 I/O Bus Modules
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Function
1
1 = Local Module
2 - 16
Not used
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Momentum I/O
Bus Module
Health
Word 13 through 20 display the health status for Momentum I/O Bus Modules as
follows:
Word
I/O Bus Modules
13
1 ... 16
14
17 ... 32
15
33 ... 48
16
49 ... 64
17
65 ... 80
18
81 ... 96
19
97 ... 112
20
113 ... 128
Each Word display the Momentum I/O Bus Module health as follows:
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Function
1
1 = Module 1
2
1 = Module 2
3
1 = Module 3
4
1 = Module 4
5
1 = Module 5
6
1 = Module 6
7
1 = Module 7
8
1 = Module 8
9
1 = Module 9
10
1 = Module 10
11
1 = Module 11
12
1 = Module 12
13
1 = Module 13
14
1 = Module 14
15
1 = Module 15
16
1 = Module 16
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
995
STAT: Status
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 171 for Quantum
RIO Status
Words
Status words 12 ... 20 display I/O module health status.
Five words are reserved for each of up to 32 drops, one word for each of up to five
possible racks (I/O housings) in each drop. Each rack may contain up to 11 I/O
modules; bits 1 ... 11 in each word represent the health of the associated I/O module
in each rack.
1
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1
1 = Slot 1
2
1 = Slot 2
3
1 = Slot 3
4
1 = Slot 4
5
1 = Slot 5
6
1 = Slot 6
7
1 = Slot 7
8
1 = Slot 8
9
1 = Slot 9
10
1 = Slot 10
11
1 = Slot 11
12
1 = Slot 12
13
1 = Slot 13
14
1 = Slot 14
15
1 = Slot 15
16
1 = Slot 16
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Four conditions must be met before an I/O module can indicate good health:
The slot must be traffic copped
z The slot must contain a module with the correct personality
z Valid communications must exist between the module and the RIO interface at
remote drops
z Valid communications must exist between the RIO interface at each remote drop
and the I/O processor in the controller
z
996
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Status Words for
the MMI Operator
Panels
The status of the 32 Element Pushbutton Panels and PanelMate units on an RIO
network can also be monitored with an I/O health status word. The Pushbutton
Panels occupy slot 4 in an I/O rack and can be monitored at bit 4 of the appropriate
status word. A PanelMate on RIO occupies slot 1 in rack 1 of the drop and can be
monitored at bit 1 of the first status word for the drop.
Note: The ASCII Keypad’s communication status can be monitored with the error
codes in the ASCII READ/WRIT blocks.
31007523 12/2006
997
STAT: Status
Communication Status Words 172 - 277 for Quantum
DIO Status
Status words 172 ... 277 contain the I/O system communication status. Words 172
... 181 are global status words. Among the remaining 96 words, three words are
dedicated to each of up to 32 drops, depending on the type of PLC.
Word 172 stores the Quantum Startup Error Code. This word is always 0 when the
system is running. If an error occurs, the controller does not start-it generates a stop
state code of 10 (word 5 (see p. 991)).
Quantum Start-up Error Codes
998
Code
Error
Meaning (Where the error has occurred)
01
BADTCLEN
Traffic Cop length
02
BADLNKNUM
Remote I/O link number
03
BADNUMDPS
Number of drops in Traffic Cop
04
BADTCSUM
Traffic Cop checksum
10
BADDDLEN
Drop descriptor length
11
BADDRPNUM
I/O drop number
12
BADHUPTIM
Drop holdup time
13
BADASCNUM
ASCII port number
14
BADNUMODS
Number of modules in drop
15
PRECONDRP
Drop already configured
16
PRECONPRT
Port already configured
17
TOOMNYOUT
More than 1024 output points
18
TOOMNYINS
More than 1024 input points
20
BADSLTNUM
Module slot address
21
BADRCKNUM
Module rack address
22
BADOUTBC
Number of output bytes
23
BADINBC
Number of input bytes
25
BADRF1MAP
First reference number
26
BADRF2MAP
Second reference number
27
NOBYTES
No input or output bytes
28
BADDISMAP
Discrete not on 16-bit boundary
30
BADODDOUT
Unpaired odd output module
31
BADODDIN
Unpaired odd input module
32
BADODDREF
Unmatched odd module reference
33
BAD3X1XRF
1x reference after 3x register
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Code
Status of Cable A
Error
Meaning (Where the error has occurred)
34
BADDMYMOD
Dummy module reference already used
35
NOT3XDMY
3x module not a dummy
36
NOT4XDMY
4x module not a dummy
40
DMYREAL1X
Dummy, then real 1x module
41
REALDMY1X
Real, then dummy 1x module
42
DMYREAL3X
Dummy, then real 3x module
43
REALDMY3X
Real, then dummy 3x module
Words 173 ... 175 are Cable A error words:
Word 173
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 8
Counts framing errors
9 ... 16
Counts DMA receiver overruns
Word 174
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
Counts receiver errors
9 ... 16
Counts bad drop receptions
Word 175
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1
1 = Short frame
2
1 = No end-of- frame
3 ... 12
Not used
13
1 = CRC error
14
1 = Alignment error
15
1 =Overrun error
16
Not used
8
999
STAT: Status
Status of Cable B
Words 176 ... 178 are Cable A error words:
Word 176
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 8
Counts framing errors
9 ... 16
Counts DMA receiver overruns
Word 177
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
Counts receiver errors
9 -...16
Counts bad drop receptions
Word 178
1
Status of Global
Communication
(Words 179 ...
181)
1000
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1
1 = Short frame
2
1 = No end-of- frame
3 ... 12
Not used
13
1 = CRC error
14
1 = Alignment error
15
1 =Overrun error
16
Not used
8
Word 179 displays global communication status:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1
1 = Comm health
2
1 = Cable A status
3
1 = Cable B status
4
Not used
5 ... 8
Lost communication counter
9 ... 16
Cumulative retry counter
10
11
12
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Word 180 is the global cumulative error counter for Cable A:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
Counts detected errors
9 ... 162
Counts No responses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
15
16
Word 181 is the global cumulative error counter for Cable B:
1
Status of Remote
I/O (Words 182 ...
277)
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
Counts detected errors
9 ... 162
Counts No responses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Words 182 ... 277 are used to describe remote I/O drop status; three status words
are used for each drop.
The first word in each group of three displays communication status for the
appropriate drop:
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1
1 = Communication health
2
1 = Cable A status
3
1 = Cable B status
4
Not used
5 ... 8
Lost communication counter
9 ... 16
Cumulative retry counter
The second word in each group of three is the drop cumulative error counter on
Cable A for the appropriate drop:
1
31007523 12/2006
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
At least one error in words 173 ...175
9 ... 162
Counts No responses
12
13
14
15
16
1001
STAT: Status
The third word in each group of three is the drop cumulative error counter on Cable
B for the appropriate drop:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
Function
1 ... 8
At least one error in words 176 ...178
9 ... 162
Counts No responses
12
13
14
15
16
Note: For PLCs where drop 1 is reserved for local I/O, status words 182 ... 184 are
used as follows:
Word 182 displays local drop status:
1
2
Bit
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1
1 = All modules healthy
2 ... 8
Always 0
9 ... 162
Number of times a module has been seen as unhealthy; counter rolls over at 255
Word 183 is a 16-bit error counter, which indicates the number of times a module
has been accessed and found to be unhealthy. Rolls over at 65535.
Word 184 is a 16-bit error counter, which indicates the number of times a
communication error occurred while accessing an I/O module. Rolls over at 65535.
1002
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Controller Status Words 1 - 11 for TSX Compact and Atrium
CPU Status
(Word 1)
Word 1 displays the following aspects of the CPU status:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit
Function
1-5
Not used
6
1 = enable constant sweep
7
1 = enable single sweep delay
8
9
1 = AC power on
10
1 = RUN light OFF
11
1 = memory protect OFF
12
1 = battery failed
13 - 16
Not used
10
11
Word 2
Controller Status
(Word 3)
Word 3 displays aspects of the controller status:
Word 4
31007523 12/2006
1
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1
1 = first scan
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
12
13
14
15
16
2
1 = start command pending
3
1 = scan time has exceed constant scan target
4
1 = existing DIM AWARENESS
5 - 12
Not used
13 - 16
Single sweeps
1003
STAT: Status
CPU Stop State
(Word 5)
Number of
Segments in
program
(Word 6)
Word 5 displays the CPU’s stop state conditions:
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1
1 = peripheral port stop
2
1 = XMEM parity error
3
1 = DIM AWARENESS
9
10
4
1 = illegal peripheral intervention
5
1 = invalid segment scheduler
11
12
13
14
6
1 = no start-of-network (SON) at the start of a segment
7
1 = state RAM test failed
8
1 = no end of logic (EOL), (bad Tcop)
9
1 = watch dog timer has expired
10
1 = real time clock error
11
1 = CPU failure
12
Not used
13
1 = invalid node in ladder logic
14
1 = logic checksum error
1
1 = coil disabled in RUN mode
16
1 = bad PLC setup
15
16
Word 6 displays the number of segments in ladder logic; a binary number is shown.
This word is confirmed during power up to be the number of EOS (DOIO) nodes plus
1 (for the end of logic nodes), if untrue, a stop code is set, causing the run light to be
off:
1
1004
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Bit
Function
1 - 16
Number of segments in the current ladder logic program
(expressed as a decimal number)
15
16
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Address of the
End of Logic
Pointer (Word 7)
Word 7 displays the address of the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit
Function
1 - 16
EOL pointer address
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Word 8, Word 9
These words are not used.
RUN/LOAD/
DEBUG Status
(Word 10)
Word 10 uses its two least significant bits to display RUN/LOAD/DEBUG status:
1
2
Bit
Word 11
31007523 12/2006
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
1 ... 14
Not used
15, 16
0 0 = Debug (0 dec)
0 1 = Run (1 dec)
1 0 = Load (2 dec)
1005
STAT: Status
I/O Module Health Status Words 12 - 15 for TSX Compact
TSX Compact I/O
Module Health
Words 12 ... 15 are used to display the health of the A120 I/O modules in the four
racks:
Word
Rack No.
12
1
13
2
14
3
15
4
Each word contains the health status of up to five A120 I/O modules. The most
significant (left-most) bit represents the health of the module in Slot 1 of the rack:
1
2
3
4
5
Bit
Function
1
1 = Slot 1
2
1 = Slot 2
3
1 = Slot 3
4
1 = Slot 4
5
1 = Slot 5
6 ... 16
Not used
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
If a module is I/O Mapped and ACTIVE, the bit will have a value of "1". If a module
is inactive or not I/O Mapped, the bit will have a value of "0".
Note: Slots 1 and 2 in Rack 1 (Word 12) are not used because the controller itself
uses those two slots.
1006
31007523 12/2006
STAT: Status
Global Health and Communications Retry Status Words 182 ... 184 for
TSX Compact
Overview
There are three words that contain health and communication information on the
installed I/O modules. If monitored with the Stat block, they are found in Words 182
through 184. This requires that the length of the Stat block is a minimum of 184
(Words 16 through 181 are not used).
Words 16 ... 181
These words are not used.
Health Status
(Word 182)
Word 182 increments each time a module becomes bad. After a module becomes
bad, this counter does not increment again until that module becomes good and
then bad again.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit
Function
1
1 = All modules healthy
9
10
2 ... 9
Not used
10 ... 16
"Module went unhealthy" counter
11
12
13
14
15
16
I/O Error
Counter
(Word 183)
This counter is similar to the above counter, except this word increments every scan
that a module remains in the bad state.
PAB Bus
Retry Counter
(Word 184)
Diagnostics are performed on the communications through the bus. This word
should normally be all zeroes. If after 5 retries, a bus error is still detected, the
controller will stop and error code 10 will be displayed. An error could occur if there
is a short in the backplane or from noise. The counter rolls over while running. If the
retries are less than 5, no bus error is detected.
31007523 12/2006
1007
STAT: Status
1008
31007523 12/2006
170
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SU16.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1010
Representation
1011
1009
Short Description
Function
Description
1010
The SU16 instruction performs a signed or unsigned 16-bit subtraction (value 1 value 2) on the top and middle node values, then posts the signed or unsigned
difference in a 4x holding register in the bottom node.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
Value 1
top value > middle value
(+ result)
max. value
65535
Value 2
top value = middle value
(zero result)
SU16
top value < middle value
(- result)
max. value
65535
signed
difference
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = enables value 1 - value 2
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Minuend, can be displayed explicitly as an
register
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Subtrahend, can be displayed explicitly as
an integer (range 1 ... 65 535) or stored in
a register
difference
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Difference
Top output
0x
None
ON = value 1 > value 2
Middle output
0x
None
ON = value 1 = value 2
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = value 1 < value 2
1011
1012
31007523 12/2006
SUB: Subtraction
171
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SUB.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1014
Representation
1015
1013
SUB: Subtraction
Short Description
Function
Description
The SUB instruction performs a signed or unsigned 16-bit subtraction (value 1 value 2) on the top and middle node values, then posts the signed or unsigned
difference in a 4x holding register in the bottom node.
Note: SUB is often used as a comparator where the state of the outputs identifies
whether value 1 is greater than, equal to, or less than value 2.
1014
31007523 12/2006
SUB: Subtraction
Representation
Symbol
control input
max.
999 16-bit PLC
9999 24-bit PLC
65535-785L
max.
999 16-bit PLC
9999 24-bit PLC
65535-785L
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
value 1
(+ result)
value 2
(zero result)
SUB
(- result)
difference
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT Minuend, can be displayed explicitly as an
integer or stored in a register
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535-785L
ON = enables value 1 - value 2
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT Subtrahend, can be displayed explicitly as
an integer or stored in a register
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535-785L
difference
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT Difference
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
1015
SUB: Subtraction
1016
31007523 12/2006
SWAP - VME Bit Swap
172
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction SWAP.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1018
Representation
1019
1017
SWAP - VME Bit Swap
Short Description
Function
Description
The SWAP block allows the user to issue one of three different swap commands:
swap high and low bits of a 16-bit word
z swap high and low words of a 32-bit double word
z swap (reverse) bits within a register's low byte
z
Note: Available only on the Quantum VME-424/X controller.
1018
31007523 12/2006
SWAP - VME Bit Swap
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
value
error
register
complete
SWAP
# of registers
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON enables SWAP operation
value
(top node)
INT, UINT, Contains a constant from 1 to 3, which specifies
WORD
what type of swap to perform:
1. Swap high and low bits of a 16-bit word.
2. Swap high and low words of a 32-bit double
word.
3. Swap (reverse) bits within a register's low byte.
register
3x, 4x
(middle node)
INT, UINT, Contains the register on which the swap is to be
WORD
performed
# of registers
(bottom node)
INT, UINT, Contains a constant that indicates how many
WORD
registers are to be swapped, starting with the
source register.
Top output
31007523 12/2006
Data Type Meaning
0x
None
Middle output 0x
None
Error
Bottom output 0x
None
Swap completed successfully
1019
SWAP - VME Bit Swap
1020
31007523 12/2006
173
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction TTR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1022
Representation: TTR - Table to Register
1023
1021
Short Description
Function
Description
The Table to Register block is one of four 484-replacement instructions.
It copies the contents of a source (input or holding) register to a holding register
implied by the constant in the bottom node. This source register is pointed to by the
input or holding register specified in the top node. Only one such operation can be
accommodated by the system in each scan.
Note: Available only on the 984-351 and 984-455.
1022
31007523 12/2006
Representation: TTR - Table to Register
Symbol
CONTROL INPUT
COPY
source
ERROR
TTR
destination
offset pointer
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Control source
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
source register address. The data located in
the source register address will be copied to
the destination address, which is determined
by the destination offset pointer.
destination
(bottom node)
(1 ... 254)
(801 ... 824)
INT, UINT
The pointer is a 3xxxx or 4xxxx whose
contents indicate the source. A value of 1 to
254 indicates a holding register (40001 40254) and a value of 801 to 832 indicates an
input register (30001 - 30032). If the value is
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
1023
1024
31007523 12/2006
T --> R Table to Register
174
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T→R.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1026
Representation
1027
1029
1025
T --> R: Table to Register
Short Description
Function
Description
1026
The T→R instruction copies the bit pattern of a register or 16 contiguous discretes
in a table to a specific holding register. It can accommodate the transfer of one
register per scan. It has three control inputs and produces two possible outputs.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input /
increase pointer
source table
active
prevents pointer
from increasing
pointer
reset pointer
T ÆR
table length
max. 255 16-bit PLC
999 24-bit PLC
31007523 12/2006
table length
1027
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
the pointer value
Middle input
(see p. 1029)
0x, 1x
None
Bottom input
(see p. 1029)
0x, 1x
None
source table
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First register or discrete reference in the
source table. A register or string of
contiguous discretes from this table will be
copied in a scan.
pointer (see
p. 1029)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Pointer to the destination where the
source data will be copied
INT, UINT
Length of the source table: number of
registers that may be copied; range: 1 ...
999
Length:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
table length
(bottom node)
1028
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Middle Input
When the middle input goes ON, the current value stored in the pointer register is
frozen while the DX operation continues. This causes the same table data to be
written to the destination register on each scan.
Bottom Input
When the bottom input goes ON, the value in the pointer is reset to zero. This causes
the next DX move operation to copy the first destination register in the table.
Pointer
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is a pointer to the destination where the
source data will be copied. The destination register is the next contiguous 4x register
after the pointer. For example, if the middle node displays a pointer of 400100, then
the destination register for the T→R copy is 400101.
The value stored in the pointer register indicates which register in the source table
will be copied to the destination register in the current scan. A value of 0 in the
pointer indicates that the bit pattern in the first register of the source table will be
copied to the destination; a value of 1 in the pointer register indicates that the bit
pattern in the second register of the source table will be copied to the destination
register; etc.
31007523 12/2006
1029
1030
31007523 12/2006
175
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T→T.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1032
Representation
1033
1035
1031
Short Description
Function
Description
1032
The T→T instruction copies the bit pattern of a register or of 16 discretes from a
position within one table to an equivalent position in another table of registers. It can
accommodate the transfer of one register per scan. It has three control inputs and
produces two possible outputs.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input /
increase pointer
source table
prevents pointer
from increasing
pointer
active
reset pointer
table length
max. 255 16-bit PLC
999 24-bit PLC
65535 *PLC
TÆT
table length
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
31007523 12/2006
1033
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
the pointer value
Middle input
(see p. 1035)
0x, 1x
None
Bottom input
(see p. 1035)
0x, 1x
None
source table
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
First register or discrete reference in the
source table. A register or string of
contiguous discretes from this table will be
copied in a scan.
pointer (see
p. 1035)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Pointer into both the source and
destination table
INT, UINT
Length of the source and the destination
table (must be equal in length)
Range:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535 785L
table length
(bottom node)
1034
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
31007523 12/2006
Middle Input
When the input to the middle node goes ON, the current value stored in the pointer
register is frozen while the DX operation continues. This causes new data being
copied to the destination to overwrite the data copied on the previous scan.
Bottom Input
When the input to the bottom node goes ON, the value in the pointer register is reset
to zero. This causes the next DX move operation to copy source data into the first
register in the destination table.
Pointer
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is a pointer into both the source and
destination tables, indicating where the data will be copied from and to in the current
scan. The first register in the destination table is the next contiguous 4x register
following the pointer. For example, if the middle node displays a a pointer reference
of 400100, then the first register in the destination table is 400101.
The value stored in the pointer register indicates which register in the source table
will be copied to which register in the destination table. Since the length of the two
tables is equal and T→T copy is to the equivalent register in the destination table,
the current value in the pointer register also indicates which register in the
destination table the source data will be copied to.
A value of 0 in the pointer register indicates that the bit pattern in the first register of
the source table will be copied to the first register of the destination table; a value of
1 in the pointer register indicates that the bit pattern in the second register of the
source table will be copied to the second register of the destination register; etc.
31007523 12/2006
1035
1036
31007523 12/2006
T.01 Timer:
One Hundredth of a Second Timer
176
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T.01 timer.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1038
Representation
1039
1037
T.01 Timer: One Hundredth Second Timer
Short Description
Function
Description
1038
The T.01 instruction measures time in hundredth of a second intervals. It can be
used for timing an event or creating a delay. T.01 has two control inputs and can
produce one of two possible outputs.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
max. 999 16-bit PLC
9999 24-bit PLC
65535 - 785L
timer = preset
timer preset
enable / reset
timer < preset
T.01
accumulated
time
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
OFF → ON = initiates the timer operation:
time accumulates in hundredths-of-asecond when top and bottom input are ON
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = accumulated time reset to 0
ON = timer accumulating
timer preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Preset value (number of hundredth-of-asecond increments), can be displayed
explicitly as an integer or stored in a
register
Range:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535 785L
accumulated
time
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Accumulated time count in hundredth-ofa-second increments.
Top output
0x
None
ON = accumulated time = timer preset
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = accumulated time < timer preset
1039
1040
31007523 12/2006
T0.1 Timer:
One Tenth Second Timer
177
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T0.1 timer.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1042
Representation
1043
1041
Short Description
Function
Description
The T0.1 instruction measures time in tenth-of-a-second increments. It can be used
for timing an event or creating a delay. T0.1 has two control inputs and can produce
one of two possible outputs.
Note: If you cascade T0.1 timers with presets of 1, the timers will time-out
together; to avoid this problem, change the presets to 10 and substitute a T.01
timer (see p. 1037).
1042
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
max. 999 16-bit PLC
9999 24-bit PLC
65535 - 785L
timer = preset
timer preset
enable / reset
timer < preset
T0.1
accumulated
time
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
time accumulates in tenth-of-a-second
when top and bottom input are ON
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
timer preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Preset value (number of tenth-of-a-second
increments), can be displayed explicitly as
Range:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535 785L
accumulated
time
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Accumulated time count in tenth-of-asecond increments.
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
1043
1044
31007523 12/2006
178
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T1.0 timer.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1046
Representation
1047
1045
Short Description
Function
Description
The T1.0 timer instruction measures time in one-second increments. It can be used
for timing an event or creating a delay. T1.0 has two control inputs and can produce
one of two possible outputs.
Note: If you cascade T1.0 timers with presets of 1, the timers will time-out
together; to avoid this problem, change the presets to 10 and substitute a T0.1
timer (see p. 1041).
1046
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
max. 999 16-bit PLC
9999 24-bit PLC
65535 - 785L
timer = preset
timer preset
enable / reset
timer < preset
T1.0
accumulated
time
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
time accumulates in seconds when top
and bottom input are ON
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
timer preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Preset value (number of one second
increments), can be displayed explicitly as
Range:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535 785L
accumulated
time
(bottom node)
4x
INT, UINT
Accumulated time count in one-second
increments.
Top output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
1047
1048
31007523 12/2006
T1MS Timer:
One Millisecond Timer
179
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction T1MS timer.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1050
Representation
1051
Example
1052
1049
Short Description
Function
Description
The T1MS timer instruction measures time in one-millisecond increments. It can be
used for timing an event or creating a delay.
Note: The T1MS instruction is available only on the B984-102, the Micro 311, 411,
512, and 612, and the Quantum 424 02.
1050
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
timer = preset
timer preset
preset value
max. 999 (in ms.)
enable / reset
timer <preset
accumulated
time
T1MS
#1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates the timer operation: time
accumulates in milliseconds when top and
middle input are ON
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
timer preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Preset value (number of millisecond
increments the timer can accumulate), can
be displayed explicitly as an integer (range
1 ... 999) or stored in a register
accumulated time
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT
Accumulated time count in millisecond
increments.
#1 (bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
INT, UINT
Constant value of #1
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
1051
Example
A Millisecond
Timer Example
Here is the ladder logic for a real-time clock with millisecond accuracy:
100
000001
400055
10
T1MS
UCTR
400054
000002
000001
1
60
000003
UCTR
400053
60
000002
000004
UCTR
400052
24
000003
000005
UCTR
400051
000004
000005
The T1MS instruction is programmed to pass power at 100 ms intervals; it is
followed by a cascade of four up-counters (see p. 1065) that store the time
respectively in hundredth-of-a-second units, tenth-of-a-second units, one- second
units, one-minute units, and one-hour units.
When logic solving begins, the accumulated time value begins incrementing in
register 40055 of the T1MS block. After 100 one-ms increments, the top output
passes power and energizes coil 00001. At this point, the value in register 40055 in
the timer is reset to 0. The accumulated count value in register 40054 in the first
UCTR block increments by 1, indicating that 100 ms have passed. Because the
accumulated time count in T1MS no longer equals the timer preset, the timer begins
to re-accumulate time in ms.
When the accumulated count in register 40054 of the first UCTR instruction
increments to 10, the top output from that instruction block passes power and
energizes coil 00002. The value in register 40054 then resets to 0, and the
accumulated count in register 40053 of the second UCTR block increments by 1.
1052
31007523 12/2006
As the times accumulate in each counter, the time of day can be read in five holding
registers as follows:
31007523 12/2006
Register
Unit of Time
Valid Range
40055
Thousandths-of-a-second
0 ... 100
40054
Tenths-of-a-second
0 ... 10
40053
Seconds
0 ... 60
40052
Minutes
0 ... 60
40051
Hours
0 ... 24
1053
1054
31007523 12/2006
180
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction TBLK.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1056
Representation
1057
1059
1055
Short Description
Function
Description
1056
The TBLK (table-to-block) instruction combines the functions of T→R (see p. 1025)
and the BLKM (see p. 75) in a single instruction. In one scan, it can copy up to 100
contiguous 4x registers from a table to a destination block. The destination block is
of a fixed length. The block of registers being copied from the source table is of the
same length, but the overall length of the source table is limited only by the number
of registers in your system configuration.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
source table
hold pointer
error
pointer
reset pointer
TBLK
block length
31007523 12/2006
1057
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data
Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates move operation
Middle input
(see p. 1059)
0x, 1x
None
ON = hold pointer
The inputs to the middle and bottom node can be
used to control the value in the pointer so that size
of the source table can be controlled.
Important: You should use external logic in
conjunction with the middle or bottom input to
confine the value in the destination pointer to a
safe range.
When the input to the middle node is ON, the
value in the pointer register is frozen while the
TBLK operation continues. This causes the same
source data block to be copied to the destination
table on each scan.
Bottom input
(see p. 1059)
0x, 1x
None
ON = reset pointer to zero
source table
(see p. 1059)
(top node)
4x
INT,
UINT,
WORD
First holding register in the source table
first holding register in the source table.
Note: The source table is segmented into a series
of register blocks, each of which is the same
length as the destination block. Therefore, the
size of the source table is a multiple of the length
of the destination block, but its overall size is not
specifically defined in the instruction. If left
uncontrolled, the source table could consume all
the 4xxxx registers available in the PLC
configuration.
pointer
(see p. 1059)
(middle node)
4x
INT,
UINT
Pointer to the source block, destination block
INT,
UINT
Number of registers of the destination block and
of the blocks within the source table; range: 1 ...
100
block length
(bottom node)
1058
Top output
0x
None
ON = move successful
Middle output
0x
None
ON = error / move not possible
31007523 12/2006
Middle Input
When the middle input is ON, the value in the pointer register is frozen while the
TBLK operation continues. This causes the same source data block to be copied to
the destination table on each scan.
Bottom Input
When the bottom input is ON, the pointer value is reset to zero. This causes the
TBLK operation to copy data from the first block of registers in the source table.
CAUTION
Confine the value in the destination pointer to a safe range.
You should use external logic in conjunction with the middle and the bottom inputs
to confine the value in the destination pointer to a safe range.
Source Table
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first holding register in the source table.
Note: The source table is segmented into a series of register blocks, each of which
is the same length as the destination block. Therefore, the size of the source table
is a multiple of the length of the destination block, but its overall size is not
specifically defined in the instruction. If left uncontrolled, the source table could
consume all the 4x registers available in the PLC configuration.
Pointer
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the pointer to the source block. The
first register in the destination block is the next contiguous register after the pointer.
For example, if the pointer is register 400107, then the first register in the destination
block is 400108.
The value stored in the pointer indicates which block of data from the source table
will be copied to the destination block. This value specifies a block number within the
source table.
31007523 12/2006
1059
1060
31007523 12/2006
181
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction TEST.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1062
Representation
1063
1061
Short Description
Function
Description
1062
The TEST instruction compares the signed or unsigned size of the 16-bit values in
the top and middle nodes and describes the relationship via the block outputs.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
value 1
max. value: 65535
value 2
max. value: 65535
signed
TEST
#1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = compares value 1 and value 2
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
value 1
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Value 1, can be displayed explicitly as an
register
value 2
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Value 2, can be displayed explicitly as an
register
INT, UINT
Constant value, cannot be changed
1
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
Bottom output
0x
None
1063
1064
31007523 12/2006
UCTR: Up Counter
182
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction UCTR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1066
Representation
1067
1065
UCTR: Up Counter
Short Description
Function
Description
1066
The UCTR instruction counts control input transitions from OFF to ON up from zero
to a counter preset value.
31007523 12/2006
UCTR: Up Counter
Representation
Symbol
control
preset value: 999 16-bit PLC
(max)
9999 24-bit PLC
65535 - *PLC
enable / reset
count value
counter preset
output condition
UCTR: count = preset
UCTR
output condition
UCTR: count < preset
accumulated
count
z E685/785 PLCs
z L785 PLCs
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
OFF → ON = initiates the counter operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = reset accumulator to 0
ON = counter accumulating
counter preset
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT
Preset value, can be displayed explicitly as
Preset value:
Max. 255 16-bit PLC
Max. 999 24-bit PLC
Max. 65535 785L
INT, UINT
Count value (actual value); which
increments by one on each transition from
OFF to ON of the top input until it reaches
the specified counter preset value.
accumulated count 4x
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Top output
0x
None
ON = accumulated count = counter preset
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = accumulated count < counter preset
1067
UCTR: Up Counter
1068
31007523 12/2006
VMER - VME Read
183
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction VMER.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1070
Representation
1071
1072
1069
VMER - VME Read
Short Description
Function
Description
The VME Read block allows the user to read data from devices on the VME bus. If
Byte Swap is active, the high byte is exchanged with the low byte of a word after it
is read from the VME bus. If Word Swap is enabled, the upper word is exchanged
with the lower word of a double after it is read. An error will occur if both inputs are
enabled at once.
1070
31007523 12/2006
VMER - VME Read
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register
byte swap
error
pointer
word swap
complete
VMER
value
(1 ... 255)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data Type Meaning
Reference
Top input
0x, 1x
ON enables read
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = byte swap
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = word swap
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT, There are five control registers in the top node.
WORD
They are allotted as follows:
4x - VME Address modifier code (39, 3A, 3D, 3E,
29, or 2D
4x+1 to 4x+4 - The VME Control Block
pointer
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT A pointer to the first destination register.
WORD
value
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
None
INT, UINT A constant specifying the number of destination
WORD
registers to which data is transferred. This
constant can be from 1 to 255.
0x
None
ON when the top input receives power
Middle output
0x
None
ON When an error occurs
Bottom output
0x
None
On when the read is complete
1071
VMER - VME Read
VME
Control Block
Error
Code Status
1072
This is the VME control block.
Register
Description
Displayed
VME Address modifier code
First implied
Error code status
Please see Error Code Status Table
Second implied
Length of data to be read/written
Third implied
VME Device address (low byte)
Fourth implied
VME Device address (high byte)
This is the Error Code Status table.
Error
Description
01
Bad word count. Must be an even number of words
02
Bad length, greater than 255
03
Bad data length. Length was 0 or greater than 255
04
Bad address modifier in first control block
05
Bad command in top node of SWAP block
06
Bad VME bus interface
07
VME bus address doesn’t exist
08
VME 486 timeout
09
ME bus interface has not been configured
10
Both BYTE and WORD swap inputs have been selected
11
Match the type implied by the AM code (A16 or A2)
31007523 12/2006
VMEW - VME Write
184
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction VMEW.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1074
Representation
1075
1076
1073
VMEW - VME Write
Short Description
Function
Description
The VME Write block allows the user to write data to devices on the VME bus. If
BYTE SWAP is active, the high byte is exchanged with the low byte of a word before
it is written to the VME bus. If WORD SWAP is active, the upper word is exchanged
with the lower word of a double before it is written. An error will occur if both inputs
are enabled at once.
1074
31007523 12/2006
VMEW - VME Write
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
register
byte swap
error
pointer
word swap
complete
VMEW
value
(1 ... 255)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM Data
Reference Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
ON enables read
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = byte swap
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = word swap
register
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT There are five control registers in the top node.
WORD
They are allotted as follows:
4x - High Byte: VME Address modifier code (39,
3A, 3D, 3E, 29, or 2D
4x - Low Byte: Data bus size
4x + 1 to 4x + 4 - The VME Control Block
pointer
(middle node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT A pointer to the first destination register.
WORD
value
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
None
INT, UINT A constant specifying the number of destination
WORD
registers to which data is transferred. This can be
from 1 to 255.
Top output
0x
None
ON when the top input receives power
Middle output
0x
None
ON when an error occurs
Bottom output
0x
None
ON when write is complete
1075
VMEW - VME Write
VME
Control Block
Error
Code Status
1076
This is the VME control block.
Register
Description
Displayed
VME Address modifier code
First implied
Error code status
Please see Error Code Status Table
Second implied
Length of data to be read/written
Third implied
VME Device address (low byte)
Fourth implied
VME Device address (high byte)
This is the Error Code Status table.
Error
Description
01
Bad word count. Must be an even number of words
02
Bad length, greater than 255
03
Bad data length. Length was 0 or greater than 255
04
Bad address modifier in first control block
05
Bad command in top node of SWAP block
06
Bad VME bus interface
07
VME bus address doesn’t exist
08
VME 486 timeout
09
ME bus interface has not been configured
10
Both BYTE and WORD swap inputs have been selected
11
Match the type implied by the AM code (A16 or A2)
31007523 12/2006
WRIT: Write
185
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction WRIT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1078
Representation
1079
1080
1077
WRIT: Write
Short Description
Function
Description
The WRIT instruction sends a message from the PLC over the RIO communications
link to an ASCII display (screen, printer, etc.).
In the process of sending the messaging operation, WRIT performs the following
functions:
z Verifies the correctness of the ASCII communication parameters, e.g. the port
number, the message number
z Verifies the lengths of variable data fields
z Performs error detection and recording
z Reports RIO interface status
WRIT requires two tables of registers: a source table where variable data (the
message) is copied, and a control block where comm port and message parameters
are identified.
Further information about formatting messages you will find on p. 31.
1078
31007523 12/2006
WRIT: Write
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
pause operation
error (one scan)
control block
abort operation
complete (one scan)
WRIT
table length
max. 255
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = initiates a WRIT
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON = pauses WRIT operation
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
ON = abort WRIT operation
source
(see p. 1080)
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
Source table
control block
(see p. 1080)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
ASCII Control block (first of seven contiguous
holding registers)
INT, UINT
Length of source table (number of registers
where the message data will be stored),
range: 1 ... 255
table length
(bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
table length
Top output
0x
None
Middle output
0x
None
ON = error in communication or operation has
timed out (for one scan)
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = WRIT complete (for one scan)
1079
WRIT: Write
Source Table
(Top Node)
The top node contains the first 3x or 4x register in a source table whose length is
specified in the bottom node. This table contains the data required to fill the variable
field in a message.
Consider the following WRIT message
vessel #1 temperature is:
III
The 3-character ASCII field III is the variable data field; variable data are loaded,
typically via DX moves, into a table of variable field data.
Control Block
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first of seven contiguous holding
register in the control block.
Register
1080
Definition
Displayed
Port Number and Error Code, p. 1081
First implied
Message number
Second implied
Number of registers required to satisfy format
Third implied
Count of the number of registers transmitted thus far
Fourth implied
Status of the solve
Fifth implied
Reserved
Sixth implied
Checksum of registers 0 ... 5
31007523 12/2006
WRIT: Write
Port Number and
Error Code
Port Number and Error Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Bit
Function
1 ... 4
PLC error code (see table below)
5
Not used
6
Input from the ASCII device not compatible with format
7
Input buffer overrun, data received too quickly at RIOP
8
USART error, bad byte received at RIOP
9
Illegal format, not received properly by RIOP
10
ASCII device off-line, check cabling
11
ASCII message terminated early (in keyboard mode
12 ... 16
Comm port # (1 ... 32)
15
16
PLC Error Code
Bit
1
31007523 12/2006
Meaning
2
3
4
0
0
0
1
Error in the input to RIOP from ASCII device
0
0
1
0
Exception response from RIOP, bad data
0
0
1
1
Sequenced number from RIOP differs from expected value
0
1
0
0
User register checksum error, often caused by altering
READ registers while the block is active
0
1
0
1
Invalid port or message number detected
0
1
1
0
User-initiated abort, bottom input energized
0
1
1
1
No response from drop, communication error
1
0
0
0
Node aborted because of SKP instruction
1
0
0
1
Message area scrambled, reload memory
1
0
1
0
Port not configured in the I/O map
1
0
1
1
Illegal ASCII request
1
1
0
0
Unknown response from ASCII port
1
1
0
1
Illegal ASCII element detected in user logic
1
1
1
1
RIOP in the PLC is down
1081
WRIT: Write
1082
31007523 12/2006
XMIT - Transmit
186
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMIT - Transmit.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1084
XMIT Modbus Functions
1085
1083
XMIT - Transmit
Short Description
Function
Description
The XMIT (transmit) function block sends Modbus messages from a master PLC to
multiple slave PLCs or sends ASCII character strings from the PLC's Modbus slave
port#1 or port#2 to ASCII printers and terminals. XMIT sends these messages over
telephone dial up modems, radio modems, or simply direct connection.
For detailed information on the XMIT function block, see p. 1085.
XMIT comes with three modes: communication, port status, and conversion.
These modes are described in the following sections.
z
z
z
XMIT Communication Block, p. 1091
XMIT Port Status Block, p. 1103
XMIT Conversion Block, p. 1111
XMIT performs general ASCII input functions in the communication mode including
simple ASCII and terminated ASCII. You may use an additional XMIT block for
reporting port status information into registers while another XMIT block performs
the ASCII communication function. You may import and export ASCII or binary data
into your PLC and convert it into various binary data or ASCII to send to DCE
devices based upon the needs of your application.
The block has built in diagnostics, which ensure no other XMIT blocks are active in
the PLC. Within the XMIT block a control table allows you to control the
communications link between the PLC and Data Communication Equipment (DCE)
devices attached to Modbus port #1 or port#2 of the PLC. The XMIT block does not
activate the port LED when it's transmitting data.
Note: The Modbus protocol is a master/slave" protocol and designed to have only
one master when polling multiple slaves. Therefore, when using the XMIT block in
a network with multiple masters, contention resolution, and collision avoidance is
your responsibility and may easily be addressed through ladder logic
programming.
1084
31007523 12/2006
XMIT - Transmit
XMIT Modbus Functions
At a Glance
The XMIT function block supports the following Modbus function codes:.
z
z
z
z
01 ... 06
08
15 and 16
20 and 21
For Modbus messages, the MSG_OUT array has to contain the Modbus definition
table. The Modbus definition table for Modbus function code: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06,
15 and 16 is five registers long and you must set XMIT_SET.MessageLen to 5 for
successful XMIT operation. The Modbus definition table is shown in the table below
Modbus
Function Codes
01...06
table. The Modbus definition table for Modbus function code: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06,
15 and 16 is five registers long and you must set XMIT_SET.MessageLen to 5 for
successful XMIT operation. The Modbus definition table is shown in the table below
Modbus Definition Table Function Codes (01 ... 06, 15 and 16)
31007523 12/2006
Content
Description
Modbus
function code
(MSG_OUT[1])
XMIT supports the following function codes:
01 = Read multiple coils (0x)
02 = Read multiple discrete inputs (1x)
03 = Read multiple holding registers (4x)
04= Read multiple input registers (3x)
05 = Write single coil (0x)
06 = Write single holding registers (4x)
15 = Write multiple coils (0x)
16 = Write multiple holding registers (4x)
Quantity
(MSG_OUT[2])
Enter the amount of data you want written to the slave PLC or read from
the slave PLC. For example, enter 100 to read 100 holding registers from
the slave PLC or enter 32 to write 32 coils to a slave PLC. There is a size
limitation on quantity that is dependent on the PLC model. Refer to
Appendix A for complete details on limits.
Slave PLC
address
(MSG_OUT[3])
Enter the slave Modbus PLC address. Typically the Modbus address range
is 1 ... 247. To send a Modbus message to multiple PLCs, enter 0 for the
slave PLC address. This is referred to as Broadcast Mode. Broadcast
Mode only supports Modbus function codes that writes data from the
master PLC to slave PLCs. Broadcast Mode does NOT support Modbus
function codes that read data from slave PLCs.
1085
XMIT - Transmit
Content
Description
Slave PLC data
area
(MSG_OUT[4])
For a read command, the slave PLC data area is the source of the data.
For a write command, the slave PLC data area is the destination for the
data. For example, when you want to read coils (00300 ... 00500) from a
slave PLC, enter 300 in this field. When you want to write data from a
master PLC and place it into register (40100) of a slave PLC, enter 100 in
this field. Depending on the type of Modbus command (write or read), the
source and destination data areas must be as defined in the Source and
Destination Data Areas table below.
Master PLC
data area
(MSG_OUT[5])
For a read command, the master PLC data area is the destination for the
data returned by the slave. For a write command, the master PLC data area
is the source of the data. For example, when you want to write coils (00016
... 00032) located in the master PLC to a slave PLC, enter 16 in the field.
When you want to read input registers (30001 ... 30100) from a slave PLC
and place the data into the master PLC data area (40100 ... 40199), enter
100 in this field. Depending on the type of Modbus command (write or
read), the source and destination data areas must be as defined in the
Source and Destination Data Areas table below.
Source and Destination Data Areas for Function Codes (01 ... 06, 15 and 16)
Function Code
Master PLC Data Area
Slave PLC Data Area
03 (Read multiple 4x)
4x (destination)
4x (source)
4x (destination)
3x (source)
0x (destination)
0x (source)
0x (destination)
1x (source)
16 (Write multiple 4x)
4x (source)
4x (destination)
15 (Write multiple 0x)
0x (source)
0x (destination)
05 (Write single 0x)
0x (source)
0x (destination)
06 (Write single 4x)
4x (source)
4x (destination)
When you want to send 20 Modbus messages out of the PLC, you must transfer 20
Modbus definition tables one after another into MSG_OUT after each successful
operation of XMIT, or you may program 20 separate XMIT blocks and then activate
them one at a time through user logic.
1086
31007523 12/2006
XMIT - Transmit
Modbus
Function Code
(08)
The Modbus definition table for Modbus function code: 08 is five registers long and
you must you must set XMIT_SET.MessageLen to 5 for For Modbus messages, the
MSG_OUT array has to contain the Modbus definition successful XMIT operation.
The Modbus definition table is shown in the table below.
Modbus Definition Table Function Codes (08)
Content
Description
Modbus function code
(MSG_OUT[1])
XMIT supports the following function code: 08 = Diagnostics
Diagnostics (MSG_OUT[2])
Enter the diagnostics subfunction code decimal value in this filed to perform the
specific diagnostics function desired. The following diagnostic subfunctions are
supported:
Code
Description
00
Return query data
01
Restart comm option
02
Return diagnostic register
03
Change ASCII input delimiter
04
Force listen only mode
05 ... 09 Reserved
10
Clear counters (& diagnostics registers in 384, 484)
11
Return bus messages count
12
Return bus comm error count
13
Return bus exception error count
14 ... 15 Not supported
16
Return slave NAK count
17
Return slave busy count
18
Return bus Char overrun count
19 ... 21 Not supported
Slave PLC address
(MSG_OUT[3])
Enter the slave Modbus PLC address. Typically the Modbus address range is 1 ...
247. Function code 8 dose NOT support Broadcast Mode (Address 0)
Diagnostics function data field
content (MSG_OUT[4])
You must enter the decimal value needed for the data area of the specific diagnostic
subfunction. For subfunctions 02, 04, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17 and 18 this value is
automatically set to zero. For subfunctions 00, 01, and 03 you must enter the desired
data field value. For more details, refer to Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference
Guide (PI-MBUS-300).
Master PLC data area
(MSG_OUT[5])
For all subfunctions, the master PLC data area is the destination for the data returned
by the slave. You must specify a 4x register that marks the beginning of the data area
where the returned data is placed. For example, to place the data into the master
PLC data area starting at (40100), enter 100 in this field. Subfunction 04 does NOT
return a response. For more details, refer to Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference
Guide (PI-MBUS-300).
31007523 12/2006
1087
XMIT - Transmit
Modbus
Function Codes
(20, 21)
table. The Modbus definition table for Modbus function codes: 20 and 21 is six
registers long and you must you must set XMIT_SET.MessageLen to 6 for
successful XMIT operation. The Modbus definition table is shown in the table below.
Modbus Definition Table Function Codes (20, 21)
1088
Content
Description
Modbus function code
(MSG_OUT[1])
XMIT supports the following function codes: 20 = Read
general reference (6x) 21 = Write general reference
(6x)
Quantity (MSG_OUT[2])
Enter the amount of data you want written to the slave
PLC or read from the slave PLC. For example, enter
100 to read 100 holding registers from the slave PLC
or enter 32 to write 32 coils to a slave PLC. There is a
size limitation on quantity that is dependent on the PLC
model. Refer to Appendix A for complete details on
limits.
Slave PLC address (MSG_OUT[3])
Enter the slave Modbus PLC address. Typically the
Modbus address range is 1 ... 247. Function code 20
and 21 do NOT support Broadcast Mode (Address 0).
Slave PLC data area
(MSG_OUT[4])
For a read command, the slave PLC data area is the
source of the data. For a write command, the slave
PLC data area is the destination for the data. For
example, when you want to read registers (600300 ...
600399) from a slave PLC, enter 300 in this field.
When you want to write data from a master PLC and
place it into register (600100) of a slave PLC, enter 100
in this field. Depending on the type of Modbus
command (write or read), the source and destination
data areas must be as defined in the Source and
Destination Data Areas table below. The lowest
extended register is addressed as register "zero"
(600000). The lowest holding register is addressed as
register "one" (400001).
31007523 12/2006
XMIT - Transmit
Content
Description
Master PLC data area
(MSG_OUT[5])
For a read command, the master PLC data area is the
destination for the data returned by the slave. For a
write command, the master PLC data area is the
source of the data. For example, when you want to
write registers (40016 ... 40032) located in the master
PLC to 6x registers in a slave PLC, enter 16 in the filed.
When you want to read 6x registers (600001 ...
600100) from a slave PLC and place the data into the
master PLC data area (40100 ... 40199), enter 100 in
this field. Depending on the type of Modbus command
(write or read), the source and destination data areas
must be as defined in the Source and Destination Data
Areas table below. The lowest extended register is
addressed as register "zero" (600000). The lowest
holding register is addressed as register "one"
(400001).
File number (MSG_OUT[6])
Enter the file number for the 6x registers to be written
to or read from. (1 ... 10) depending on the size of the
extended register data area. 600001 is 60001 file 1
and 690001 is 60001 file 10 as viewed by the
Reference Data Editor.
Source and Destination Data Areas for Function Codes (20, 21)
Function Code
Master PLC Data Area
Slave PLC Data Area
20 (Read general reference 6x)
4x (destination)
6x (source)
21 (Write general reference 6x)
4x (source)
6x (destination)
When you want to send 20 Modbus messages out of the PLC, you must transfer 20
Modbus definition tables one after another into MSG_OUT after each successful
operation of XMIT, or you may program 20 separate XMIT blocks and then activate
them one at a time through user logic.
31007523 12/2006
1089
XMIT - Transmit
1090
31007523 12/2006
187
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMIT Communication Block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1092
Representation
1093
1095
1099
1101
1091
Short Description
Function
Description
The purpose of the XMIT communication block is to receive and transmit ASCII
messages and Modbus Master messages using your PLC ports.
The XMIT instruction block will not operate correctly if:
The NSUP and XMIT loadables are not installed
z The NSUP loadable is installed after the XMIT loadable
z The NSUP and XMIT loadables are installed in a Quantum PLC with an out-ofdate executive (older than version 2.10 or 2.12)
z
For an overview of the XMIT instruction please see p. 1084.
1092
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start
operation is active
port
#0001
or
#0002
abort
register
unsuccessfully
XMIT
constant =
#0016
Parameter
Description
31007523 12/2006
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON begins an XMIT operation and START
should remain ON until the operation has
completed successfully or an error has
occurred.
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
ON aborts any active XMIT operation and
forces the port to slave mode. The abort code
(121) is placed into the fault status register.
The port remains closed as long as this input
is ON.
Note: To reset an XMIT fault and clear the
fault register, the top input must go OFF for at
least one PLC scan.
port #0001 or
#0002
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
The top node must contain one of the
following constants either (#0001) to select
PLC port #1, or (#0002) to select PLC port #2.
Note: The loadable version DOES accept
4xxxx registers in the top node, whereas the
built-in does NOT.
1093
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
The 4xxxx register entered in the middle node
is the first in a group of sixteen (16)
contiguous holding registers that comprise
the control block, as shown in the
Communication Control Table.
(For detailed information on this node please
see p. 1095.)
Important: DO NOT modify the address in
the middle node of the XMIT block or delete
the address from the block while the program
is active. This action locks up the port
preventing communications.
INT, UINT,
WORD
The bottom node must contain a constant
equal to (#0016). This is the number of
registers used by the XMIT instruction.
#0016
(bottom node)
1094
Top output
0x
None
ON while an XMIT operation in progress.
Passes power while an XMIT operation is in
progress.
Middle output
0x
None
ON when XMIT has detected an error or was
issued an abort.
Passes power when XMIT has detected an
error or when an XMIT operation was aborted.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON for one scan only when an XMIT
operation has been successfully completed.
Passes power when an XMIT operation has
been successfully completed.
Note: The START input must remain ON until
the OPERATION SUCCESSFUL has turned
OFF.
31007523 12/2006
Communication
Control Table
31007523 12/2006
This table represents the first in a group of 16 contiguous holding registers that
comprise the control block.
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx
Revision
Number
Displays the current revision number of XMIT block. Read
This number is automatically loaded by the block
Only
and the block over writes any other number entered
into this register.
4xxxx + 1
Fault Status
This field displays a fault code generated by the
XMIT port status block.
(For detailed information please
see p. 1099).
4xxxx + 2
Available to
User
The XMIT block does not use this register.
Read/
However, it may be used in ladder logic as a pointer. Write
An efficient way to use the XMIT block is to place a
pointer value of a TBLK instruction into this register.
4xxxx + 3
Data Rate
XMIT supports the following data rates: 50, 75, 110, Read/
134, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400, 3600, Write
4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200.
To configure a data rate, enter its decimal number
into this field. When an invalid data rate is entered,
the block displays an illegal configuration error
(error code 127) in the Fault Status (4xxxx + 1)
register.
4xxxx + 4
Data Bits
XMIT supports the following data bits: 7 and 8.
Read/
To configure a data bit size, enter its decimal
Write
number into this register.
Note: Modbus messages may be sent in ASCII
mode or RTU mode. ASCII mode requires 7 data
bits, while RTU mode requires 8 data bits. When
sending ASCII character message you may use
either 7 or 8 data bits. When an invalid data bit is
entered, the block displays an illegal configuration
error (error code 127) in the Fault Status (4xxxx + 1)
register.
4xxxx + 5
Parity Bits
XMIT supports the following parity: none, odd and Read/
even. Enter a decimal of either: 0 = no parity, 1 =
Write
odd parity, or 2 = even parity. When an invalid parity
is entered, the block displays an illegal configuration
error (error code 127) in the Fault Status (4xxxx + 1)
register.
Read
Only
1095
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx + 6
Stop Bits
XMIT supports one or two stop bits. Enter a decimal Read/
of either: 1 = one stop bit, or 2 = two stop bits. When Write
an invalid stop bit is entered, the block displays an
illegal configuration error (error code 127) in the
Fault Status (4xxxx + 1) register.
4xxxx + 7
Available to
User
The XMIT block does not use this register.
Read/
However, it may be used in ladder logic as a pointer. Write
An efficient way to use the XMIT block is to place a
pointer value of a TBLK instruction into this register.
4xxxx + 8
Command
Word
(16-digit binary number)
The XMIT interprets each bit of the command word
as a function to perform. If bit 7 and 8 are on
simultaneously or if any two or more of bits 13, 14,
15 or 16 are on simultaneously or if bit 7 is not on
when bits 13, 14, 15, or 16 are on error 129 will be
generated.
For detailed information please see p. 1101.
4xxxx + 9
Message
Pointer Word
Read/
(message pointer)
Write
Values are limited by the range of 4x registers
configured.
The message table consists of either
z ASCII characters
For ASCII character strings, the pointer is the
register offset to the first register of the ASCII
character string. Each register holds up to two
ASCII characters. Each ASCII string may be up
to 1024 characters in length. For example, when
you want to send 10 ASCII messages out of the
PLC, you must program 10 ASCII characters
strings into 4xxxx registers of the PLC and then
through ladder logic set the pointer to the start of
each message after each successful operation
of XMIT.
z Modbus Function Codes
For detailed information please
see p. 1085
Read/
Write
Enter a pointer that points to the beginning of the
message table.
1096
31007523 12/2006
31007523 12/2006
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx + 10
Message
Length
(0 - 512)
Read/
Enter the length of the current message. When
Write
XMIT is sending Modbus messages for function
codes 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08, 15 and 16, the
length of the message is automatically set to five.
When XMIT is receiving Terminated ASCII input the
length of the message must be set to five or an error
results. When XMIT is sending Modbus messages
for function codes twenty and twenty- -one, the
length of the message is automatically set to six.
When XMIT is sending ASCII messages, the length
may be 1 through 1024 ASCII characters per
message.
4xxxx + 11
Response
Timeout (ms)
(0 - 65535 milliseconds)
Read/
Enter the time value in milliseconds (ms) to
Write
determine how long XMIT waits for a valid response
message from a slave device (PLC, modem, etc.).
In addition, the time applies to ASCII transmissions
and flow control operations. When the response
message is not completely formed within this
specified time, XMIT issues a fault. The valid range
is 0 through 65535 ms. The timeout is initiated after
the last character in the message is sent.
4xxxx + 12
Retry Limit
Read/
Enter the quantity of retries to determine how many Write
times XMIT sends a message to get a valid
response from a slave device (PLC, modem, etc.).
When the response message is not completely
formed within this specified time, XMIT issues a
fault and a fault code. The valid range is 0 ... 65535
# of retries. This field is used in conjunction with
response time-out (4xxxx + 11).
4xxxx + 13
Start of
Transmission
Delay (ms)
Read/
Enter the time value in milliseconds (ms) when RTS/ Write
CTS control is enabled, to determine how long XMIT
waits after CTS is received before it transmits a
message out of the PLC port #1. Also, you may use
this register even when RTS/CTS is NOT in control.
In this situation, the entered time value determines
how long XMIT waits before it sends a message out
of the PLC port #1. You may use this as a pre
message delay timer. The valid range is 0 through
65535 ms.
1097
1098
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx + 14
End of
Transmission
Delay (ms)
Read/
To determine how long XMIT keeps an RTS
Write
assertion once the message is sent out of the PLC
port #1, enter the time value in milliseconds (ms)
when RTS/CTS control is enabled, After the time
expires, XMIT ends the RTS assertion. Also, you
may use this register even when RTS/CTS is NOT
in control. In this situation, the entered time value
determines how long XMIT waits after it sends a
message out of the PLC port #1. You may use this
as a post message delay timer. The valid range is 0
through 65535 ms.
4xxxx + 15
Current Retry
The value displayed here indicates the current
number of retry attempts made by the XMIT block
Read
Only
31007523 12/2006
Fault Status
Table
31007523 12/2006
The following is a list of the fault codes generated by the XMIT port status block
(4x + 1).
Fault Code
Fault Description
1
Modbus exception -- Illegal function
2
Modbus exception -- Illegal data address
3
Modbus exception -- Illegal data value
4
Modbus exception -- Slave device failure
5
Modbus exception -- Acknowledge
6
Modbus exception -- Slave device busy
7
Modbus exception -- Negative acknowledge
8
Modbus exception -- Memory parity error
9 through 99
Reserved
100
Slave PLC data area cannot equal zero
101
Master PLC data area cannot equal zero
102
Coil (0x) not configured
103
Holding register (4xxxx) not configured
104
Data length cannot equal zero
105
Pointer to message table cannot equal zero
106
Pointer to message table is outside the range of configured holding registers
(4xxxx)
107
Transmit message timeout
(This error is generated when the UART cannot complete a transmission in
10 seconds or less. This error bypasses the retry counter and will activate the
error output on the first error.)
108
Undefined error
109
Modem returned ERROR
110
Modem returned NO CARRIER
111
Modem returned NO DIALTONE
112
Modem returned BUSY
113
Invalid LRC checksum from the slave PLC
114
Invalid CRC checksum from the slave PLC
115
Invalid Modbus function code
116
Modbus response message time-out
117
Modem reply timeout
1099
Fault Code
1100
Fault Description
118
XMIT could not gain access to PLC communications port #1 or port #2
119
XMIT could not enable PLC port receiver
120
XMIT could not set PLC UART
121
User issued an abort command
122
Top node of XMIT not equal to zero, one or two
123
Bottom node of XMIT is not equal to seven, eight or sixteen
124
Undefined internal state
125
Broadcast mode not allowed with this Modbus function code
126
DCE did not assert CTS
127
Illegal configuration (data rate, data bits, parity, or stop bits)
128
Unexpected response received from Modbus slave
129
Illegal command word setting
130
Command word changed while active
131
Invalid character count
132
Invalid register block
133
ASCII input FIFO overflow error
134
Invalid number of start characters or termination characters
31007523 12/2006
Command Word
Communication
Functions Table
31007523 12/2006
This table describes the function performed as XMIT interprets each bit of the
command word.
(4x + 8) Command Word Function
Command word bits
that must be set to 1
Command word bits
that must be set to 0
Terminated ASCII input (Bit 5=1)
2,3,9,10,11,12
6,7,8,13,14,15,16
Simple ASCII input (Bit 6=1)
2,3,9,10,11,12
5,7,8,13,14,15,16
Simple ASCII output (Bit 7=1)
2,3,9,10,11,12
5,6,8,13,14,15,16
Modem output (Bit 7=1)
2,3,13,14,15,16
5,6,8,9,10,11,12
(plus one, but ONLY
one, of the following bits
is set to 1: 13,14,15 or
16, while the other three
bits must be set to 0)
Modbus master messaging output
(Bit 8=1)
2,3
5,6,7,9,10,11,12,13,14,
15,16
Enable ASCII receive input FIFO ONLY
(Bit 9=1)
2,3,10,11,12
5,6,7,8,13,14,15,16
1101
1102
31007523 12/2006
188
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMIT Port Status Block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1104
Representation
1105
1107
1103
Short Description
Function
Description
The XMIT port status block shows the current port status, Modbus slave activity,
ASCII input FIFO, and flow control information that may be used in ladder logic for
some applications. The XMIT port status block is totally passive. It does not take,
release, or control the PLC port.
For an overview of the XMIT instruction, please see p. 1084.
1104
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start
port
#0001
or
#0002
register
unsuccessfully
XMIT
constant =
#0007
31007523 12/2006
1105
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON begins an XMIT operation and it should
remain ON until the operation has
occurred.
port #0001 or
#0002
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
WORD
Must contain one of the following constants
either (#0001) to select PLC port #1, or
(#0002) to select PLC port #2.
Note: The loadable version DOES accept
4xxxx registers in the top node, whereas
the built-in does NOT.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
node is the first in a group of seven (7)
the port status display block, as shown on
p. 1107.
the address from the block while the block
is active. This action locks up the port
INT, UINT,
WORD
Must contain a constant equal to (#0007).
This is the number of registers used by the
XMIT port status instruction.
constant =
#0007
(bottom node)
1106
Middle output
0x
None
ON when XMIT has detected an error or
was issued an abort.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON when an XMIT operation has been
successfully completed.
31007523 12/2006
Overview
This topic provides detailed information relevant to the middle node. There are six
units in this topic.
z
z
z
z
z
z
Port Status
Display Table
31007523 12/2006
Port Status Display Table
Fault Code Generation Table
Status Generation Table
Port Ownership Table
Input FIFO Status Table
Input FIFO Length Table
This table represents the first in a group of seven contiguous holding registers that
comprise the port status block.
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx
Revision Number
Displays the current revision number of
XMIT block.
This number is automatically loaded by
the block and the block over writes any
other number entered into this register.
Read Only
4xxxx + 1
Fault Status
This field displays a fault code generated
by the XMIT port status block.
(For expanded and detailed information
please see the Fault Code Generation
Table below.)
Read Only
4xxxx + 2
Slave login status/
Slave port active
status
This register displays the status of two
items generated by the XMIT port status
block.
The two items are the slave login status
and the slave port active status.
Ladder logic may be able to use this
information to reduce or avoid collisions
on a multi master Modbus network.
please see the Status Generation Table
below.
Read Only
1107
Fault Code
Generation Table
1108
Register
Name
Description
4xxxx + 3
Slave transaction
counter
This register displays the number of slave Read Only
transactions generated by the XMIT port
status block. The counter increases every
time the PLC Modbus slave port receives
another command from the Modbus
master. Ladder logic may be able to use
this information to reduce or avoid
collisions on a multi master Modbus
network.
4xxxx + 4
Port State
This register displays ownership of the
port and its state. It is generated by the
XMIT port status block.
please see the Port Ownership Table
below.)
4xxxx + 5
Input FIFO status bits The register displays the status of seven
items related to the input FIFO. It is
generated by the XMIT port status block.
please see the Input FIFO Table below.)
Read Only
4xxxx + 6
Input FIFO length
Read Only
This register displays the current number
of characters present in the ASCII input
FIFO. The register may contain other
values based on the state of the input
FIFO and if the length is empty or
overflowing. It is generated by the XMIT
port status block.
please see the Input FIFO Length Table
below.
No Valid
Entries
Read Only
This table describes the fault codes generated by the XMIT port status block in the
(4x + 1) register.
Fault Code
Fault Description
118
XMIT could not gain access to PLC communications port #1 or port #2.
122
Top node of XMIT not equal to zero, one or two.
123
Bottom node of XMIT is not equal to seven, eight or sixteen.
31007523 12/2006
Status
Generation Table
This table describes the slave login status and the slave port active status generated
by the XMIT port status block for the (4x + 2) register.
(4x + 2 high byte)
Slave Login Status
(4x + 2 low byte)
Slave Port Active Status
Yes - When a programming device is currently Yes - When observed port is owned by the
logged ON to this PLC slave port.
PLC and currently receiving a Mod-bus
command or transmitting a Mod-bus
response.
No - When a programming device is currently
NOT logged ON to this PLC slave port.
Note: A Modbus master can send commands
but, not be logged ON
Port Ownership
Table
31007523 12/2006
No - When observed port is NOT owned by
the PLC and currently receiving Mod-bus
command or transmitting a Mod-bus
response.
This table describes the port’s ownership and state for the (4x + 4) register.
Owns Port
Active State
Value
PLC
PLC Modbus slave
0
XMIT
Tone dial modem
1
XMIT
Hang up modem
2
XMIT
Modbus messaging
3
XMIT
Simple ASCII output
4
XMIT
Pulse dial modem
5
XMIT
Initialize modem
6
XMIT
Simple ASCII input
7
XMIT
Terminated ASCII input
8
XMIT
ASCII input FIFO is ON, but no XMIT function is active
9
1109
Input FIFO Status
Table
This table describes the status bits related to the input FIFO for the (4x + 5) register.
Bit #
Definition
1-3
Reserved
4
Port owned by ...
Yes / 1
No / 0
XMIT
PLC
5-7
Reserved
8
ASCII output transmission
...
Blocked by receiving
device
Unblocked by receiving
device
9
ASCII input received ...
New character
No new character
10
ASCII input FIFO is ...
Empty
Not empty
11
Overflowing (error)
Not overflowing (error)
12
On
Off
XMIT blocked sending
device
XMIT unblocked sending
device
13 - 15 Reserved
16
Input FIFO
Length Table
ASCII input reception ...
This table describes the current number of characters present in the ASCII input
FIFO for the (4x + 6) register.
WHEN Input FIFO
1110
THEN Length
= OFF
=0
= ON and Empty
=0
= ON and Overflowing
= 512
31007523 12/2006
189
At A Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMIT Conversion Block.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1112
Representation
1113
1115
1111
Short Description
Function
Description
The purpose of the XMIT conversion block is to take data and convert it into other
usable forms based upon your application needs. The convert block performs 11
different functions or options. Some functions include ASCII to binary, integer to
ASCII, byte swapping, searching ASCII strings, and others. This block allows
internal conversions using 4xxxx source blocks to 4xxxx destination blocks.
For an overview of the XMIT instruction please see p. 1084.
1112
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
start
constant
#0001
register
unsuccessfully
XMIT
constant =
#0008
31007523 12/2006
1113
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON begins an XMIT operation and it should
remain ON until the operation has
occurred.
Note: To reset an XMIT fault and clear the
fault register, the top input must go OFF for
at least one PLC scan.
constant #0001
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT
WORD
The top node must contain a constant
(#0000) since conversions do not deal with
the PLC’s port.
The loadable version DOES accept 4xxxx
registers in the top node, whereas the builtin does NOT.
register
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT,
WORD
node is the first in a group of eight (8)
the control block, as shown on p. 1115.
the address from the program while the
block is active. This action locks up the port
INT, UINT,
WORD
The bottom node must contain a constant
equal to (#0008). This is the number of
registers used by the XMIT conversion
instruction.
constant =
#0008
(bottom node)
1114
Middle output
0x
None
ON when XMIT has detected an error or
was issued an abort.
Bottom output
0x
None
ON when an XMIT operation has been
successfully completed.
31007523 12/2006
Overview
This topic provides detailed information relevant to the middle node. There are four
units in this topic.
z
z
z
z
Conversion
Block Control
Table
31007523 12/2006
Conversion Block Control Table
Fault Code Generation Table
Data Conversion Control Bits Table
Data Conversion Opcodes Table
This table represents the first in a group of eight contiguous holding registers that
comprise the port status block.
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx
XMIT
Revision
Number
Displays the current revision number of XMIT block.
Read
This number is automatically loaded by the block and Only
the block over writes any other number entered into this
register.
4xxxx + 1 Fault Status
This field displays a fault code generated by the XMIT
port status block.
(For expanded and detailed information please see the
Fault Code Generation Table below.)
Read
Only
4xxxx + 2 Available to
User
0 (May be used as pointers for instructions such as
Read/
TBLK.)
Write
The XMIT conversion block does not use this register.
However, it may be used in ladder logic as a pointer. An
efficient way to use the XMIT block is to place a pointer
value of a TBLK instruction into this register.
4xxxx + 3 Data
Conversion
Control Bits
This 16 bit word relates to the Data Conversion (4xxxx
+ 3) word. These bits provide additional control options
based on which of the eleven conversions you select.
(For expanded and detailed information please see
Data Conversion Control Bits Table below.
Read/
Write
4xxxx + 4 Data
Conversion
Opcodes
Select the type of conversion you want to perform from
the list of eleven options listed in the Data Conversion
Opcodes Table below.
After picking the type of conversion refer to Data
Conversion Control Bits (4xxxx + 4) and the Data
Conversion Control Bits Table for additional control
options that relate to the specific conversion type
selected.
Read/
Write
1115
Register
Name
Description
No Valid
Entries
4xxxx + 5 Source
Register
Enter the 4xxxx register desired.
This is the first register in the source block that is read.
Ensure you select where you want the READ to begin
(high or low byte).
Read/
Write
4xxxx + 6 Destination
Register
Read/
Enter the 4xxxx register desired.
This is the first register in the source block that is read. Write
Ensure you select where you want the READ to begin
(high or low byte).
The selection beside this register in the DX zoom is the
same as bit16 in (4xxxx + 3).
4xxxx + 7 ASCII String Enter the search area. This register defines the search
Character
area.
Count
When either automatic advance source (Bit 13) or
automatic advance destination (Bit 14) are ON and no
ASCII character is detected, the block automatically
adjusts the character count.
Fault Code
Generation Table
1116
Read/
Write
This table describes the fault codes generated by the XMIT conversion block in the
(4x + 1) register.
Fault Code
Fault Description
122
Top node of XMIT is not equal to zero, one or two
123
Bottom node of XMIT is not equal to seven, eight or sixteen
131
Invalid character count
135
Invalid destination register block
136
Invalid source register block
137
No ASCII number present
138
Multiple sign characters present
139
Numerical overflow detected
140
String mismatch error
141
String not found
142
Invalid error check detected
143
Invalid conversion opcode
31007523 12/2006
Data Conversion
Control Bits
Table
31007523 12/2006
This table describes the control options available based upon the conversion
selected in the (4x + 3) register.
Bit # Definition
1=
0=
2
CRC 16 seed
0x0000
0xFFFF
3
Error check type
LRC 8
CRC 16
4
Error check
Validate
Append
7
Conversion case
Upper to Lower Lower to Upper
8
Case sensitivity
No
Yes
9
Format leading
Zeros
Blanks
10
Output format
Fixed
Variable
11
Conversion type
Unsigned
Signed
12
Conversion word
32-bit
16-bit
13
Automatic advance source pointer (points to the Yes
next character after the last character purged)
No
14
Automatic advance destination pointer (points to Yes
the next character after the last character
purged)
No
15
Begin reading ASCII at source beginning with ... Low byte
High byte (normal)
16
Begin saving ASCII at destination beginning
with ...
High byte (normal)
Low byte
1117
Data Conversion
Opcodes Table
1118
This table describes the 11 functions or options for performing conversions using the
data conversion opcodes in the (4x + 4) register.
Opcode
Action
Data Type
(4xxxx block)
Illegal opcode
Displayed when Not applicable
illegal opcode is
detected.
(1 Hex)
Converted to
Received ASCII decimal character string
16-bit or 32-bit signed or
unsigned binary integer
(2 Hex)
Received ASCII hex character string
Converted to
16-bit or 32-bit unsigned binary
integer
(3 Hex)
Received ASCII hex character string
Converted to
16-bit unsigned binary integer
array
(4 Hex)
16-bit or 32-bit signed or unsigned
integer
Converted to
ASCII decimal character string
for transmission
(5 Hex)
16-bit or 32-bit unsigned binary integer
Converted to
ASCII hex character string for
transmission
(6 Hex)
16-bit unsigned integer array
Converted to
ASCII hex character string for
transmission
(7 Hex)
High and low bytes from saved ASCII
source register block
Swapped to
ASCII destination register block
(8 Hex)
ASCII string from source register block
Copied to
ASCII destination register block
with or without case conversion
(9 Hex)
ASCII source register block
Compared to
ASCII string defined in
destination register block with or
without case sensitivity
(10 Hex)
ASCII source register block
Search for
ASCII string defined in
destination block with or without
case sensitivity
(11 Hex)
Error check 8-bit LRC or 16-bit CRC
Validated or
appended on
ASCII string in source register
block
31007523 12/2006
190
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMRD.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1120
Representation
1121
1122
1119
Short Description
Function
Description
1120
The XMRD instruction is used to copy a table of 6x extended memory registers to a
table of 4x holding registers in state RAM.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
control block
enable clear offset
error
destination
enable abort if error
complete (one scan)
XMRD
#1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = activates read operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = clears offset to 0
ON = does not clear offset
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = abort on error
ON = do not abort on error
control block
(see p. 1122)
(top node)
4x
INT, UINT, First of six contiguous holding registers in the
WORD
extended memory
destination
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT, The first 4x holding register in a table of registers
WORD
that receive the transferred data from the 6x
extended memory storage registers
1 (bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type Meaning
INT, UINT Contains the constant value 1, which cannot be
changed
Top output
0x
None
Read transfer active
Middle output
0x
None
Error condition detected
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = operation complete
1121
Control Block
(Top Node)
The 4x register entered in the top node is the first of six contiguous holding registers
in the extended memory control block.
Reference
Register Name
Description
Displayed
status word
Contains the diagnostic information about extended
memory (see p. 1123)
First implied
file number
Specifies which of the extended memory files is
currently in use (range: 1 ... 10)
Second
implied
start address
Specifies which 6x storage register in the current file is
the starting address; 0 = 60000, 9999 = 69999
Third implied
count
Specifies the number of registers to be read or written in
a scan when the appropriate function block is powered;
range: 0 ... 9999, not to exceed number specified in max
registers (fifth implied)
Fourth implied offset
Keeps a running total of the number of registers
transferred thus far
Fifth implied
Specifies the maximum number of registers that may be
transferred when the function block is powered
(range: 0 ... 9999)
max registers
If you are in multi-scan mode, these six registers should be unique to this function
block.
1122
31007523 12/2006
Status Word of
the Control Block
31007523 12/2006
Status Word of the Control Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bit
Function
1
1 = power-up diagnostic error
2
1 = parity error in extended memory
3
1 = extended memory does not exist
4
0 = transfer not running
1 = busy
5
0 = transfer in progress
1 = transfer complete
6
1 = file boundary crossed
7
1 = offset parameter too large
8-9
Not used
11
10
1 = nonexistent state RAM
11
Not used
12
1 = maximum registers parameter error
13
1 = offset parameter error
14
1 = count parameter error
15
1 = starting address parameter error
16
1 = file number parameter error
12
13
14
15
16
1123
1124
31007523 12/2006
191
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XMWT.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1126
Representation
1127
1128
1125
Short Description
Function
Description
1126
The XMWT instruction is used to write data from a block of input registers or holding
registers in state RAM to a block of 6x registers in an extended memory file.
31007523 12/2006
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source
enable clear offset
error
control block
enable abort if error
complete (one scan)
XMWT
1
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Top input
0x, 1x
None
ON = activates write operation
Middle input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = clears offset to 0
ON = does not clear offset
Bottom input
0x, 1x
None
OFF = abort on error
ON = do not abort on error
source
(top node)
3x, 4x
INT, UINT, The first 3x or 4x register in a block of
WORD
contiguous source registers, i.e. input or
holding registers, whose contents will be
written to 6x extended memory registers
control block
(see p. 1128)
(middle node)
4x
INT, UINT, First of six contiguous holding registers in the
WORD
extended memory
1 (bottom node)
31007523 12/2006
Data Type Meaning
INT, UINT
Contains the constant value 1, which cannot
be changed
Top output
0x
None
Write transfer active
Middle output
0x
None
Error condition detected
Bottom output
0x
None
ON = operation complete
1127
Control Block
(Middle Node)
The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first of six contiguous holding
registers in the extended memory control block.
Reference
Register Name Description
Displayed
status word
Contains the diagnostic information about extended
memory (see p. 1129)
First implied
file number
Specifies which of the extended memory files is currently
in use (range: 1 ... 10)
Second implied start address
Specifies which 6x storage register in the current file is
the starting address; 0 = 60000, 9999 = 69999
Third implied
count
Specifies the number of registers to be read or written in
a scan when the appropriate function block is powered;
range: 0 ... 9999, not to exceed number specified in max
registers (fifth implied)
Fourth implied
offset
Keeps a running total of the number of registers
transferred thus far
Fifth implied
max registers
Specifies the maximum number of registers that may be
transferred when the function block is powered
(range: 0 ... 9999)
If you are in multi-scan mode, these six registers should be unique to this function
block.
1128
31007523 12/2006
Status Word of
the Control Block
31007523 12/2006
Status Word of the Control Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bit
Function
1
1 = power-up diagnostic error
2
1 = parity error in extended memory
3
1 = extended memory does not exist
4
0 = transfer not running
1 = busy
5
0 = transfer in progress
1 = transfer complete
6
1 = file boundary crossed
7
1 = offset parameter too large
8-9
Not used
11
10
1 = nonexistent state RAM
11
Not used
12
1 = maximum registers parameter error
13
1 = offset parameter error
14
1 = count parameter error
15
1 = starting address parameter error
16
1 = file number parameter error
12
13
14
15
16
1129
1130
31007523 12/2006
XOR: Exclusive OR
192
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter describes the instruction XOR.
What's in this
Chapter?
31007523 12/2006
Topic
Page
Short Description
1132
Representation
1133
1135
1131
XOR: Exclusive OR
Short Description
Function
Description
The XOR instruction performs a Boolean Exclusive OR operation on the bit patterns
in the source and destination matrices.
The XORed bit pattern is then posted in the destination matrix, overwriting its
previous contents:
source
bits
0
0
1
1
0
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
0
0
1
1
0
1
destination
bits
1
WARNING
XOR will override any disabled coils within the destination matrix without
enabling them.
This can cause personal injury if a coil has disabled an operation for maintenance
or repair because the coil’s state can be changed by the XOR operation.
equipment damage.
1132
31007523 12/2006
XOR: Exclusive OR
Representation
Symbol
control input
active
source matrix
destination
matrix
matrix size
XOR
(16 - 1600 bits)
Parameter
Description
Parameters
State RAM
Reference
Data Type
Meaning
Top input
0x, 1x
None
Initiates XOR
source matrix
(top node)
0x, 1x, 3x, 4x BOOL, WORD First reference in the source matrix
destination matrix
(middle node)
0x, 4x
length
(bottom node)
Top output
31007523 12/2006
length
0x
BOOL, WORD First reference in the destination matrix
INT, UINT
Matrix length; range 1 ... 100 registers.
None
1133
XOR: Exclusive OR
An XOR Example
When contact 10001 passes power, the source matrix formed by the bit pattern in
registers 40600 and 40601 is XORed with the destination matrix formed by the bit
pattern in registers 40608 and 40609, overwriting the original destination bit pattern.
source matrix
40600 = 1111111100000000 40601 = 1111111100000000
40600
10001
40608
XOR
00002
40608 = 1111111111111111 40609 = 0000000000000000
XORed destination matrix
40608 = 0000000011111111 40609 = 1111111100000000
Note: If you want to reatin the original destination bit pattern of registers 40608 and
40609, copy the information into another table using a BLKIM before performing
the XOR operation.
1134
31007523 12/2006
XOR: Exclusive OR
Matrix Length
(Bottom Node)
31007523 12/2006
1 ... 100. A length of 2 indicates that 32 bits in each matrix will be XORed.
1135
XOR: Exclusive OR
1136
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
A
active window
The window, which is currently selected. Only one window can be active at any one
given time. When a window is active, the heading changes color, in order to
distinguish it from other windows. Unselected windows are inactive.
Actual parameter
Currently connected Input/Output parameters.
Addresses
(Direct) addresses are memory areas on the PLC. These are found in the State RAM
and can be assigned input/output modules.
The display/input of direct addresses is possible in the following formats:
z Standard format (400001)
z Separator format (4:00001)
z Compact format (4:1)
z IEC format (QW1)
ANL_IN
ANL_IN stands for the data type "Analog Input" and is used for processing analog
values. The 3x References of the configured analog input module, which is specified
in the I/O component list is automatically assigned the data type and should
therefore only be occupied by Unlocated variables.
ANL_OUT
ANL_OUT stands for the data type "Analog Output" and is used for processing
analog values. The 4x-References of the configured analog output module, which is
specified in the I/O component list is automatically assigned the data type and
should therefore only be occupied by Unlocated variables.
ANY
In the existing version "ANY" covers the elementary data types BOOL, BYTE, DINT,
INT, REAL, UDINT, UINT, TIME and WORD and therefore derived data types.
31007523 12/2006
xxix
Glossary
ANY_BIT
In the existing version, "ANY_BIT" covers the data types BOOL, BYTE and WORD.
ANY_ELEM
In the existing version "ANY_ELEM" covers the elementary data types BOOL,
BYTE, DINT, INT, REAL, UDINT, UINT, TIME and WORD.
ANY_INT
In the existing version, "ANY_INT" covers the data types DINT, INT, UDINT and
UINT.
ANY_NUM
In the existing version, "ANY_NUM" covers the data types DINT, INT, REAL, UDINT
and UINT.
ANY_REAL
In the existing version "ANY_REAL" covers the data type REAL.
Application
window
The window, which contains the working area, the menu bar and the tool bar for the
application. The name of the application appears in the heading. An application
window can contain several document windows. In Concept the application window
corresponds to a Project.
Argument
Synonymous with Actual parameters.
ASCII mode
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. The ASCII mode is used for
communication with various host devices. ASCII works with 7 data bits.
Atrium
The PC based controller is located on a standard AT board, and can be operated
within a host computer in an ISA bus slot. The module occupies a motherboard
(requires SA85 driver) with two slots for PC104 daughter boards. From this, a
PC104 daughter board is used as a CPU and the others for INTERBUS control.
B
Back up data file
(Concept EFB)
xxx
The back up file is a copy of the last Source files. The name of this back up file is
"backup??.c" (it is accepted that there are no more than 100 copies of the source
files. The first back up file is called "backup00.c". If changes have been made on the
Definition file, which do not create any changes to the interface in the EFB, there is
no need to create a back up file by editing the source files (Objects → Source). If a
back up file can be assigned, the name of the source file can be given.
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Base 16 literals
Base 16 literals function as the input of whole number values in the hexadecimal
system. The base must be denoted by the prefix 16#. The values may not be
preceded by signs (+/-). Single underline signs ( _ ) between figures are not
significant.
Example
16#F_F or 16#FF (decimal 255)
16#E_0 or 16#E0 (decimal 224)
Base 8 literal
Base 8 literals function as the input of whole number values in the octal system. The
base must be denoted by the prefix 3.63kg. The values may not be preceded by
signs (+/-). Single underline signs ( _ ) between figures are not significant.
Example
8#3_1111 or 8#377 (decimal 255)
8#34_1111 or 8#340 (decimal 224)
Basis 2 literals
Base 2 literals function as the input of whole number values in the dual system. The
base must be denoted by the prefix 0.91kg. The values may not be preceded by
Example
2#1111_1111 or 2#11111111 (decimal 255)
2#1110_1111 or 2#11100000 (decimal 224)
Binary
connections
Connections between outputs and inputs of FFBs of data type BOOL.
Bit sequence
A data element, which is made up from one or more bits.
BOOL
BOOL stands for the data type "Boolean". The length of the data elements is 1 bit
(in the memory contained in 1 byte). The range of values for variables of this type is
0 (FALSE) and 1 (TRUE).
Bridge
A bridge serves to connect networks. It enables communication between nodes on
the two networks. Each network has its own token rotation sequence – the token is
not deployed via bridges.
BYTE
BYTE stands for the data type "Bit sequence 8". The input appears as Base 2 literal,
Base 8 literal or Base 1 16 literal. The length of the data element is 8 bit. A numerical
range of values cannot be assigned to this data type.
31007523 12/2006
xxxi
Glossary
C
Cache
The cache is a temporary memory for cut or copied objects. These objects can be
inserted into sections. The old content in the cache is overwritten for each new Cut
or Copy.
Call up
The operation, by which the execution of an operation is initiated.
Coil
A coil is a LD element, which transfers (without alteration) the status of the horizontal
link on the left side to the horizontal link on the right side. In this way, the status is
saved in the associated Variable/ direct address.
Compact format
(4:1)
The first figure (the Reference) is separated from the following address with a colon
(:), where the leading zero are not entered in the address.
Connection
A check or flow of data connection between graphic objects (e.g. steps in the SFC
editor, Function blocks in the FBD editor) within a section, is graphically shown as a
line.
Constants
Constants are Unlocated variables, which are assigned a value that cannot be
altered from the program logic (write protected).
Contact
A contact is a LD element, which transfers a horizontal connection status onto the
right side. This status is from the Boolean AND- operation of the horizontal
connection status on the left side with the status of the associated Variables/direct
Address. A contact does not alter the value of the associated variables/direct
address.
D
Data transfer
settings
xxxii
Settings, which determine how information from the programming device is
transferred to the PLC.
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Data types
The overview shows the hierarchy of data types, as they are used with inputs and
outputs of Functions and Function blocks. Generic data types are denoted by the
prefix "ANY".
z ANY_ELEM
z ANY_NUM
ANY_REAL (REAL)
ANY_INT (DINT, INT, UDINT, UINT)
z ANY_BIT (BOOL, BYTE, WORD)
z TIME
z System data types (IEC extensions)
z Derived (from "ANY" data types)
DCP I/O station
With a Distributed Control Processor (D908) a remote network can be set up with a
parent PLC. When using a D908 with remote PLC, the parent PLC views the remote
PLC as a remote I/O station. The D908 and the remote PLC communicate via the
system bus, which results in high performance, with minimum effect on the cycle
time. The data exchange between the D908 and the parent PLC takes place at 1.5
Megabits per second via the remote I/O bus. A parent PLC can support up to 31
(Address 2-32) D908 processors.
DDE (Dynamic
Data Exchange)
The DDE interface enables a dynamic data exchange between two programs under
Windows. The DDE interface can be used in the extended monitor to call up its own
display applications. With this interface, the user (i.e. the DDE client) can not only
read data from the extended monitor (DDE server), but also write data onto the PLC
via the server. Data can therefore be altered directly in the PLC, while it monitors
and analyzes the results. When using this interface, the user is able to make their
own "Graphic-Tool", "Face Plate" or "Tuning Tool", and integrate this into the
system. The tools can be written in any DDE supporting language, e.g. Visual Basic
and Visual-C++. The tools are called up, when the one of the buttons in the dialog
box extended monitor uses Concept Graphic Tool: Signals of a projection can be
displayed as timing diagrams via the DDE connection between Concept and
Concept Graphic Tool.
Decentral
Network (DIO)
A remote programming in Modbus Plus network enables maximum data transfer
performance and no specific requests on the links. The programming of a remote
net is easy. To set up the net, no additional ladder diagram logic is needed. Via
corresponding entries into the Peer Cop processor all data transfer requests are
met.
Declaration
Mechanism for determining the definition of a Language element. A declaration
normally covers the connection of an Identifier with a language element and the
assignment of attributes such as Data types and algorithms.
31007523 12/2006
xxxiii
Glossary
Definition
data file
(Concept EFB)
The definition file contains general descriptive information about the selected FFB
and its formal parameters.
Derived data type
Derived data types are types of data, which are derived from the Elementary data
types and/or other derived data types. The definition of the derived data types
appears in the data type editor in Concept.
Distinctions are made between global data types and local data types.
Derived Function
Block (DFB)
A derived function block represents the Call up of a derived function block type.
Details of the graphic form of call up can be found in the definition " Function block
(Item)". Contrary to calling up EFB types, calling up DFB types is denoted by double
vertical lines on the left and right side of the rectangular block symbol.
The body of a derived function block type is designed using FBD language, but only
in the current version of the programming system. Other IEC languages cannot yet
be used for defining DFB types, nor can derived functions be defined in the current
version.
Distinctions are made between local and global DFBs.
DINT
DINT stands for the data type "double integer". The input appears as Integer literal,
Base 2 literal, Base 8 literal or Base 16 literal. The length of the data element is 32
bit. The range of values for variables of this data type is from –2 exp (31) to 2 exp
(31) –1.
Direct display
A method of displaying variables in the PLC program, from which the assignment of
configured memory can be directly and indirectly derived from the physical memory.
Document
window
A window within an Application window. Several document windows can be opened
at the same time in an application window. However, only one document window
can be active. Document windows in Concept are, for example, sections, the
message window, the reference data editor and the PLC configuration.
Dummy
An empty data file, which consists of a text header with general file information, i.e.
author, date of creation, EFB identifier etc. The user must complete this dummy file
with additional entries.
DX Zoom
This property enables connection to a programming object to observe and, if
necessary, change its data value.
xxxiv
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
E
Elementary
functions/
function blocks
(EFB)
Identifier for Functions or Function blocks, whose type definitions are not formulated
in one of the IEC languages, i.e. whose bodies, for example, cannot be modified with
the DFB Editor (Concept-DFB). EFB types are programmed in "C" and mounted via
Libraries in precompiled form.
EN / ENO (Enable
/ Error display)
If the value of EN is "0" when the FFB is called up, the algorithms defined by the FFB
are not executed and all outputs contain the previous value. The value of ENO is
automatically set to "0" in this case. If the value of EN is "1" when the FFB is called
up, the algorithms defined by the FFB are executed. After the error free execution of
the algorithms, the ENO value is automatically set to "1". If an error occurs during
the execution of the algorithm, ENO is automatically set to "0". The output behavior
of the FFB depends whether the FFBs are called up without EN/ENO or with EN=1.
If the EN/ENO display is enabled, the EN input must be active. Otherwise, the FFB
is not executed. The projection of EN and ENO is enabled/disabled in the block
properties dialog box. The dialog box is called up via the menu commands Objects
→ Properties... or via a double click on the FFB.
Error
When processing a FFB or a Step an error is detected (e.g. unauthorized input value
or a time error), an error message appears, which can be viewed with the menu
command Online → Event display... . With FFBs the ENO output is set to "0".
Evaluation
The process, by which a value for a Function or for the outputs of a Function block
during the Program execution is transmitted.
Expression
Expressions consist of operators and operands.
F
FFB (functions/
function blocks)
Collective term for EFB (elementary functions/function blocks) and DFB (derived
function blocks)
Field variables
Variables, one of which is assigned, with the assistance of the key word ARRAY
(field), a defined Derived data type. A field is a collection of data elements of the
same Data type.
FIR filter
Finite Impulse Response Filter
31007523 12/2006
xxxv
Glossary
Formal
parameters
Input/Output parameters, which are used within the logic of a FFB and led out of the
FFB as inputs/outputs.
Function (FUNC)
A Program organization unit, which exactly supplies a data element when executing.
A function has no internal status information. Multiple call ups of the same function
with the same input parameter values always supply the same output values.
Details of the graphic form of function call up can be found in the definition " Function
block (Item)". In contrast to the call up of function blocks, the function call ups only
have one unnamed output, whose name is the name of the function itself. In FBD
each call up is denoted by a unique number over the graphic block; this number is
automatically generated and cannot be altered.
Function block
(item) (FB)
A function block is a Program organization unit, which correspondingly calculates
the functionality values, defined in the function block type description, for the output
and internal variables, when it is called up as a certain item. All output values and
internal variables of a certain function block item remain as a call up of the function
block until the next. Multiple call up of the same function block item with the same
arguments (Input parameter values) supply generally supply the same output
value(s).
Each function block item is displayed graphically by a rectangular block symbol. The
name of the function block type is located on the top center within the rectangle. The
name of the function block item is located also at the top, but on the outside of the
rectangle. An instance is automatically generated when creating, which can
however be altered manually, if required. Inputs are displayed on the left side and
outputs on the right of the block. The names of the formal input/output parameters
are displayed within the rectangle in the corresponding places.
The above description of the graphic presentation is principally applicable to
Function call ups and to DFB call ups. Differences are described in the
corresponding definitions.
Function block
dialog (FBD)
One or more sections, which contain graphically displayed networks from Functions,
Function blocks and Connections.
Function block
type
A language element, consisting of: 1. the definition of a data structure, subdivided
into input, output and internal variables, 2. A set of operations, which is used with
the elements of the data structure, when a function block type instance is called up.
This set of operations can be formulated either in one of the IEC languages (DFB
type) or in "C" (EFB type). A function block type can be instanced (called up) several
times.
xxxvi
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Function counter
The function counter serves as a unique identifier for the function in a Program or
DFB. The function counter cannot be edited and is automatically assigned. The
function counter always has the structure: .n.m
n = Section number (number running)
m = Number of the FFB object in the section (number running)
G
Generic data
type
A Data type, which stands in for several other data types.
Generic literal
If the Data type of a literal is not relevant, simply enter the value for the literal. In this
case Concept automatically assigns the literal to a suitable data type.
Global derived
data types
Global Derived data types are available in every Concept project and are contained
in the DFB directory directly under the Concept directory.
Global DFBs
Global DFBs are available in every Concept project and are contained in the DFB
directory directly under the Concept directory.
Global macros
Global Macros are available in every Concept project and are contained in the DFB
directory directly under the Concept directory.
Groups (EFBs)
Some EFB libraries (e.g. the IEC library) are subdivided into groups. This facilitates
the search for FFBs, especially in extensive libraries.
I
I/O component
list
The I/O and expert assemblies of the various CPUs are configured in the I/O
component list.
IEC 61131-3
International norm: Programmable controllers – part 3: Programming languages.
IEC format (QW1)
In the place of the address stands an IEC identifier, followed by a five figure address:
z %0x12345 = %Q12345
z %1x12345 = %I12345
z %3x12345 = %IW12345
z %4x12345 = %QW12345
31007523 12/2006
xxxvii
Glossary
IEC name
conventions
(identifier)
An identifier is a sequence of letters, figures, and underscores, which must start with
a letter or underscores (e.g. name of a function block type, of an item or section).
Letters from national sets of characters (e.g. ö,ü, é, õ) can be used, taken from
project and DFB names.
Underscores are significant in identifiers; e.g. "A_BCD" and "AB_CD" are
interpreted as different identifiers. Several leading and multiple underscores are not
authorized consecutively.
Identifiers are not permitted to contain space characters. Upper and/or lower case
is not significant; e.g. "ABCD" and "abcd" are interpreted as the same identifier.
Identifiers are not permitted to be Key words.
IIR filter
Infinite Impulse Response Filter
Initial step
(starting step)
The first step in a chain. In each chain, an initial step must be defined. The chain is
started with the initial step when first called up.
Initial value
The allocated value of one of the variables when starting the program. The value
assignment appears in the form of a Literal.
Input bits
(1x references)
The 1/0 status of input bits is controlled via the process data, which reaches the CPU
from an entry device.
Note: The x, which comes after the first figure of the reference type, represents a
five figure storage location in the application data store, i.e. if the reference 100201
signifies an input bit in the address 201 of the State RAM.
Input parameters
(Input)
When calling up a FFB the associated Argument is transferred.
Input words
(3x references)
An input word contains information, which come from an external source and are
represented by a 16 bit figure. A 3x register can also contain 16 sequential input bits,
which were read into the register in binary or BCD (binary coded decimal) format.
Note: The x, which comes after the first figure of the reference type, represents a
five figure storage location in the user data store, i.e. if the reference 300201
signifies a 16 bit input word in the address 201 of the State RAM.
Instantiation
The generation of an Item.
Instruction
(984LL)
When programming electric controllers, the task of implementing operational coded
instructions in the form of picture objects, which are divided into recognizable
contact forms, must be executed. The designed program objects are, on the user
level, converted to computer useable OP codes during the loading process. The OP
codes are deciphered in the CPU and processed by the controller’s firmware
functions so that the desired controller is implemented.
xxxviii
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Instruction (IL)
Instructions are "commands" of the IL programming language. Each operation
begins on a new line and is succeeded by an operator (with modifier if needed) and,
if necessary for each relevant operation, by one or more operands. If several
operands are used, they are separated by commas. A tag can stand before the
instruction, which is followed by a colon. The commentary must, if available, be the
last element in the line.
Instruction list
(IL)
IL is a text language according to IEC 1131, in which operations, e.g. conditional/
unconditional call up of Function blocks and Functions, conditional/unconditional
jumps etc. are displayed through instructions.
INT
INT stands for the data type "whole number". The input appears as Integer literal,
Base 2 literal, Base 8 literal or Base 16 literal. The length of the data element is 16
bit. The range of values for variables of this data type is from –2 exp (15) to 2 exp
(15) –1.
Integer literals
Integer literals function as the input of whole number values in the decimal system.
The values may be preceded by the signs (+/-). Single underline signs ( _ ) between
figures are not significant.
Example
-12, 0, 123_456, +986
INTERBUS (PCP)
To use the INTERBUS PCP channel and the INTERBUS process data
preprocessing (PDP), the new I/O station type INTERBUS (PCP) is led into the
Concept configurator. This I/O station type is assigned fixed to the INTERBUS
connection module 180-CRP-660-01.
The 180-CRP-660-01 differs from the 180-CRP-660-00 only by a clearly larger I/O
area in the state RAM of the controller.
Item name
An Identifier, which belongs to a certain Function block item. The item name serves
as a unique identifier for the function block in a program organization unit. The item
name is automatically generated, but can be edited. The item name must be unique
throughout the Program organization unit, and no distinction is made between
upper/lower case. If the given name already exists, a warning is given and another
name must be selected. The item name must conform to the IEC name conventions,
otherwise an error message appears. The automatically generated instance name
always has the structure: FBI_n_m
FBI = Function block item
m = Number of the FFB object in the section (number running)
31007523 12/2006
xxxix
Glossary
J
Jump
Element of the SFC language. Jumps are used to jump over areas of the chain.
K
Key words
Key words are unique combinations of figures, which are used as special syntactic
elements, as is defined in appendix B of the IEC 1131-3. All key words, which are
used in the IEC 1131-3 and in Concept, are listed in appendix C of the IEC 1131-3.
These listed keywords cannot be used for any other purpose, i.e. not as variable
names, section names, item names etc.
L
Ladder Diagram
(LD)
Ladder Diagram is a graphic programming language according to IEC1131, which
optically orientates itself to the "rung" of a relay ladder diagram.
Ladder Logic 984
In the terms Ladder Logic and Ladder Diagram, the word Ladder refers to execution.
In contrast to a diagram, a ladder logic is used by engineers to draw up a circuit (with
assistance from electrical symbols),which should chart the cycle of events and not
the existing wires, which connect the parts together. A usual user interface for
controlling the action by automated devices permits ladder logic interfaces, so that
when implementing a control system, engineers do not have to learn any new
programming languages, with which they are not conversant.
The structure of the actual ladder logic enables electrical elements to be linked in a
way that generates a control output, which is dependant upon a configured flow of
power through the electrical objects used, which displays the previously demanded
condition of a physical electric appliance.
In simple form, the user interface is one of the video displays used by the PLC
programming application, which establishes a vertical and horizontal grid, in which
the programming objects are arranged. The logic is powered from the left side of the
grid, and by connecting activated objects the electricity flows from left to right.
Landscape
format
Landscape format means that the page is wider than it is long when looking at the
printed text.
xl
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Language
element
Each basic element in one of the IEC programming languages, e.g. a Step in SFC,
a Function block item in FBD or the Start value of a variable.
Library
Collection of software objects, which are provided for reuse when programming new
projects, or even when building new libraries. Examples are the Elementary function
block types libraries.
EFB libraries can be subdivided into Groups.
Literals
Literals serve to directly supply values to inputs of FFBs, transition conditions etc.
These values cannot be overwritten by the program logic (write protected). In this
way, generic and standardized literals are differentiated.
Furthermore literals serve to assign a Constant a value or a Variable an Initial value.
The input appears as Base 2 literal, Base 8 literal, Base 16 literal, Integer literal, Real
literal or Real literal with exponent.
Local derived
data types
Local derived data types are only available in a single Concept project and its local
DFBs and are contained in the DFB directory under the project directory.
Local DFBs
Local DFBs are only available in a single Concept project and are contained in the
DFB directory under the project directory.
Local link
The local network link is the network, which links the local nodes with other nodes
either directly or via a bus amplifier.
Local macros
Local Macros are only available in a single Concept project and are contained in the
DFB directory under the project directory.
Local network
nodes
The local node is the one, which is projected evenly.
Located variable
Located variables are assigned a state RAM address (reference addresses 0x,1x,
3x, 4x). The value of these variables is saved in the state RAM and can be altered
online with the reference data editor. These variables can be addressed by symbolic
names or the reference addresses.
Collective PLC inputs and outputs are connected to the state RAM. The program
access to the peripheral signals, which are connected to the PLC, appears only via
located variables. PLC access from external sides via Modbus or Modbus plus
interfaces, i.e. from visualizing systems, are likewise possible via located variables.
31007523 12/2006
xli
Glossary
M
Macro
Macros are created with help from the software Concept DFB.
Macros function to duplicate frequently used sections and networks (including the
logic, variables, and variable declaration).
Distinctions are made between local and global macros.
Macros have the following properties:
Macros can only be created in the programming languages FBD and LD.
z Macros only contain one single section.
z Macros can contain any complex section.
z From a program technical point of view, there is no differentiation between an
instanced macro, i.e. a macro inserted into a section, and a conventionally
created macro.
z Calling up DFBs in a macro
z Variable declaration
z Use of macro-own data structures
z Automatic acceptance of the variables declared in the macro
z Initial value for variables
z Multiple instancing of a macro in the whole program with different variables
z The section name, the variable name and the data structure name can contain up
to 10 different exchange markings (@0 to @9).
z
MMI
Man Machine Interface
Multi element
variables
Variables, one of which is assigned a Derived data type defined with STRUCT or
ARRAY.
Distinctions are made between Field variables and structured variables.
N
Network
A network is the connection of devices to a common data path, which communicate
with each other via a common protocol.
Network node
A node is a device with an address (164) on the Modbus Plus network.
xlii
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Node address
The node address serves a unique identifier for the network in the routing path. The
address is set directly on the node, e.g. with a rotary switch on the back of the
module.
O
Operand
An operand is a Literal, a Variable, a Function call up or an Expression.
Operator
An operator is a symbol for an arithmetic or Boolean operation to be executed.
Output
parameters
(Output)
A parameter, with which the result(s) of the Evaluation of a FFB are returned.
Output/discretes
(0x references)
An output/marker bit can be used to control real output data via an output unit of the
control system, or to define one or more outputs in the state RAM. Note: The x,
which comes after the first figure of the reference type, represents a five figure
storage location in the application data store, i.e. if the reference 000201 signifies
an output or marker bit in the address 201 of the State RAM.
Output/
marker words
(4x references)
An output/marker word can be used to save numerical data (binary or decimal) in
the State RAM, or also to send data from the CPU to an output unit in the control
system. Note: The x, which comes after the first figure of the reference type,
represents a five figure storage location in the application data store, i.e. if the
reference 400201 signifies a 16 bit output or marker word in the address 201 of the
State RAM.
P
Peer processor
The peer processor processes the token run and the flow of data between the
Modbus Plus network and the PLC application logic.
PLC
Programmable controller
Program
The uppermost Program organization unit. A program is closed and loaded onto a
single PLC.
Program cycle
A program cycle consists of reading in the inputs, processing the program logic and
the output of the outputs.
31007523 12/2006
xliii
Glossary
Program
organization unit
A Function, a Function block, or a Program. This term can refer to either a Type or
an Item.
Programming
device
Hardware and software, which supports programming, configuring, testing,
implementing and error searching in PLC applications as well as in remote system
applications, to enable source documentation and archiving. The programming
device could also be used for process visualization.
Programming
redundancy
system
(Hot Standby)
A redundancy system consists of two identically configured PLC devices, which
communicate with each other via redundancy processors. In the case of the primary
PLC failing, the secondary PLC takes over the control checks. Under normal
conditions the secondary PLC does not take over any controlling functions, but
instead checks the status information, to detect mistakes.
Project
General identification of the uppermost level of a software tree structure, which
specifies the parent project name of a PLC application. After specifying the project
name, the system configuration and control program can be saved under this name.
All data, which results during the creation of the configuration and the program,
belongs to this parent project for this special automation.
General identification for the complete set of programming and configuring
information in the Project data bank, which displays the source code that describes
the automation of a system.
Project data bank
The data bank in the Programming device, which contains the projection information
for a Project.
Prototype
data file
(Concept EFB)
The prototype data file contains all prototypes of the assigned functions. Further, if
available, a type definition of the internal status structure is given.
R
REAL
REAL stands for the data type "real". The input appears as Real literal or as Real
literal with exponent. The length of the data element is 32 bit. The value range for
variables of this data type reaches from 8.43E-37 to 3.36E+38.
Note: Depending on the mathematic processor type of the CPU, various areas
within this valid value range cannot be represented. This is valid for values nearing
ZERO and for values nearing INFINITY. In these cases, a number value is not
shown in animation, instead NAN (Not A Number) oder INF (INFinite).
xliv
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Real literal
Real literals function as the input of real values in the decimal system. Real literals
are denoted by the input of the decimal point. The values may be preceded by the
Example
-12.0, 0.0, +0.456, 3.14159_26
Real literal with
exponent
Real literals with exponent function as the input of real values in the decimal system.
Real literals with exponent are denoted by the input of the decimal point. The
exponent sets the key potency, by which the preceding number is multiplied to get
to the value to be displayed. The basis may be preceded by a negative sign (-). The
exponent may be preceded by a positive or negative sign (+/-). Single underline
signs ( _ ) between figures are not significant. (Only between numbers, not before
or after the decimal poiont and not before or after "E", "E+" or "E-")
Example
-1.34E-12 or -1.34e-12
1.0E+6 or 1.0e+6
1.234E6 or 1.234e6
Reference
Each direct address is a reference, which starts with an ID, specifying whether it
concerns an input or an output and whether it concerns a bit or a word. References,
which start with the code 6, display the register in the extended memory of the state
RAM.
0x area = Discrete outputs
1x area = Input bits
3x area = Input words
4x area = Output bits/Marker words
6x area = Register in the extended memory
Note: The x, which comes after the first figure of each reference type, represents
a five figure storage location in the application data store, i.e. if the reference
400201 signifies a 16 bit output or marker word in the address 201 of the State
RAM.
Register in the
extended
memory (6x
reference)
6x references are marker words in the extended memory of the PLC. Only 984LL
user programs and CPU 213 04 or CPU 424 02 can be used.
RIO (Remote I/O)
Remote I/O provides a physical location of the I/O coordinate setting device in
relation to the processor to be controlled. Remote inputs/outputs are connected to
the consumer control via a wired communication cable.
RP (PROFIBUS)
RP = Remote Peripheral
31007523 12/2006
xlv
Glossary
RTU mode
Remote Terminal Unit
The RTU mode is used for communication between the PLC and an IBM compatible
personal computer. RTU works with 8 data bits.
Rum-time error
Error, which occurs during program processing on the PLC, with SFC objects (i.e.
steps) or FFBs. These are, for example, over-runs of value ranges with figures, or
time errors with steps.
S
SA85 module
The SA85 module is a Modbus Plus adapter for an IBM-AT or compatible computer.
Section
A section can be used, for example, to describe the functioning method of a
technological unit, such as a motor.
A Program or DFB consist of one or more sections. Sections can be programmed
with the IEC programming languages FBD and SFC. Only one of the named
programming languages can be used within a section.
Each section has its own Document window in Concept. For reasons of clarity, it is
recommended to subdivide a very large section into several small ones. The scroll
bar serves to assist scrolling in a section.
Separator format
(4:00001)
The first figure (the Reference) is separated from the ensuing five figure address by
a colon (:).
Sequence
language (SFC)
The SFC Language elements enable the subdivision of a PLC program organizational unit in a number of Steps and Transitions, which are connected horizontally
by aligned Connections. A number of actions belong to each step, and a transition
condition is linked to a transition.
Serial ports
With serial ports (COM) the information is transferred bit by bit.
Source code
data file
(Concept EFB)
The source code data file is a usual C++ source file. After execution of the menu
command Library → Generate data files this file contains an EFB code framework,
in which a specific code must be entered for the selected EFB. To do this, click on
the menu command Objects → Source.
Standard format
(400001)
The five figure address is located directly after the first figure (the reference).
xlvi
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Standardized
literals
If the data type for the literal is to be automatically determined, use the following
construction: ’Data type name’#’Literal value’.
Example
INT#15 (Data type: Integer, value: 15),
BYTE#00001111 (data type: Byte, value: 00001111)
REAL#23.0 (Data type: Real, value: 23.0)
For the assignment of REAL data types, there is also the possibility to enter the
value in the following way: 23.0.
Entering a comma will automatically assign the data type REAL.
State RAM
The state RAM is the storage for all sizes, which are addressed in the user program
via References (Direct display). For example, input bits, discretes, input words, and
discrete words are located in the state RAM.
Statement (ST)
Instructions are "commands" of the ST programming language. Instructions must be
terminated with semicolons. Several instructions (separated by semi-colons) can
occupy the same line.
Status bits
There is a status bit for every node with a global input or specific input/output of Peer
Cop data. If a defined group of data was successfully transferred within the set time
out, the corresponding status bit is set to 1. Alternatively, this bit is set to 0 and all
data belonging to this group (of 0) is deleted.
Step
SFC Language element: Situations, in which the Program behavior follows in
relation to the inputs and outputs of the same operations, which are defined by the
associated actions of the step.
Step name
The step name functions as the unique flag of a step in a Program organization unit.
The step name is automatically generated, but can be edited. The step name must
be unique throughout the whole program organization unit, otherwise an Error
message appears.
The automatically generated step name always has the structure: S_n_m
S = Step
m = Number of steps in the section (number running)
Structured text
(ST)
31007523 12/2006
ST is a text language according to IEC 1131, in which operations, e.g. call up of
Function blocks and Functions, conditional execution of instructions, repetition of
instructions etc. are displayed through instructions.
xlvii
Glossary
Structured
variables
Variables, one of which is assigned a Derived data type defined with STRUCT
(structure).
A structure is a collection of data elements with generally differing data types (
Elementary data types and/or derived data types).
SY/MAX
In Quantum control devices, Concept closes the mounting on the I/O population SY/
MAX I/O modules for RIO control via the Quantum PLC with on. The SY/MAX
remote subrack has a remote I/O adapter in slot 1, which communicates via a
Modicon S908 R I/O system. The SY/MAX I/O modules are performed when
highlighting and including in the I/O population of the Concept configuration.
Symbol (Icon)
Graphic display of various objects in Windows, e.g. drives, user programs and
Document windows.
T
Template
data file
(Concept EFB)
The template data file is an ASCII data file with a layout information for the Concept
FBD editor, and the parameters for code generation.
TIME
TIME stands for the data type "Time span". The input appears as Time span literal.
The length of the data element is 32 bit. The value range for variables of this type
stretches from 0 to 2exp(32)-1. The unit for the data type TIME is 1 ms.
Time span
literals
Permitted units for time spans (TIME) are days (D), hours (H), minutes (M), seconds
(S) and milliseconds (MS) or a combination thereof. The time span must be denoted
by the prefix t#, T#, time# or TIME#. An "overrun" of the highest ranking unit is
permitted, i.e. the input T#25H15M is permitted.
Example
t#14MS, T#14.7S, time#18M, TIME#19.9H, t#20.4D, T#25H15M,
time#5D14H12M18S3.5MS
Token
The network "Token" controls the temporary property of the transfer rights via a
single node. The token runs through the node in a circulating (rising) address
sequence. All nodes track the Token run through and can contain all possible data
sent with it.
Traffic Cop
The Traffic Cop is a component list, which is compiled from the user component list.
The Traffic Cop is managed in the PLC and in addition contains the user component
list e.g. Status information of the I/O stations and modules.
xlviii
31007523 12/2006
Glossary
Transition
The condition with which the control of one or more Previous steps transfers to one
or more ensuing steps along a directional Link.
U
UDEFB
User defined elementary functions/function blocks
Functions or Function blocks, which were created in the programming language C,
and are available in Concept Libraries.
UDINT
UDINT stands for the data type "unsigned double integer". The input appears as
Integer literal, Base 2 literal, Base 8 literal or Base 16 literal. The length of the data
element is 32 bit. The value range for variables of this type stretches from 0 to
2exp(32)-1.
UINT
UINT stands for the data type "unsigned integer". The input appears as Integer
literal, Base 2 literal, Base 8 literal or Base 16 literal. The length of the data element
is 16 bit. The value range for variables of this type stretches from 0 to (2exp16)-1.
Unlocated
variable
Unlocated variables are not assigned any state RAM addresses. They therefore do
not occupy any state RAM addresses. The value of these variables is saved in the
system and can be altered with the reference data editor. These variables are only
addressed by symbolic names.
Signals requiring no peripheral access, e.g. intermediate results, system tags etc,
should primarily be declared as unlocated variables.
V
Variables
31007523 12/2006
Variables function as a data exchange within sections between several sections and
between the Program and the PLC.
Variables consist of at least a variable name and a Data type.
Should a variable be assigned a direct Address (Reference), it is referred to as a
Located variable. Should a variable not be assigned a direct address, it is referred
to as an unlocated variable. If the variable is assigned a Derived data type, it is
referred to as a Multi-element variable.
Otherwise there are Constants and Literals.
xlix
Glossary
Vertical format
Vertical format means that the page is higher than it is wide when looking at the
printed text.
W
Warning
When processing a FFB or a Step a critical status is detected (e.g. critical input value
or a time out), a warning appears, which can be viewed with the menu command
Online → Event display... . With FFBs the ENO output remains at "1".
WORD
WORD stands for the data type "Bit sequence 16". The input appears as Base 2
literal, Base 8 literal or Base 1 16 literal. The length of the data element is 16 bit. A
numerical range of values cannot be assigned to this data type.
l
31007523 12/2006
Index
Numerics
1 millisecond timer, 1049
1 second timer, 1045
1/100th of a second timer, 1037
1/10th of a second timer, 1041
1x3x, 53
4-station ratio controller, 879
31007523 12/2006
B
AC
984LL
1x3x, 53
AD16, 57
ADD, 61
AND, 65
BCD, 71
BLKM, 75
BLKT, 79
BMDI, 83
BROT, 87
CALL, 91
CANT, 99
CCPF, 105
CCPV, 109
CFGC, 113
CFGF, 117
CFGI, 121
CFGR, 125
CFGS, 129
CHS, 133
CKSM, 139
closed loop control / analog values, 19
CMPR, 143
coils, 147
coils, contacts, and interconnects, 39
COMM, 151
COMP, 155
contacts, 161
CONV, 165
CTIF, 169
DCTR, 177
DIOH, 181
li
Index
DISA, 187
DIV, 191
DLOG, 197
DMTH, 203
DRUM, 211
DV16, 217
EARS, 223
EMTH, 231
EMTH-ADDDP, 237
EMTH-ADDFP, 243
EMTH-ADDIF, 247
EMTH-ANLOG, 251
EMTH-ARCOS, 257
EMTH-ARSIN, 263
EMTH-ARTAN, 267
EMTH-CHSIN, 273
EMTH-CMPFP, 279
EMTH-CMPIF, 285
EMTH-CNVDR, 291
EMTH-CNVFI, 297
EMTH-CNVIF, 303
EMTH-CNVRD, 309
EMTH-COS, 315
EMTH-DIVDP, 319
EMTH-DIVFI, 325
EMTH-DIVFP, 329
EMTH-DIVIF, 333
EMTH-ERLOG, 337
EMTH-EXP, 343
EMTH-LNFP, 349
EMTH-LOG, 355
EMTH-LOGFP, 361
EMTH-MULDP, 367
EMTH-MULFP, 373
EMTH-MULIF, 377
EMTH-PI, 383
EMTH-POW, 389
EMTH-SINE, 395
EMTH-SQRFP, 401
EMTH-SQRT, 407
EMTH-SQRTP, 413
EMTH-SUBDP, 419
EMTH-SUBFI, 425
EMTH-SUBFP, 429
EMTH-SUBIF, 433
EMTH-TAN, 437
lii
ESI, 441
EUCA, 461
FIN, 473
formatting messages for ASCII READ/
31007523 12/2006
Index
WRIT operations, 31
FOUT, 477
FTOI, 483
G392, 537
GD92, 487
GFNX, 499
GG92, 513
GM92, 525
HLTH, 549
HSBY, 563
IBKR, 569
IBKW, 573
ICMP, 577
ID, 583
IE, 587
IMIO, 591
IMOD, 597
INDX, 605
interrupt handling, 45
ITMR, 609
ITOF, 615
JOGS, 619
JSR, 623
LAB, 627
LOAD, 631
MAP3, 635
MATH, 643
MBIT, 651
MBUS, 655
MMFB, 665
MMFE, 669
MMFI, 673
MMFS, 679
MOVE, 683
MRTM, 687
MSPX, 693
MSTR, 697
MU16, 743
MUL, 747
NBIT, 751
NCBT, 755
NOBT, 759
NOL, 763
OR, 771
PCFL, 777
PCFL-AIN, 783
31007523 12/2006
PCFL-ALARM, 789
PCFL-AVER, 799
PCFL-CALC, 805
PCFL-DELAY, 811
PCFL-EQN, 815
PCFL-INTEG, 821
PCFL-KPID, 825
PCFL-LIMIT, 831
PCFL-LIMV, 835
PCFL-LKUP, 839
PCFL-LLAG, 845
PCFL-MODE, 849
PCFL-ONOFF, 853
PCFL-PI, 857
PCFL-PID, 863
PCFL-RAMP, 869
PCFL-RATE, 875
PCFL-RATIO, 879
PCFL-RMPLN, 883
PCFL-SEL, 887
PCFL-TOTAL, 893
PEER, 899
PID2, 903
R --> T, 919
RBIT, 923
READ, 927
RET, 933
RTTI, 937
RTU, 945
SAVE, 951
SBIT, 955
SCIF, 959
SENS, 965
shorts, 969
SKP, 973
SRCH, 977
STAT, 983
SU16, 1009
SUB, 1013
subroutine handling, 47
SWAP, 1017
T.01 timer, 1037
T-->R, 1025
T-->T, 1031
T0.1 timer, 1041
T1.0 timer, 1045
liii
Index
T1MS timer, 1049
TBLK, 1055
TEST, 1061
TTR, 1021
UCTR, 1065
VMER, 1069
VMEW, 1073
WRIT, 1077
XMIT, 1083
XMIT communication block, 1091
XMIT conversion block, 1111
XMIT port status block, 1103
XMRD, 1119
XMWT, 1125
XOR, 1131
A
abort
ESI, 441
absolute move, 683
AD16, 57
ADD, 61
add 16 bit, 57
addition, 61
AD16, 57
ADD, 61
EMTH-ADDFP, 247
addition, double precision
EMTH-ADDDP, 237
addition, floating point
EMTH-ADDFP, 243
Advanced Calculations, 778
AGA #3
G392, 537
GD92 gas flow, 487
GG92, 513
GM92, 525
AGA #3 ‘85
GFNX, 499
AGA #8
GD92, 487
GM92, 525
alarm
PCFL-ALARM, 789
liv
algorithms, PID
PCFL-PID, 863
analog input
PCFL-AIN, 783
Analog Output, 795
analog values, 19
AND, 65
antilogarithm, base 10
EMTH-ANLOG, 251
API 21.1 audit trail
G392, 537
arcsine of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-ARSIN, 263
ASCII communications
COMM, 151
ASCII functions
READ, 927
WRIT, 1077
ASCII message
ESI, 441
auto mode, put input
PCFL-MODE, 849
average weighted inputs calculate, 799
axis, imaginary
CFGI, 121
axis, remote
CFGR, 125
axis, SERCOS
CFGS, 129
B
base 10 antilogarithm
EMTH-ANLOG, 251
base 10 logarithm
EMTH-LOG, 355
BCD, 71
binary to binary code, 71
bit control
NBIT, 751
bit pattern comparison
CMPR, 143
bit rotate, 87
BLKM, 75
BLKT, 79
block move, 75
31007523 12/2006
Index
block move with interrupts disabled, 83
block to table, 79
BMDI, 83
boolean exclusive OR, 1131
BROT, 87
C
calculated preset formula, 805
calculation, derivative rate over specified
time
PCFL-RATE, 875
CALL, 91
cam profile
CCPF, 105
CCPV, 109
CamProfile type, 106
CANT, 99
CCPF, 105
CCPV, 109
central alarm handler, 789
CFGC, 113
CFGF, 117
CFGI, 121
CFGR, 125
CFGS, 129
changing the sign of a floating point number
EMTH-CHSIN, 273
check sum
CKSM, 139
CHS, 133
CKSM, 139
closed loop control, 19
CMPR, 143
coils, 39, 147
CANT, 99
COMM, 151
common logarithm
EMTH-LOGFP, 361
communication block
XMIT, 1091
communications
MSTR, 697
communications, ASCII
COMM, 151
COMP, 155
31007523 12/2006
compare register, 143
complement a matrix, 155
comprehensive ISA non interacting PID, 825
contacts, 39, 161
CANT, 99
controller, 4-station ratio
PCFL-RATIO, 879
CONV, 165
conversion
BCD to binary, 71
binary to BCD, 71
conversion block
XMIT, 1111
conversion of degrees to radians
EMTH-CNVDR, 291
conversion of radians to degrees
EMTH-CNVRD, 309
convert data
CONV, 165
coordinated set
CFGC, 113
cosine of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-COS, 315
cosine, floating point arc
EMTH-ARCOS, 257
counter
CTIF, 169
counters
DCTR, 177
counters / timers
T.01 timer, 1037
T0.1 timer, 1041
T1.0 timer, 1045
T1MS timer, 1049
UCTR, 1065
CTIF, 169
D
data
ESI, 441
data logging for PCMCIA read/write
support, 197
data, convert
CONV, 165
DCTR, 177
lv
Index
deadband, on/off values
PCFL-ONOFF, 853
deferred DX function
CALL, 91
degrees to radians, conversion
EMTH-CNVDR, 291
delay, time
PCFL-DELAY, 811
derivative rate calculation over a specified
time, 875
derivative, proportional integral
PID2, 903
detail method
GD92, 487
GM92, 525
DIOH, 181
DISA, 187
disabled discrete monitor
DISA, 187
discrete monitor, disabled
DISA, 187
distributed I/O health, 181
DIV, 191
divide
DIV, 191
divide 16 bit, 217
division, double precision
EMTH-DIVDP, 319
division, floating point
EMTH-DIVFP, 329
DLOG, 197
DMTH, 203
double precision addition
EMTH-ADDDP, 237
double precision division
EMTH-DIVDP, 319
double precision math
DMTH, 203
double precision multiplication
EMTH-MULDP, 367
double precision subtraction
EMTH-SUBDP, 419
down counter
DCTR, 177
DRUM, 211
drum sequencer, 211
lvi
DV16, 217
DX function, deferred
CALL, 91
E
EARS, 223
EMTH, 231
EMTH-ADDDP, 237
EMTH-ADDFP, 243
EMTH-ADDIF, 247
EMTH-ANLOG, 251
EMTH-ARCOS, 257
EMTH-ARSIN, 263
EMTH-ARTAN, 267
EMTH-CHSIN, 273
EMTH-CMPFP, 279
EMTH-CMPIF, 285
EMTH-CNVDR, 291
EMTH-CNVFI, 297
EMTH-CNVIF, 303
EMTH-CNVRD, 309
EMTH-COS, 315
EMTH-DIVDP, 319
EMTH-DIVFI, 325
EMTH-DIVFP, 329
EMTH-DIVIF, 333
EMTH-ERLOG, 337
EMTH-EXP, 343
EMTH-LNFP, 349
EMTH-LOG, 355
EMTH-LOGFP, 361
EMTH-MULDP, 367
EMTH-MULFP, 373
EMTH-MULIF, 377
EMTH-PI, 383
EMTH-POW, 389
EMTH-SINE, 395
EMTH-SQRFP, 401
EMTH-SQRT, 407
EMTH-SQRTP, 413
EMTH-SUBDP, 419
EMTH-SUBFI, 425
EMTH-SUBFP, 429
EMTH-SUBIF, 433
EMTH-TAN, 437
31007523 12/2006
Index
engineering unit conversion and alarms
EUCA, 461
equation calculator, formatted
PCFL-EQN, 815
error report log, floating point
EMTH-ERLOG, 337
errors, run time
ESI, 441
ESI, 441
EUCA, 461
event/alarm recording system
EARS, 223
exclusive OR, 1131
exponential function, floating point
EMTH-EXP, 343
extended math
EMTH, 231
extended memory read, 1119
extended memory write, 1125
F
fast I/O instructions
BMDI, 83
ID, 583
IE, 587
IMIO, 591
IMOD, 597
ITMR, 609
FIN, 473
first in, 473
first out, 477
first-order lead/lag filter, 845
flash, load, 631
flash, save
SAVE, 951
floating point - integer subtraction
EMTH-SUBFI, 425
floating point addition
EMTH-ADDFP, 243
floating point addition + integer
EMTH-ADDIF, 247
floating point arc cosine of an angle
(in radians)
EMTH-ARCOS, 257
31007523 12/2006
floating point arc tangent of an angle
(in radians)
EMTH-ARTAN, 267
floating point arcsine of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-ARSIN, 263
floating point common logarithm
EMTH-LOGFP, 361
floating point comparison
EMTH-CMPFP, 279
floating point conversion of degrees to
radians
EMTH-CNVDR, 291
floating point conversion of radians to
degrees
EMTH-CNVRD, 309
floating point cosine of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-COS, 315
floating point divided by integer
EMTH-DIVFI, 325
floating point division
EMTH-DIVFP, 329
floating point error report log, 337
floating point exponential function
EMTH-EXP, 343
floating point multiplication
EMTH-MULFP, 373
floating point natural logarithm
EMTH-LNFP, 349
floating point number to integer power
EMTH-POW, 389
floating point number, changing the sign
EMTH-CHSIN, 273
floating point sine of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-SINE, 395
floating point square root
EMTH-SQRFP, 401
EMTH-SQRT, 407
floating point subtraction
EMTH-SUBFP, 429
floating point subtraction, integer
EMTH-SUBIF, 433
floating point tangent of an angle
(in radians), 437
floating point to integer, 483
floating point to integer conversion
EMTH-CNVFI, 297
lvii
Index
floating point value of Pi
EMTH-PI, 383
follower set
CFGF, 117
formatted equation calculator, 815
formatting messages, 31
FOUT, 477
FTOI, 483
G
G392, 537
gas flow function block, 487, 499, 513
G392, 537
GM92, 525
GD92, 487
get data
ESI, 441
GFNX, 499
GG92, 513
GM92, 525
gross method
G392, 537
GG92, 513
H
health, distributed I/O
DIOH, 181
history and status matrices, 549
HLTH, 549
hot standby, 563
CHS, 133
HSBY, 563
I
I/O, health
DIOH, 181
IBKR, 569
IBKW, 573
ICMP, 577
ID, 583
IE, 587
imaginary axis
CFGI, 121
lviii
IMIO, 591
immediate DX function
CALL, 91
immediate I/O, 591
immediate incremental move, 605
IMOD, 597
indirect block read, 569
indirect block write, 573
INDX, 605
registers, 608
input compare, 577
input selection, 887
input simulation
1x3x, 53
installation of DX loadables, 49
instruction
Instruction Groups
Overview, 6
Special Instructions, 17
instruction groups, 5
ASCII communication instructions, 7
counters and timers instructions, 8
fast I/O instructions, 9
loadable DX, 10
math instructions, 11
matrix instructions, 13
miscellaneous, 14
move instructions, 15
skips/specials, 16
integer - floating point subtraction
EMTH-SUBIF, 433
integer + floating point addition
EMTH-ADDIF, 247
integer divided by floating point
EMTH-DIVIF, 333
integer operations
MATH, 643
integer subtraction, floating point
EMTH-SUBFI, 425
integer to floating point, 615
integer to floating point conversion
EMTH-CNVIF, 303
integer x floating point multiplication
EMTH-MULIF, 377
31007523 12/2006
Index
integer-floating point comparison
EMTH-CMPIF, 285
integrate input at specified interval, 821
interconnects, 39
interfaces, sequential control
SCIF, 959
interrupt
CTIF, 169
interrupt disable, 583
interrupt enable, 587
interrupt handling, 45
interrupt module instruction, 597
interrupt timer, 609
ISA non interacting PI, 857
ITMR, 609
ITOF, 615
J
jog move, 619
JOGS, 619
JSR, 623
jump to subroutine, 623
L
LAB, 627
label for a subroutine, 627
lead/lag filter, first-order
PCFL-LLAG, 845
limiter for the Pv, 831
limiter, velocity
PCFL-LIMV, 835
LL984
PCFL-AOUT, 795
LOAD, 631
load flash, 631
load the floating point value of Pi
EMTH-PI, 383
31007523 12/2006
loadable DX
CHS, 133
DRUM, 211
ESI, 441
EUCA, 461
HLTH, 549
ICMP, 577
installation, 49
MAP3, 635
MBUS, 655
MRTM, 687
NOL, 763
PEER, 899
logarithm
EMTH-LNFP, 349
logarithm, base 10
EMTH-LOG, 355
logarithm, floating point common
EMTH-LOGFP, 361
logarithmic ramp to set point, 883
logging, data
DLOG, 197
logical AND, 65
logical OR, 771
Lonworks
NOL, 763
look-up table, 839
M
manual mode, put input
PCFL-MODE, 849
map transaction, 635
MAP3, 635
master instruction, 697
MATH, 643
lix
Index
math
AD16, 57
ADD, 61
BCD, 71
DIV, 191
DV16, 217
EMTH, 231
FTOI, 483
ITOF, 615
MU16, 743
MUL, 747
SU16, 1009
SUB, 1013
TEST, 1061
math, double precision
DMTH, 203
matrix
AND, 65
BROT, 87
CMPR, 143
COMP, 155
MBIT, 651
NBIT, 751
NCBT, 755
NOBT, 759
OR, 771
RBIT, 923
SBIT, 955
SENS, 965
XOR, 1131
MBIT, 651
MBUS, 655
memory read, extended
XMRD, 1119
memory write, extended
XMWT, 1125
metering flow, totalizer
PCFL-TOTAL, 893
MMFB, 665
MMFE, 669
MMFI, 673
MMFS, 679
Modbus functions
XMIT, 1085
Modbus Plus
MSTR, 697
lx
MSTR, 727
mode, auto or manual
PCFL-MODE, 849
modify bit, 651
monitor, disabled discrete
DISA, 187
motion framework bits block, 665
motion framework extended parameters
subroutine, 669
motion framework initialize block, 673
motion framework subroutine block, 679
MOVE, 683
move
BLKM, 75
BLKT, 79
FIN, 473
FOUT, 477
IBKR, 569
IBKW, 573
INDX, 605
JOGS, 619
R --> T, 919
SRCH, 977
T-->R, 1025
T-->T, 1031
TBLK, 1055
MRTM, 687
MSPX, 693
MSTR, 697
Clear Local Statistics, 712
Clear Remote Statistics, 718
CTE Error Codes for SY/MAX and TCP/
IP Ethernet, 741
Get Local Statistics, 710
Get Remote Statistics, 716
31007523 12/2006
Index
Modbus Plus and SY/MAX Ethernet
Error Codes, 734
Modbus Plus Network Statistics, 727
Peer Cop Health, 720
Read CTE (Config Extension Table), 723
Read Global Data, 715
Reset Option Module, 722
SY/MAX-specific Error Codes, 736
TCP/IP Ethernet Error Codes, 738
TCP/IP Ethernet Statistics, 732
Write CTE (Config Extension Table), 725
Write Global Data, 714
MU16, 743
MUL, 747
multiplication
EMTH-MULDP, 367
multiplication, floating point
EMTH-MULFP, 373
multiplication, integer x floating point
EMTH-MULIF, 377
multiply, 747
multiply 16 bit, 743
multi-register transfer module, 687
N
natural logarithm
EMTH-LNFP, 349
NBIT, 751
NCBT, 755
network option module for Lonworks, 763
networks, skipping
SKP, 973
NOBT, 759
NOL, 763
normally closed bit, 755
normally open bit, 759
NX19 ‘68
GFNX, 499
O
on/off values for deadband, 853
OR, 771
OR, boolean exclusive, 1131
31007523 12/2006
P
PCFL, 777
PCFL subfunctions
general, 21
PCFL-AIN, 783
PCFL-ALARM, 789
PCFL-AOUT, 795
PCFL-AVER, 799
PCFL-CALC, 805
PCFL-DELAY, 811
PCFL-EQN, 815
PCFL-INTEG, 821
PCFL-KPID, 825
PCFL-LIMIT, 831
PCFL-LIMV, 835
PCFL-LKUP, 839
PCFL-LLAG, 845
PCFL-MODE, 849
PCFL-ONOFF, 853
PCFL-PI, 857
PCFL-PID, 863
PCFL-RAMP, 869
PCFL-RATE, 875
PCFL-RATIO, 879
PCFL-RMPLN, 883
PCFL-SEL, 887
PCFL-Subfunction
PCFL-AOUT, 795
PCFL-TOTAL, 893
PCMICA, data logging
DLOG, 197
PEER, 899
Pi
EMTH-PI, 383
PI, ISA non interacting
PCFL-PI, 857
PID algorithms, 863
PID example, 25
PID, non interacting
PCFL-KPID, 825
PID2, 903
PID2 level control example, 28
port status block
XMIT, 1103
process control function library, 777
lxi
Index
process square root
EMTH-SQRTP, 413
process variable, 20
proportional integral derivative, 903
put data
ESI, 441
put input in auto or manual mode, 849
Pv, limiter
PCFL-LIMIT, 831
Pv, velocity limiter
PCFL-LIMV, 835
R
R --> T, 919
radians to degrees, conversion
EMTH-CNVRD, 309
raising a floating point number to an integer
power
EMTH-POW, 389
ramp to set point at a constant rate, 869
ramp, logarithmic, to set point
PCFL-RMPLN, 883
rate, derivative
PCFL-RATE, 875
ratio, 4-station controller
PCFL-RATIO, 879
RBIT, 923
READ, 927
MSTR, 708
read
VME, 1069
read ASCII message
ESI, 441
read, extended memory
XMRD, 1119
READ/WRIT operations, 31
read/write, data logging
DLOG, 197
recording, event/alarm
EARS, 223
register to input table, 937
register to table, 919
register, compare
CMPR, 143
Regulatory Control, 778
lxii
remote axis
CFGR, 125
remote terminal unit, 945
reset bit, 923
RET, 933
return from a subroutine, 933
RTTI, 937
RTU, 945
run time errors
ESI, 441
S
SAVE, 951
SBIT, 955
SCIF, 959
search, 977
selection, input
PCFL-SEL, 887
SENS, 965
sequencer, drum
DRUM, 211
sequential control interfaces, 959
SERCOS axis
CFGS, 129
seriplex
MSPX, 693
set bit, 955
set point variable, 20
shorts, 969
sign, floating point number
EMTH-CHSIN, 273
sine, of an angle (in radians)
EMTH-SINE, 395
skipping networks, 973
skips / specials
RET, 933
skips/specials
JSR, 623
LAB, 627
SKP, 973
Special
PCFL-, 795
31007523 12/2006
Index
special
PCFL, 777
PCFL-AIN, 783
PCFL-ALARM, 789
PCFL-AVER, 799
PCFL-CALC, 805
PCFL-DELAY, 811
PCFL-EQN, 815
PCFL-INTEG, 821
PCFL-KPID, 825
PCFL-LIMIT, 831
PCFL-LIMV, 835
PCFL-LKUP, 839
PCFL-LLAG, 845
PCFL-MODE, 849
PCFL-ONOFF, 853
PCFL-PI, 857
PCFL-PID, 863
PCFL-RAMP, 869
PCFL-RATE, 875
PCFL-RATIO, 879
PCFL-RMPLN, 883
PCFL-SEL, 887
PCFL-TOTAL, 893
PID2, 903
STAT, 983
square root, floating point
EMTH-SQRFP, 401
EMTH-SQRT, 407
square root, process
EMTH-SQRTP, 413
SRCH, 977
STAT, 983
status, 983
SU16, 1009
SUB, 1013
SUB block
CANT, 99
subroutine handling, 47
subroutine, return from
RET, 933
subtract 16 bit, 1009
subtraction, 1013
subtraction, double precision
EMTH-SUBDP, 419
31007523 12/2006
subtraction, floating point
EMTH-SUBFP, 429
subtraction, integer
EMTH-SUBFI, 425
subtraction, integer - floating point
EMTH-SUBIF, 433
support of the ESI module, 441
SWAP, 1017
T
T.01 timer, 1037
T-->R, 1025
T-->T, 1031
T0.1 timer, 1041
T1.0 timer, 1045
T1MS timer, 1049
table to block, 1055
table to register, 1021, 1025
table to table, 1031
tangent
EMTH-TAN, 437
tangent, floating point arc
EMTH-ARTAN, 267
TBLK, 1055
MSTR, 732
TEST, 1061
test of 2 values, 1061
time delay queue, 811
timer
CTIF, 169
timers
CANT, 99
DCTR, 177
T.01, 1037
T0.1, 1041
T1.0, 1045
T1MS, 1049
UCTR, 1065
totalizer for metering flow, 893
transfer module, multi-register
MRTM, 687
transmit
XMIT, 1083
TTR, 1021
lxiii
Index
U
UCTR, 1065
up counter, 1065
V
variable increments
CCPV, 109
variable instruments
CCPF, 105
velocity limiter for changes in the Pv, 835
VME bit swap, 1017
VMER, 1069
VMEW, 1073
W
WRIT, 1077
Write
MSTR, 706
write
VME, 1073
write ASCII message
ESI, 441
write, extended memory
XMWT, 1125
write/read, data logging
DLOG, 197
X
XMIT, 1083
XMIT communication block, 1091
XMIT conversion block, 1111
XMIT port status block, 1103
XMRD, 1119
XMWT, 1125
XOR, 1131
lxiv
31007523 12/2006

ProWORX 32 Ladder Logic Block Library

Transcription

Similar documents

- rtt firearms

Cut Sheet for CPICS-100 family

14 Big Online Marketing Ideas For Businesses

Sell Sheet: EVOLite Skyworker Helmet

OSR Flyer

Keystone Industries 52 W King St Myerstown, PA 17067 www

The Continuous World of Dungeon Siege

Zeppes Plaza

Smart Node Pod - Northrop Grumman